Volume II - The Northern Cape Provincial Spatial Development ...

Office of the Premier of the Northern Cape 

National Department of Rural Development and Land Reform 

NORTHERN CAPE PROVINCIAL SPATIAL 

DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK 

Volume Volume Volume 2: 2: 2: Profile Profile and and Key Key Aspects 

Aspects 

December 2011 

RQ RQ - 055312 

G3881

Northern Cape PSDF 

Volume 2 

Office of the Premier & 

Department of Rural Development & Land Reform 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

SECTION A: INTRODUCTION 

i 

December 2011 

A.1 BACKGROUND 1 

A.1.1 FORMAT AND STRUCTURE OF THE PSDF 1 

A.2 METHODOLOGY AND PROCESS FOR PREPARATION OF VOLUME 2 2 

A.3 STRUCTURE AND CONTENT OF VOLUME 2 2 

SECTION B: CONTEXT 

B.1 LOCATION 4 

B.2 ADMINISTRATIVE CONTEXT 5 

B.3 DISTINCTIVE MACRO‐REGIONS 10 

SECTION C: THE ENVIRONMENT 

C.1 GENERAL BIOPHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS 12 

C.1.1 CLIMATE 12 

C.2 HYDROLOGY AND WATER 14 

C.2.1 WATER MANAGEMENT 15 

C.2.2 INTERNATIONAL ISSUES 16 

C.2.3 WATER SERVICE INSTITUTIONS 17 

C.2.4 WATER AVAILABILITY 18 

C.2.4.1 LOWER ORANGE WMA 20 

PAGE 

Dennis Moss Partnership





December 2011 

C.2.4.2 UPPER ORANGE WMA 21 

C.2.4.3 LOWER VAAL WMA 21 

C.2.4.4 OLIFANTS / DOORN WMA 22 

C.2.5 GROUNDWATER 22 

C.2.6 WATER BALANCE 23 

C.2.7 STORAGE DAMS 23 

C.2.8 WATER QUALITY 25 

C.2.8.1 THE LOWER VAAL 25 

C.2.8.2 LOWER ORANGE 26 

C.2.9 WATER‐RELATED KEY ISSUES 27 

C.3 BIODIVERSITY AND NATURAL RESOURCES 28 

C.3.1 FLORA 28 

C.3.1.1 NAMA KAROO BIOME 28 

C.3.1.2 SUCCULENT KAROO BIOME 29 

C.3.1.3 SAVANNA BIOME 30 

C.3.1.4 GRASSLAND BIOME 31 

C.3.1.5 FYNBOS BIOME 31 

C.3.1.6 CENTRES OF ENDEMISM 31 

C.3.2 FAUNA 32 

C.3.3 PROTECTED NATURE AREAS 33 

C.4 THE COASTAL ZONE 34 

C.4.1 INSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL CONTEXT OF COASTAL MANAGEMENT 36 

C.4.2 COASTAL MANAGEMENT 37 

C.4.3 COASTAL PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 37 

C.4.4 ACCESS TO MARINE AND COASTAL RESOURCES 38 

C.5 HERITAGE RESOURCES 39 

C.5.1 PREHISTORIC HISTORY 39 

C.5.2 KHOISAN HISTORY 40 

ii 






December 2011 

C.5.3 EARLY PIONEERS AND TRAVELLERS 41 

C.5.4 HISTORY OF MINING 42 

SECTION D: SETTLEMENT PATTERN 

D.1 INTRODUCTION 45 

D.1.1 ROLE OF SMALL SETTLEMENTS IN REGIONAL AND RURAL DEVELOPMENT 46 

D.1.2 FACTORS INFLUENCING GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT OF SETTLEMENTS 48 

D.1.3 RELEVANT POLICY FOR RURAL DEVELOPMENT ADOPTED FOR THE PSDF 50 

D.1.3.1 NATIONAL SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT PERSPECTIVE (NSDP, 2006) 50 

D.1.3.2 NORTHERN CAPE PROVINCIAL GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY 

(PGDS) 

D.2 PREMISE AND RATIONALE FOR GOVERNMENT AND PRIVATE SECTOR 

INVESTMENT 

D.2.1 INDICATORS AND COMPOSITE INDICES 54 

D.2.2 DEVELOPMENT POTENTIAL 57 

D.2.3 HUMAN DEVELOPMENT NEED 60 

D.2.4 INVESTMENT TYPE REQUIRED 62 

D.2.5 CHANGE ASSESSMENT 65 

D.3 INTEGRATED PROFILES 67 

D.3.1 MUNICIPAL PROFILES 67 

D.3.2 SETTLEMENT PROFILES 68 

D.4 USE OF THE SETTLEMENT INDICES 71 

D.5 RECOMMENDATIONS 73 

iii 

52 






SECTION E: SOCIAL AND HUMAN ENVIRONMENT 

iv 

December 2011 

E.1 HUMAN CAPITAL 75 

E.1.1 DEMOGRAPHIC PROFILE 75 

E.1.2 DEMOGRAPHIC ASPECTS THAT CAN INFLUENCE FUTURE DEVELOPMENT 79 

E1.2.1 DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DATA SETS 80 

E.1.2.2 MIGRATION PATTERN 81 

E.2 SOCIO‐ECONOMIC STATUS 83 

E.2.1 POVERTY 84 

E.2.1.1 POVERTY ALLEVIATION FOCUS AREA 85 

E.2.2 INCOME LEVELS IN THE NORTHERN CAPE 86 

E.2.3 SOCIAL GRANTS RECEIVED 87 

E.2.4 LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT 88 

E.2.5 EDUCATION 89 

E.2.6 LITERACY AND EDUCATION LEVELS 90 

E.2.7 SKILL LEVELS 91 

E.3 GENERAL SOCIO‐ECONOMIC INFORMATION 95 

E.3.1 SERVICE STANDARDS: HOUSING 95 

E.3.2 SERVICE STANDARDS: SEWAGE REMOVAL 97 

E.3.3 SERVICE STANDARDS: WATER RETICULATION 100 

E.3.3.1 BLUE DROP STATUS 101 

E.3.3.2 WATER NEEDS ON FORMAL AND INFORMAL STANDS 102 

E.3.4 SERVICE STANDARDS: TELECOMMUNICATIONS 103 

E.3.5 SERVICES STANDARDS: ROADS AND STREETS 104 

E.3.5.1 MODE OF TRANSPORT 104 

E.3.6 SERVICE STANDARDS: REFUSE REMOVAL 105 

E.3.7 SERVICE STANDARDS: ELECTRICITY AND ENERGY 106 

E.3.8 SERVICE STANDARDS: HEALTH 107 






December 2011 

E.4 COMPREHENSIVE RURAL DEVELOPMENT 111 

E.4.1 THE COMPREHENSIVE RURAL DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMME (CRDP) 111 

E.5 LAND REFORM 112 

SECTION F: ECONOMY 

F.1 ECONOMIC SECTORS 118 

F.1.1 MINING SECTOR 120 

F.1.2 AGRICULTURE AND AGRO‐PROCESSING SECTOR 124 

F.1.3 FISHING AND MARICULTURE SECTOR 126 

F.1.3.1 AQUACULTURE AND MARICULTURE 127 

F.1.3.2 CURRENT INITIATIVES 127 

F.1.4 ENERGY SECTOR 128 

F.1.4.1 SOLAR ENERGY 130 

F.1.4.2 WIND ENERGY 131 

F.1.5 TOURISM 131 

F.1.6 SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 133 

F.1.6.1 SOUTHERN AFRICAN LARGE TELESCOPE (SALT) 134 

F.1.6.2 SQUARE KILOMETRE ARRAY (SKA) 134 

F.1.6.3 KAROO ARRAY TELESCOPE 136 

F.2 DEVELOPMENT REGIONS AND CORRIDORS 136 

F.3 SUPPORTING PROVINCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICE BASE 138 

F.3.1 TRANSPORT 138 

F.3.1.1 ROADS 138 

F.3.1.2 AIRPORTS 139 

F.3.1.3 RAILWAYS 140 

F.3.1.4 HARBOURS 141 

v 






December 2011 

F.3.2 WATER DISTRIBUTION NETWORK 141 

SECTION G: PGDS INTERVENTIONS 

G.1 KEY INTERVENTIONS PROPOSED BY PGDS 144 

SECTION H: SUMMARY OF KEY ASPECTS 

H.1 CATEGORIES OF KEY ASPECTS 153 

H.2 WAY FORWARD 158 

H.2.1 METHODOLOGY FOR PHASE 3 AND PHASE 4 158 

H.2.2 SUBMISSION TO PROJECT STEERING COMMITTEE 159 

SECTION 1: REFERENCE FRAMEWORK 

LIST OF FIGURES 

Figure A.1 Volumes of the PSDF. 1 

Figure A.2 Structure and content of Volume 2. 3 

Figure C.1 Rainfall of the Northern Cape in context of the country as a whole. 14 

Figure C.2 Annual direct and diffuse solar radiation in South Africa. 15 

Figure C.3 Water management institutional arrangements. 17 

Figure C.4 Rivers of the Northern Cape. 20 

Figure C.5 The Gariep River Basin. 21 

Figure C.6 Water Management Areas of South Africa. 23 

Figure C.7 Main dams in the Northern Cape. 25 

Figure C.8 Biomes of the Northern Cape. 30 

vi 






December 2011 

Figure C.9 Centres of Endemism in the Northern Cape. 33 

Figure C.10 National and provincial protected areas in the Northern Cape. 35 

Figure C.11 Coastal regions of South Africa 36 

Figure C.12 Coastal region properties owned by mining companies 40 

Figure D.1 Key dimensions of settlement study. 53 

Figure D.2 Composite Resource Indices used to classify the municipalities and 

settlements. 

Figure D.3 Determining the development potential of local municipalities and 

settlements. 

Figure D.4 Determining the human development needs of local municipalities and 

settlements. 

Figure D.5 Defining the appropriate investment types for the municipalities and 

settlements. 

Figure D.6 General approach to the appropriation of capital. 63 

Figure D.7 Determining change that took place in local municipalities and 

settlements. 

Figure D.8 Context of this chapter. 67 

Figure D.9 Histogram illustration of Upington (Source: Van der Merwe & 

Zietsman,2011). 

Figure D.10 Histogram illustration profile of //Khara Hais Municipality (Source: Van der 

Merwe & Zietsman,2011). 

Figure E.1 Land reform in the Northern Cape 122 

Figure F.1 The Northern Cape growth rate of the GDP per region between 2001 and 

2009 

Figure H.1 Categories of key issues 153 

Figure H.2 Basic steps towards preparation of Volume 3 and Volume 4. 158 

vii 

54 

58 

60 

62 

65 

72 

72 

118 






LIST OF TABLES 

viii 

December 2011 

Table B.1 Municipalities of the Northern Cape. 5 

Table B.2 Inventory of the settlements of the province. 7 

Table C.1 Monthly average temperature and rainfall for the Northern Cape 12 

Table C.2 Northern Cape national and provincial protected areas 33 

Table D.1 Integrated Municipal Profiles 67 

Table D.2 Integrated Settlement Profiles 68 

Table E.1 Population composition of the Northern Cape Province 76 

Table E.2 Population groups in the Northern Cape per district municipality 76 

Table E.3 Percentage distribution of the population by population group in the 

Northern Cape 

Table E.4 Northern Cape gender and age composition from 1996, 2001 and 2007 77 

Table E.5 Population Structure of the district municipalities of Northern Cape Province 78 

Table E.6 Population of the Northern Cape on provincial and district level 80 

Table E.7 Average Population Growth of the district municipalities in the Northern 

Cape 

Table E.8 Population of the Northern Cape on district level for 2007 and 2009 81 

Table E.9 Estimated emigration from the Northern Cape: 2006‐2011 82 

Table E.10 Percentage distribution of non‐migrants and migrants based on place of 

birth 

Table E.11 Human Development Index for the Northern Cape and District 

Municipalities 

Table E.12 Percentage of people living in poverty in the Northern Cape 84 

Table E.13 Percentage of the monthly household income in the Northern Cape 

Province, 2007 

Table E.14 Average Monthly Household Income in the Northern Cape, 2007 86 

Table E.15 Social Grants received in South Africa and the Northern Cape, 2007 87 

Table E.16 Social Grants received on district level in the Northern level, 2007 88 

Table E.17 Employment in the Northern Cape in relation to other provinces 88 

77 

80 

82 

83 

86 






December 2011 

Table E.18 Employment in the district municipalities of the Northern Cape 89 

Table E.19 Adult Education levels of South Africa per province, 2007 90 

Table E.20 Adult Education on district level, 2007 91 

Table E.21 Employment by skill on national and provincial level, 2007 92 

Table E.22 Formal employment by skills on district level, 2007 92 

Table E.23 Number of households in the districts of the Northern Cape for 2001 and 

2007 

Table E.24 Household living in formal and informal dwellings in South Africa 95 

Table E.25 General dwelling information of the district municipalities 96 

Table E.26 Household backlog per district municipality 96 

Table E.27 Household Access to appropriate sanitation per district, 2007 98 

Table E.28 Standard of Sewage Removal per district municipality 98 

Table E.29 Top sewage concerns per district municipality of the Northern Cape 99 

Table E.30 Percentage of Household Access to Piped Water on district level, 2007 100 

Table E.31 Standard of Water Reticulation (2001 and 2007) 101 

Table E.32 Water needs in the district municipalities of the Northern Cape 102 

Table E.33 Top water concerns per district municipality of the Northern Cape 102 

Table E.34 Percentage of household access to telecommunication facilities per district 103 

Table E.35 Availability of transport 104 

Table E.36 Household refuse removal by local authority, 2007 105 

Table E.37 Households by type of refuse disposal of district municipalities in the 

Northern Cape (2001 and 2007) 

Table E.38 Households using electricity for lighting, cooking and heating of the 

provinces in South Africa 

Table E.39 Household Access of electricity services on district level, 2007 107 

Table E.40 Provision of Electricity for entire Northern Cape 107 

Table E.41 The number of public facilities in the Northern Cape Province 108 

Table E.42 Top ten causes of death in the Northern Cape 109 

Table E.43 Land Redistribution per district municipality 113 

Table F.1 Employment by Economic Sector and Industry (Source: Community Survey, 

2007 as cited in the LED Strategy) 

ix 

95 

106 

106 

119 






December 2011 

Table F.2 Northern Cape Sectoral Economic Trends (Source: LED Strategy) 119 

Table F.3 Key Economic Industries in the Northern Cape 120 

Table F.4 Mineral Production and Pricing, 2007 121 

Table F.5 Key mining concerns per district municipality of the Northern Cape 123 

Table F.6 Development regions and corridors of the Northern Cape (PGDS) 137 

Table F.7 Primary roads in the Northern Cape 139 

Table G.1 Strategic interventions in agriculture 145 

Table G.2 Strategic interventions in mining and mineral processing 145 

Table G.3 Strategic interventions in tourism 146 

Table G.4 Strategic interventions on energy 146 

Table G.5 Strategic interventions on enterprise development 146 

Table G.6 Strategic interventions in science and technology 146 

Table G.7 Strategic interventions in local economic development 150 

Table G.8 Strategic interventions in comprehensive rural development program 150 

Table G.9 Interventions in transport operations 151 

Table H.1 Key aspects to be addressed in Volume 3 and Volume 4 154 

LIST OF MAPS 

Map B.1 National context of the Northern Cape Province 4 

Map B.2 Linkages between the Northern Cape, the surrounding provinces, Namibia 

and Botswana 

Map B.3 Municipalities of the Northern Cape Province 6 

Map B.4 Settlements in context of the municipalities of the Province 9 

Map B.5 Macro‐bioregions of the Northern Cape 10 

Map C.1 Rainfall of the Northern Cape in context of the country as a whole 13 

Map C.2 Annual direct and diffuse solar radiation in South Africa 14 

Map C.3 Water management institutional arrangements 16 

Map C.4 Rivers of the Northern Cape 19 

Map C.5 The Orange River Basin 20 

x 

5 






December 2011 

Map C.6 Water Management Areas of South Africa 22 

Map C.7 Main dams in the Northern Cape 24 

Map C.8 Biomes of the Northern Cape 29 

Map C.9 Centres of Endemism in the Northern Cape 32 

Map C.10 National and provincial protected areas in the Northern Cape 34 

Map C.11 Coastal regions of South Africa 35 

Map D.1 Composite resource index of local municipalities (Van der Merwe & 

Zietsman, 2011) 

Map D.2 Composite infrastructure index of local municipalities (Van der Merwe & 


Map D.3 Composite economic index of local municipalities (Van der Merwe & 


Map D.4 Composite resource index of settlements (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 

2011) 

Map D.5 Composite infrastructure index of settlements (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 

2011) 

Map D.6 Composite economic activities of settlements (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 

2011) 

Map D.7 Development potential index of local municipalities (Van der Merwe & 


Map D.8 Development potential index of settlements (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 

2011) 

Map D.9 Development potential index of local municipalities and settlements (Van 

der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011) 

Map D.10 Human development needs index of local municipalities (Van der Merwe & 


Map D.11 Human development needs index of settlements (Van der Merwe & 


Map D.12 Human development needs index of local municipalities and settlements 

(Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011) 

xi 

54 

55 

55 

56 

56 

57 

58 

59 

59 

60 

61 

61 




Map D.13 Investment typology of local municipalities (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 

2011) 



xii 

December 2011 

Map D.14 Investment typology of settlements (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011) 64 

Map D.15 Investment typology of local municipalities and settlements (Van der 

Merwe & Zietsman, 2011) 

Map D.16 Development Potential Index change between 2001 and 2007 of local 

municipalities (2011 boundaries) (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011) 

Map D.17 Human Development Needs Change between 2001 and 2007 of local 

municipalities (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011) 

Map D.18 Urban population distribution of the Northern Cape settlements (2001) 

(Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011) 

Map E.1 Land reform in the Northern Cape 114 

Map F.1 Location of mining operation concentrations in the province in 2011 124 

Map F.2 Astronomy Reserve in the Northern Cape with the core site of SKA 135 

Map F.3 Development regions and corridors of the Northern Cape 137 

Map F.4 Transport network of the Northern Cape 139 

Map F.5 Provincial water plan and strategy 142 

LIST OF BOXES 

Box 1 Summary of Key Contextual Aspects 11 

Box 2 Summary of key Environmental Aspects 44 

Box 3 Summary of Key Settlement Aspects 74 

Box 4 Summary of Key Social and Human Aspects 117 

Box 5 Summary of Key Economic Aspects 143 

Box 6 Summary of Key PGDS Interventions 153 

64 

65 

66 

66 

71 






LIST OF ANNEXURES 

Annexure 1 Record of Public Participation: September 2011. 

Annexure 1.1 Presentation made in Kuruman: 5 September 2011. 

xiii 

December 2011 

Annexure 2 Study Report: Development Potential of Urban Settlements in the Northern 

Cape. Van der Merwe, I.J, and Zietsman, H.L. 2011. 

Annexure 3 Minutes of Project Management Committee Meeting on 1 November 2011 

regarding Volume 2. 

Annexure 4 Inventory of Completed Tasks and Way Forward Volume 1 and 2. 

Annexure 5 Agenda of Project Steering Committee Meeting 29 November 2011 

Annexure 6 PPT Presentation to Project Steering Committee on 29 November 2011 

Annexure 7 PPT Presentation (Way Forward) to Project Steering Committee on 29 

November 2011 

Annexure 8 Minutes of Project Steering Committee Meeting 29 November 2011 

Annexure 9 Northern Cape PSDF DVD 






LIST OF ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS 

xiv 

December 2011 

The following terms, abbreviations and acronyms have been used, or are referred to in this 

document. 

ACSA Airports Company South Africa. 

Agenda 21 Agenda 21 is an international program, adopted by more than 178 governments, to 

put sustainable development into practice around the world. It emerged from the 

United Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED) held in Rio 

de Janeiro in 1992. 

AIDS Acquired Immune Deficiency syndrome is a disease of the human immune system caused 

by the Human Immunodeficiency Virus. 

ASGISA Accelerated and Shared Growth Initiative for South Africa. 

BEE Black Economic Empowerment. 

BCLME Benguela Current Large Marine Ecosystem. 

Biodiversity It is an abbreviation of “biological diversity” which is described as the mix of species in an 

ecosystem that enables the system both to provide a flow of ecosystem services under 

given environmental conditions, and to maintain that flow if environmental conditions 

change. The loss of biodiversity limits the resilience of the affected ecosystem, which in 

turn, may have direct negative socio‐economic implications. Furthermore, biodiversity is 

the degree of variation of life forms within a given ecosystem, biome, or an entire planet. 

Biodiversity is one measure of the health of ecosystems, and life on earth today consists 

of many millions of distinct biological species. 

Biodiversity Hotspot A biodiversity hotspot is a biogeographic region with a significant reservoir of 

biodiversity that is under threat from human interventions. To qualify as a hotspot, 

a region must meet two strict criteria: 

1. It must contain at least 1 500 species of vascular plants (less than 0.5 percent of 

the world’s total) as endemics. 

2. It has to have lost at least 70 percent of its original habitat. 

Biological resources Includes genetic resources, organisms or parts thereof, populations, or any other 

biotic component of ecosystems with actual, or potential, value for humanity. 

Biome Biomes can be defined as the major communities of the world, classified according to 

their predominant vegetation and characterised by adaptations of organisms to that 

particular environment. Furthermore, biomes are defined by factors such as plant 

structures (such as trees, shrubs, and grasses), leaf types (such as broadleaf and 

needleleaf), plant spacing (forest, woodland, savanna), and climate. Biomes are 

composed of several ecosystems and represent a regional community of organisms 

named after the dominant vegetation. 

Bioregional planning Land‐use planning and management that promotes sustainable development by 

recognizing the relationship between, and giving practical effect to, environmental 

integrity, human well‐being and economic efficiency within a defined geographical 

space, the boundaries of which were determined in accordance with environmental 

and social criteria. 

Biosphere reserve An area of terrestrial and coastal/marine ecosystems, or a combination thereof, which is 






December 2011 

internationally recognised within the framework of the UNESCO's MAB Programme. 

Each biosphere reserve is intended to fulfil three basic functions, which are 

complementary and mutually reinforcing: 

1. a conservation function ‐ to contribute to the conservation of landscapes, 

ecosystems, species and genetic variation; 

2. a development function ‐ to foster economic and human development which is 

socio‐culturally and ecologically sustainable; 

3. a logistic function ‐ to provide support for research, monitoring, education and 

information exchange related to local, national and global issues of 

conservation and development. 

CASP Comprehensive Agriculture Support Program. 

Catchment or catchment 

area 

The entire drainage area from which water flows into a river or other water body. 

Generally consisting of various smaller ‘quaternary’ catchments, or ‘sub‐catchments’. 

CMA Catchment Management Agency 

Conservancy A group of farms, or natural areas, on which the landowners have pooled some, or 

all, of their resources for the purpose of conserving natural and cultural resources on 

the combined properties. These resources include wildlife and their habitats, 

indigenous vegetation, forests, catchments, sites of geological and archaeological 

importance, and generally undisturbed natural and scenic landscapes. 

Conservation The management of human use of the biosphere to yield the greatest benefit to 

present generations while maintaining the potential to meet the needs and 

aspirations of future generations. Conservation thus includes sustainable use, 

protection, maintenance, rehabilitation, restoration, and enhancement of the 

natural and cultural environment. 

Constitution Constitution of the Republic of South Africa Act 108 of 1996. 

CPPP Community Public Private Partnerships are defined as a contract between a public 

sector institution/municipality and a private party, in which the private party 

assumes substantial financial, technical and operational risk in the design, financing, 

building and operation of a project. 

CRDP Comprehensive Rural Development Program. 

Critical Regionalism Critical regionalism constitutes a sensory understanding and appreciation of the 

environment and its component ‘things’. Critical regionalism recognises the quality 

and attributes of regional characteristics and builds upon the development of 

regional idiosyncrasies and variations. It is based on five basic principles or senses 

that should guide the planning, design and management of development, namely 

sense of place, sense of history, sense of craft, sense of nature and sense of limits. 

CSIR Council for Scientific and Industrial Research. 

CSP Concentrating Solar Power. 

DBSA Development Bank of Southern Africa. 

DEAT Department of Environmental Affairs and Tourism. 

Developmental State A development state tries to balance economic growth and social development. It 

uses State resources and State influence to attack poverty and expand economic 

opportunities. 

xv 




DTI Department of Trade and Industry. 

DWA Department of Water Affairs. 

DWAF Department of Water Affairs and Forestry. 



xvi 

December 2011 

Ecosystem A dynamic system of plant, animal and micro‐organism communities and their non‐ 

living environment interacting as a functional unit. 

EMP Environmental Management Plan. 

EMPR Environmental Management Programme Report. 

EMS Environmental Management System. 

Endemic species Any plant or animal species confined to, or exclusive to, a particular, specified area. 

Environment The surroundings within which humans exist and that are made up of: 

a) the land, water and atmosphere of the earth; 

b) micro‐organisms, plant and animal life; 

c) any part or combination of (a) and (b) and the interrelationships among and 

between them; and 

d) the physical, chemical, aesthetic and cultural properties and conditions of the 

foregoing that influence human health and well‐being. 

Eskom Eskom is a South African electricity public utility, and is the largest producer of 

electricity in Africa, and is among the top seven utilities in the world in terms of 

generation capacity and among the top nine in terms of sale. 

GDP Gross Domestic Product refers to the market value of all final goods and services 

produced within a country in a given period. GDP per capita is often considered an 

indicator of a country’s standard of living. 

GEF Global Environmental Facility. 

GGP The Gross Geographic Product of a particular area amounts to the total income or 

payment received by the production factors (i.e. land, labour, capital and 

entrepreneurship) for their participation in the production within that area. 

GIS Geographical Information System or ‘a system that captures, stores, analyses, 

manages and presents data with reference to geographic location data – it is a 

system of hardware and software used for storage, retrieval, mapping, and analysis 

of geographic data’’. 

GIWA Global International Waters Assessment. 

HIV Human Immunodeficiency virus that causes the condition in which progressive 

failure of the immune system allows life‐threatening opportunistic infections and 

cancers to thrive. 

I&AP 

Interested and Affected Party. 

IDC Industrial Development Corporation. 

IDP 

Integrated Development Plan. 

IEM Integrated Environmental Management. 


IISD 





International Institute for Sustainable Development. 

Indigenous Native to a particular area. 

LRAD Land Reform and Agricultural Development. 

xvii 

December 2011 

Irreplaceability The potential contribution of a site to a preservation or representation goal. It is a 

fundamental way of measuring the conservation value of any site. An irreplaceable 

site will appear in every analysis of alternative combinations of sites. In other words, 

it is one which must be included in a conservation area because significant options 

for preservation are lost if the site is excluded. 

ISO 

IUCN 

The “International Organisation for Standardisation” is an international‐standard 

setting body composed of representatives from various national standard 

organizations. The organization promulgates worldwide proprietary industrial and 

commercial standards. 

International Union for the Conservation of Nature. 

JPTC Joint Permanent Technical Committee. 

LED Local Economic Development. 

MAB 

Man and the Biosphere. 

MaB Program Launched in 1971 by UNESCO, it is a global program of international scientific co‐ 

operation, dealing with people‐environment interactions over the entire realm of 

bioclimatic and geographic situations of the biosphere. 

Macro biogeographical 

region 

A region defined by its unique biological characteristics (flora and fauna) and 

biophysical characteristics (climate, geology, soils), giving rise to a variety of major 

landscapes, and variations in human settlement patterns and economic activity. 

MDGs Millennium Development Goals. 

MW Megawatt is equal to one million watts. Watts are the yardstick for measuring 

power. 

NEMA National Environmental Management Act 107 of 1998. 

NEPAD New Partnership for Africa’s Development. 

NGO Non‐Governmental Organisation. 

Northern Cape PSDF Northern Cape Provincial Spatial Development Framework. 

NSDP National Spatial Development Perspective. 

ORASECOM Orange‐Senqu River Commission. 

PWC Permanent Water Commission. 

PGDS Northern Cape Provincial Growth and Development Strategy, 2004 ‐ 2014. 

PSDF Provincial Spatial Development Framework. 

Quaternary catchment 

Usually the area that feeds a tributary of a river or a part of the main river. 




Ramsar Convention on Wetlands of International Importance. 



xviii 

December 2011 

Rehabilitation To return a degraded ecosystem or population to a safe, stable, predetermined 

condition. 

Restoration To return a degraded ecosystem or place to its original condition. 

SADC Southern African Development Community. 

SALT Southern African Large Telescope. 

SDI Sustainable Development Initiative. 

SDF Spatial Development Framework. 

SEA Strategic Environmental Assessment. 

SKA Square Kilometre Array. 

SLAG Settlement and Land Acquisition Grant. 

SOER State of the Environment Report 

SPC Spatial Planning Category. 

Species Plants, animals, or other organisms that do not normally interbreed with individuals 

of another kind, including any sub‐species, cultivar, variety, strain, hybrid, or 

geographically separate population provided they are not part of another species. 

SMA Special Management Area which is defined as ‘an area of excellence and good practice, 

where the ethos sustainable development is served in practice. It is a cadastral 

geographical unit, which is formally recognised and managed as an area where 

environmental sustainability is promoted in practise and in accordance with international 

standards for environmental sustainability.’ 

SMME Small Micro Medium Enterprises. 

Stone Age The earliest known period of human culture, characterised by the use of stone tools. In 

South Africa, the stone age is divided into three periods: 

1. Early Stone Age ranges from between 2 million to 250 000 years ago. 

2. Middle Stone Age ranges from between 300 000 to 20 000 years ago and is 

associated with early modern humans. 

3. Late Stone Age dates to the last 20 000 years and is associated with fully modern 

people. 

Sustainable agriculture This is refers to agriculture that is socially just, humane, economically viable and 

environmentally sound. Sustainable agriculture integrates three main goals: 

environmental stewardship, farm profitability and prosperous farming communities. 

Sustainable 

development 

Sustainable development is development that meets the needs of the present 

generation without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own 

needs. 

TB Tuberculosis is a chronic infectious disease that usually affects the lungs. TB is 

caused by various strains of mycobacteria, usually Mycobacterium tuberculosis. As 

TB is a common opportunistic infection ailing people with HIV, South Africa has a 

particularly high burden of TB due to its high prevalence of HIV. 




UNCED United Nations Conference on Environment and Development. 

UNDP United Nations Development Program. 

UNEP United Nations Environmental Program. 



xix 

December 2011 

UNESCO United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation. It is a specialized 

agency of the United Nations established on 16 November 1945. Its stated purpose 

is to contribute to peace and security by promoting international collaboration 

through education, science and culture in order to further universal respect for 

justice, the rule of law and the human rights along with fundamental freedoms 

proclaimed in the UN Charter. 

Urban edge Is the demarcated outer boundary of urban areas and marks the transition between 

urban and rural land‐uses. 

World Heritage Site A World Heritage Site is a place (such as a desert, mountain, building, architectural 

monument, etc.) that is listed by UNESCO as of special cultural or physical 

significance. The list is maintained by the International World Heritage Programme 

administered by the UNESCO World Heritage Committee. Each World Heritage Site 

belongs to the country in which it is located, but it is conserved for the benefit of the 

global community and future generations. 

WMA Water Management Area. 

WQOs Water Quality Objectives. 

WRI World Resources Institute. The WRI is an environmental think tank that conducts 

research to find practical ways to protect the earth and improve people’s lives. It 

focuses on four key programs, namely: climate protection, governance, markets and 

enterprise, and people and ecosystems. 

WSA Water Services Authority. 

WSP Water Services Provider. 

WUA Water User Association. 




SECTION A: INTRODUCTION 

SECTION CONTENT 

This section comprises the following key aspects of Volume 2 of the PSDF: 

• Its format, structure and content. 

• Key objectives and function as part of the PSDF process. 

• Process and methodology followed in the preparation of Volume 2. 

A.1 BACKGROUND 

December 2011 

The Office of the Premier of the Northern Cape and the Department of Rural Development 

and Land Reform jointly commissioned the preparation of a Provincial Development and 

Resource Management Plan / Provincial Spatial Development Framework for the Northern 

Cape Province (hereinafter also referred to as the Northern Cape or the Province). For ease 

of reference the document is referred to as the Northern Cape PSDF, or the PSDF. The PSDF 

is a legal requirement in terms of Chapter 4 of the Northern Cape Planning and Development 

Act 7 of 1998. 

A.1.1 FORMAT AND STRUCTURE OF THE PSDF 

The PSDF consists of four volumes, with this document being Volume 2 (refer to Figure A.1). 

The various volumes each has a distinct 

purpose and can function as stand‐alone 

components of the PSDF. They 

collectively address all the requirements 

and guidelines for the preparation of 

SDFs and the terms of reference. 

Volume 1 provides the context, policy 

and principle framework, procedural 

guidance for the preparation of Volumes 

2, 3 and 4 and for the implementation of 

the PSDF as a whole. Volume 1 has been 

completed and was approved by the 

Project Steering Committee in June 

2011. 

VOLUME 1 

CONTEXT & OVER‐ARCHING PO LIC Y 

VOLUME 2 

PROFILE & KEY ASPECTS 

VOLUME 3 

SPATIAL DIRECTIVES & GUIDELINES 

VOLUME 4 

STRATEG IES, PRO GRAM S & PRO JEC T S 

Figure A.1: Volumes of the PSDF. 

Volume 2 (this volume) summarises the key environmental, cultural, heritage, economic, 

social, demographic, institutional and infrastructural aspects to be addressed by the PSDF. It 

incorporates the findings of an empirical study and evaluation of the urban settlements of 

the Province the purpose of which is to inform the formulation of guidelines for the 

allocation of government funds and facilitation of private sector investment. Volume 2 inter 

alia provides the basis for the preparation of a spatial vision for the Northern Cape and for 

the land‐use proposals put forward in Volume 3 and Volume 4. 



1 




December 2011 

Volume 3 puts forward the spatial directives and guidelines pertaining to land‐use 

throughout the Province. This volume consists of a ‘package’ of plans that covers the entire 

surface area of the Province together with areas outside the provincial boundaries that are 

of relevance and significance to the long‐term future of the Northern Cape. As such, the 

primary purpose of Volume 3 is to serve as the spatial manual for the future development of 

the Northern Cape. Based upon the above situational analysis, Volume 3 provides a spatial 

vision for the Northern Cape which serves as a basis for the land‐use proposals put forward 

in Volume 4. 

Volume 4 addresses the (primarily non‐spatial) key issues that emerged from inter alia the 

PSDF process, the Northern Cape Provincial Growth and Development Strategy (2011) 

(hereinafter referred to as the PGDS), and the input provided by other relevant sources. The 

key issues were collated and addressed under sectoral programs for which detailed planning 

and management strategies are provided. Collectively these sectoral programs are the 

‘mechanisms’ through which the goals and objectives of the Northern Cape are to be 

achieved. 

A.2 METHODOLOGY AND PROCESS FOR PREPARATION OF VOLUME 2 

The methodology for the preparation of this volume was adapted from Denzin and Lincoln 

(1994). It constitutes the gathering, collation and interpretation of qualitative and 

quantitative information from inter alia empirical studies, scientific research papers, study 

reports, local traditional knowledge of the Northern Cape and its component places and 

resources, and from the public participation process. Information was furthermore obtained 

from questionnaires completed by all municipalities, meetings with individual sectors and 

stakeholder groups. The PSDF Project Management Committee scrutinised the initial draft of 

this volume and submitted comment which was incorporated into this draft of the report. 

Stakeholders were informed through inter alia official notices by the Office of the Premier, 

personal notification and communication with sectoral and stakeholder representatives by 

the Department of Rural Development and Land Reform and the service provider, meetings 

between the service provider and individual municipalities, and media communications. 

Posters and pamphlets were prepared and distributed through inter alia departmental and 

municipal offices, offices of other key stakeholders, and during the public participation 

process. 

The public participation process included presentations in Kimberley, De Aar, Upington, 

Springbok and Kuruman. (Annexure 1 comprises one of the PowerPoint presentations held 

and Annexure 1.1 provides a summary of the aspects identified by the stakeholders during 

the public process). 

A.3 STRUCTURE AND CONTENT OF VOLUME 2 

In addition to this introductory section (Section A), this document comprises 8 further 

sections, the contents and functions of which are summarised in the figure below. Sections B 

to F comprise a summary of the key environmental social and economic aspects of the 

Northern Cape. Section G provides an inventory of the interventions proposed by the PGDS 



2 




December 2011 

that are of relevance to the PSDF. Section H constitutes a summary of the key aspects drawn 

from Sections B to G that are to be addressed in Volume 3 (Spatial Directives and Guidelines) 

and Volume 4 (Strategies, Programs and Projects) of the PSDF. 

SECTION B: 

CONTEXT 

SECTION C: 

ENVIRONMENT 

SECTION D: 

SETTLEMENT 

SECTION E: 

SOCIAL & HUMAN 

SECTION F: 

ECONOMY 

Location 

Location 

& Administrative 

Administrative 

Biophysical 

Biodiversity 

Cultural 

Pattern & Status 

Demography 

Status 

Sectors 

Corridors 

Infrastructure 

SECTION G: 

PGDS INTERVENTIONS 

Figure A.2: Structure and content of Volume 2. 

SECTION H: 

KEY ASPECTS INVENTORY 

Premise for preparation of 

Volume 3 & 4 



3 




SECTION B: CONTEXT 


December 2011 

This section comprises the following: 

• Location and context of the Northern Cape Province. 

• International and national significance of the Northern Cape in terms of its primary comparative economic 

advantages. 

• Administrative context with specific reference to the component municipalities and settlements. 

• Summary of the key aspects of the settlements. 

• Macro‐regions that characterise the province. 

B.1 LOCATION 

The Northern Cape is located in the north‐western corner of South Africa and has a shoreline 

of approximately 310 km with the Atlantic Ocean (refer to Map B.1 below). The Northern 

Cape Province is the largest of the nine Provinces of South Africa – it covers approximately 

372 889 km², which is 30.5% of the total land area of the country. The Northern Cape is 

bordered by the Provinces of the North West, Free State, Eastern Cape and Western Cape. In 

the north the Province shares a common international border with Namibia and Botswana 

respectively. The Northern Cape has a pivotal function as a linkage between the remainder 

of South Africa and Namibia (refer to Map B.2). 

Map B.1: National context of the Northern Cape Province 



4 




December 2011 

Map B.2: Linkages between the Northern Cape, the surrounding provinces, Namibia and 

Botswana. 

The Province is bisected by the Orange River which has its origins in the Drakensberg 

Mountains in Lesotho. The Orange River forms the international border between the 

Northern Cape and Namibia and flows into the Atlantic Ocean at Alexander Bay. 

B.2 ADMINISTRATIVE CONTEXT 

The Northern Cape, in its current jurisdictional form, was created in 1994 when the historic 

Western Cape was subdivided into the present‐day Western Cape, Eastern Cape and the 

Northern Cape. Kimberley is the capital of the Province which comprises 5 District 

Municipalities and 27 Local Municipalities. Important regional settlements include 

Springbok, Upington, De Aar, Kuruman, Calvinia and Colesberg. The tables and maps below 

summarise and contextualise the various municipalities and the component settlements. 

Table B.1: Municipalities of the Northern Cape (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

DISTRICT MUNICIPALITY LOCAL MUNICIPALITY 

NO. ADMIN. 

CAPITAL 

AREA KM² & % 

OF THE 

PROVINCE 

Frances Baard DC9 Kimberley 12 800 (3.4%) Dikgatlong 

Magareng 

Phokwane 

Sol Plaatje 

NO. AREA KM² & % OF 

THE DISTRICT 

MUNICIPALITY 

NC092 

NC093 

NC094 

NC091 

7 300 (57.0%) 

1 510 (11.8%) 

836 (6.5%) 

3 154 (24.6%) 



5 


John Taolo 

Gaetsewe 



DC45 Kuruman 27 300 (7.3%) Gamagara 

Ga‐Segonyaya 

Joe Morolong 

Namaqua DC6 Springbok 126 900 (34.0%) Hantam 

Kamiesberg 

Karoo Hoogland 

Khâi‐Ma 

Nama Khoi 

Richtersveld 

Pixley ka Seme DC7 De Aar 103 500 (27.8%) Emthanjeni 

Kareeberg 

Renosterberg 

Siyancuma 

Siyathemba 

Thembelihle 

Ubuntu 

Umsobomvu 

Siyanda DC8 Upington 102 500 (27.5%) //Khara Hais 

!Kheis 

Kai Garib 

Kgatelopele 

Mier 

Tsanatsabane 

NC453 

NC452 

NC451 

NC065 

NC064 

NC066 

NC067 

NC062 

NC061 

NC073 

NC074 

NC075 

NC078 

NC077 

NC076 

NC071 

NC072 

NC083 

NC084 

NC082 

NC086 

NC081 

NC085 

December 2011 

2 621 (9.6%) 

4 498 (16.5%) 

20 181 (73.9%) 

36 139 (28.5%) 

14 237 (11.2%) 

32 275 (25.4%) 

16 619 (13.1%) 

18 028 (14.2%) 

9 602 (7.6%) 

13 497 (13.0%) 

17 700 (17.1%) 

5 502 (5.3%) 

16 776 (16.2%) 

14 733 (14.2%) 

8 037 (7.8%) 

20 412 (19.7%) 

6 843 (6.6%) 

21 780 (21.3%) 

11 103 (10.8%) 

26 361 (25.7%) 

2 442 (2.4%) 

22 470 (21.9%) 

18 344 (17.9%) 

Map B.3: Municipalities of the Northern Cape Province (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 

2011). 



6 




December 2011 

Table B.2: Inventory of the settlements of the Province (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 

2011). 

DISTRICT MUNICIPALITY LOCAL MUNICIPALITY SETTLEMENT POPULATION 

Frances Baard Dikgatlong Barkly West 14062 

Delportshoop 9253 

Holpan 528 

Ulco 1066 

Windsorton 5074 

Magareng Warrenton 18171 

Phokwane Hartswater 5261 

Jan Kempdorp 16448 

Ganspan 2700 

Pampierstad 21129 

Sol Plaatje Kimberley 185173 

Ritchie 11222 

John Taolo Gaetsewe Gamagara Dibeng 4020 

Dingleton 2866 

Kathu 8242 

Olifantshoek 7026 

Ga‐Segonyana Kuruman 31878 

Joe Morolong Blackrock 1005 

Hotazel 1220 

Van Zylsrus 851 

Namakwa Hantam Brandvlei 2311 

Calvinia 8459 

Loeriesfontein 2347 

Nieuwoudtville 1434 

Kamiesberg Garies 1655 

Hondeklip Bay 540 

Kamieskroon 908 

Karkams 1292 

Kheis 444 

Klipfontein 463 

Koingnaas 721 

Leliefontein 807 

Nourivier 416 

Paulshoek 494 

Spoegrivier 456 

Karoo Hoogland Fraserburg 2406 

Sutherland 1983 

Williston 2846 

Khâi‐Ma Aggeneys 2054 

Onseepkans 910 

Pella 1423 

Pofadder 2920 

Nama Khoi Buffelsrivier 1117 

Carolusberg 967 

Concordia 4031 

Kleinzee 2708 

Komaggas 3309 



7 




December 2011 

Nababeep 5592 

Okiep 5250 

Springbok 10292 

Steinkopf 7261 

Vioolsdrif 492 

Richtersveld Alexander Bay 1455 

Eksteenfontein 446 

Khubus 1095 

Lekkersing 420 

Port Nolloth 5014 

Sanddrif 1137 

Pixley Ka Seme Emthanjeni Britstown 4028 

De Aar 26027 

Hanover 2693 

Kareeberg Carnarvon 5233 

Van Wyksvlei 1421 

Vosburg 1131 

Renosterberg Petrusville 3584 

Phillipstown 2782 

Vanderkloof 1017 

Siyancuma Campbell 1769 

Douglas 15476 

Griekwastad 5211 

Schmidtsdrift 3249 

Siyathemba Marydale 2077 

Niekerkshoop 1998 

Prieska 11515 

Thembelihle Hopetown 8057 

Orania 516 

Strydenburg 2345 

Ubuntu Loxton 771 

Richmond 4316 

Victoria West 5728 

Umsobomvu Colesberg 12761 

Norvalspont 1014 

Noupoort 6870 

Siyanda !Kheis Boegoeberg 1584 

Gannaput 965 

Groblershoop 440 

Grootdrink 2183 

Stutterheim 3037 

Wegdraai 1553 

//Khara Hais Karos 953 

Klippunt 1948 

Lambrechtsdrif 568 

Leerkrans 1064 

Louisvale 902 

Raaswater 1980 

Swartkop 1272 

Upington 61358 



8 




December 2011 

Kai !Garib Alheit 689 

Augrabies 2693 

Cillie 1527 

Kakamas 7306 

Keimoes 7311 

Kenhardt 3795 

Lennetsville 1499 

Loxtonberg 711 

Lutzburg 1305 

Marchand 1674 

Riemvasmaak 702 

Kgatelopele Danielskuil 10075 

Lime Acres 4079 

Mier Groot Mier 422 

Philandersbron 790 

Rietfontein 2151 

Tsantsabane Goedgedacht 539 

Groenwater 517 

Postmasburg 21232 

Map B.4: Settlements in context of the municipalities of the Province (Source: Van der 

Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 



9 




B.3 DISTINCTIVE MACRO‐REGIONS 

December 2011 

The vastness, area‐based economic resources, environmental manifestations and unique 

cultural groupings of the Northern Cape have, over the ages, given rise to spontaneous 

delimitation of what could be referred to as ‘macro‐regions’ (Northern Cape Tourism 

Authority, 2011) 1 . The broad informal parameters of these ‘macro‐regions’ will serve as a 

layer in the demarcation of the component bioregions of the Province to be undertaken 

under Phase 3 and Phase 4 of the PSDF process. 

Map B.5: Macro‐bioregions of the Northern Cape (Northern Cape Tourism Authority, 2011). 

Diamond Fields 

This region is located in the eastern corner of the Province and borders the Free State 

and North West Provinces. Its name is derived from the primary diamond rush in the 

19th century when hordes of prospectors converged on the area, scouring the river 

banks and probing soil in a frantic exploration for wealth. The Diamond Fields include 

Kimberley, Barkly West, Harstwater, Jan Kempdorp, Modder River, Warrenton and 

Windsorton. 

Kalahari 

The Kalahari desert in the Northern Cape is part of the huge sand basin that reaches 

from the Orange River up to Angola in the west to Namibia and in the east to 

Zimbabwe. The Kalahari is known for the unique aesthetic appeal of its red‐dune 

1 

Northern Cape Tourism Authority, 2011: http://www.inabustours.com/NorthCape.pdf ‐ Inabus Tours. 



10 




December 2011 

landscape. Well‐known settlements include Kuruman, Van Zylsrus, and 

Postmansburg, and the other smaller settlements were largely established where 

mineral deposits occur. 

Green Kalahari: 

The Green Kalahari is a region of dramatic contrasts, where semi‐desert dunes meet 

with vineyards and other cultivated farmlands. A flourishing green valley associated 

with the Orange River cuts through the Province. Settlements in this region include 

Kakamas, Kanoneiland, Keimoes, Kenhardt, Upington etc. The Augrabies Falls 

National Park and the Kgalagadi Transfrontier Park are two of the main natural 

resources of this region. 

Karoo 

Approximately 250 million years ago the Karoo was an inland lake fringed by cycads 

and roamed by mammalian reptiles. Today, it is a geological wonderland with 

fossilised prints of dinosaurs and other fossils. It is one of the largest wool and 

mutton producing regions in South Africa. Important settlements are Colesberg, De 

Aar, Hopetown, Marydale and Prieska, etc. The Karoo includes broad sub‐regions 

such as the Hantam, Roggeveld and Boesmanland. 

Namaqualand 

This region extends from the Atlantic Ocean in the west to roughly Pofadder in the 

east, up to the Orange River in the north, and beyond Bitterfontein in the south. It 

includes the coastline, Richtersveld in the north, Knersvlakte in the south, and a 

portion of the Boesmanland in the east. The primary settlements include Alexander 

Bay, Garies, Kamieskroon, Nababeep, Port Nolloth, Springbok and Steinkopf. 

Prominent conservation areas include the Richtersveld National Park, Namaqua 

National Park and Goegap Nature Reserve. 

BOX 1 

SUMMARY OF KEY CONTEXTUAL ASPECTS 

a) Align PSDF with development directives and objectives of adjoining countries and provinces. 

b) Consider traditional parameters as a key criterion in the demarcation of municipal boundaries. 

c) Enhance management of Kgalagadi and Richtersveld Transfrontier Conservation Areas. 

d) Include municipalities in formulation and establishment of cross-border agreements (currently 

primarily the function of national government). 

e) Interrogate boundaries of John Gaetsewe District Municipality against inter alia traditional 

domain parameters. 

f) Interrogate efficiency of cross-border arrangements with Namibia with specific reference to 

the Noord-Oewer / Vioolsdrift irrigation scheme, cross-frontier conservation schemes, and 

cross-frontier economic schemes such as the proposed film industry. 

g) Interrogate the delineation of the provincial, district, municipal and ward boundaries. 

h) Provide appropriate spatial context and orientation for the Northern Cape in terms of 

international agreements, protocols and conventions. 

i) Strengthen historical binds between the Karas Region of Namibia and the Northern Cape 

Province - aspects identified for further action are (i) the education and training sector, with 

the focus on ensuring that best practice is shared in skills development for economic growth, 

(ii) further development of the Nama language and culture, (iii) exchange of learners’ support 

material and teacher development programs. 



11 




SECTION C: THE ENVIRONMENT 


December 2011 

This section addresses the key aspects of the natural and cultural environment of the Northern Cape in terms 

of the holistic definition of the ‘environment’ as put forward by the National Environmental Management Act 

(NEMA) 107 of 1998, namely the aggregate of all external conditions and influences affecting the life of an 

organism. In particular, ‘environment’ refers to the surroundings within which humans exist and that are made 

up of: 



c) any part or combination of (a) and (b) and the interrelationships among and between them; and 

d) the physical, chemical, aesthetic and cultural properties and conditions of the foregoing that influence 

human health and well‐being. 

NOTE: There is a significant gap in information relating to the biodiversity resources of the Province and the 

associated environmental services. This shortcoming has to be addressed in order to ensure that the 

requirements of the environment receive rightful and balanced consideration in land use planning and in the 

adjudication of the desirability of land use applications in terms of the PSDF and municipal SDFs. 

C.1 GENERAL BIOPHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS 

C.1.1 CLIMATE 

The weather of the Northern Cape is typically that of desert and semi‐desert areas. It is a 

generally hot and dry region with fluctuating temperatures and generally low rainfall. 

Evaporation levels exceed the annual rainfall which varies between 50 mm and 400 mm (the 

average annual rainfall over the Province is 202 mm). The western areas of the Province, 

which include Namaqualand, portions of Boesmanland, and small areas of the Green 

Kalahari, receive rainfall during the winter months (April to September). The central, 

northern and eastern parts of the Province receive rain primarily during the summer months 

(December to February). Map C.1 below illustrates the average rainfall of the Northern Cape 

in context of the country as a whole. In January, average afternoon temperatures range 

between 34°C and 40°C in the interior. Summer temperatures often top the 40°C mark in 

most of the Province, with temperatures as high as 48°C having been recorded along the 

Orange River. During winter (especially in June and August), average day temperatures are 

mild (approximately 22°C). Night temperatures often drop below 0°C. In winter, snow often 

falls in the mountainous areas of Sutherland. This town lies at an altitude of 1 500 meters 

above sea level and is one of the coldest settlements in southern Africa with winter 

temperatures often being between ‐6 to ‐9°C. 

Table C.1: Monthly average temperature and rainfall for the Northern Cape (Source: 

http://www.wheretostay.co.za/nc/info/climate.htm) 

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec 

Temp (°C) 25.3 24.1 22.0 17.9 13.9 10.7 10.8 13.1 17.2 19.9 22.4 24.3 

Rainfall (mm) 57 76 65 49 16 7 7 7 12 30 42 46 



12 




December 2011 

Map C.1: Rainfall of the Northern Cape in context of the country as a whole (Source: 

Department of Water Affairs). 

The Benguela current plays a very important role in Namaqualand’s climate, with onshore 

winds blowing over the cold, up‐welled waters of the Atlantic Ocean ensuring that summer 

temperatures are seldom extreme, ranging from 25 to 35°C. Along the coastline, 

temperatures reach 25°C in summer. Winter temperatures range between 5°C and 15°C. 

Frost occurs in the high‐laying regions with snow occasionally falling in the Kamiesberg 

uplands region. The fog that blankets much of Namaqualand is a phenomenon that occurs 

frequently during the autumn months when onshore wind speeds are not strong enough to 

produce the turbulence that breaks up the fog. The fog is an important alternative source of 

moisture for the plants and various animal species and fulfils a vitally important function in 

the ecology of the Richtersveld. 

A key environmental phenomenon which represents an important potential comparative 

economic advantage is the high occurrence of sunny days and the regular occurrence of 

strong wind (especially the on‐shore winds along the coastline) both of which could be 

source of energy. The wind regine, especially along the coast, is suitable for sustainable 

electricity generation 2 . 

2 

The upper limit of wind energy available to be captured in South Africa is estimated at 3 GW. Taking a 

conservative estimate of 30% conversion efficiency and 25% capacity factor, it is estimated that wind 

power could supply at least 1% of South Africa’s projected electricity requirements (19 800 GWh) in 2002. 

This excludes the offshore wind energy potential which should also be assessed (White Paper of 

Renewable Energy, 2003). 



13 




December 2011 

The portions of the Northern Cape that border on the Orange River and Namibia have the 

highest solar radiation intensity in Southern Africa (SOER, 2011). The Map below illustrates 

the measured annual direct and diffuse solar radiation of the Northern Cape in context of 

the country as a whole 3 . 

Map C.2: Annual direct and diffuse solar radiation in South Africa (Source: CSIR et al, 2001). 

C.2 HYDROLOGY AND WATER 

King et al (2009) state that ‘water is considered one of the most essential of all natural 

resources. Due to the nature of water resources and the importance of water for the 

perpetuation of life, interventions through supply or demand management are required in 

order to meet social and economic goals such as: efficacy, economic efficiency, equity, 

environmental impacts, fiscal impacts, political and public acceptability, sustainability and 

administrative feasibility. Water of acceptable quality is both necessary for the improvement 

of the quality of life and is essential in the maintenance of all forms of life. The availability of 

3 

The average daily solar radiation in South Africa varies between 4.5 and 6.5 kWh/m. the radiation of the 

Northern Cape is between 8.501 and 9.500 kWh/m 2 . The total area of high radiation in South Africa 

amounts to approximately 194 000 km 2 and it includes the Northern Cape. If the electricity production 

per km 2 of mirror surface in a solar thermal power station is 30.2 MW and only 1 % of the area of high 

radiation is available for solar power generation, then generation potential is already approximately 64 

GW. A mere 1.25 % of the area of high radiation could thus meet projected South African electricity 

demand in 2025 (80 GW) (Pegels, 2009). 



14 




December 2011 

water for various uses is directly related to the management of water quantity, quality 

and/or the elimination of diseases. 

The Northern Cape Province is the driest Province in South Africa with an average annual 

rainfall of about 200 mm. The scarcity of water resources is a defining feature of this arid 

environment. The Orange River with its tributaries is the main source of surface water in the 

Province. Ground water plays an important part in the region, especially in settlements far 

removed the Orange River and other small rivers, however, the quality and quantity of 

ground water varies. The western part of the Northern Cape borders on the Atlantic Ocean 

and these marine resources play an integral role in the economy, environment and climate 

of the Province. 

C.2.1 WATER MANAGEMENT 

The institutional landscape for the water sector is set out in the Water Services Act of 1997 

and the National Water Act of 1998. The 1997 Water Services Act is the instrument that 

regulates the accessibility of water by domestic users. It secures the right of access to basic 

water supply and basic sanitation necessary to ensure efficient water and an environment 

not harmful to health or well‐being as stipulated in the Constitution of the Republic of South 

Africa. In terms of the Water Services Act Water Services Institution is defined in the as a 

water services authority, water services provider, water board or a water services 

committee. 

The 1998 National Water Act defines the legal framework under which water resources are 

protected, developed and managed, using the three principles of equity, efficiency and 

sustainability. Water management institutions that are defined in this legislation are: 

• Catchment Management Agencies 

• Water User Associations 

• A body responsible for International Water Management 

Although the water sector policy framework is highly regarded, the institutional and 

legislative framework that anchors the implementation of policy has not been functioning 

optimally. To address this, a process of reviewing the water sector institutional framework 

started in 2007. The process included various stages of intensive research, consultation and 

analysis. From the analysis of the various institutions, it has been decided that institutional 

reform of CMAs, WUAs, Water Boards and institutions responsible for national water 

resources infrastructure will be undertaken. A new model has been derived from the 

two‐year process and it is guided by the following principles: 

a) Wall‐to‐wall coverage of water resources and water services institutions 

b) Reduction of the number of institutions to ensure economies of scale and improved 

regulation 

c) Ensure clear accountability by addressing the span of control and relationships 

d) Strengthen institutional capacity in the value chain 

e) Maximize service delivery 

f) Impact on water pricing for socio economic growth by reducing transactional costs of 

institutional arrangements 

g) Strengthen capacity to collect revenue 



15 




December 2011 

In terms of the proposed model, the Minister of Water Affairs will retain the responsibility to 

establish various water sector institutions through consultation with various government 

and water sector stakeholders. 

Map C.3: Water management institutional arrangements (Source: Department of Water 

Affairs). 

C.2.2 INTERNATIONAL ISSUES 

The Northern Cape borders on Namibia and Botswana. Most of the rivers shared with 

Botswana are ephemeral due to very low rainfall figures, but the Province shares a 

significant part of the Orange River with Namibia. Chapter 10 of the 1998 National Water 

Act, 36 of 1998, discusses issues related to international water management and outlines 

the establishment of institutional bodies to implement international agreements with 

respect to the management and development of shared water resources with neighbouring 

countries. It outlines the key governance functions, reporting requirements, and 

management of financial affairs. The key functions of such bodies are as follows: 

• Investigating, managing, monitoring and protecting water resources. 

• Regional cooperation on water resources. 

• Acquiring, constructing, altering, operating or maintaining a water work. 

• Allocation, use, and supply of water. 

At the time of the promulgation of the National Water Act, the Noordoewer Joint Irrigation 

Authority, which was established through an agreement on 14 September 1992 with the 



16 




December 2011 

Government of Namibia, already existed. Institutional bodies that deal with cross‐border 

water issues related to the Northern Cape are the: 

a) ORASECOM: South Africa, Lesotho, Botswana and Namibia are the watercourse 

states (or co‐basin countries) of the Orange River System. Cooperation amongst the 

Orange River Basin Countries is facilitated through the Orange‐Senqu River 

Commission (ORASECOM) with membership by the basin countries. 

b) Permanent Water Commission (PWC) between South Africa and Namibia, dealing 

with all matters related to common Watercourses and also supervises the 

Vioolsdrift/Noordoewer Joint Irrigation Authority (JIA). 

c) Joint Permanent Technical Committee (JPTC) between South Africa and Botswana 

that deals with all matters relating to common watercourses. 

Interaction between Namibia and South Africa currently deals with common interests in the 

following areas: 

(i) Permanent Water Commission with representatives from South African and Namibia 

at a national level. 

(ii) Orange River Mouth Interim Management Committee. 

(iii) Ai‐Ais/Richtersveld Transfrontier Conservation Park (addressing guidelines for the 

joint management of the park). 

(iv) Lower Orange Mediation Forum, mainly addressing the problem of toxic algae. 

C.2.3 WATER SERVICE INSTITUTIONS 

Effective and efficient water services delivery is entirely dependent on an effective local 

government. The policies and legislation that guides the provision of potable water supply to 

all, include the following: 

1994 Reconstruction and Development Programme 

1996 Constitution (Act 108 of 1996) 

Transitional Local Government System 

1997 Water Services Act (Act 108 of 1997) 

1998 Demarcation Act (Act 27 of 1998) 

National Water Act (Act 36 of 1998) 

Municipal Structures Act (Act 117 of 1998) 

2000 New local government systems in place 

Municipal Systems Act 

2001 Set of Norms and Standards: Regulations relating to Compulsory National 

Standards and measures to conserve water – Government Gazette, 08 June 2001 

2003 The Strategic Framework for Water Services 

Municipal Financial Management Act 

Even though DWA sets national policy and strategy for water services and is the regulator, 

the Constitution states that local government has the executive authority in respect of the 

delivery and administration of potable water and sanitation services and therefor has the 

constitutional obligation to ensure that residents get access to water and sanitation services. 

The Water Services Act defines two different roles at the municipal level in terms of water 

services: Water Services Authority (WSA) and Water Services Provider (WSP). The WSA is in 



17 




December 2011 

effect the local regulator, whereas the Provider carries out operation of the system on a 

day‐to‐day basis and reports to the WSA. 

The primary responsibility for the provision of safe drinking water rests with the Water 

Service Authority who has the legal responsibility to: 

• Plan (through the Water Services Development Plan) 

• Regulate (through the development of bylaws) 

• Monitor the quality of drinking water provided to consumers 

• Compare the results to national drinking water standards 

• Communicate any health risks to consumers and appropriate authorities 

Although the Amendment to the Municipal Structures Act assigns WSA functions to the 

district municipalities (Category C), the service capacity rests with the local municipalities 

(Category B) and thus they continue to be the service providers. Section 78 of the Municipal 

Systems Act 32 of 2000, obligates all WSAs to undertake a strategic assessment to determine 

how to go about the water services provision function – whether the WSA can carry out the 

provision function by itself, or whether it can delegate it to a range of other suitable parties, 

be they in the public or private sector. 

In the Northern Cape, all local municipalities and district municipalities have been authorised 

as both WSAs and WSPs. No other South African Province has this situation. On farms, the 

landowner provides water. In the case of the district municipalities, their authorisation is 

only for District Management Areas, which tend to be sparsely populated, which makes the 

role a relatively minor one. Most of the municipalities in the Northern Cape have capacity 

challenges in water services provision. 

C.2.4 WATER AVAILIBILITY 

The Orange and the Vaal River system are the most relevant in context of water availability 

in the Northern Cape Province. 

Contrary to popular belief, the Orange River was not named after the reddish orange colour 

of its silt‐laden water. It was in fact named in 1779 by Colonel Robert Gordon, the 

commander of the garrison of the Dutch East India Company (Cape Town) during a 

reconnaissance into the interior, in honour of the Dutch House of Orange. The Lesotho part 

of the river is called Senqu, and the whole river is sometimes referred to the as the Orange‐ 

Senqu. It is also refered to as the ‘Gariep’, a Nama or Korana name that could have meant 

‘the river’ or ‘our river’ or ‘the great river’. To the earlier hunter‐gatherers this was the 

mother of all rivers. It brought life to the desert areas, but the source of the vast flow of 

water was a mystery (Earle et al, 2005). 

The Orange River Basin (refer to Map C.5) is an international river basin shared by 4 

southern African countries, South Africa, Lesotho, Botswana and Namibia and encompasses 

an area of 896 368 km² (Diederichs et al, 2005) making it the largest river system south of 

the Zambezi. Approximately 70% of the Orange River Basin is situated in the south‐western 

arid to semi‐arid southern African sub‐region, where mean annual precipitation ranges, from 

east to west, between 500 and 0mm and evaporation between 2900 and >3500 mm. In the 



18 




December 2011 

South African context, the Orange River Basin stretches over 6 of the country’s nine 

Provinces, i.e. Mpumalanga, Gauteng, North West, Eastern Cape, Free State and the 

Northern Cape. Approximately 50% of the Orange River Basin is situated within the semi‐arid 

to arid Northern Cape Province. 

Topographically, the Orange River System, which drains approximately 47% of South Africa’s 

total surface area and approximately 22% of the country’s mean annual rainfall run‐off, can 

be divided into an upper (origin to Orange ‐Vaal confluence), a middle, (Orange ‐Vaal 

confluence to Augrabies Falls) and a lower (Augrabies Falls to Orange River Mouth) section. 

Approximately 98% of the Orange River System’s runoff is generated in the upper section. 

The Orange River System is the most developed transboundary river basin in the region, with 

a variety of water transfer schemes to supply water to municipalities, industries and farms 

inside and outside the basin. It has become highly regulated by virtue of 24 major 

impoundments (constructed within the catchment between 1884 and 1997), numerous 

minor impounding structures and 6 inter‐basin as well as 5 inter‐catchment water transfer 

schemes. 

Map C.4: Rivers of the Northern Cape (Source: Department of Water Affairs). 



19 




Map C.5: The Orange River Basin (Source: WRP in Earl et al 2005). 

December 2011 

The Province largely falls within 4 Water Management Areas, namely the Lower Orange 

(WMA 06), Upper Orange (WMA 12), Olifants/Doorn (WMA 15) and the Lower Vaal (WMA 

20) Water Management Area (WMA) (refer to Map C.6 below). 

C.2.4.1 LOWER ORANGE WMA 

This WMA largely corresponds to the boundaries of the Northern Cape Province with 

Botswana and Namibia, as well as having small portions located in the Western Cape and 

Free State Provinces. Most of the water requirement is met from releases from major dams 

in the Upper Orange WMA. The area receives the lowest mean annual rainfall in the country, 

ranging from 20mm at the coast and 400mm on the eastern boundary. Evaporation can be 

several times more than the rainfall received, being as high as 3,000 mm per annum. The 

area is also characterised by prolonged droughts often interspersed with severe flooding. 

57% Of the natural runoff is generated in Lesotho, 33% in the Upper Orange WMA and the 

remaining 10% in the Lower Orange WMA. The Vaal River is the main tributary to the Orange 

River with the confluence near the town of Douglas. Other tributaries are Ongers, 

Hartebeest and Molopo rivers, as well as the Fish River in Namibia. Most of the runoff 

generated in the WMA is coming from the Fish River and enters the main Orange River close 

to the river mouth. The WMA is extremely dependent on water from upstream WMAs. Over 

95% of water available in the WMA is released from the Vanderkloof Dam in the Upper 

Orange WMA. Water is transferred within the WMA from the Orange River to the Coastal 

sub‐area. This water transfer supplies 75% of the requirements for water in the sub‐area. 

The Orange River’s negative yield within the Lower Orange WMA is a result of evaporation 



20 




December 2011 

losses and evapo‐transpiration by riparian vegetation along that part of the river, which by 

far exceed the run‐of‐river yield contributed by local inflows. The WMA is also most 

impacted upon by upstream developments. It is the most downstream of five WMAs 

covering the Orange/Vaal River Basis, with extensive inter‐catchment transfers into and from 

most of these WMAs. Water use in Lesotho, and transfers from Lesotho to the Upper Vaal 

WMA, as well as the sharing of water with Namibia and underground resources with 

Botswana, also have an influence on the WMA. 

The Orange River Estuary is a transboundary Ramsar site. The in‐stream and estuarine flow 

requirements are approximately 280 million m³ per annum and this water is currently being 

released from the Vanderkloof Dam. The three sub‐areas of the water management area are 

the Orange, the Orange Tributaries and the Orange Coastal sub‐areas. 

C.2.4.2 UPPER ORANGE WMA 

This WMA lies predominantly within the Free State. As with the Lower Orange WMA, the 

Orange River, which rises in the eastern highlands of Lesotho where it is known as the Senqu 

River, is the main river in this WMA. The Orange River is the largest and longest river in 

South Africa and discharges into the Atlantic Ocean some 2 300 km from its origin in 

Lesotho. The climate over the Upper Orange WMA is cool to temperate and ranges from 

semi‐arid to arid. Rainfall mainly occurs as summer thunder showers and reduces 

dramatically from as high as 1 000 mm per year at locations in the east to about 200 mm per 

year in the west. In Lesotho rainfall varies between 600 mm per year to about 1 500 mm per 

year. Potential evaporation within the Upper Orange WMA is also well in excess of the 

annual rainfall. Main storage dams in the WMA are: 

a) The Gariep and Vanderkloof dams, which command the two largest reservoirs in 

South Africa. Hydropower for peaking purposes is generated at both sites. 

b) The Armenia and Egmont dams on tributaries in the Caledon sub‐area, the 

Welbedacht Dam on the Caledon River, and the Knellpoort Dam that supplements 

the water to Bloemfontein. 

c) The Rustfontein, Mockes and Krugersdrift dams that are situated on the Modder 

River, and the Tierpoort and Kalkfontein dams on the Riet River. 

C.2.4.3 LOWER VAAL WMA 

The Vaal River is the only major river in the Lower Vaal WMA flowing across its south‐ 

eastern corner connecting it to the Middle Vaal and Lower Orange WMAs. The Harts River is 

the only significant tributary to the Vaal River as it enters the Lower Orange WMA. The 

largest part of the Lower Vaal WMA falls within the catchment of the Molopo River, a 

tributary to the Orange River. However, the Molopo is an endorheic river with its flow not 

reaching the Orange River. Intensive irrigation is practiced at Vaalharts and along the Vaal 

River. The Vaalharts Irrigation Scheme is the largest in the country and of its 35,302 ha, 

31,732 ha is located in the Northern Cape. There are no distinct topographic features in the 

Lower Vaal WMA and most of the terrain is relatively flat with no climatic barriers. Climate 

over the Lower Vaal WMA therefore varies gradually according to the larger regional 

patterns. Annual rainfall ranges from about 500 mm in the east to as low as 100 mm in the 



21 




December 2011 

west. Potential evaporation can be as high as 2 800 mm per year, which, as is the case with 

the Upper and Lower Orange WMAs, exceeds the rainfall. 

Map C.6: Water Management Areas of South Africa (Source: Department of Water Affairs). 

C.2.4.4 OLIFANTS / DOORN WMA 

This is the least populated WMA in South Africa. The main river in the area is the Olifants 

River with the Doring River as its main tributary. The Olifants / Doorn WMA is predominantly 

a winter rainfall region, with only the south‐eastern region receiving more than 300 mm of 

rain annually (DWAF, 2004). 

C.2.5 GROUNDWATER 

Over a third of the rural population of South Africa is dependent on groundwater resources 

for household and agricultural use (Colvin et al. 2007). In all areas of the Northern Cape, 

except along the Orange and Vaal rivers, the population is dependent on groundwater. 

C.2.6 WATER BALANCE 

The table below demonstrates the water balance in the Province as it was in 2000, and 

adjusted to estimate the envisaged situation in 2025 (Source: Department of Water Affairs). 



22 




December 2011 

AVAILABLE WATER IN MILLION WATER REQUIREMENTS IN MILLION 

M³/PA 

M³/PA 

SUB AREA DATE LOCAL YIELD TRANSF. IN TOTAL LOCAL REQ. TRANSF. OUT TOTAL 

Harts 2000 136 419 555 494 45 539 

Harts 2025 136 419 555 494 45 539 

Molopo 2000 35 4 39 36 0 36 

Molopo 2025 35 4 39 36 0 36 

Vaal 

(downstream 

from Bloem) 

2000 ‐46 545 499 65 423 488 

Vaal 

(downstream 

from Bloem) 

2025 ‐46 545 499 65 423 488 

Riet/Modder 2000 137 242 379 351 29 380 

Riet/Modder 2025 160 301 461 410 52 462 

Vanderkloof 2000 3534 0 3534 346 2809 3155 

Vanderkloof 2025 3264 0 3264 384 2918 3302 

Doring 2000 11 3 14 15 0 15 

Doring 2025 11 3 14 15 0 15 

Knersvlakte 2000 4 4 8 7 0 7 

Knersvlakte 2025 4 4 8 6 0 6 

C.2.7 STORAGE DAMS 

The follow primary irrigation dams occur in the Province (refer to Map C.7): 

a) Gariep and Vanderkloof 

The Gariep and Vanderkloof dams are the largest and second largest water reservoirs 

respectively in the country. Vanderkloof Dam is situated 130 km downstream of the 

Gariep Dam. These dams, which are owned and operated by DWA and the Eskom 

hydro power stations, are integral components of the Orange River Scheme. Eskom 

contributed to the cost of raising the walls of both Gariep and Vanderkloof dams in 

order to substantially increase the hydro power potential of the dams. There is thus a 

close liaison and co‐operation between DWA and Eskom in order to ensure that a 

balance is maintained between irrigation, urban water supplies, recreation and the 

generation of electricity needs. Laker (2009) indicates that the Gariep Dam was built 

just for storage andhydro‐electric power generation, and does not have any canal 

outlets. The dam cannot be used to irrigate the irrigable Plooysburg area. He further 

notes that the Vanderkloof dam is sited originally with the intention that it provides 

irrigation water to large areas south of the Orange River in the Karoo, but there are 

no viable irrigable soils in this area. The dam is currently just providing water to small 

areas at Rama, Douglas and the Riet River Scheme. 

b) Vaalharts Weir 

The Vaalharts Weir is located in the Vaal River near Hartswater. This is one of the 

most important schemes in the Northern Cape in that it feeds and the Vaalharts 

WUA, Magareng Municipality and Phokwane. 

c) Boegoeberg Dam 

The Boegoeberg dam is located near Groblershoop and Langberg, and was 

constructed during the 1930s economic depression as a measure to relieve 

unemployment. The original capacity of the dam was over 40 million m³ has been 



23 




December 2011 

reduced by half to approximately 20 million m³ due to the build‐up of sedimentation. 

The dam currently provides approximately 7,560 ha of irrigation water. 

d) Douglas Storage Weir 

The Douglas Storage Weir is situated near Douglas, upstream of the Orange ‐Vaal 

confluence. 

e) Neusberg Storage Weir 

The Neusberg Storage Weir is situated on the Orange River 12km upstream from 

Kakamas and was completed in 1993. The weir is 960m long and on average 5m high 

and has a storage capacity of almost two million m³. The weir diverts water into two 

canals, one on each bank of the Orange River. These canals supply water to the 

Kakamas Irrigation Scheme. 

f) Spitskop Dam 

The Spitskop Dam is situated near Kimberley on the Harts River in the Lower Vaal 

WMA. 

Map C.7: Main dams in the Northern Cape (Source: Department of Water Affairs). 

Approximately eight possible locations for future dams on the Orange River have been 

identified. The Boskraai Dam is mentioned as a priority in the 2004 National Water Resource 

Strategy. This dam is planned to be constructed at the Orange /Kwaai confluence. A dam at 

Vioolsdrift is also a priority to improve the control of the last section of the Orange River, 

approximately 1,800 km from the Vanderkloof Dam. The Orange River mouth is a protected 

area and a constant volume of water needs to be released into the sea to protect the 

ecology of the area. Namibia in turn is supporting the plan for the dam as it will secure 

additional irrigation water from the Orange River. This dam is required by 2023‐2026, and it 



24 




December 2011 

is anticipated that the planning, surveying, design, and the South Africa‐Namibia 

negotiations will delay construction until 2014‐2018. An investigation of the potential of a 

dam at Aspoort in the Doring subarea of Olifants/Doorn WMA was undertaken by Northern 

Cape in the 1990s. The study indicated that a dam would have the potential for irrigation 

developments on a large scale. The Northern Cape Department of Agriculture originally 

proposed to undertake a pilot scheme to verify some of the assumptions used in the Aspoort 

Scheme proposal. However, this has not yet been undertaken. The Western Cape also 

investigated the Melkboom and Melkbosrug dams and a development cap was put in place 

for a period of seven years, up to end 2005, to ensure that ad hoc development did not 

preclude the development of any schemes by the Northern Cape. 

C.2.8 WATER QUALITY 

C.2.8.1 THE LOWER VAAL 

The land use in the Lower Vaal WMA is primarily livestock farming, with some dry land 

cultivation in the northeast. Intensive irrigation is practiced at Vaalharts. Diamond‐bearing 

intrusions near Kimberley and alluvial diamonds are found near Bloemhof. Iron ore and 

other minerals are found in the south‐eastern parts of the Lower Vaal WMA. The 

development in the Upper and Middle Vaal WMAs has led to the deterioration in the water 

quality of the water resources in the system, with salinisation and eutrophication being the 

two major water quality problems being experienced. 

Salination has either a natural or an anthropogenic cause. Although the origin of natural 

salination of river water is geological, human activities are associated with increased 

releases of salts, particularly at point sources of pollution, such as poorly managed urban 

settlements and mining residues. Water quality studies have found that levels of dissolved 

salts are high in the Lower Vaal downstream of the Harts River confluence. Irrigation along 

the lower Vaal River to Douglas causes concentration of salts. The Modder and Riet River 

irrigation schemes consume large amounts of fresh water and raise salinity levels in the 

depleted river flow to high levels, further adding to the pollution of the lower Vaal River at 

Douglas Barrage. Water quality can have a significant effect on crop production. All irrigation 

water contains dissolved mineral salts, but the concentration and composition of the 

dissolved salts vary according to the source of the water. Very high salt levels can reduce and 

even stop crop growth. Other reasons for high levels of salinity are related to mining 

activities. 

Eutrophication is the enrichment of water with plant nutrients nitrate and phosphates, 

which encourages the growth of algae. The algae cause problems in water purification. The 

sources of the nutrients include irrigation return flows, urban runoff, industrial discharges 

and wastewater treatment works discharges. Water quality studies have found that there is 

also excessive growth of water hyacinth. Eutrophication has negative economic implications 

for water users. Water boards in the Middle Vaal have been forced to upgrade their water 

treatment works to treat odour and colour associated with the eutrophication. Further 

impacts include alteration of the ecology of the river systems, the clogging of irrigation 

equipment, and being unable to use river systems for recreational purposes. The regulation 

of the Vaal River has resulted in a reduction in baseflows and flow variations in the river. The 



25 




December 2011 

low flows and the lack of variation in flow has been identified as contributing factors to the 

eutrophic conditions in the middle reaches of the Vaal River. 

Water quality studies have also found localised occurrence of microbiological pollutants in 

specific catchments, including the Harts River catchment. The reason for microbiological 

contamination is that many of the wastewater treatment works are not performing to their 

specifications and are not complying with their licence discharge standard requirements. 

Investigations have found that the maintenance and management of the sewerage systems 

have also fallen into disrepair in many of the local municipalities in the immediate vicinity of 

the specific catchment. This is resulting in microbiological pollution of the receiving streams 

with the resulting public health issues. 

C.2.8.2 LOWER ORANGE 

Nutrients and algae blooms are the main concern in the Lower Orange WMA. Salination is 

currently not the main problem experienced in the Lower Orange WMA in terms of water 

quality. The pre‐feasibility study conducted in 2004/2005 found that total dissolved salts 

concentrations in the Orange River, just downstream of its confluence with the Vaal River, 

were in a range of 150 to 160 mg/l. However, according to the September/October 2006 

edition of ‘The Water Wheel’, substantial volumes of low salinity water from the Orange 

River has been diverted to the Vaal River Catchment since the implementation of the 

Lesotho Highlands Water Project. This has led to increased salt levels in the Gariep and 

Vanderkloof dams. The article reports on a Water Research Council funded study focused on 

the river reach between Boegoeberg and Onseepkans. More than 35 000 ha of land in this 

area are under irrigation cultivation, with 60% grapes and 20% cotton. The study found that 

the water in this stretch is still in relatively good quality, with limited potential for salinity 

and sodicity, but that there are problems in the area between Onseepkans to Alexander Bay, 

with the highest potential for problems at Alexander Bay where the water quality was 

influenced by tidal flows. However, an unyielding increase in salinity could seriously affect 

the economy of the Boegoeberg‐Onseepkans area, as it has been found that grapevines are 

more sensitive to salinity under local conditions than found by international salinity 

guidelines. The following water quality management strategies for the Vaal River have been 

recommended 4 : 

a) Improving management of the water resources of the system by more effective 

monitoring, assessment and reporting. 

b) Implementing source control measures through licensing, EIA and EMPR processes. 

c) Putting in place Water Quality Objectives (WQOs). 

d) Maintaining or improving the water quality of the water resources of the system for 

all users and beneficial uses 

e) Controlling the salinity, eutrophication and microbiological levels. 

C.2.9 WATER‐RELATED KEY ISSUES 

4 

As recommended in the following documents: 

DWAF. 2004. Internal strategic perspective – System: Overarching. February 2004. Report number P RSA 

D000/00/0104. Page 2‐16. 

DWAF. 2008. Integrated water quality management plan for the Vaal River system: Water Quality 

Management Strategy. Directorate National Water Resource Planning. Report 



26 




December 2011 

Key Issues and Trends in the Orange River Basin (Diederichs, O’Regan, Sullivan, Fry, Mander, 

Haines & McKenzie, 2005) are the following: 

a) The Orange River Basin is an international river basin with an advanced hydropolitics 

regime, different legal and management capacities and frameworks for water 

resource management in each of the basin states. 

b) The basin is water‐scarce, with run‐off disproportionately distributed. It is a highly 

regulated basin, with large dams and extensive transfer schemes. Transformation of 

freshwater and groundwater systems has resulted in biodiversity loss and water 

quality problems, resulting in a range of ecological, economic and human health 

impacts. Infrastructure to deliver water is lacking in some rural areas, and many 

households cannot afford to pay for water. Floods and droughts are common, 

particularly in the middle and lower Orange River Basin. 

c) Water availability is limited. The water resources in the basin are considered to be 

close to maximally utilised or developed. Future water demands are likely to be met 

through transfers from other river basins into the Orange River. 

d) Gauteng Province, the economic hub of Southern Africa, is highly dependent on 

water resources from outside the Province. Gauteng’s water supply is largely 

delivered by inter‐basin transfers from other areas. 

e) Water resources from the Orange River underpin the regions cereal production and 

industrial sectors. Within the boundaries of the basin, 70% of South Africa’s cereal 

crop is produced, and 80% of the region’s industrial activities are contained. 

f) Food production in the basin contributes to livelihoods, markets, raw materials and 

foreign exchange. Agriculture is a cause of water and air pollution, and 

mismanagement has resulted in significant land degradation. 

g) Mineral extraction contributes to economies and creates employment, but impacts 

negatively particularly on groundwater resources. Owing to the region’s geology, the 

basin contains fuel deposits (coal) and mineral resources of regional and global 

importance. 

h) Human well‐being the in the basin is highly variable. The population comprises a 

diverse mix of cultural and ethnic backgrounds, a multitude of languages, and wide‐ 

ranging socio‐economic status. The majority of people live in the higher‐rainfall areas 

in the east, with significantly fewer people living in the more arid west. High rates of 

unemployment, low rural literacy, and high HIV‐AIDS occurrences have significant 

consequences for livelihoods options on the basin. 

i) The basin contains all seven of South Africa’s biomes, including two international 

biodiversity hotspots: the Drakensberg Grasslands and the Succulent Karroo, east of 

the river’s terminus. 

j) Declining water quality and river health in the lower basin has recently resulted in 

the RAMSAR status of the Orange River mouth being rescinded. 



27 




C.3 BIODIVERSITY AND NATURAL RESOURCES 

December 2011 

As stated in Volume 1, the PSDF recognises that natural biodiversity 5 is essential to human 

survival. On the genetic level, for example, biodiversity underpins the development of 

cultivated food crops varieties and animal breeds. Many of the Northern Cape’s people have 

livelihoods dependent on direct use of species, including the gathering, harvesting or 

hunting of animals and plants for food, medicine, shelter, fuel and fibre (Wynberg, 2002). 

Ecosystem services such as the maintenance of soil fertility, climate regulation and natural 

pest control, as well as intangible benefits such as aesthetic and cultural values, all support 

human activity and sustain human life (Chapin et al, 2002). Biodiversity provides a variety of 

environmental services, including the regulation of the gaseous composition of the 

atmosphere, protection of coastal zones, regulation of the hydrological cycle and climate, 

generation and conservation of fertile soils, dispersal and breakdown of wastes, pollination 

of many crops, and absorption of pollutants. Biodiversity is no longer an issue confined to 

conservation and wildlife proponents, rather its importance to farmers, to indigenous people 

and their livelihoods, to human rights, political dispensations and global trade issues, is now 

well recognised (CSIR, 2004). 

According to the Northern Cape State of the Environment Report (2004), a rational and 

consolidated system of formally protected areas is essential to ensure effective conservation 

of biodiversity. Current trends indicate that a landscape or regional approach to 

conservation is more effective than designing conservation efforts around protecting 

individual species (DEAT, 2001). Such an approach is effective if the designated protected 

areas are located in areas that contribute to the representation of the local/regional 

biodiversity (Margules and Pressey, 2000). Within South Africa the existing protected area 

system poorly represents biodiversity patterns and processes. As many as 50 of of South 

Africa’s 68 vegetation types are less than 10% conserved. 

C.3.1 FLORA 

The five biomes 6 that occur in the Northern Cape are illustrated and decribed below (refer 

to Map C.8): 

C.3.1.1 NAMA KAROO BIOME 

The Nama Karoo Biome is dominated by grassy, dwarf shrubland and covers 25% of the land 

surface of South Africa and more than 50% of that of the Northern Cape Province. Within 

this biome grasses (hemicryptophytes) tend to be more common in landscape depressions 

5 

The Convention on Biological Diversity defines it as ’the variability among living organisms from all 

sources including terrestrial, marine, and other aquatic ecosystems, and the ecological complexes of which 

they are part; this includes diversity within, and between, species and of ecosystems’. 

6 

A group of ecosystems, which may differ considerably in the species they contain, but function in 

ecologically similar ways. In practice, although biomes contain both plants and animals, for purposes of 

identifying biomes and mapping them, the vegetation type is used to define the biome boundaries. 

Biomes are classified according to their predominant vegetation. Biomes are defined by factors such as 

plant structures (such as trees, shrubs, and grasses), leaf types (such as broadleaf and needleleaf), plant 

spacing (forest, woodland, savanna), and climate. 



28 




December 2011 

and on sandy soils (as opposed to clayey soils). Grazing rapidly increases the relative 

abundance of shrubs (chaemaphytes). Although not remarkably rich in species or endemism, 

the flora and fauna of this region are impressively adapted to its climate extremes. 

Some of the more abundant shrubs in this biome include species of Drosanthemum, 

Eriocephalus, Galenia, Pentzia, Pteronia and Ruschia, while the principle perennial grasses 

are Aristida, Digitaria, Enneapogon and Stipagrostis spp. The more well‐known species that 

occur in the Nama Karoo include Sweet Thorn (Acacia karroo), Three Thorn (Rhigozum 

trichotomum), Bitterbos (Chrysocoma ciliate), Stone Plant (Lithos ruschiorum) and Karoo 

daisy (Felicia austalis). The major large‐scale disturbance to the Nama Karoo ecosystem has 

been grazing, previously by a variety of indigenous migratory ungulates and now by sheep 

and goats confined within farm boundaries. Very little of the Nama Karoo is formally 

protected (WWF, 2008). 

Map C.8: Biomes of the Northern Cape (Source: Department of Environmental Affairs). 

C.3.1.2 SUCCULENT KAROO BIOME 

The Succulent Karoo Biome is recognised as an International Biodiversity Hotspot. It occurs 

along the western extremities of the Northern Cape Province (refer to Map C.8) and includes 

the Namaqualand and the Richtersveld regions. The Succulent Karoo Biome Biome has the 

richest succulent flora on earth of which 69% are endemic 7 . Plants in the Succulent Karoo 

are adapted to survive extremely dry summers. The typical vegetation of the Succulent 

7 

Confined to, or exclusive to, a particular, specified area. 



29 




December 2011 

Karoo is a dwarf shrubland dominated alm ost entirely by leaf succulents such as Vygies 

(Mesembryanthemacceae) and Stonecrops (Crassulaceae). Mass flowering displays occurs 

annually (mainly Daisies Asteraceae) during the months of spring, often on degraded or 

fallow agricultural land. 

Notable plants species found in this Hotspot include the Botterboom (Tylecodon paniculatus) 

and the Halfmens (Pachypodium namaquanum), a stem succulent endemic to the 

Richtersveld that can grow up to four meters tall. Clusters of Halfmens trees tend to face 

towards the north, giving the appearance of groups of people gazing northwards. The iconic 

quiver tree (Aloe dichotoma) 8 occurs in the Richtersveld and is a keystone species in the 

region. The Succulent Karoo is also famous for its numerous species of lithops, tiny succulent 

plants which resemble small stones. They are amongst the smallest perennial plants in the 

world. 

Another outstanding feature of the Succulent Karoo is the high diversity of geophytes or 

bulblike plants. Most of the 630 species of geophytes are petaloid monocots in the families 

Hyacinthaceae (Lachenalia, Ornithogalum), Iridaceae (Babiana, Lapeirousia, Moraea, 

Romulea), Amaryllidaceae (Brunsvigia, Hessea, Strumaria) and Asphodelaceae (Bulbine, 

Trachyandra). No other desert region has this diversity and splendour of bulbs. 

The distinctive climatic characteristics of the Succulent Karoo make it different from all other 

deserts in the world. Rainfall is reliable and predictable, falling mostly in winter and 

prolonged droughts are rare. Precipitation is supplemented by heavy dewfalls and fog 

generated by the cold Benguela current of the Atlantic Ocean. Another interesting feature is 

the prevalence of ‘heuweltjies’ which are raised mounds of calcium‐rich soil, thought to have 

been created by termites. These often support distinctive plant communities. 

The Biome is threatened by overgrazing, especially on communal lands, and mining activities 

(mining for diamonds, heavy minerals, gypsum, limestone, marble, monazite, kaolin, 

ilmenite and titanium) continue to transform this landscape. 

C.3.1.3 SAVANNA BIOME 

The Savanna Biome covers the northern part of the Province. It is the largest biome in 

Southern Africa, occupying 46% of its area and over one‐third of South Africa. It is 

characterised by a grassy ground layer and a distinct upper layer of woody plants. Where this 

upper layer is near the ground the vegetation may be referred to as Shrubveld, where it is as 

dense as Woodland the intermediate stages are locally known as Bushveld. A major factor 

delimiting the biome is the lack of sufficient rainfall which prevents the upper layer from 

dominating, coupled with fires and grazing, which keep the grass layer dominant. Most of 

the Savanna vegetation types are used for grazing, mainly by cattle or game. 

In the Northern Cape and the Kalahari, the most distinctive trees are the Camel Thorn 

(Acacia erioloba) and the Camphor Bush (Tarchonanthus camphorates). Other prominent 

trees are the Portly Baobab (Adansonia digitata) and the Candelabra tree (Euphorbia ingens). 

8 

Known as ‘Choje’ to the indigenous San people, the Quiver tree gets its name from the San practice of 

hollowing out of the tubular branches to form quivers for their arrows. 



30 




December 2011 

Much of the area is used for game‐farming and can thus be considered effectively preserved, 

provided that sustainable stocking levels are maintained. 

C.3.1.4 GRASSLAND BIOME 

As illustrated by Map C.8, small parts in the southern‐eastern region of the Northern Cape 

fall under the Grassland Biome. Grasslands are dominated by a single layer of grasses. The 

amount of cover depends on rainfall and the degree of grazing. Trees are absent, except in a 

few localised habitats. Geophytes (bulbs) are often abundant. Frosts, fire and grazing 

maintain the grass dominance and prevent the establishment of trees. 

Grasslands are one of the most threatened biomes in South Africa and play an important 

role in water production. For instance, the Orange River has its headwaters in the biome. 

The Grassland Biome is a very old, complex and slowly evolved system with indigenous 

species diversity second only to the Fynbos Biome. Only one in six plants species in the 

Biome is a grass, the remainder includes bulbous plants such as Arum Lillies, Orchids, Red‐ 

Hot Pokers, Aloes, Watsonias, Gladioli, Ground Orchids and Underground trees. This biome 

is the mainstay of dairy, beef and wool production in South Africa and pastures may be 

augmented in wetter areas by the addition of legumes and sweet grasses. 

C.3.1.5 FYNBOS BIOME 

As illustrated by Map C.8, small portions of the Northern Cape fall within the world‐ 

renowned Fynbos Biome 9 . According to the Namakwa District Biodiversity Sector Plan (2008) 

Bokkeveld Sandstone Fynbos and Niewoudtville Shale Renosterveld are found within the 

Hantam Local Municipality. Namaqualand Granite Renosterveld and Kamiesberg Granite 

Fynbos are found within the Kamiesberg Local Municipality. The Kamiesberg Protea (Protea 

namaquana) is endemic to the Kamiesberg area. 

C.3.1.6 CENTRES OF ENDEMISM 

In addition to the 5 biomes that occur in the Northern Cape, 8 out of the 18 Centres of 

Endemism that exist in South Africa are found within the Northern Cape. The Kamiesberg, 

Orange and Hantam‐Roggeveld centres fall almost exclusively within the Northern Cape 

(refer to Map C.9 below). 

9 

The Fynbos Biome is one of the six floral kingdoms of the world. It covers a mere 0.04 % of the land 

surface of the world and is only floral kingdom found within the boundaries of one country. It has more 

than 8 500 species of which more than 6 000 are endemic. 



31 




December 2011 

Map C.9: Centres of Endemism in the Northern Cape (Source: Department of Environmental 

Affairs). 

C.3.2 FAUNA 

In the mid and late 1800s, travellers witnessed game migrations numbering millions across 

the Northern Cape, especially close to the Orange River. One account recalls a herd taking 

three days to pass through a small town. Springbok were by far the most numerous species 

involved in these migrations but were also joined by Wildebeest, Blesbok, Eland etc (WWF, 

2008). Today a large variety of game species is still found throughout the Northern Cape. Big 

game animals like Black Rhinoceros, Buffalo, Giraffe and Eland along with numerous species 

of plains game occur mainly in protected areas and on game farms. 

The critically endangered and endemic Riverine Rabbit (Bunolagus monticularis) is found in 

limited habitats in the southern Karoo). It is regarded as one of the world’s rarest mammals 

with an estimated adult population of less than 250. In August 2003, the Riverine Rabbit 

Program (EWT‐RRP) was established to co‐ordinate all conservation efforts of this species 

and its habitat. 

The Northern Cape, especially the Kalahari, is a primary bird habitat. Raptors that occur 

include Black Eagle (Aquila verreauxii), Tawny Eagle (Aquila rapax), Black‐breasted Snake 

Eagle (Circaetus pectoralis), Jackal Buzzard (Buteo rufofuscus), Pale Chnating Goshawk 

(Melierax canorus), Rock Kestrel (Falco tinnunculus) and Pygmy Falcon (Polihierax 

semitorquantus), etc. 



32 




C.3.3 PROTECTED NATURE AREAS 

December 2011 

The Northern Cape includes the Richtersveld Botanical and Landscape World Heritage Site 

which has been inscribed as an UNESCO World Heritage Site under the World Heritage 

Convention. The World Heritage Site sits in the heart of the Succulent Karoo Biodiversity 

Hotspot ‐ an ecosystem with approximately 4 850 succulent plants, 40% to 60% of which are 

endemic to the area. The Province furthermore includes the Orange River Mouth Ramsar 

Site which focuses on the conservation of the riverine and estuarine ecosystem of the 

Orange River. 

The formally protected areas in the Northern Cape currently represent an area of 

approximately 14 000 km². This area represents 3.8% of the total area of the Province. This 

area constitutes 2 transfrontier conservation areas established in terms of international 

protocols and agreements (i.e. the Kgalagadi Transfrontier Park and the Richtersveld/Ai‐Ais 

Transfrontier Part), 5 national parks, and 6 provincial reserves (refer to the table below and 

Map C.10). 

Table C.2: Northern Cape national and provincial protected areas (Source: Department of 

Environmental Affairs). 

NORTHERN CAPE PROTECTED AREAS AREA (KM²) 

Kgalagadi Transfrontier Park (South Africa) 9 591 

Richterveld National Park 1 610 

Tankwa Karoo National Park 800 

Namaqua National Park 686 

Augrabies FallsNational Park 554 

Mokala National Park 196 

Goegap Nature Reserve 148 

Doornkloof Nature Reserve 119 

Nababiep Nature Reserve 109 

Rolfontein Nature Reserve 81 

Oorlogskloof Nature Reserve 47 

Witsand Nature Reserve 32 

Total Area Formally Protected 13 973 

It is estimated that approximately 16.5% of South Africa’s land cover has been transformed, 

and a further 10% degraded (Wynberg, 2002). Sensitive arid habitat such as the Succulent 

Karoo Biome of the Northern Cape Province is particularly prone to degradation as a result 

of overgrazing, alien invasive species and mining (CEPF, 2003). The aridity of the climate 

precludes rapid recovery of degraded areas. When examining veld degradation in terms of 

severity and rate of degradation, the Northern Cape emerged as the third most degraded 

Province in South Africa, after the Limpopo Province and KwaZulu‐Natal (Hoffman and 

Ashwell, 2001). 



33 




Map C.10: National and provincial protected areas in the Northern Cape (Source: 

Department of Environmental Affairs). 

C.4 THE COASTAL ZONE 

December 2011 

The Northern Cape Province includes the the Namaqualand Coastal Region (refer to Map 

C.11). The Namaqualand Coastal Region of the Northern Cape extends over 3 local 

municipalities within the Namaqua District Municipality, namely Richtersveld, Nama Khoi 

and Kamiesberg, and stretches over 313 km. The coastal area is a sparsely inhabited, hot, dry 

region with rainfall averaging less than 100 mm per annum. The scarcity of freshwater is an 

obstacle to development and the soil along the coast is generally of a very poor quality and 

limits the potential for agriculture in the area (CSIR, 2004). A lack of physical access to 

coastal resources and isolation from the centre of provincial administration constrain 

development opportunities for coastal communities. 

The greatest value from marine and coastal resources is generated through the mining and 

fishing sectors. The Northern Cape has an abundance of diamond deposits both onshore and 

in marine deposits. This has led to the development of a large diamond mining sector, which 

has become the dominant activity of the Northern Cape’s coastal zone. Diamond deposits 

are so extensive along the coast that mining companies hold the mineral rights and diamond 

concession areas covering most of the coast. 



34 




December 2011 

Map C.11: Coastal regions of South Africa (Source: Department of Environmental Affairs). 

Fisheries along the Northern Cape benefit from the presence of the Benguela Current Large 

Marine Ecosystem (BCLME). The icy Benguela current moves from the Southern Ocean 

(around Antarctica) and flows northwards along the west coast of Africa as far as southern 

Angola – it is shared by South Africa, Namibia and Angola. The nutrient‐rich Benguela 

current supports a wide range of marine life. The cooling and upwelling of the Benguela 

brings moisture‐laden sea winds to the west coast. The Benguela current is driven by the 

prevailing south‐easterly trade winds and source water for the Benguela include Indian and 

South Atlantic subtropical thermoclimate water – saline, low‐oxygen tropical Atlantic water, 

and cooler, fresher deep water. According to CSIR (2004), the BCLME is one of the four major 

coastal upwelling ecosystems of the world, and is an important centre of marine biodiversity 

and marine food production. It is estimated that the BCLME is one of the most productive 

ocean areas in the world, with a mean annual primary productivity of 1.25 grams of carbon 

m 2 per year. 

The Benguela ecosystem supports large populations of living marine resources that are of 

substantial economic importance to the Northern Cape. Fish species include small pelagic 

fish species, such as Anchovy (Engraulis encrasicolus), Red‐eye Round Heriing (Etrumeus 

whiteheadi), Sardine (Sardinops sagax), and the Sardinellas (Sardinella aurita and S. 

mederensis). Midwater fish species include Cape Horse Mackerel (Trachurus trachurus 

capensis), etc. and species such as Hake (Merluccius capensis and M. paradoxus) and West 

Coast Lobster (Jasus lalandii) are well established along the coast. Other species include the 

Cape Fur Seal (Artocephalus pusillus), Southern Right Whale (Eubalaena australis), and the 

rare Heaviside’s dolphin (Cephalorhynchus heavisidei). Furthermore, the near‐shore and off‐ 



35 




December 2011 

shore sediments hold rich deposits of precious minerals (particularly diamonds) as well as oil 

and gas reserves. This massive ecosystem contains numerous endangered and vulnerable 

species, as well as a few altered food webs and migrations of fish, bird and animals due to 

the El Niño 10 events. Among the endangered species are the African penguin, the 

leatherback and loggerhead turtles, and the black African oystercatcher. The Global 

International Waters Assessment (GIWA) program has identified the Benguela ecosystem as 

environmentally unhealthy with regard to habitat destruction and modification (including 

wetlands and lagoons), as a result of the occurrence of pollution, solid wastes, radionuclides 

and oils spills stemming from the heavy traffic of oil tankers past this coastal area. 

Not only is the Benguela Current at a critical location in terms of the global climate system, 

but its marine and coastal environments are also potentially extremely vulnerable to future 

climate change or increasing variability in climate – with obvious consequences for long‐ 

term sustainable management of the coast and marine resources. 

Although dominated by large mining and fishing companies, the Namaqualand region has 

the second lowest economic growth rate in South Africa. Challenges include declining fish 

stocks, poor road infrastructure, lack of sheltered bays for ports and limited agricultural 

potential. With the closure of many land‐based diamond‐mining operations, extensive 

rehabilitation programmes will be necessary to rehabilitate the natural environment and to 

create alternative livelihoods for people. Potential exists for the harvesting of under‐utilised 

coastal resources, such as mussels and limpets, for small‐scale industries that add value to 

fishing and agriculture and for small‐scale mining. Other natural assets, such as the annual 

wildflower display, a high diversity of succulent plant species and the stark beauty of the 

area offer potential for nature‐based tourism with community participation. More equitable 

distribution of mining and fishing concessions and the development of value‐added activities 

could contribute to retaining revenue in local communities. 

C.4.1 INSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL CONTEXT OF COASTAL MANAGEMENT 

The Coastal Management Office of the Department of Environmental Affairs and Tourism 

(DEAT) has a number of responsibilities relating to policy formulation, environmental 

education, coordination of management activities, and international conventions, protocols 

and agreements. Management functions affecting the coast are also carried out by other 

offices of the DEAT, the Department of Water Affairs and Forestry, the Department of 

Transport, the Department of Agriculture, the Department of Public Works, the Department 

of Land Affairs, the Department of Minerals and Energy and other departments. Coastal 

management is largely carried out through the provincial planning, environment and nature 

conservation departments. 

At local authority level, institutional arrangements are still in a state of transition. New 

planning procedures are in the process of being implemented or developed. The application 

of these procedures will significantly influence the coast and coastal management. There is a 

10 

El Niño is the warming of the sea‐surface temperatures in the equatorial Pacific Ocean which influences 

atmospheric circulation, and consequently rainfall and temperature in specific areas around the world. 

This could result in droughts along Namaqualand and diminishing fish stocks with could have adverse 

economic repercussions for the fishing industry. 



36 




December 2011 

widespread lack of resources and skills for coastal management, particularly in smaller local 

authorities and District or Regional Councils in rural areas. This means that proactive coastal 

management efforts are especially difficult to initiate. In attempts to boost their capacity, 

some local authorities co‐operate with nature conservation agencies and are involved in co‐ 

management initiatives with community groups. 

C.4.2 COASTAL MANAGEMENT 

In terms of the White Paper for Sustainable Coastal Development in South Africa (2000) the 

following agents are responsible for the management of the coastal region: 

National: 

The Chief Directorate: Marine and Coastal Management of the Department of 

Environmental Affairs and Tourism (DEAT) will act as national lead agent for coastal 

management and undertake certain executive functions, for example, preparing 

State of the Coast reports and running national education and training programmes. 

Co‐ordination with other national departments and the Provinces will occur through 

a Coastal Management Subcommittee to be established under the Committee for 

Environmental Co‐ordination (CEC). 

Provincial: 

In the four coastal Provinces a provincial lead agent for coastal management is 

defined, e.g., the planning department. Responsibilities of the lead agent include 

reviewing provincial legislation and monitoring the state of the coast in the Province. 

It is proposed that a Coastal Working Group be established in each Province as a sub‐ 

structure of the national CEC, in order to improve co‐ordination of coastal 

management at provincial level through involving governmental and 

nongovernmental role‐players. 

Local: 

Local authorities will continue to carry out many day‐to‐day responsibilities for 

coastal management above the high water mark, for example, planning, engineering, 

beach management and tourism. In some areas local coastal forums may need to be 

established to promote dialogue between governmental and nongovernmental 

coastal role‐players, as well as to improve co‐ordination. 

Achieving the ideal of sustainable coastal development is dependent on the establishment of 

partnerships and co‐responsibility between government, the private sector, parastatals and 

other statutory management bodies, civil society organizations and the research community, 

all of whom have a key role to play in coastal management. 

C.4.3 COASTAL PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 

Coastal planning and management should be undertaken proactively to optimise sustainable 

development opportunities. Our coast provides many social and economic development 

opportunities that are dependent on maintaining the diversity, health and productivity of 

coastal ecosystems. We need to proactively identify and realise these opportunities, in the 

interests of current and future generations. In particular, there is an urgent need to 

streamline coastal development approvals, to make sure that costly delays are avoided, 

whilst ensuring that the environmental impacts of proposed developments are carefully 



37 




December 2011 

considered and that mechanisms are in place to ensure that conditions of approval are 

implemented. The following key coastal issues are relevant regarding efficient coastal region 

planning: 

a) Diversify coastal economies 

b) Consider alternative livelihood opportunities 

c) Promote mariculture opportunities 

d) Promote Spatial Development Initiatives and coastal management 

e) Retain revenues generated in local areas 

f) Promote local benefits from tourism 

g) Promote tourism and local cultural values 

h) Improve infrastructure for tourism 

i) Improve public facilities at beaches 

j) Upgrade and maintain small‐craft harbours 

k) Promote multiple use of harbours 

l) Reduce agriculture and conservation conflicts 

m) Reconcile development opportunities and land claims 

n) Encourage the establishment of buffer and transition zones 

o) Retain aesthetic values 

p) Limit ribbon development 

q) Control sprawling urban development 

r) Limit development speculation 

s) Limit inappropriate development and its impact on ecosystems 

t) Reduce risk due to development 

u) Address informal settlements and their impact on sensitive ecosystems 

v) Take into account water availability in development planning 

w) Promote sustainable use of all water resources, including coastal aquifers 

x) Address sea level rise 

y) Recognise cost of maintaining protection works 

z) Explore coast's potential to contribute to the provision of energy and freshwater. 

C.4.4 ACCESS TO MARINE AND COASTAL RESOURCES 

Diamond mining is the main economic activity along the Northern Cape coastline, so much 

so that the Northern Cape coast as has been described ‘an extensive mining area, with 

different areas in various stages of the mining process, awaiting prospecting, undergoing 

prospecting, being mined or having been mined’ (Enviro‐Fish Africa, 2003a). Terrestrial 

onshore mining concessions, including beach concessions, occur between the Orange River 

mouth and an area slightly south of the Olifants River. Two major companies, Alexkor and De 

Beers Namaqualand (Pty) Ltd dominate diamond mining in the Northern Cape coastal zone 

(Clark et al, 1999). 

All mining concession areas have some level of restriction in terms of public access to the 

area (Enviro‐Fish Africa, 2003a). This access is often limited to employees of the mining 

companies and sub‐contractors. In some cases, recreational access is permitted on an 

informal basis (Brand, 2002). As a result, the majority of the Northern Cape population do 

not enjoy public access to the marine and coastal resources of the Province. Marine and 



38 




December 2011 

coastal resources can therefore not be utilised to their maximum sustainable capacity for the 

socio‐economic benefit of the people of the Northern Cape. 

There are a number of indirect impacts resulting from the lack of public coastal property 

through the monopolisation of coastal land by mining activities. The most obvious and 

concerning impact is that restricted access limits people’s use of marine and coastal 

resources. This restriction of access does not occur to such an extent in the other coastal 

Provinces of South Africa. Due to the limited use of coastal areas, the physical infrastructure 

of the area is also poorly developed (Tapscott, 1999) and those that do exist are mostly 

related to mining use (Spatial Development Initiatives, 2003). 

From an economic perspective, lack of access to marine and coastal resources has limited 

the development of other economic activities such as fishing, mariculture and tourism along 

the coast (Enviro‐Fish Africa, 2003a). This has implications for community development 

projects and the long term sustainability of the economy of the area. The activity of mining 

has a limited life‐span in any area as it is based on the extraction of a non‐renewable 

resource (Hounsome and Ashton, 2001). The long‐term mining concessions have an impact 

on the growth of alternative economic activities in the area (Enviro‐Fish Africa, 2003a) and it 

is important to consider viable alternative economic opportunities for the long term 

(FAMDA, 2003). 

Recognising these impacts, mining companies together with local municipalities have 

initiated projects to create local economic development at the small and medium scale (Eco‐ 

Africa, 2002; Spatial Development Initiatives, 2003). However there still exists a significant 

obstacle to public access to marine and coastal resources which is contradictory to the spirit 

of the White Paper on Sustainable Coastal Development (Republic of South Africa, 1999). 

C.5 HERITAGE RESOURCES 

C.5.1 PREHISTORIC HISTORY 

The Northern Cape has a particularly rich history dating back millions of years. Early hominid 

remains occur, in particular, along the Ghaap escarpment in the vicinity of Kuruman and 

along the coastline. Based upon the discovery of the Taung skull approximately 100 km north 

of Kimberley, it is estimated that Australopithecus were the first hominid to roam the area. 

These hominids evolved in eastern Africa around 4 million years ago before spreading 

throughout the continent and eventually becoming extinct 2 million years ago. 

Remains of the Stone Age have been discovered on several locations primarily along rivers or 

around pans. Stone tools found at the bottom level of Wonderwerk Cave 43 km south of 

Kuruman show that human ancestors resided in the cave two million years ago. The 

Wonderwerk Cave is 139 m deep and archaeologically of considerable importance. 

Archaeological research in the cave has revealed an immensely long record of human and 

environmental history spanning hundreds of thousands of years. The cave, which is a 

national heritage site, has a geological context of stratified dolomitic limestone of the 2.3 

billion‐year old Ghaap Paltaeu Dolomite Formation. It is believed that the stone tools found 



39 




December 2011 

were more than likely made by Homo habilis 11 . The Wonderwerk Cave discoveries are close 

in age to the very earliest known stone tools and similar to date to the bottom levels at 

Olduvia Gorge, Tanzania. 

Homo erectus 12 existed in the Northern Cape approximately 800 000 to a million years ago. 

These hunter‐gatherers mainly survived on wild plants and scavenged on kills made by other 

predators (Kostka, 2002). Furthermore, the Acheulian stone age culture affiliated with Home 

erectus dates between 1 million and 500 000 years in the Vaal basin and artefacts range 

from large stone handaxes and cleavers, and a number of very large flakes. 

Later Stone Age (the last 20 000 years) remnants associated with hunter‐gatherers who, in 

the subsequent historical record, are referred to as Bushman, tend to be preserved mostly in 

the foothills and rocky outcrops. Late Stone Age deposits in the Northern Cape are often 

found in conjunction with rock art. The significance of archaeological remains can be variable 

depending on the context of the deposits and the degree of preservation. In areas that have 

been extensively farmed over the centuries, the context of archaeological remains is mostly 

destroyed. 

C.5.2 KHOISAN HISTORY 

For thousands of years the land was inhabited by the Bushman 13 . Small groups of San 

hunter‐gatherers travelled through the landscape, collecting plants and catching birds and 

animals. They found shelter in caves and rock formations and constructed windbreaks and 

waterproof skerms in more open areas. The rock art presents a record of their presence. 

Early archaeological evidence tells that the San inhabited the Richtersveld area thousands of 

years ago. Arrowheads made of stone and plant resin have been found around 

Eksteenfontein. 

Researchers claim that some of the rock paintings probably depict shaman of the San calling 

for rain, attracting herds of antelope or revealing enemies. In this ecstatic state, they 

believed that they are transformed into another being, probably an eland antelope (which 

was considered a holy animal) or the mysterious rainmaker animal. When shamans painted 

an eland, they didn’t just pay homage to a sacred animal, they also harnessed its essence. 

They put paint to rock and opened portals to the spirit world. 

Today the two largest San groups in South Africa are immigrants from Angola and Botswana. 

These are the !Xû and the Khwe currently living at Schmidtsdrift, 80 km outside Kimberley. 

There are 3 500 !Xû and 1 100 Khwe. Both groups claim an indigenous identity on the basis 

of their languages and cultures. The next largest group is the San population of the southern 

Kalahari a group which refers to themselves as the !Khomani San. This group lives in the 

11 

The name means ‘handy man’ and were the first humans to use tools. Part of the species of the genus, 

Homo, they lived approximately 2.3 to 1.4 million years ago. 

12 

Homo erectus (meaning ‘upright man) lived for 1.5 million years from approximately 1.9 million years to 

400 000 years ago. They were very adaptable, had fire and made stone tools that are part of the 

Acheulian stone tool culture. 

13 

The historic terms of ‘Bushmen’ and ‘Hottentot’ are considered to be derogatory. The terms 

Khoekhoe/Khoikhoi and San are preferred. Collectively, the indigenous people who lived in and around 

the Northern Cape are referred to as Khoisan. 



40 




December 2011 

northern reaches of Gordonia at Witdraai, Ashkam, Welkom, Rietfontein and surrounding 

villages. 

At approximately 2000 years ago the Khoi herders moved into South Africa with their cattle 

and sheep. They led a semi‐nomadic lifestyle and lived in small ‘kraals’ often with over one 

hundred people. These kraals or village communities were organised along patrilineal lines 

and consisted of a group of males, descended from the same male ancestor. The 

matjieshuis, a semi‐permanent mat‐house, was perfectly suited to the nomadic lifestyle of 

the Khoi herders. 

The arrival of Governor Jan van Riebeeck at the Cape threatened the land‐rights of the 

Khoisan people. As the Dutch expanded their territorial rights they later clashed with 

different Khoisan tribes. The Khoi tribes of the Cape Peninsula (the Goringhaiqua and 

Goraxouqua) decided to leave the area as a result of these bloody clashes. In 1672 the two 

tribes moved in a northerly direction and reached the Orange River in 1680. Here they 

amalgamated and became known as the Korannas. They formed smaller groups which were 

ruled by tribe captains and each small tribe lived in a separate area (//Khara Hais SDF, 2009). 

Inevitably the Khoi and the San competed for land as grazing herds increased, especially on 

the more marginal lands. The pastoralist Khoi took the upper hand, having a more consistent 

food source, a centralised and stable community and much larger numbers. The Nama are 

remnants of one of the largest Khoi groups to settle in Namaqualand, Hantam Karoo and 

southern Namibia. In 1991 a portion of Namaqualand, home of the Nama and one of the last 

true wilderness areas of South Africa, became the Richtersveld National Park. Today, the 

Richtersveld National Park is one of the few places where the old Nama ways still exist. 

The Nama language is widely used in areas such as Namaqualand, although Afrikaans is the 

preferred language. Many of Namaqualand’s places of interest, rivers, springs, mountains, 

farms and settlements have Nama names, although modernised. The provincial motto Sa 

ka//a !aisi ?uisi (‘Strive for a better life’) is written in the !Auni language of the Khomani San, 

which was given by the last speakers of the language, Ms. Elsie Vaalbooi of Rietfontein in 

1997 (Makiti Guides and Tours, 2008). This pre‐dates the national motto which is written in 

the extinct !Xam language and the provincial motto. It is the first officially registered motto 

in the history of South Africa to be in a Khoisan language. 

C.5.3 EARLY PIONEERS AND TRAVELLERS 

In 1685 Simon van der Stel visited Namaqualand with a large entourage seeking the copper 

treasures of the area. Many other adventurers and explores followed, such as H.J. Wikar 

(1779), R.J. Gordon (1780), J. Campbell (1815) and G. Thompson (1827). According to history, 

the remote northern reaches of the Cape Colony were home to cattle rushers, gun‐runners, 

river pirates and outlaws of all kinds. Namaqualand and other parts of the Northern Cape 

had its fair share of violence and border wars with expansion of white farmers into the 

hinterland. For long until the 19 th century the Middle and Lower Orange River Valley 

remained relatively unknown, except for a small number of European explorers, hunters, 

adventures and freehold farmers. These were later joined by miners, missionaries and 

runaway slaves. Rouges such as Jager Afrikaner, based at Warmbad, southern Namibia, 



41 




December 2011 

created so much havoc that by the 1780s the Middle and Lower Orange River Valley and 

much of Namaqualnd became a zone of terror. This induced many frontiersman of varied 

origins to join this rouge robbing, pillaging and killing weaker groups for their livestock. 

Missionaries played an integral part in the Northern Cape. 

Among the most sought‐after hideouts were the densely‐wooded islands in the Orange River 

around the present‐day Upington. From such a stronghold Nama Chief Jonker Afrikaner 

allegedly rustled cattle from other clans in the region. In 1884 the settlement was visited by 

the new prime minister of the Cape Colony, Sir Thomas Upington and promptly renamed the 

settlement in his honour. After a pontoon ferry service across the Orange River was 

introduced, Upington became the main administrative centre for the vast region north of the 

Orange River. The region was called Gordonia in honour of Sir Gordon Sprigg, four times 

prime minister of the Cape Colony between 1878 and 1892. Prior to this the area was known 

as Korannaland. 

Due to its isolation, the Richtersveld was only visited by European travellers by the middle of 

the 19 th century. One of the earliest explorers was James Alexander, who prospected for 

copper and visited Aries Drfit in 1836. The Richtersveld is named after an inspector, Dr 

Richter, who came to inspect the Kuboes mission station. White farmers settled in the 

Richtersveld during the 20 th century. The South African government also resettled a large 

group of Basters during the apartheid years in the settlements of Eksteenfontein and 

Lekkersing from their settlements in Bushmanland. 

The Northern Cape was very important in the Anglo‐Boer War (1899‐1902) and played a 

decisive role in the war, the major battles of the Western Campaign taking place within 120 

kilometres of Kimberley. Kimberley was besieged for 103 days by the Boers and a number of 

great battles were fought, including the battle of Magersfontein. However, through the war, 

Boer guerrilla forces roamed the entire Northern Cape region with skirmishes between Boer 

and Brits being regular occurrences. 

The Northern Cape is also the birthplace of Sol Plaatje who was a renowned author and 

journalist who played an integral role in the history of South Africa and was part of the rise 

of African political consciousness. Plaatje was a founder member of the ANC and the first 

Secretary General of the organisation. He was the first black South African to write a novel 

in English, and made a significant contribution to South African journalism by recording 

events of the Anglo‐Boer War and translated many Shakespearean works in Setswana. 

C.5.4 HISTORY OF MINING 

The Northern Cape has an abundance of natural resources. The discovery of these resources 

has led to major exploration and the development of the mining sector in the Province to 

the point where mining has transformed the Northern Cape Province, especially during the 

19 th century. Archaeological evidence at Blinkklipkop, near Postmasburg, indicates that the 

Khoisan attempted mining as early as 700 AD. They mined specularite, which is a soft form of 

haematite. This was used as a cosmetic as well as in certain rituals. Furthermore, in the 

Dithakong area, east of Kuruman, there are sites attributable to the Iron Age of South Africa 

(100 AD to 1600 AD). 



42 




December 2011 

The first copper miners of Namaqualand were the Nama, who, as early as 1691, presented 

Simon van der Stel with fine examples of copper and copper artefacts. Early Cornish and 

Welsh miners (1848) found and mined the abundance of copper. Some very promising 

copper deposits were discovered at Okiep in 1862 and in the 1870s it was ranked the richest 

copper min in the world. This led to the construction of a narrow‐gauge railway from Okiep 

to Port Nolloth. Springbok, first known as Springboksfontein (reference to the thousands of 

Springbok antelopes that frequented the strong spring), owes its existence to the first 

copper mines in these parts discovered in the 1850s (Erasmus, 2004). 

The Northern Cape’s history changed dramatically with the discovery of diamonds. The first 

major diamond was purportedly discovered at Barkley West. In 1866 Erasmus Jacobs found a 

small brilliant pebble on the banks of the Orange River on the farm De Kalk leased from local 

Griquas, near Hopetown. He showed the pebble to his father who sold it. The pebble was 

purchased from Jacobs by Schalk van Niekerk, who later sold it and turned out to be a 21.25 

carat (4.25 g) diamond, known as the Eureka. Three years later Schalk van Niekerk sold 

another diamond also found in the De Kalk vicinity, the Star of South Africa, for £11,200. The 

second diamond was promptly resold in the London markets for £25,000. 

Diamond deposits were discovered in 1871 on the farm Vooruitzicht owned by the De Beers 

brothers. By 1872, 50 000 hopeful miner/diggers were housed in tents around the hillcock 

where the discovery was made. The conditions were ghastly with insufficient water. Medical 

and sanitary facilities were very poor and disease was a constant threat. The subsequent 

digging of the area created the so‐called Big Hole which is an open‐pit and underground 

mine, claimed to be the largest hole excavated by hand. The Big Hole has a surface area of 

17 ha and is 463 metres wide. It was excavated to a depth of 240 metres, but then partially 

infilled with debris reducing its depth to approximately 215 metres. There were many stories 

of success and riches but equal amounts of despair and loss. By 1873 grand homes were 

being built and the town was named Kimberley after the Earl of Kimberley who was the 

British Secretary of State for the Colonies at the time. 

With time Kimberley was able to add a number of ‘firsts’ to its list of accomplishments. It 

had the first South African flying school, first stock exchange and first city in the Southern 

Hemisphere to install electric street lights. Diamonds and religion seldom go together, but 

they did at Kimberley. Here, diamond profits were used to establish and develop the 

Seventh Day Adventists faith in South Africa and Australia. 



43 






BOX 2 

SUMMARY OF KEY ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS 

December 2011 

a) Consider designation of agricultural reserves in areas of high-potential agricultural soils with 

adequate irrigation water. 

b) Create appropriate ecological linkages between conservation areas. 

c) Designate coastal zone as a core conservation area. 

d) Institute standard development approach along the Orange River by all relevant 

municipalities. //Khara Hais SDF is to serve as a model in this regard. 

e) Enhance sustainable use of formal conservation areas and their resources. 

f) Enhance viability and sustainability of the Richtersveld Botanical and Landscape World 

Heritage Site which is the core of the Succulent Karoo Biodiversity Hotspot. 

g) Explore desirability of implementing strategies such as Protected Nature Areas and Special 

Management Areas in collaboration with organised agriculture and the Department of the 

Environment. 

h) Indicate mining areas with a dedicated SPC. 

i) Land-use along the coastline must be addressed in a similar manner by all relevant 

municipalities and stakeholders. 

j) Preparation and implementation of an efficient Water Demand Conservation Strategy must be 

mandatory on all municipalities. 

k) Promote cross-border conservation initiatives – explore the merit and desirability of UNESCO 

biosphere reserves. 

l) Promote history and archaeology as primary tourism resources. 

m) Protect high-potential agricultural land through appropriate land-use designation. 

n) Provide for biodiversity conservation in terms of SANBI’s ‘critical biodiversity area’ (CBA) 

indicators. 

o) Provide guidelines for the re-use and/or the more sustainable use of resources. 

p) Provide innovative strategies to help conserve conservation-worthy habitats on private land. 

q) Provide land-use plan as a basis for integration of mining activities with conservation. 

r) Provide strategy to off-set loss of conservation-worthy habitat through mining through ex-situ 

conservation projects. 

s) Standardise land-use planning and management by municipalities and other stakeholders. 

t) //Khara Hais Tourism Plan is to serve as a model for municipal tourism & environmental 

planning. 

44 




SECTION D: SETTLEMENT PATTERN 


December 2011 

This section describes the settlement pattern of the Northern Cape with specific reference to the development 

potential of the settlements and the human needs of the inhabitants of the settlements. The section is based upon the 

findings of the empirical study that was undertaken specifically for the PSDF by Van der Merwe and Zietsman (2011 14 ) 

This section should be read together with the said report which is appended under Annexure 2. 

The purpose of the section is to provide a premise and rationale for the formulation of guidelines (refer to Volume 3 

and Volume 4) as it relates to the following: 

a) Determining and assessing the status of the settlements of the Northern Cape 

b) Prioritising government spending and LED to best benefit of province as a whole. 

c) Preparing IDPs and prioritising IDP spending. 

d) Indicating what type of development and investment are required and how the municipal budget should be 

allocated to eradicate backlog or weaknesses. 

e) Measuring the change that occurred in local municipalities and settlements over a defined period in order to 

create a basis for future performance assessment 

D.1 INTRODUCTION 

The settlement system in the Northern Cape is characterised by numerous small and isolated 

urban and quasi‐urban settlements scattered across the vast area of the province. Many of these 

settlements find it hard to provide basic services and sufficient income generating‐opportunities 

to their inhabitants. 

A general consensus in the international literature is that sustainable rural development is closely 

bound to a vibrant and functional urban settlement system. Villages, settlements and cities are the 

‘engine rooms’ that drive regional development and economic growth. Unfortunately not all urban 

settlements have the same growth potential. Growth trends fluctuate over time due to many 

influencing factors. In a large province such as the Northern Cape such ‘engine rooms’ make a 

special contribution towards meeting the general needs in both the settlements and the 

surrounding rural hinterland. Such ‘engine rooms’ also affect global links, the national spatial 

economy and sustainable regional development in the province. 

The Northern Cape comprises approximately 115 urban settlements of various sizes (refer to Map 

B.4 on Page 9), some of which have a solid economic base which stimulate energetic growth. 

Other settlements are steadily losing economic power, service‐ability and infrastructural strength. 

This situation poses the self‐evident question whether there is an effective remedy for such a 

distressful picture? 

The starting point was a comprehensive evaluation and monitoring of the performance patterns of 

the province’s settlements in order to ascertain how the various communities could be optimally 

supported by a system of dynamic town structures. An empirical urban audit was accordingly 

undertaken to investigate the challenges and problems of urban development in the Northern 

Cape. This process was carried out within the framework of existing national and provincial policy 

strategies, as well as recognised development theory. The overall aim of the study was to 

14 

Van der Merwe IJ & Zietsman HL, 2011 Development Potential of Urban Settlements in the Northern Cape. A 

research study undertaken for Dennis Moss Partnership, Stellenbosch. 



45 






December 2011 

determine the growth performance and development potential of the urban settlements in the 

province, with a focus on their role in the creation of a dynamic urban and rural development 

system. More specifically this includes the following objectives: 

a) Identify criteria and indicators for assessing the urban growth/development potential from 

relevant academic literature and policy documents. The National Spatial Development 

Perspective (NSDP) and the Northern Cape PGDS provide valuable guidelines in this regard. 

b) Statistically measure and compare the growth performance of the urban settlements and 

local municipalities in the Northern Cape. 

c) Qualitative assessment of the economic base and place identity of these localities by 

engaging local stakeholders – in the process communities will have the opportunity to 

make input regarding the growth potential of their municipality and town’s. 

d) Index and categorise these settlements according to their development potential and 

human needs levels. 

e) Make recommendations for appropriate decision‐making and investment strategies to 

facilitate comprehensive rural development and performance management in the 

settlements and municipalities. 

D.1.1 ROLE OF SMALL SETTLEMENTS IN REGIONAL AND RURAL DEVELOPMENT 

The role of small‐ and medium‐sized settlements has received renewed interest and recognition 

globally as bridges on the rural‐urban development continuum. In a well‐balanced settlement 

system they act as infrastructural clusters and growth engines for regional development (Weliwita 

& Okpala, 2004). During the 1980s many academics, regional planners and policy makers reached 

consensus that small settlements played an essential role as service centres in the development of 

a region through their economic base, production linkages, as well as trickle‐down effects (Van der 

Merwe, 1983; Rondinelli, 1988; Evans, 1992; Gaile, 1992). 

It is a generally‐eccepted principle that public funds should be applied for the improvement of a 

small town’s structure and functioning (e.g. investment in market support, provision of water and 

electricity, development of housing and new industrial areas) only if the basic rural development 

conditions are found to be suitable (Hinderink & Titus, 2002). The basic driving force behind a 

town’s growth is provided by its specific economic activities, which generate job opportunities, 

capital, buildings and infrastructure (Badcock 2002: 66). 

The potential contribution of small rural settlements to local economic development has probably 

not been sufficiently recognised in rural development strategies. There is scope for a more 

positive and dynamic approach, which duly recognises the existing and potential economic and 

social role of rural settlements and attaches greater importance to these locations as entry points 

for policy, investment, job creation, enterprise development and service delivery. Analysis of key 

sub‐sectors can offer significant insights into commodity flows across the rural and urban spaces, 

as well as these settlements’ role as market and distribution centres (Wandschneider, 2003) 

It is widely recognised that an economic, social and environmental interdependence exists 

between urban and rural areas and the ‘rural‐urban linkage development perspective’ is 

increasingly becoming the accepted approach in developing countries. Rural‐urban linkage 

generally refers to the flow of monetary capital, people, goods and information between urban 

and rural areas. Infrastructure such as transportation, communications, energy and basic services, 

form the backbone of the urban‐rural development linkage approach. Adequate investment in this 

46 






December 2011 

domain improves rural productivity and better access to markets, jobs and public services 

(Weliwita & Okpala, 2004). 

According to Tacoli (2004), the spatial aims of regional planning policies assume that small and 

intermediate urban centres contribute to regional and rural development in four main ways, 

namely by being centres: 

• of demand and markets for rural agricultural produce and products; 

• in which rural non‐farm activities and employment can grow and consolidate; 

• where goods and services to surrounding rural areas are produced and distributed; 

• that attract rural migrants from the surrounding rural areas in order to decrease the labour 

pressure on larger urban centres. 

The recent move to a global economy has been painful for many settlements because of the loss 

of manufacturing jobs, the vulnerability of export agriculture, and the increased competition in the 

energy and mining sectors. Larger commercial settlements seem to have a built‐in growth 

dynamic, based on a sufficient level of diversification. Nel (2005) identifies several noticeable 

changes taking place in small settlements: 

• The collapse of many once‐prosperous mining settlements and the demise of railway 

settlements. 

• The decline in agricultural output in many areas or the shift to new rural activities such as 

game farming, which have significantly reduced reliance on local small centres as points of 

sale and service supply. 

• Advances in transport technology and changes in retail patterns, which have facilitated 

access to the more distant regional centres and displaced the role of the small agricultural 

service centres. 

• A positive trend is the growth of tourist settlements and settlements in areas of natural 

beauty. 

• Growth of the larger centres has extended service fields and a diversified economy and has 

often displaced and absorbed the functions of smaller settlements in their area. 

• In many of the smaller centres, there is an artificial economic dependence on state welfare 

on the part of the town’s people, the loss of many formal sector job opportunities, 

continuing poverty and the out‐migration of the skilled. 

• As result of the amalgamation of smaller centres under a single authority, the loss of local 

government status has weakened many settlements. 

Atkinson (2008) stresses the following arguments in aid of struggling settlements: 

a) There is a need for productive government spending in small and medium‐sized 

settlements. The future of small and medium‐sized settlements should be understood in 

relation to the spatial strategies of national and provincial governments (i.e. NSDP and 

PGDS). It will be argued that these settlements require some level of productive 

government spending – i.e. expenditure which will raise local production and multipliers. 

b) To stimulate local economies and to bring additional private sector capital into small and 

medium‐sized settlements, the comparative advantages of such settlements need to be 

analysed. Much more effort needs to be done to investigate and promote the real 

economic drivers of a town and its hinterland. 

c) To understand the comparative advantage of these settlements, there is no ‘one‐size‐fits‐ 

all’ solution to small and medium‐sized settlements. This means that every town should be 

understood in its regional context. 

47 






December 2011 

d) Efforts should be made to bring services for the second economy into these settlements. An 

injection of funding is required to stimulate the local economy. 

D.1.2 FACTORS INFLUENCING GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT OF SETTLEMENTS 

Settlements originate to meet a particular need or provide a specific service for a specific 

community at an appropriate location. In this process urban settlements can be classified into a 

variety of functional types. The majority of settlements in the Northern Cape fall into the group of 

central places, being service centres or market settlements that meet the needs of the rural 

farming community for goods and services (Van der Merwe et al, 2005). Other settlements may 

have much more specific functions, such as those focussing on mining or tourism activities. It is 

well known that not all settlements grow at a uniform rate or to the same size. Certain economic 

functions offer more opportunities for growth and prosperity than others. Over time natural 

resources may become exhausted and spatial economic relations could change due to 

technological innovations or altered political and economic policies. Some urban settlements may 

be adversely affected and stagnate or decline while others may flourish, giving rise to regional 

inequalities and a sub‐optimal functional settlement system. 

Certain growth energy is inherent in an urban settlement’s location. A town’s location with respect 

to infrastructure, main transport routes, natural resource base and large population 

concentrations influences its growth trend in a specific manner. Settlements are thus encouraged 

where there are better living, working, marketing, labour and investment opportunities. Such 

opportunities usually exist in settlements close to metropolitan centres and secondary centres as 

the settlements benefit from the big city’s population concentrations, economic agglomerations, 

overflow effects and positive externalities. The expansion and improvement of transport systems 

have also contributed towards a reduction of distance as a barrier in the development and growth 

of settlements. Small and medium‐sized settlements located on traffic nodes or along prominent 

transport corridors should be among the first to intercept or channel extensive economic activities 

away from the more isolated settlements. 

Apart from the population migration patterns to and from settlements, there is also inherent 

growth energy for a town in the natural increase of its inhabitants. In this regard the particular 

demographic and socio‐economic structures (i.e. race, sex, age, occupation, income and level of 

education) have an effect on the birth and death rates of a town. A large and growing population, 

however, does not guarantee healthy economic growth, especially if the inhabitants are not able 

to apply economic initiative and labour force productivity. If the Human Development Index (HDI) 

of a settlement is very low, a large and growing population can become a huge economic burden 

for a town and inhibit its development. 

Probably the most prominent requirement for urban change and development is the capacity for 

management and leadership by means of productivity, new strategies, new technologies and 

capital investment. The quality of the human resource base and associated behaviour patterns 

and leadership are important factors that can influence the growth energy of a town. Individuals, 

entrepreneurs, companies and government institutions have the ability to stifle or stimulate the 

growth of a settlement through their decisions. The three imperatives of sustainable development 

(economic viability, social equity and ecological integrity) are equally relevant in this regard. The 

strong link between the development of small settlements, the environment and the types of 

agricultural development and land tenure structures should also be incorporated. 

48 






49 

December 2011 

The most fundamental growth regulator of a town is its economic base. The basic driving force 

behind a town’s growth is provided by its economic activities, which generate job opportunities, 

capital investment and infrastructure (Hoyt, 1939; Smith, 1965; Carter, 1981; Hartshorne, 1980; 

Cheshire, 1990; Markusen & Gwiasda, 1994; Badcock, 2002; and Pacione, 2001). 

The diversity of economic activities (mixture of industrial, service and business composition), 

represented in a town usually holds the key to how well the urban economy performs. The 

functional classification of settlements offers a very useful analytical instrument that can help to 

explain why settlements with a certain economic profile perform well or poor. (Cheshire 1990; 

Markusen & Gwiasda, 1994). From a conceptual perspective it is important to refer back to the 

export base theory, which states that job opportunities will increase most rapidly in those 

settlements that can extend their comparative advantage by the production of goods and services 

for which there is the greatest demand on the world and national market. The extent to which an 

enterprise or economic activity can render a service and make sales outside of the town can be 

regarded as a measure of its contribution or importance to the growth of the settlement. Such 

activities bring new capital into circulation in the town by attracting it from outside – the so‐called 

primary, propulsive, external or basic activities. Other activities are geared more towards meeting 

the needs of the local inhabitants and thus simply keep capital that is already in the town in 

circulation. This means that the existing situation is maintained without new growth – the so‐ 

called secondary, service, internal or non‐basic activities. If the basic activities of a city expand, a 

chain reaction (multiplier effect) takes place, which also increases non‐basic activities and thus 

leads to growth in the town. The basic/non‐basic ratio for the economic activities of a town can be 

calculated quantitatively and this can be an indication of the town’s potential growth energy and 

economic links with its region. However, very detailed economic data is necessary for this 

operation. 

The most important cause behind the decline of settlements has to do with the reason for their 

existence or function within a changing technological framework in a globalised environment. It is 

obvious that a town that no longer fulfils an appropriate function will start to decline. The reason 

for the existence of many of the agricultural service centres in the Northern Cape area has been 

eroded by technological development, especially in the communication and transport sector (Van 

der Merwe et al, 2005). The mobility of people has increased as a result of better roads, extensive 

ownership of private vehicles, and access to the internet, which implied the relativisation of 

distance and greater human interaction possibilities. Lower order settlements, with their limited 

variety of goods and services, can no longer compete with higher‐order centres. In developing 

countries the population usually grows faster than the economy and the capacity of the urban 

economy cannot create sufficient job opportunities for the growing town population. The key 

question, then, has to do with how to create employment services and quality of life in such 

settlements. 

Quality of life is also related to the ‘sense of place’ experienced in a town. The extent to which an 

urban place developed a unique identity or spirit that differentiates it from other settlements is an 

important gauge of the values and emotional well‐being of the local community. This encourages a 

sense of belonging and personal identification with the specific town (Moore & Graefe, 1994; 

Tuan, 1977). ‘Sense’ depends on spatial form and quality, but also on the culture, temperament, 

status, experience, and purpose of the observer. Lynch (1998) describes sense as the degree to 

which a place can be clearly perceived and mentally differentiated and structured in time and 

space by its residents and the degree to which that mental structure connects with their values 

and concepts – the match between environment, one’s sensory capabilities, and one’s cultural 






50 

December 2011 

constructs. The most basic form of sense is ‘sense of place’. Identity is the degree to which a 

person can recognise a place as being distinct from other places and having a character of its own. 

Lynch (1998) refers to this quality as a convenient peg to hang personal memories, feelings and 

values on. 

D.1.3 RELEVANT POLICY FOR RURAL DEVELOPMENT ADOPTED FOR THE PSDF 

South Africa in general and the Northern Cape in particular have been experiencing the trends of 

declining settlements for many decades already. In the past authorities and other role players 

largely ignored this problem and treated all urban settlements in more or less the same way in 

terms of investment support. However, the situation has taken on such proportions that 

intervention has become essential. Several central government and Northern Cape provincial 

policy documents have explicitly addressed this problem recently. 

D.1.3.1 NATIONAL SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT PERSPECTIVE (NSDP, 2006) 

The NSDP indicates a dramatic new approach in future policy directions with respect to 

investment and other support for national, regional and town development. In no country in the 

world is social and economic development evenly distributed in geographic space. Spatial 

disparities are a universal problem affecting all countries. South Africa is not unique. The NSDP 

(2006) puts forward the following principles in this regard: 

a) Unfocused infrastructure spending does not necessarily result in improved GDP growth. 

b) Regions which already have some economic success are more likely to grow than other 

regions. 

c) Success is often achieved through focused and polarised investment. 

d) Redirecting public investment from economically dominant regions to lagging regions has 

not automatically spurred economic activity in these regions. 

e) The poor benefit when they have more options to which to turn, and more options are 

created in the profile of dynamic growth processes, not in the declining sectors that are left 

behind. 

In order to identify the development potential of the respective urban settlements, the NSDP 

recommended the creation of a composite spatial profile of resource potential, existing economic 

activity and human needs. The results of such an analysis should be translated in specific potential 

categories. From such an analysis, broad guidelines can be put forward: 

(i) The further concentration of people in need in low potential areas should not be 

encouraged. Where possible, people should be assisted through social investment to 

become more mobile so that they may choose to move out of such an area. 

(ii) Future economic growth should primarily be explored in those areas with a medium to high 

value resource base where there are economic potential to be exploited. Economic activity 

should be encouraged and supported by infrastructure (fixed) investment where there is 

already a medium to high level of economic activity and where natural and human 

resource potential is medium to high (NSDP, 2006). 

(iii) Of course, this does not mean that localities not identified may not have potential, but that 

the current interpretation of the available data will need to be supplemented by more local 

area assessments of potential as required. In order not to discriminate against people who 

are currently locationally disadvantaged, it is proposed that the government seek to 

redress these inequities by maintaining the current distribution of fiscal resources to these 

areas, but that this investment be shifted to fewer fixed assets. This could mean that only a 




December 2011 

very basic level of infrastructural services (or mobile services) should be provided and that 

an additional social investment goes into skills development, labour‐market information 

and other resources that will enable those living in these areas to become more mobile 

(NSDP, 2006). 

Given the national government’s objectives of growing the economy, creating jobs, addressing 

poverty and promoting social cohesion, the NSDP (2006) assists local and provincial governments 

in confronting the following fundamental planning questions: 

• Where should government direct its investment and development initiatives to ensure 

sustainable and maximum impact? 

• What kinds of spatial forms and arrangements are most conducive to the achievement of 

the objectives of democratic nation‐building, as well as social and economic inclusion? 

• How can government capitalise on complementarities and facilitate consistent decision 

making? 

In order to contribute to the broader growth and development policy objectives of government, 

the NSDP puts forward a set of five normative principles 15 which have been adopted by the PSDF 

for the Northern Cape: 

(i) Rapid economic growth that is sustained and inclusive is a pre‐requisite for the 

achievement of other policy objectives, among which poverty alleviation is a key facet. 

(ii) Government has a constitutional obligation to provide basic services (social capital) to all 

citizens (e.g. water, energy, health and educational opportunities) wherever they reside. 

(iii) Beyond this constitutional obligation, government spending on fixed investment 

(infrastructural capital) should be focused on localities of proven economic growth and 

development potential in order to gear up private‐sector investment, to stimulate 

sustainable economic activities and to create long‐term employment opportunities. 

(iv) Efforts to address past and current social inequalities should focus on people, not on 

places. In localities with high levels of need and low demonstrated economic potential, 

government should, beyond the provision of basic services, concentrate primarily on 

social/human investment by providing education, training, and social transfers. It should 

also reduce migration costs by providing better information regarding opportunities and 

capabilities. This could enable people to gravitate ‐ if they choose so ‐ to localities that are 

more likely to provide sustainable employment and economic opportunities. 

(v) In localities where there are high levels of need (poverty) and demonstrated high economic 

potential, this could be an indication for fixed and social investment to exploit the potential 

of those localities. 

(vi) In order to overcome the spatial distortions of apartheid, future settlement and economic 

development opportunities should be channelled into activity corridors and nodes that are 

adjacent to or link with national growth centres. Infrastructure investment should further 

support localities that may become major growth nodes in South Africa and the SADC 

region to create regional gateways to the global economy (Namibia and Botswana is quite 

relevant for the Northern Cape in this regard). 

The NSDP is supported by the concept draft of the National Urban Development Framework 

(Department of Co‐operative Governance and Traditional Affairs, in conjunction with the 

Presidency and SA Cities Network, 2009.) The purpose of a national urban development 

framework is to provide a common view on how to strengthen the capacity of South Africa’s 

15 

The Northern Cape PGDS is perfectly in line with these NSDP principles (NC PGDS, Draft 3, 2010). 



51 






December 2011 

settlements, cities and city‐regions to realise their potential to support shared growth, social 

equity, as well as environmental sustainability as key components of our national agenda. 

The NSDP has been controversial with some since its release in 2003. In the Northern Cape it has 

also been subject to critisism and questions primarily due to its perceived potential impact on so‐ 

called ‘areas lacking in economic potential’ such as the Karoo and Kalahari. Atkinson (2008:4) 

believes that such areas will ‘continue to be starved of government funding and development 

effort’ and that the NSDP ‘will unfortunately become a self‐fulfilling prophecy – it will reinforce the 

process of underdevelopment in backward areas. This will have the unintended consequence of 

intensifying poverty in these areas, or encouraging out‐migration to the cities.’ 

The PSDF recognises the critisism and potential shortcomings of the NSDP. However, it builds upon 

the sound notions, principles and guidelines put forward in the latter in order to achieve 

sustainable development throughout the Province in an equitable manner and within the 

parameters posed by the various form of capital vested in the Province (refer to Chapter D.2.4). 

D.1.3.2 NORTHERN CAPE PROVINCIAL GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY (PGDS) 

In response to the social and economic development imperatives yielded by an analysis of the 

socio‐economic profile of the province, the following primary development objectives have been 

identified in the PGDS: 

• Promoting the growth, diversification and transformation of the provincial economy; 

• Reduction of poverty through social development; 

• Creating the required levels of human and social capital; 

• Improving the efficiency and effectiveness of governance and development institutions; 

and 

• Enhancing infrastructure for economic growth and social development. 

The PGDS cautions that certain sub‐sectors of the mining industry in the Northern Cape have 

peaked and that downscaling is underway in especially the copper and diamond mining industries. 

This results in an urgent need to identify and promote alternative economic activities in these 

areas and settlements which have been dependent on income from minerals in the past. Declining 

settlements require an in depth assessment which includes a review of urban rural linkages and 

the development of clear criteria appraising their long term sustainability. When this is established 

dedicated measures will need to be put in place to rejuvenate them. It is likely that it may not be 

possible to turn certain of these rural settlements which have lost the economic rationale for their 

existence around (Northern Cape Rural Development Strategy Paper, 2010). 

The PSDF is to address the current situation in the Northern Cape as described in the PGDS. The 

envisaged Northern Cape Spatial Development Framework should indicate as to what should 

develop where, how and when. It should provide a means to guide strategic decisions relating to 

the location and distribution of resources in time and geographic space. The PSDF will be an 

enabling mechanism that responds to and fully complies with the NSDP. 

This also corresponds with the Northern Cape PGDS which has committed the province to a vision 

of ‘building a prosperous, sustainable and growing provincial economy, to reduce poverty and 

improve social development’. It further clearly states that the PSDF must not only give effect to 

national spatial development priorities but it must also set out a series of provincial, district and 

local development priorities for the space economy of the Northern Cape. In so doing, the PSDF 

52 






December 2011 

will provide a means to guide strategic decisions relating to the location and distribution of 

resources in time and geographic space. It should therefore aim to provide: 

• A long term spatial development vision that will promote balanced, integrated and 

sustainable human settlements. 

• Certainty and direction to investors by indicating preferred locations for development and 

where certain types of developments should not take place. 

• Guidelines for decision making (private and public). 

• Indication of priority areas for targeted public investment which will support the spatial 

development vision. 

D.2 PREMISE AND RATIONALE FOR GOVERNMENT AND PRIVATE SECTOR INVESTMENT 

A key objective of the PSDF is to guide the investment of government and private sector 

resources. The settlement study (Van der Merwe and Zietsman (2011) was applied in the chapters 

below as a spatial rationale and premise for the formulation of dedicated policy guidelines and 

strategy as it relates to the appropriation of government funds and investment ofprivate sector 

resources (to be put forward in Volume 3 and Volume 4 of the PSDF). The following chapters 

summarise the key findings of the study under the headings illustrated by Figure D.1. 

1 COMPOSITE INDICES 

2 DEVELOPMENT POTENTIAL 

3 HUMAN DEVELOPMENT NEED 

4 INVESTMENT TYPE REQUIRED 

5 CHANGE ASSESSMENT 

6 INTEGRATED MUNICIPAL & TOWN 

PROFILES 

Figure D.1: Key dimensions of settlement study. 

PERFORMANCE 

ASSESSMENT 

The study was based upon a set of composite indices derived from 59 variables from which 

information could be obtained for each of the 32 municipalities and 115 settlements. The latter 

figure excludes the traditional rural settlements (for example those in the Joe Morolong 

Municipality). Those settlements are not defined as urban and are to be given separate 

consideration (refer to Chapter D.2.4). 

The choice of the 59 variables was based on the criteria put forward in the applicable policy (refer 

to Chapter D.1.3.1 and D.1.3.2 above) and the availability of comparative data. The variables were 

grouped into two major indicator dimensions representing (a) urban development/growth 

potential; and (b) human development needs. 

53 




D.2.1 INDICATORS AND COMPOSITE INDICES 



December 2011 

A host of indicators together with three Composite Resource Indices were used to classify the 32 

municipalities and 115 settlements of the Province into useful typologies. These indices constitute 

the following (refer to Map D.1): 

Composite Resource Index: Natural Resources + Human Resources. 

Composite Infrastructure Index: Transportation and Communication + Institutional 

Services. 

Composite Economic Index: Economic Sectors + Commercial services + Market and 

Accessibility Potential + Property Market. 

COMPOSITE INDICES FOR MUNICIPALITIES 

• Composite Resources Index Figure D.3 

• Composite Infrastructure Index Figure D.4 

• Composite Economic Activities Figure D.5 

COMPOSITE INDICES 

COMPOSITE INDICES FOR SETTLEMENTS 

• Composite Resources Index Figure D.6 

• Composite Infrastructure Index Figure D.7 

• Composite Economic Activities Figure D.8 

Figure D.2: Composite Resource Indices used to classify the municipalities and settlements. 

Maps D.2 to D.6 illustrate the status of the municipalities and settlements as it relates to the 

Composite Resource, Infrastructure and Economic Indices. 

Map D.1: Composite resource index of local municipalities (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

54 






December 2011 

Map D.2: Composite infrastructure index of local municipalities (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

Map D.3: Composite economic index of local municipalities (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

55 






December 2011 

Map D.4: Composite resources index of settlements (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

Map D.5: Composite infrastructure index of settlements (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

56 






December 2011 

Map D.6: Composite economic activities of settlements (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

D.2.2 DEVELOPMENT POTENTIAL 

The Composite Indices summarised and illustrated in Chapter D.2.1 were subsequently combined 

to create a single grand Index of Development Potential (i.e. Resource Index + Infrastructure Index 

+ Economic Index). The municipalities and settlements were accordingly classified in terms of the 

classes or typologies summarised below. 

CLASS DEVELOPMENT 

POTENTIAL 

1 & 2 ‘Very Low’ and ‘Low’ 

growth potential 

3 ‘Medium’ growth 

potential 

4 & 5 High’ and ‘Very High’ 

growth potential: 

DESCRIPTION 

These settlements possess limited economic and human 

resources, devoid of the potential to stimulate the urban 

economy in a significant way. The difference between ‘Low’ 

and ‘Very Low’ is only a degree variation. 

These settlements’ development indices are roughly in line 

with the average value of the provinces’ aggregate on the 115 

settlements. Consistent and moderate growth prevails in these 

settlements and certain sectors of the economy show signs of 

growth, or have the potential for it; 

These settlements experience sustainable growth on the 

positive side of the provincial average. They already have an 

established and proven track record to operate as ‘growth 

engines’ at a certain level. They have the potential to grow at a 

sustainable and powerful rate in line with the capacity of their 

57 






December 2011 

resources and to operate as service providers to a relatively 

extensive hinterland. The difference between ‘High’ and ‘Very 

High’ status only lies in the diversity and intensity of the town 

dynamics. The meaning of ‘High’ on the Development 

Potential scale and on the Human Needs scale respectively 

should be interpreted in a reciprocal way. 

Figure D.3 illustrates the process of classifying the municipalities and settlements in terms of their 

Development Potential. 

DEVELOPMENT POTENTIAL OF MUNICIPALITIES 

• Development Potential Index ‐ Figure D10 


DEVELOPMENT POTENTIAL 

COMBINED DEVELOPMENT POTENTIAL OF 

MUNICIPALITIES AND SETTLEMENTS 

• Development Potential Index ‐ Figure D.12 

DEVELOPMENT POTENTIAL OF SETTLEMENTS 


Figure D.3: Determining the development potential of local municipalities and settlements. 

Maps D.7 to D.9 illustrate the status of the municipalities and settlements as it relates to their 

Development Potential. 

Map D.7: Development potential index of local municipalities (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

58 






December 2011 

Map D.8: Development potential index of settlements (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

Map D.9: Development potential index of local municipalities and settlements (Van der Merwe & 

Zietsman, 2011). 

59 




D.2.3 HUMAN DEVELOPMENT NEED 



December 2011 

This index measures aspects of vulnerability or development need. The proportion black and 

coloured population groups (generally considered apartheid victims), children and aged, female 

household heads, educationally deprived, lower income groups, the unemployed, unskilled, and 

recent in‐migrants are typical indicators. Places with low matriculation pass rates, high 

proportions under the mean level of living index, high rates of HIV/AIDS and high percentages 

receiving social grants are indications of high need. Other measures relate to housing conditions 

and access to domestic services such as water, sanitation and electricity. Figure D.4 illustrates the 

process of classifying the municipalities and settlements in terms of their Human Development 

Needs. Maps D.10 to D.12 illustrate the status of the municipalities and settlements as it relates to 

their Human Development Needs. 

HUMAN DEVELOPMENT NEED OF MUNICIPALITIES 

• Human Development Needs Index ‐ Figure D.14 



HUMAN DEVELOPMENT NEED 

COMBINED HUMAN DEVELOPMENT NEED OF 

MUNICIPALITIES AND SETTLEMENTS 


HUMAN DEVELOPMENT NEED OF SETTLEMENTS 

• Human Development Needs Index ‐ Figure D.15 

Figure D.4: Determining the human development needs of local municipalities and settlements. 

Map D.10: Human development needs index of local municipalities (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 

2011). 

60 






December 2011 

Map D.11: Human development needs index of settlements (Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

Map D.12: Human needs index of local municipalities and settlements (Van der Merwe & 


61 




D.2.4 INVESTMENT TYPE REQUIRED 



December 2011 

By integrating the Development Potential Index with the Human Needs Index, municipalities and 

settlements and were classified into a Typology for Investment to provide a clearer insight into the 

development potential and the development needs of the various local municipalities and 

settlements and, as well as the investment policies required to manage urban growth and 

development in the province in future. Apart from the town indicators, indices computed for 

municipalities (cross‐sectional and temporal) are used as contextual information for providing 

further investment guidelines to the various spheres of government on the type and locations for 

stimulating economic growth and social advancement. The figure below illustrates the prossess of 

defining the appropriate investment types for the municipalities and settlements. 

INVESTMENT TYPE REQUIRED IN MUNICIPALITIES 

• Investment Typology ‐ Figure D.19 




INVESTMENT TYPE REQUIRED 

COMBINED INVESTMENT TYPE REQUIRED IN 

MUNICIPALITIES & SETTLEMENTS 

• Investment Typology ‐ Figure D21 

INVESTMENT TYPE REQUIRED IN SETTLEMENTS 

• Investment Typology ‐ Figure D.20 

Figure D.5: Defining the appropriate investment types for the municipalities and settlements. 

The PSDF aims to facilitate the employment of the various forms of ‘development capital’ vested 

in the province in order to reach its goals and objectives pertaining to sustainable development in 

the settlements. The ‘Five Capitals Model’ (Forum for the Future, 2010) suggests the following 

capital components in this regard, namely (a) Natural Capital; (b) Human Capital; (c) Social Capital; 

(d) Manufactured (Infrastructure) Capital; and (e) Financial (Monetary) Capital. 

a) Human Capital refers to people’s health, education, training, knowledge, skills, spirituality 

and motivation, which are needed for a flourishing economy, productive work, poverty 

reduction and capacity for human relationships. 

b) Social Capital concerns investments by institutions that help us maintain and develop 

human capital e.g. families, communities, municipalities, trade unions, hospitals and 

schools. This means access to varied and supportive opportunities for work, health, living 

conditions, etc. 

c) Manufactured (Infrastructure) Capital comprises material goods or fixed assets which 

contribute to the production process and service provision rather than being the output 

itself – e.g. tools, machines and buildings. The main components include buildings and 

infrastructure such as roads, communications, waste disposal, water systems, etc. 

d) Natural Capital of the physical environment refers to the natural resources (matter and 

energy) and processes that are needed to maintain life and to produce/deliver goods and 

62 






December 2011 

services. They include renewable resources such as fresh water, fisheries and wood, and 

non‐renewable resources such as mineral deposits. 

e) Financial (Monetary) Capital plays a critical role in any economy, enabling the other types 

of capital to be owned and traded, for example, through shares, bonds or money. 

It is only when the networked relations and correlations among these five capitals are recognised 

and operational, that a sustainable economy and a contented society can be created in the 

Northern Cape. Figure D.6 illustrates the general approach to the investment of public and private 

funds in terms of the business principle that investment should be directed to where the best 

return on such investment can be generated. 

CATEGORY 1 SETTLEMENT 

Towns with High Development Potential & 

Low Human Needs 



High Human Needs 


Towns with Low Development Potential & 






Towns that are neither High nor Low as it 

relates to Development Potential & Human 

Needs 


Traditional rural settlements that are not 

described as urban 

INVESTMENT TYPE 






• Infrastructural Capital 


• Social & Human Capital 


• Basic Services 

• Subject to discretion of 

relevant Municipality 

• Subject to discretion of 

relevant Municipality 

Figure D.6: General approach to the appropriation of capital. 

PRIORITY AREAS FOR 

COMMERCIAL & 

INFRASTRUCTURAL 

DEVELOPMENT 

NOT EXCLUDED FROM 

COMMERCIAL & 

INFRASTRUCTURAL 

DEVELOPMENT – 

HOWEVER THIS IS 

SUBJECT TO CONCLUSIVE 

FEASIBILITY PROOF + 

CROSS‐SUBSIDY FROM 

DEVELOPER 

While the idea of focusing government spending on fixed infrastructure in areas with some 

potential for economic development may seem to exclude other areas/settlements from 

development, this is in fact not the case. Different regions and settlements have different 

economic potential and the spatial variations in the incidence of poverty are also vastly different. 

The NSDP argues that these diverse and disparate spatial contexts suggest a policy approach that 

itself should be differentiated and conducive to the requirements of the different contexts. Hence, 

in areas of low or no economic potential, the path of development and poverty reduction should 

be through a focus on investment in human and social capital (e.g. education, training, social 

welfare, rural development planning, land and agrarian reform, expansion of agricultural 

extension services, etc). This means that each individual town should discover its real development 

potential and then grow to the maximum of that development level. It is important to stress that 

the NSDP does not in any way rule out investment in small settlements per se. What matters is 

whether an area has the potential to grow economically in a sustainable way, create jobs and 

alleviate poverty. If a small town has such potential there is nothing that precludes such 

investment (Oranje et al, 2008). Maps D.13 to D.15 illustrate the investment types required for 

the local municipalities and settlements of the Province. 

63 






December 2011 

Map D.13: Investment typology of local municipalities (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

Map D.14: Investment typology of settlements (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

64 






December 2011 

Map D.15: Investment typology of local municipalities and settlements (Van der Merwe & 


D.2.5 CHANGE ASSESSMENT 

Change analysis at local municipality level and in the settlements was undertaken by comparing 

the performance of such entities in accordance with applicable 2001 and 2007 data. Figure D.7 

below illustrates how change in the municipalities and settlement over the period 2001‐2007 was 

measured and assessed as part of the settlement study of Van der Merwe and Zietsman (2011). 

The purpose of this assessment was to provide a procedure and basis for the future assessment of 

the performance of municipalities and settlements and for giving effect to the goal of continual 

improvement which is embodied in the PSDF. 

CHANGE ASSESSMENT IN MUNICIPALITIES 

• Development Potential Change Index ‐ Figure D.23 





CHANGE ASSESSMENT 

PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT IN SETTLEMENTS 

• Human Development Needs Change Index –Figure D.24 

Figure D.7: Determining change that took place in local municipalities and settlements. 

Maps D.16 and D.17 illustrate the change that occurred in municipalities 2001‐2007. 

65 

PERFORMANCE 

ASSESSMENT 






December 2011 

Map D.16: Development Potential Index change between 2001 and 2007 of local municipalities 

(2011 boundaries) (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

Map D.17: Human Development Needs Change Index between 2001 and 2007 of local 

municipalities (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011) 

66 




D.3 INTEGRATED PROFILES 



December 2011 

For ease of reference, the aspects described and illustrated under Chapters D.2.1 to D2.5 were 

collated into an integrated profile of the 32 municipalities and an integrated profile of the the 115 

settlements respectively (refer to Table D.1 and D.2). Figure D.8 contextualises this chapter. 

D.3.1 MUNICIPAL PROFILES 





CHANGE ASSESSMENT 

INTEGRATED TOWN PROFILES 

Table D.1: Integrated Municipal Profiles. 

Figure D.8: Context of this chapter. 

PERFORMANCE 

ASSESSMENT 

LOCAL MUNICIPALITY 

POPULATION 

(SEE MAP D.26) 

DEVELOPMENT & NEED INVESTMENT TYPE 

!Kheis Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

//Khara Hais Very Large High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Dikgatlong Large Low Dev/High Need Social 

Emthanjeni Large Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Frances Baard Very Small Low Dev/High Need Social 

Gamagara Large High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Ga‐Segonyana Very Large High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Hantam Medium Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Kai !Garib Large Transitional Infra & Social 

Kamiesberg Small Transitional Basic* 

Kareeberg Very Small Low Dev/High Need Social 

Karoo Hoogland Very Small Transitional Infra & Basic 

Kgalagadi Very Small High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Kgatelopele Medium Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

KhΓi‐Ma Small Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Magareng Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Mier Very Small Low Dev/High Need Social 

Joe Morolong Very Large High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Nama Khoi Large High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Namakwa Very Small Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Phokwane Large High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Pixey Ka Seme Very Small Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

67 




Renosterberg Very Small Low Dev/High Need Social 

Richtersveld Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Siyancuma Large Transitional Infra & Social 

Siyanda Very Small Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Siyathemba Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Sol Plaatje Very Large High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Thembelihle Small Transitional Social 

Tsantsabane Large Transitional Basic 

Ubuntu Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Umsobomvu Medium High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

D.3.2 SETTLEMENT PROFILES 



68 

December 2011 

A fundamental element of the town profiles was to expose the dominant economic base of each 

town to better understand and appreciate the settlements’ development and socio‐cultural 

potential. By evaluating each town’s rationale for existence, the individual settlements were 

qualitatively categorised according to the following economic base categories. Although 

settlements usually have more than one economic base function, in these cases only the 

predominant function is highlighted: 

a) Agriculture centre: Related to traditional service centres are those settlements with a 

substantial component of agriculture activities within the town structure. 

b) Diverse centre: Settlements with a well established and balanced economic base, 

incorporating a diversified amalgam of economic functions – such settlements do not rely 

on only one or two sectors as their economic base. 

c) Mining centre: Settlements where mining activities provide the resource base for economic 

development. 

d) Recreational centre: Leisure activities undertaken by residents and tourists to exploit local 

natural and cultural recreation opportunities. 

e) Regional centre: Settlements serving several lower‐order settlements with higher‐order 

services and goods over a relatively extensive spatial sphere of influence. 

f) Residential centre: A dormitory town where people live permanently, but work elsewhere, 

or are jobless. 

g) Service centre: Traditional central place settlements serving the daily needs of a 

surrounding farming community, e.g. providing educational, religious, shopping and 

professional services. 

h) Transportation centre: Settlements where road, rail, air or water activities play a dominant 

role in their economic functioning. 

Table D.2: Integrated Settlement Profiles 

SETTLEMENT 

POPULATION 

(SEE MAP D.18) 

ECONOMIC BASE DEVELOPMENT & NEED INVESTMENT TYPE 

Aggeneys Medium Mining Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Alexander Bay Small Mining High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Alheit Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Augrabies Medium Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Barkly West Large Mining High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Blackrock Small Mining Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Boegoeberg Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Brandvlei Medium Service Centre Transition Social 

Britstown Medium Service Centre Transition Infra & Social 






December 2011 

Buffelsrivier Small Residential Transition Social 

Calvinia Large Service Centre High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Campbell Medium Mining Low Dev/High Need Social 

Carnarvon Medium Service Centre Transition Infra & Basic 

Carolusberg Small Mining High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Cillie Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Colesberg Large Service Centre High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Concordia Medium Mining Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Danielskuil Large Mining Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

De Aar Large Transportation High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Delportshoop Large Mining High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Dibeng Medium Residential Transition Social 

Dingleton Medium Mining Transition Infra & Basic 

Douglas Large Agriculture High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Eksteenfontein Very Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Fraserburg Medium Service Centre Transition Infra & Basic 

Gannaput Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Garies Medium Service Centre High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Goedgedacht Very Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Griekwastad Medium Service Centre Transition Infra & Social 

Groblershoop Very Small Service Centre High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Groenwater Very Small Mining Low Dev/High Need Social 

Groot Mier Very Small Residential Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Grootdrink Medium Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Hanover Medium Service Centre High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Hartswater Medium Agriculture High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Holpan Very Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Hondeklip Bay Very Small Fishing Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Hopetown Large Service Centre High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Hotazel Small Mining Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Jan Kempdorp Large Agriculture High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Kakamas Large Service Centre Transition Infra & Basic 

Kamieskroon Small Residential High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Karkams Small Residential Transition Social 

Karos Small Agriculture Transition Infra & Social 

Kathu Large Mining High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Keimoes Large Service Centre Transition Infra & Basic 

Kenhardt Medium Service Centre Low Dev/High Need Social 

Kheis Very Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Khubus Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Kimberley Very Large Regional Centre High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Kleinzee Medium Mining High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Klipfontein Very Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Klippunt Medium Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Koingnaas Small Mining Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Komaggas Medium Mining Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Kuruman Large Regional Centre High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Lambrechtsdrif Very Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Leerkrans Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Lekkersing Very Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Leliefontein Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Lennetsville Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Lime Acres Medium Mining High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Loeriesfontein Medium Service Centre Transition Infra & Basic 

69 






December 2011 

Louisvale Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Loxton Small Service Centre Transition Infra & Social 

Loxtonberg Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Lutzburg Small Agriculture Transition Social 

Marchand Medium Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Marydale Medium Service Centre Low Dev/High Need Social 

Nababeep Medium Mining High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Niekerkshoop Medium Agriculture Transition Social 

Nieuwoudtville Small Recreation Transition Infra & Basic 

Norvalspont Small Recreation High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Noupoort Medium Service Centre Transition Infra & Social 

Nourivier Very Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Okiep Medium Mining High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Olifantshoek Large Service Centre Transition Infra & Social 

Onseepkans Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Orania Very Small Residential High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Pampierstad Large Residential High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Paulshoek Very Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Pella Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Petrusville Medium Service Centre Transition Infra & Social 

Philandersbron Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Phillipstown Medium Service Centre Transition Infra & Social 

Pofadder Medium Service Centre Transition Basic 

Port Nolloth Medium Transportation High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Postmasburg Large Mining High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Prieska Large Service Centre Transition Infra & Basic 

Raaswater Medium Agriculture Transition Social* 

Richmond Medium Service Centre Transition Infra & Social 

Riemvasmaak Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Rietfontein Medium Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Ritchie Large Agriculture High Dev/High Need Infra & Social 

Sanddrif Small Mining Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Schmidtsdrift Medium Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Spoegrivier Very Small Residential Low Dev/High Need Social 

Springbok Large Regional Centre High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Steinkopf Large Residential Transition Infra & Basic 

Strydenburg Medium Service Centre Transition Social 

Stutterheim Medium Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Sutherland Medium Recreation Transition Infra & Basic 

Swartkop Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Ulco Small Mining Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Upington Very Large Regional Centre High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Van Wyksvlei Small Service Centre Transition Social 

Van Zylsrus Small Service Centre Low Dev/High Need Social 

Vanderkloof Small Recreation High Dev/Low Need Infra & Basic 

Victoria West Medium Service Centre Transition Infra & Basic 

Vioolsdrif Very Small Transportation Transition Social 

Vosburg Small Service Centre Transition Basic 

Warrenton Large Agriculture Transition Infra & Social 

Wegdraai Small Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

Williston Medium Service Centre Transition Infra & Basic 

Windsorton Medium Agriculture Low Dev/High Need Social 

70 




D.4 USE OF THE SETTLEMENT INDICES 



December 2011 

As stated previously, the indicies and information put forward in this section will be used for the 

drafting of a spatial framework and policy as it relates to: 

a) Prioritising government spending and LED to best benefit of province as a whole. 

b) Preparing IDPs and prioritising IDP spending. 

c) Indicating what type of development and investment are required and how the municipal 

budget should be allocated to eradicate backlog or weaknesses. 

d) Measuring performance of district and local municipalities. 

e) Assisting municipalities in the continual improvement of their performance and status. 

f) Assisting national and provincial government departments in allocating their budgets, e.g. 

identify towns that can qualify for pilot projects of the Comprehensive Rural Development 

Program or guide LED‐programs, etc. 

Map D.18: Urban population distribution of the Northern Cape settlements (2001) (Source: Van 

der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011) 

Volume 4 will include a development profile (displayed in the form of histograms) for each of 32 

local municipalities that will serve as a platform for a detailed diagnoses and preparation of a 

development strategy for each local municipality. Volume 4 will also include a ‘manual’ with 

regard to the interpretation and application of such profile in order to achieve the objectives 

referred to under Par. (a)‐(f) above. An example a town profile and a corresponding local 

municipality profile (Upington and //Khara Hais Municipality) are illustrated by the figures below. 

71 






December 2011 

Figure D.9: Histogram illustrating profile of Upington (Source: Van der Merwe & Zietsman, 2011). 

Figure D.10: Histogram illustrating profile of //Khara Hais Municipality (Source: Van der Merwe & 


72 




D.5 RECOMMENDATIONS 



73 

December 2011 

The settlement study report (Van der Merwe and Zietsman, 2011) suggested various opportunities 

for intervention with specific reference to the following: 

a) The Provincial Government should align its future urban investment strategy with the 

investment typology summarised in Chapter D.2.4. However, municipalities are to be urged 

to implement such a scheme with appropriate caution not to jeopardize the unique 

context of specific places. This report merely presents the empirical profiles as a point of 

departure for further deliberation between the affected parties. 

b) Municipalities should use the town profiles presented in Chapter D.3 as a guideline for 

gauging future development initiatives on a local scale in their respective urban centres. In 

this process individual towns and municipalities may need further investigation and 

interpretation to unpack the profiles in greater detail to expose specific local situations. 

c) The PSDF, read together with the report should be used to inform possible investors, 

entrepreneurs and developers, of the most appropriate locations and economic 

components that will best serve development and community needs in the province. 

d) A similar settlement study should be repeated after five years in order to monitor changes 

to the factual situation over time. Municipalities and other relevant role players should 

understand that the findings of this report are not necessarily cast in stone, but that new 

information could yield different results in certain cases. 

e) The quantitative town profiling in this study should be supplemented and integrated with a 

thorough qualitative self‐evaluation from the local role‐players. This exercise should 

highlight the various centres’ strong points for future economic and social development. 

The process could be used by local decision‐makers to rethink the role their towns play 

within a municipal, regional, provincial and national context. In this process the site visits 

and personal interviews at each municipality will enhance the identification of the ‘sense of 

place’ in each town. 

f) Each municipality would benefit from a detailed analysis of their unique town profiles 

displayed in a general way in this report. In this way, role players can find out what they 

can do to improve the economic status of their towns. Such detailed analysis has to be 

undertaken as part of the preparation of the SDF of a municipality. 






BOX 3 

SUMMARY OF KEY SETTLEMENT ASPECTS 

December 2011 

a) District and local SDFs should incorporate place-specific guidelines for architecture and 

landscaping premised upon historic design precedents and vernacular. 

b) Formulate guidelines for the preparation of a provincial climate-neutrality strategy in terms of 

international best practice. 

c) Indicate actions to be taken by municipalities to enhance the status of settlements as it 

relates to development potential and human needs. 

d) Indicate investment typologies required by the various municipalities and settlements. 

e) Planning and design of industrial and mining infrastructure have to be undertaken in 

accordance with dedicated design criteria. 

f) Provide a spatial plan for bulk services and infrastructure for settlement priorities. 

g) Provide a spatial plan for settlement development priorities. 

h) Provide a spatial premise and rationale for decision-making as it relates to the appropriation 

of government funds. 

i) Provide a spatial premise and rationale for decision-making as it relates to the private sector 

investment in development. 

j) Provide broad guidelines for improvement of subsidised housing –municipalities must adopt 

such guidelines in their SDFs. These guidelines must be mandatory. 

k) Provide framework for performance management of municipalities and settlements. 

l) Provide spatial structuring elements to facilitate sustainable urban development. 

74 




www.statssa.gov.za 



SECTION E: SOCIAL AND HUMAN ENVIRONMENT 


75 

December 2011 

This section addresses the key aspects related to the Human Capital and the Social Capital of the province which are 

defined as follows: 

a) Human Capital refers to people’s health, education, training, knowledge, skills, spirituality and motivation, which 

are needed for a flourishing economy, productive work, poverty reduction and capacity for human relationships. 

b) Social Capital concerns investments by institutions that help us maintain and develop human capital e.g. families, 

communities, municipalities, trade unions, hospitals and schools. This means access to varied and supportive 

opportunities for work, health, living conditions, etc. 

The section also comprises an inventory of other forms of capital required to ensure the well‐being and ongoing 

development of the above forms of capital, i.e. Manufactured (Infrastructure) Capital which constitutes material 

goods or fixed assets which contribute to the production process and service provision rather than being the output 

itself – e.g. tools, machines and buildings. The main components include buildings and infrastructure such as roads, 

communications, waste disposal, water systems, etc. 

E.1 HUMAN CAPITAL 

The socio‐economic data provided by the Northern Cape Local Economic Development Strategy 

(hereinafter referred to as the LED Strategy), Northern Cape PGDS (2011) and Statistics South 

Africa (2001 & 2007) was used in the preparation of this section. The census data was taken from 

the interactive tables of the 2001 South Africa Census as amended on 9 December 2005 after 

provision was made for the new demarcationboundaries 16 . 

A community Survey was undertaken by Statistics South Africa during 2007 as a result of the gap in 

data created by the decision of Cabinet to move away from 5‐year to 10‐year censuses 17 . The 

Community Survey also took the newly demarcated municipal boundaries (released in December 

2005) into consideration. Although Statistics South Africa states that the Community Survey is not 

a replacement of the Census, the measurements were adjusted to a best estimate and the Survey 

does give useful information. 

The discrepancies between the, 2001 Census Data, 2007 Statistics South Africa Community Survey, 

the LED Strategy and PGDS will be indicated, where possible, to assist in addressing societal needs, 

implementing development strategies and monitoring the progress of governmental development 

programs. The results of Census 2011 are only expected in November 2012. This could be used to 

up‐date the PSDF if required. 

E.1.1 DEMOGRAPHIC PROFILE 

The Northern Cape is the largest province by area in South Africa (one third of the geographical 

land surface in South Africa) but it has the smallest population in the country. The province is vast, 

with many remote areas that are relatively unspoilt. With its variety of natural assets, it is 

regarded as a generally rural region (PGDS). 

16 http://www.statssa.gov.za/census01/html/C2001Interactive.asp 

17 Statistics South Africa, 2008: Community Survey 2007: Statistical Release Basic Results Municipalities. P0301.1. 






76 

December 2011 

As stated in Section B, the Northern Cape has five administrative districts comprising Pixley ka 

Seme (De Aar as its district capital), Frances Baard (Kimberley as its district capital), Siyanda 

(Upington as its district capital), Namaqua (Springbok as its capital), and John Taolo Gaetsewe 

(Kuruman as its district capital). Most of the population in the Northern Cape is distributed in and 

around these above‐mentioned settlements. According to the SA Census, 2005, the population 

composition for the Northern Cape is as follows (refer to Table E.1 below). 

Table E.1: Population composition of the Northern Cape Province (Source: SA Census, 2005). 

POPULATION GROUP 

BLACK COLOURED WHITE INDIAN/ASIAN TOTAL POPULATION 

Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female 

222 724 238 581 205 798 219 919 50 070 52 449 1 201 1 177 479 793 512 126 

461 305 

425 717 

102 519 

2 378 

991 919 

(46.50%) 

(42.91%) 

(10.33%) 

(0.23%) 

According to table above the total population for Northern Cape in 2005 is estimated to be 991 

919 people with the major ethnic group being the black population, representing 46% of the entire 

population. The sex structure is almost equal with 51.25% (512 126) of the total population being 

female. The male population constitutes the remaining 48.37% (479 793). 

No provision is made in the LED Strategy and the PGDS for the different population groups found 

in the province. The only data available is the SA Census 2001/2005 and Community Survey of 

2007. The population is generally comprised of four ethnic groups, namely: Africans (Blacks), 

Coloureds, Whites and Indians (Asians). According to the SA Census 2005, the population groups 

for the Northern Cape per district municipality is as follows (refer to Table E.2 below): 

Table E.2: Population groups in the Northern Cape per district municipality (Source: SA Census, 

2005). 

DISTRICT POPULATION GROUP 

AFRICAN COLOURED INDIAN WHITE TOTAL % OF THE 

PROVINCE 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 167 693 13 872 109 9 864 191 538 19.3% 

% 87.55% 7.24% 0.05% 5.14% 

Namaqua 4 527 90 712 124 12 746 108 110 10.89 

% 4.18% 83.90% 0.11% 11.78% 

Pixley ka Seme 44 322 102 715 165 17 405 164 607 16.59 

% 26.92% 62.40% 0.10% 10.57% 

Siyanda 47 818 130 123 194 24 025 202 161 20.38 

% 23.65% 64.36% 0.09% 11.8% 

Frances Baard 196 945 88 295 1 786 38 472 325 501 32.81 

% 60.50% 27.12% 0.54% 11.81% 

Total 461 305 425 717 2 378 102 519 991 919 100 

Frances Baard is the district with the largest population (32.81%) in the Northern Cape while the 

Namaqua District has the smallest population in the province. This may be attributed to the fact 

that Frances Baard district is the provincial headquarters of the Northern Cape. 






77 

December 2011 

The largest African population group is found in the John Taolo Gaetsewe (87.55%) and Frances 

Baard (60.5%) districts, whilst the Coloured population dominates in the Namaqua (83.9%), Pixley 

ka Seme (62.4%) and Siyanda (64.36%) districts. The white population represents approximately 

11 tot 11.8% of the total population of all districts, except the John Taolo Gaetsewe where it only 

forms 5.14% of the total population. According to the Community Survey of 2007, the Percentage 

distribution of the population in 1996, 2001 and 2007 by population group and province is 

illustrated as follows by Table E.3 below: 

Table E.3: Percentage distribution of the population by population group in the Northern Cape 

(Source: StatsSA, Community Survey, 2007). 

YEAR 

POPULATION GROUP 1996 2001 Community Survey 

2007 

Black African 44.4 35.7 39.8 

Coloured 43.1 51.6 50.0 

Indian or Asian 0.3 0.3 0.2 

White 11.0 12.4 10.0 

It is evident from the table above that the Coloured population is growing and is currently the 

largest population group in the Northern Cape Province. The white population has dropped by 

2.4% from 2001 to 2007, whilst the African population has increased by 4.1%. It should be noted 

that according to the SA Census 2005, the African population formed approximately 46% of the 

total population of the Northern Cape. 

According to the LED Strategy, the Northern Cape falls into the expansive or rapid growth profile, 

which is characterised by the large numbers of people in the younger age groups. The table below 

indicated the gender and age composition of the population in the Northern Cape for 1996, 2001 

and 2007. 

Table E.4: Northern Cape gender and age composition from 1996, 2001 and 2007 (Source: 

StatsSA, Community Survey, 2007). 

1996 2001 2007 

AGE 

GROUP 

MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE 

0‐4 56 488 56 029 51 149 50 884 48 399 48 304 

5‐9 58 349 58 102 53 494 52 837 48 270 48 186 

10‐14 59 774 59 688 54 668 55 274 56 337 54 416 

15‐19 52 935 53 446 52 893 52 953 54 970 56 458 

20‐24 43 632 46 564 41 740 43 485 47 508 48 090 

25‐29 38 934 41 493 37 708 40 591 45 115 38 810 

30‐34 34 454 38 506 35 143 37 774 43 771 37 364 

35‐39 31 299 33 640 32 093 35 449 36 913 37 815 

40‐44 26 317 28 930 29 035 31 407 31 538 34 209 

45‐49 21 371 23 138 24 047 27 007 28 467 31 967 

50‐54 17 103 18 381 19 316 21 030 20 137 26 325 

55‐59 13 775 15 281 14 904 16 858 18 144 21 319 

60‐64 11 000 13 515 11 854 14 408 13 668 16 407 






78 

December 2011 

65‐69 8 179 9 881 8 778 11 655 10 352 13 256 

70‐79 3 767 5 597 3 650 5 606 4 706 7 921 

80+ 3 108 7 417 3 434 6 725 4 082 7 460 

Unspecified 5 562 4 848 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 

TOTAL 491 601 520 263 479 793 512 126 519 402 538 659 

COMBINED 

TOTAL 

1 011 864 991 919 1 058 060 

During 2001, approximately 32.1% of the provincial population fell into the age group of 0 to 14 

years. This has since decreased to 28.7%. In 2001, most people fell into the age group of 15 to 64 

years, and it has increased to 65.1% in 2007. This holds significant implications for future 

development planning as this age group of 0 to 14 years will become economically active within 

the next 5 to 10 years. A consistent economic growth rate and the creation of sufficient job 

opportunities are therefore of importance. Approximately 5.4% of the province’s total population 

is older than 65 years, and it is envisaged that this Percentage will increase over time. 

The population estimates and figures of the PGDS and the SA Census confirms that the province is 

a demographically ‘young’ province since 39.89% of its population is estimated to be younger than 

19 years, representing a less developed area, as at least one of every 3 people were under the age 

of 15 years – 29.34% of the Northern Cape’s population fell into this age category (i.e. younger 

than 15 years). 

The PGDS states that the Northern Cape suggests characteristics of a less developed area (as it is 

estimated that one out of 3 people were younger than 15 years in 2009), and the age‐gender 

composition indicates a decline in fertility in the province which in turn is indicative that this 

population has recently entered the demographic transition (i.e. population growth is very rapid 

as a decline in mortality occurs before a decline in fertility – ultimately low levels of fertility and 

mortality will exist). Furthermore, StatsSA estimates, that fertility rates will decline in all the 

provinces with the Northern Cape declining from 3.03 per 1000 live births over the period 2001‐ 

2006 to 2.58 per live births for the period 2006‐2011. In the Northern Cape life expectancy at 

birth is estimated at 56.3 years for males and 59.7 for females compared to South African’ 

averages of 53.5 years for males and 57.2 years for females. 

Table E.5: Population Structure of the district municipalities of Northern Cape Province (2005) 

(Source: SA Census, 2005) 

AGE JOHN TAOLO 

GAETSEWE 

NAMAQUA PIXLEY KA SEME SIYANDA FRANCES BAARD 

MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE 

0‐4 11 460 11 380 5 118 4 871 8 529 8 583 10 665 10 475 15 376 15 574 

5‐9 12 434 12 101 5 494 5 199 8 867 9 004 10 447 10 371 16 253 16 165 

10‐14 12 787 12 778 5 595 5 437 9 255 9 491 10 149 10 233 16 879 17 335 

15‐19 11 254 11 311 4 939 4 867 8 973 8 660 10 233 10 577 17 495 17 537 

20‐24 7 804 8 903 4 224 3 988 6 439 6 363 9 194 9 284 14 081 14 947 

25‐29 5 856 7 448 4 278 4 090 6 018 5 950 8 712 8 895 12 843 14 208 

30‐34 5 292 6 436 4 271 4 382 5 832 6 030 7 910 8 000 11 837 12 929 

35‐39 4 887 6 155 3 943 4 139 5 279 5 723 6 985 7 387 10 998 12 041 

40‐44 4 921 5 449 3 371 3 626 4 565 5 094 6 059 6 496 10 117 10 741 

45‐49 3 803 4 453 3 066 3 318 4 106 4 653 4 887 5 376 8 182 9 208 

50‐54 2 943 3 394 2 453 2 513 3 384 3 702 3 843 4 295 6 697 7 123 

55‐59 2 380 2 635 2 018 2 216 2 599 2 980 2 858 3 271 5 047 5 759 

60‐64 1 714 2 346 1 603 1 835 2 093 2 633 2 496 2 816 3 950 4 782 

65‐69 1 360 2 036 1 192 1 486 1 556 2 179 1 867 2 185 2 806 3 770 




December 2011 

70‐74 944 1 504 870 1 085 1 004 1 475 1 173 1 438 1 895 2 705 

75‐79 605 989 495 716 676 1 012 711 1 030 1 161 1 859 

80+ 566 1 210 521 918 616 1 284 688 1 155 1 042 2 159 

TOTAL 91 190 100 528 53 451 54 559 79 791 84 816 98 877 103 284 156 659 168 842 

SUB 

TOTALS 

191 718 108 010 164 607 202 161 325 501 

GRAND 

TOTAL 

991 919 

Table E.5 illustrates that approximately 30% (97 582) of Frances Baard and 38% (72 940) of John 

Taolo Geatsewe of the total population is younger than 15 years. Approximately 29% (31714) of 

Namaqua total population is under 15 years old, and is a clear indication that the population of the 

Northern Cape is a young population. 

E.1.2 DEMOGRAPHIC ASPECTS THAT CAN INFLUENCE FUTURE DEVELOPMENT 

An important study in a planning process is the analysis of the existing demographic information 

pertaining to communities and projected changes in population, households, and employment. 

The Population Census 2011 Strategy 18 emphasises the importance of a population census, 

namely: 

a) The population census plays an essential role in public administration. The results are uses 

to ensure: 

• Equity in distribution of government services. 

• Distributing and allocating government funds among various regions and districts for 

education and health services. 

• Delineating electoral districts at the national and local levels. 

• Measuring the impact of industrial development, etc. 

b) The census also plays an essential role in all elements of the national statistical system, 

including the economic and social components. Census statistics are used as benchmarks 

for statistical compilation or as a sampling frame for sample surveys. The national 

statistical system of almost every country relies on sample surveys for efficient and reliable 

data collection. Without the sampling frame derived from the population census, the 

national statistical system would face difficulties in providing reliable official statistics for 

use by the government and the general public. 

c) The basic feature of the census is to generate statistics on small areas and small population 

groups with minimum sampling errors. While the statistics on the small areas are useful in 

their own right, they can also be used to produce statistics on any geographical unit. This 

is an important requirement for example, in planning the location of a school or clinic. 

d) Since census data can be tabulated for any geographical unit, it is possible to provide the 

required statistics in remarkably flexible manner. This versatile feature of the census is 

also invaluable for use in the private sector for applications such as business planning 

market analyses. 

e) The census results are used as a benchmark for research and analysis. Population 

projections are one of the most important analytical outputs based on census data; future 

population projections are crucial for all segments of the public and private sectors. 

18 

StatsSA, 2011: Revised Census 2011 – Strategy Document (20100118‐v.4.3). http://www.statssa. 

gov.za/census2011/ documents/Population_Census_2011_Strategy_V4.3.1_2.pdf 



79 




E.1.2.1 DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DATA SETS 



80 

December 2011 

The LED Strategy estimates the population on 980 327 with a gender distribution of 49.1% males 

and 50.9% females (refer to Table E.6 below), while the PGDS estimates a population size of 1 103 

900 people, with a gender distribution of 542 700 (49.16%) males and 561 200 (50.84%) females. 

The difference is estimated at 123 573 people, which is quite substantial, since the Northern Cape 

never had a large population. 

Table E.6: Population of the Northern Cape on provincial and district level (Source: Quantec 

Research, Standardised Regional Data, 2009 as cited in the LED Strategy). 

DISTRICT 

MUNICIPALITY 

TOTAL POPULATION % OF NORTHERN 

CAPE TOTAL 

POPULATION 

AREA OF THE 

DISTRICT 

MUNICIPALITY (KM 2 ) 

% OF THE 

NORTHERN CAPE 

TOTAL AREA 

Frances Baard 314 502 32.1 13 543 3.6 

Johan Taolo Gaetsewe 184 027 18.8 27 128 7.3 

Namaqua 114 255 11.7 126 880 34 

Pixely ka Seme 153 694 15.7 102 814 27.6 

Siyanda 213 849 21.8 102 822 27.6 

TOTAL: 


980 327 100 100 100 

As illustrated by Table E.6, the Census data (2005) estimates a population for the Northern Cape of 

991 919, and the Community Survey of 2007, estimates a population of 1 058 060 people. The LED 

Strategy states that the Northern Cape accounts only for 2% of South Africa’s total population (i.e. 

47 850 033), and the Northern Cape PDGS states that it forms a 2.3% share of the total population 

of South Africa. The Northern Cape has the smallest population in South Africa and the lowest 

average annual population growth from 1995 to 2007 in South Africa and of all the provinces. 

According to the LED Strategy the average annual population growth for the Northern Cape from 

1995 to 2007 was calculated at 0.3 % with South Africa’s growth rate for the same period was 

estimated at 1.4%. 

The Community Survey (2007) of StatsSA estimated that between the years of 1995 to 2001, the 

population of the Northern Cape declined from 1 011 864 to 991 919 people at a change 

Percentage of ‐2.0%. From 2001 to 2007, a change of 6.7% was experienced when the population 

increased to 1 058 060 in 2007. According to the LED Strategy, the Pixley ka Seme is the only 

district in the Northern Cape with a negative average annual population growth rate at ‐0.5, whilst 

Namaqua and Siyanda both have the highest average population growth rates at 1%. Refer to 

Table E.7 below that indicated the average population growth at district level in the Northern 

Cape: 

Table E.7: Average Population Growth of five district municipalities in the Northern Cape (Source: 

Quantec Research, Standardised Regional Data, 2009 as cited in the LED Strategy). 

DISTRICT MUNICIPALITY AVERAGE POPULATION GROWTH RATE: 

1995‐2007 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 0.0 

Namaqua 1.0 

Pixley ka Seme ‐0.5 

Siyanda 1.0 

Frances Baard 0.1 






81 

December 2011 

The South African population density increased from 33 persons per square kilometre (km 2 ) in 

1996, to almost 40 persons per km 2 in 2007. As can be expected, the Northern Cape, the province 

with the largest land mass and smallest population, has the lowest density, but its population 

density has increased slightly from 2.8 persons per km 2 in 1996 to 2.9 persons per square 

kilometre in 2007. By contrast, the population density in Gauteng has rocketed from 448.3 people 

per km 2 in 1996 to 614.5 people per km 2 in 2007. KwaZulu‐Natal is the second most densely 

population province in South Africa at 111.4 people per km 2 according to the 2007 Community 

Survey. 

However, the Provincial Treasury of the Northern Cape Province (2011) in its Medium Term 

Expenditure Framework 2011/12‐2013/14 estimates that the population size and Percentage 

distribution of the district municipalities for 2007 and 2009, and the growth rate is as follows: 

Table E.8: Population of the Northern Cape on district level for 2007 and 2009 (Source: Global 

Insight, 2011 as cited in the Northern Cape’s Medium Term Expenditure Framework 2011/12‐ 

2013/14, 2011). 

DISTRICT 

MUNICIPALITY 

TOTAL 

POPULATION 

(2007) 

% OF 

NORTHERN 

CAPE POP 

TOTAL 

POPULATION 

(2009) 

% OF 

NORTHERN 

CAPE POP 

% GROWTH 

RATE 

Frances Baard 364 611 32.9 371 536 32.9 0.96 

Johan Taolo Gaetsewe 207 440 18.7 209 892 18.6 0.58 

Namaqua 123 561 11.2 126 730 11.2 1.27 

Pixely ka Seme 178 942 16.2 181 530 16.1 0.72 

Siyanda 233 062 21.0 239 111 21.2 1.29 

TOTAL: 


1 107 616 100 1 128 799 100 0.95 

The above table estimates a growth rate of 0.95% in the Northern Cape in comparison of the LED 

Strategy that estimates a growth rate of 0.3%. The population estimate of the Community Survey 

represents a significant discrepancy in the population composition as estimated by Statistics South 

Africa and LED Strategy. This will ultimately influence the population growth rate projected for 

the Northern Cape, which in turn could influence the development and service delivery 

capabilities, infrastructure investment and the amount of government funds allocated to the 

Northern Cape. 

E.1.2.2 MIGRATION PATTERN 

Migration is defined as the change of people’s place of residence, which involves the crossing of 

some kind of migration defining boundary such as an international or provincial border. A migrant 

is thus defined as a person who changes his/her place of residence, and in the process crosses a 

migration‐defining boundary. Migration is, in many ways, a response to structural disequilibria 

between and within sectors of the economy, or between countries. Deepening and widening 

inequality in income and opportunities within provinces, and an absolute increase in the numbers 

of people enduring poverty and extreme hardship, add to the pressure for people to migrate. 

It is estimated that the migration stream for the population of 2006‐2011 in the Northern Cape is a 

net‐migration of ‐25 500 people, of which 66 600 were out‐migrants and 41 100 in‐migration, thus 






82 

December 2011 

indicating that more people move out of the Northern Cape than into the province. The majority 

of people migrating out of the province (23.87%) tend to move to the Western Cape, followed by 

18.47% to Gauteng, 18.17% to the Eastern Cape and 17.12% will migrate to North West (PGDS). 

The following table indicates the estimated number of out‐migrants from the Northern Cape to 

the various provinces in South Africa. 

Table E.9: Estimated emigration from the Northern Cape: 2006‐2011 (Source: PGDS). 

PROVINCE NUMBER OF MIGRANTS 

Western Cape 

15 900 

North West 

11 400 

Mpumalanga 

2 600 

Limpopo 

3 000 

KwaZulu‐Natal 

2 100 

Gauteng 

12 300 

Free State 

7 200 

Eastern Cape 

12 100 

It is evident from the table above, that the Western Cape, Gauteng and Eastern Cape are 

provinces that where most emigration takes place. Table E.10 below describes the distribution of 

non‐migrants and migrants based on place on birth in South Africa. It clearly shows that 

approximately 29% of the population born in the Northern Cape reside in different provinces. 

Only approximately 15.6% of in‐migrants were born outside the Northern Cape. This is evident 

that out‐migration has negative impact on the growth of the population in the Northern Cape. 

Table E.10: Percentage distribution of non‐migrants and migrants based on place of birth (Source: 

Community Survey, 2007). 

PROVINCE Percentage OF 

POPULATION BORN IN THE 

PROVINCE 

% OF IN‐MIGRANTS 

(RESIDENT POPULATION 

NOT BORN IN THE 

PROVINCE) 

% OF OUT‐MIGRANTS 

(POPULATION BORN IN 

THE PROVINCE RESIDING 

ELSEWHERE) 

Eastern Cape 93.4 6.6 23.0 

Free State 85.6 14.4 21.5 

Gauteng 58.1 41.4 21.5 

KwaZulu‐Natal 93.5 6.5 9.4 

Limpopo 93.6 6.4 22.9 

Mpumalanga 76.3 23.7 20.0 

Northern Cape 84.4 15.6 29.3 

North West 76.9 23.1 16.6 

Western Cape 71.7 28.3 8.1 

According to the Pixley ka Seme District Spatial Development Framework (2007), while the district 

population may appear to be stagnant, the settlements are growing as rural households move to 

settlements to access better facilities and services. This trend is expected to continue with the 

access to health and education facilities as major pull factors. 




December 2011 

A study 19 conducted in Pixley ka Seme and Namaqua districts in 2005, found that 79% of the 

respondents find seasonal employment within the province. Another 21% migrate out of the 

province, mainly to the Western Cape, although a few find work in the Eastern Cape and the Free 

State. Most of the respondents indicated that they do not migrate too far from their permanent 

residence and the average distance and the average distance travelled to work is 109 kilometres. 

Seven percent of the respondents indicated that their immediate family travels with them to their 

place of work. 

Migration is in many ways a response to structural disequilibria between and with sectors of the 

economy and much pressure for migration is created by the deepening and widening inequality in 

income and opportunities within the country and between South Africa and its neighbours. 

Migration patterns and trends have far reaching impacts on the social, economic and 

environmental conditions in the areas of origin and destination and the process is hence often, 

mistakenly, described as a problem. However, it should be understood that migration is often a 

central component of households’ livelihood strategies, and that it not only offers hope for the 

future, but that it could play a vital role in redressing past inequities. 

E.2 SOCIO‐ECONOMIC STATUS 

The HDI (Human Development Index) provides an alternative method to measure the relative 

socio‐economic development of an area and is seen as a measure of people’s ability to live a long 

and healthy live, to communicate, to participate in the community and have sufficient means to be 

able to afford a decent living 20 . 

Table E.11: Human Development Index for the Northern Cape and District Municipalities (Source: 

Global Insight, 2009 as cited in the PGDS). 

Region White African Coloured TOTAL 

Northern Cape 0.87 0.44 0.54 0.55 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 0.89 0.41 0.54 0.46 

Namaqua 0.88 0.47 0.57 0.63 

Pixley ka Seme 0.85 0.42 0.46 0.52 

Siyanda 0.87 0.43 0.53 0.57 

Frances Baard 0.87 0.47 0.59 0.57 

Over the past 8 years there has been little to no variance in the HDI figures for the Northern Cape, 

indicating no increase or decrease in the overall standard of living. This trend is unlikely to change 

in the foreseeable future, mainly due to the marginal economic base of the poorer areas, and the 

19 Setplan, 2006. as cited in the Pixley ka Seme SDF (June 2007). 

20 The Human Development Index (HDI) was developed by the United Nations Development Program (UNDP) based 

on the philosophy that the goal of development was to ensure that individuals live long, informed and 

comfortable lives. The HDI consists of three components: 

• Longevity, which is measured by life expectancy at birth. 

• Educational attainment, which is measured by two education variables, namely adult literacy and combined 

gross primary, secondary and tertiary enrolment ratio. 

• Income, which is measured by gross domestic product (GDP) per capita. 

Performance in each dimension is expressed as a value between 0 and 1, and the HDI index gives an 

internationally accepted measure of the wellness (quality of life) of the population of the area under 

consideration. An HDI of 0.8 or more is considered to represent high development, whilst an HDI of below 0.5 is 

considered to represent low development. 


83 

Dennis Moss Partnership 

Department of Rural Development & Land Reform



December 2011 

consolidation of the economic base in the relatively better off areas. It is important to note that 

the HDI for the Northern Cape (0.55) is substantially below the South African figure of 0.72. From 

the table above it is evident that the HDI of 0.55 displays a pattern of semi‐development, and 

there is a definite inequality between the different population groups, with the Whites having a 

higher development lifestyle than the African or Coloured groups. 

E.2.1 POVERTY 

Poverty is a key problem with a high number of households living below the poverty line. Poverty 

cannot be measured by income alone nor can anti‐poverty measures only address income‐ 

enhancing measures. This necessitates a multi‐sectoral and an integrated approach (PGDS). The 

strategy that has proved most effective in improving economic and social well‐being consists of 

three elements, namely labour absorbing growth, equitable investment in education and health 

care and social support for poor and vulnerable groups. Social welfare policies and programs must 

be aimed at enabling the poor and vulnerable groups to break the cycle of poverty. Social and 

economic development are two inter‐dependent and mutually reinforcing processes. Equitable 

social development is the foundation of economic prosperity and economic growth is necessary 

for social development. Without social investment, economic growth will be compromised. The 

key challenges facing the social sector are to: 

• Enhance social integration and protection of the most vulnerable; and 

• Build a caring society through sustainable development. 

According to Botes (2011) 21 , two of the most frequent ways of measuring poverty is to use: 

• Poverty line which is the average sum of money that a household or individual needs to 

survive. 

• Poverty gap, which indicates how far a household or individual falls below the poverty line 

The proportion of Northern Cape people living below the poverty line has declined from 40 % in 

1995 to 27 % in 2011, while the poverty gap was 11 % in 1995, compared to eight % 2011. In this 

regard, the province intend to halve poverty by 2015, the population living below the poverty line 

must stand at 20%, which means that the province is left between 2011 and 2015 to reduce 

poverty by 7 % (Botes, 2011). 

Table E.12: Percentage of people of living in poverty in the Northern Cape (Source: Global Insight, 

2009 as cited in the PGDS). 

Region 1996 2009 

Northern Cape 43.8% 42.8% 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 62.5% 52.8% 

Namaqua 32.7% 41.0% 

Pixley ka Seme 49.6% 44.7% 

Siyanda 40.5% 39.1% 

Frances Baard 35.2% 39.5% 

The table above illustrates that from 1996 to 2009, the percentage of people living in poverty only 

decreased by 1% but people living in poverty is still at 42, 8% which is very high. Frances Baard 

experienced an increase in poverty by approximately 4%. However, John Taolo Gaetsewe 

21 

Botes, A. 2011: Budget speech by MEC for Social Development by Alvin Botes. 5 April 2011. 

http://www.info.gov.za/speech/DynamicAction?pageid=461&sid=17611&tid=31597 



84 






December 2011 

experienced a 9.2% decrease in poverty from 1996 to 2009. The Namaqua District experienced an 

8.3%increase in poverty from 1996 to 2009. 

Reducing poverty is one of the key challenges for economic development. Higher levels of 

economic growth are a key challenge for poverty eradication. Investment in people is pivotal to 

redressing the poverty and vast inequalities inherited from apartheid and in addressing the rate 

and pattern of growth. Investment in people is also, to a large extent, about delivering social and 

economic infrastructure: education, welfare, health, housing, as well as transport and bulk 

infrastructure. Infrastructure delivery assures minimum standards and redistribution. Due to the 

vastness of the Northern Cape, and the remoteness of its communities in mostly rural areas, 

certain challenges exist regarding the implementation of projects, because delivery costs are very 

high and expertise and skills are scarce resources (PGDS). 

E.2.1.1 POVERTY ALLEVIATION FOCUS AREA 

The PGDS identified a number of poverty alleviation focus areas, such as: 

a) Inter‐Sectoral Collaboration: A Food Security and Nutrition Task Team has been formed to 

respond to the food crisis that vulnerable individuals and households are experiencing. 

b) Food Security: Providing food to the needy has led to the funding of Community Soup 

Kitchens and it is in collaboration with departments in the Social Sector (i.e. agriculture, 

education, health and water affairs, and forestry. As stated in the LED Strategy, the 

establishment of community food gardens is a sustainable development initiative that 

enhances self‐reliance. Analysis of provincial data showed that 37 food security gardens 

were funded with 340 beneficiaries from 2004 to 2009. 

c) Social Research: Livelihood analyses of communities are critical in understanding the 

vulnerability index of beneficiaries, the range of services and the spatial spread of 

interventions. 

d) Material Assistance: The importance of Drop‐in‐centres in providing food, clothes, 

emergency resources etc is another manner to alleviate poverty. A drop‐in‐centres is a 

physical building structure that provides a range of community services. 

e) Socio‐Economic Initiatives: Funds provided by the Small Enterprise Development Agency, 

Industrial Development Corporation and Khula could the local LED strategies on municipal 

level in providing poverty relief programs. 

f) War on Poverty Campaign: Adopted by Cabinet in 2007, it is an instrument of 

coordination, alignment, support and supervision of anti‐poverty initiatives in order to 

make as much possible impact to households and communities living in poverty in the 

short term, to reach 3 million households by 2014, and to eradicate poverty in the long 

term. It is implemented in conjunction with other government programs to ensure a 

coordinated and integrated approach that secures a greater impact towards alleviating 

poverty in communities. As a pilot project, the Northern Cape government adopted the 

‘Building Healthy Families Project’ and it entails identifying the 500 poorest families in the 

5 districts of the province. A comprehensive ‘anti‐poverty strategy’ has been designed to 

integrate and improve the current efforts to deal with the unacceptable levels of poverty in 

society. As part of the implementation of the Anti‐Poverty Strategy, government has 

developed a single central database of affected households to ensure that interventions 

are systematic; that individuals with the potential to lift their families out of poverty are 

identified and accordingly supported; and to ensure that there is a follow up on each 

household so that practical positive results come out of each interaction. 

85 




E.2.2 INCOME LEVELS IN THE NORTHERN CAPE 



86 

December 2011 

Extreme inequality in the distribution of income exists among racial groups and households. The 

poorest 44, 7% of households in the Northern Cape earn less than 9, 8% of the income. Unequal 

income distribution has severely hampered development, particularly that of people in the rural 

areas who are generally poorer than their urban counterparts. The LED Strategy states that two 

thirds of households (66.6%) in the Northern Cape earned less than R3 200 per month (poverty 

level indicated by red line), and thus the province is regarded as poor (refer to Table E.13). 

Table E.13: Percentage of the monthly household income in the Northern Cape Province, 2007 

(Source: Global Insight, 2009 as cited in the PGDS). 

No income 

R1 –R400 

R401‐R800 

R801‐R1 

600 

R1 601‐R3 

200 

R3 201‐R6 

400 

R6 401‐ 

R12 800 

R12 801‐ 

R25 600 

R25 601‐ 

R51 200 

R51 201‐ 

R101 400 

R102 401‐ 

R204 800 

7.8% 4.1% 9.0% 23.1% 22.6% 15.1% 9.2% 5.4% 2.6% 0.7% 0.3% 0.3% 

R204 801 

or more 

Furthermore, from the table above, it is evident that approximately 7.8% of households earn no 

income, and 24.3% of households earn less than R12 800 per month. This is a clear indication that 

poverty and inequality are massive problems in the Northern Cape. Approximately 0.6% of 

households earn more than R101 401 monthly or approximately R1 228 801 annually. As stated in 

the LED Strategy, this low income level profile has severe social consequences on the total 

population. Problems arise that households in the province are not able to pay school fees, can’t 

afford everyday necessities, and can’t afford proper medical care and education, etc. 

As illustrated in the table below approximately 45.25% of the total population did not have any 

monthly income at all, and approximately 39.5% have a monthly income of less than R3 200. It is 

also evident that the John Taolo Gaetsewe and Frances Baard are the districts with the highest 

Percentage of households with no income at 48.11% and 48.19% respectively. 

Table E.14: Average monthly household income in the Northern Cape, 2007 (Source: PGDS). 

INDIVIDUAL 

INCOME 

% 

JOHN 

TAOLO 

GAETSEWE 

% 

NAMAQUA 

% 

PIXLEY KA 

SEME 

% 

SIYANDA 

% 

FRANCES 

BAARD 

% 

TOTAL 

No income 48.11% 40.89% 41.14% 43.93% 48.19% 45.25% 

R1‐R400 22.58% 12.03% 15.15% 11.28% 12.47% 14.24% 

R401‐R800 3.86% 6.00% 7.83% 8.42% 5.49% 6.31% 

R801‐R1 600 11.96% 16.99% 15.74% 15.50% 14.89% 14.92% 

R1 601‐R3 200 3.01% 5.08% 3.22% 4.49% 4.23% 4.03% 

R3 201‐R 6 400 3.04% 5.74% 3.11% 4.05% 4.44% 4.07% 

R6 401‐R12 800 2.19% 3.81% 2.35% 2.43% 4.07% 3.09% 

R12 801‐R25 600 0.74% 1.25% 0.69% 0.84% 1.73% 1.15% 

R25 601‐R51 200 0.13% 0.28% 0.30% 0.24% 0.67% 0.38% 

R51 201‐R102 400 0.22% 0.10% 0.16% 0.14% 0.11% 0.14% 

R102 401‐R204 800 0.21% 0.03% 0.13% 0.06% 0.08% 0.10% 

R204 801 or more 0.07% 0.02% 0.02% 0.05% 0.05% 0.05% 

Response not given 3.88% 7.79% 10.16% 8.57% 3.59% 6.29% 

Total 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 




E.2.3 SOCIAL GRANTS RECEIVED 

Stellenbosch Economic Working Papers: 15/10. 



87 

December 2011 

Grants have been playing an important role in redistributing wealth in South Africa and proven to 

be successful in reducing some of the income inequality. Grants soften the effects of poverty by 

improving children’s health, reducing malnutrition, and enabling better access to schooling, 

among other benefits 22 . Social grants are important sources of income for poor households, 

especially in rural areas. They contribute up to 50% of income in households headed by the 

elderly and prevent many such households from falling into poverty (Van der Berg et al 2009) 23 . 

With 66.6% of households in Northern Cape earning less than R3 200, it is imperative that social 

grants be effectively implemented among the poor. According to Botes (2011), social security 

interventions will continue to be up‐scaled in the Northern Cape, because the government has 

extended Child Support Grant to 18 years of age, and because of the population paradigm which 

indicates that the Northern Cape is experiencing an increasingly ageing population. The 

demographic indicators used for the Millennium Development Goals for lifting people out of 

poverty shows an increase in the number of children receiving grants from 101 728 in 2005 to 245 

486 in 2010 out of an estimated number of 327 541 children in the Northern Cape. 

The number of foster care grants increased from 8 835 in 2007 to 10 238 in 2010. The care 

dependency grant increased from 2 852 in 2007 to 3 883 in 2010, whilst the child support grant 

now covers all eligible children born after 31 December 1993 until the child reaches the age of 18 

years. Botes (2011) states when looking at the provincial population benefiting from social 

assistance, the Old Age grant represents 17%, Disability grant represents 13% and the Child 

Support grant represents 64% of the total. Child grants are but one way of addressing child 

poverty by embracing the survival needs of children. Addressing child poverty holistically requires 

interventions that achieve results of survival, protection, development and participation. 

According to the LED Strategy approximately 27.9% of the Northern Cape received social grants in 

2007 with child support (48.9%) getting the largest portion followed by old age grants (22.6%) and 

physical disabilities (16.6%). Refer to the table below that indicates the social grants received in 

South Africa and in the Northern Cape in 2007: 

Table E.15: Social Grants received in South Africa and the Northern Cape, 2007 (Source: Global 

Insight, 2009 as cited in the PGDS). 

SOCIAL GRANT SOUTH AFRICA 

(NUMBER OF 

PERSONS) 

AS % OF SOUTH 

AFRICAN 

POPULATION 

NORTHERN CAPE 

(NUMBER OF 

PERSONS) 

AS % OF 

NORTHERN CAPE 

POPULATION 

Old age pension 2 367 320 4.9% 61 985 6.3% 

Disability grant 1 186 493 2.5% 45 264 4.6% 

Child support grant 7 192 926 15.0% 133 632 13.6% 

Care dependency grant 182 365 0.4% 5 598 0.6% 

Foster care grant 23 185 0.0% 914 0.1% 

Grant in aid 102 322 0.2% 2 764 0.3% 

Social relief 39 645 0.1% 1 031 0.1% 

Multiple social grants 56 147 0.1% 1 914 0.2% 

Institutions 651 769 1.4% 20 423 2.1% 

TOTAL 11 802 173 24.7% 273 436 27.9% 

22 http://ipsnews.net/news.asp?idnews=50402 – 20 September 2011. 

23 Van der Berg, S. Siebrits, K. and Lekezwa, B. 2009: Efficiency and equity effects of social grants in South Africa. 




December 2011 

Table E.15 below illustrates the social grants received on district level in the Northern Cape for 

2007. It is evident that Pixely ka Seme receives the highest portion (32.1%) of social grants, 

followed by John Taolo Gaetsewe (29.2%) and Frances Baard (28.0%). This is directly related to 

the number of people in these district municipalities that live below the poverty line. 

Table E.16: Social Grants received on district level in the Northern level, 2007 (Source: LED 

Strategy). 

DISTRICT NUMBER OF PERSONS WHO RECEIVED AS % OF DISTRICT MUNICIPALITY TOTAL 

GRANTS IN 2007 

POPULATION 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 53 799 29.2 

Namaqua 31 694 27.7 

Pixley ka Seme 49 335 32.1 

Siyanda 50 618 23.7 

Frances Baard 87 990 28.0 

E.2.4 LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT 

According to the LED Strategy, the province has the second lowest unemployment rate (18.1%) in 

South Africa. In 2007, 40.3% of the Northern Cape were employed, 18.1% were unemployed and 

41.6% were not economically active 24 . On an individual level this translates to approximately 269 

000 individuals being employed and 121 000 unemployed. 

However according to the PGDS the Province has a population of 710 000 persons that are 

between the ages of 15 and 64, of this only 371 000 (Quarter 1 2010) are within the labour force 25 . 

The labour force of the province in terms of year to year (i.e. March to March) shows a decline of 

22 000, i.e. ‐7.6%. This is made up of 268 000 employed persons and 103 000 unemployed. While 

persons that are not economically active are 339 000 and discouraged work seekers are 47 000. 

Compared to 2001, the economically active population of the province has decreased to 

approximately 383 000. From 2005 the economically active population has been growing and is 

predominantly male. Employment grew by 2.3% between the 3 rd and 4 th quarter of 2008 bringing 

the unemployment rate down from 22.6% in the 3 rd quarter of 2008 to 21.6% in the 4 th quarter, of 

which 56% of the unemployed are females. The table below illustrates the employment structure 

in 2007 of the Northern Cape compared with other provinces in South Africa. 

Table E.17: Employment in the Northern Cape in relation to other provinces (Source: LED 

Strategy). 

PROVINCE EMPLOYED UNEMPLOYED NOT ECONOMICALLY 

ACTIVE 

South Africa 41.3% 20.2% 38.5% 

Western Cape 55.1% 15.7% 29.2% 

Eastern Cape 30.5% 19.9% 49.% 

Northern Cape 40.3% 18.1% 41.6% 

Free State 40.0% 22.3% 37.7% 

KwaZulu‐Natal 35.5% 21.3% 43.2% 

24 

This classification includes housewives/homemakers, students or scholars, pensioners and retired people as well 

as those not seeking work. 

25 

The labour force consist of people of working age (between 15 – 65 years) who are either employed or 

unemployed, and is also referred to as the ‘Economically Active Population’. 



88 




North West 38.5% 20.9% 40.6% 

Gauteng 52.2% 21.6% 26.3% 

Mpumalanga 40.1% 20.0% 39.9% 

Limpopo 28.3% 19.1% 52.6% 



89 

December 2011 

It is evident that unemployment in the Northern Cape is a problem as seen from the estimates 

obtained of the LED Strategy and PGDS. The unemployed level in the Northern Cape is lower than 

the national average but the not economically active population is higher than the average for 

South Africa. Furthermore, the table below illustrates that Pixley ka Seme has the highest 

unemployment rate (21.6%) in the province followed by Frances Baard at 19.19%, and Namaqua 

has the lowest unemployed rate (13.4%). 

Table E.18: Employment in the district municipalities of the Northern Cape (Source: LED Strategy). 

DISTRICT EMPLOYED UNEMPLOYED NOT ECONOMICALLY ACTIVE 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 30.1% 18.6% 51.3% 

Namaqua 47.7% 13.4% 39.0% 

Pixley ka Seme 38.3% 21.6% 40.1% 

Siyanda 47.5% 16.4% 36.1% 

Frances Baard 38.2% 19.1% 42.7% 

The Northern Cape’s employment level increased with 0.3% (approximately 900 jobs) from 2006 

to 2007. In the same period, South Africa also experienced an increase in its employment of 1.7% 

(approximately 204 000 jobs). The PGDS states that the provincial government aims to generate in 

excess of 10 000 jobs annually by the year 2014. It is therefore recognised that: 

a) Eradication of poverty is an imperative for sustainable development. 

b) Eradication of poverty requires environmentally sustainable solutions. 

c) Sustainable development requires a balance between economic growth, social 

development and environmental sustainability, but with the emphasis on economic growth 

until such time as wide‐spread poverty has been successfully eradicated. 

d) Rolling back poverty must go hand in hand with rolling back inequality. 

E.2.5 EDUCATION 

The National Minister of Higher Education announced in 2010 the appointment of two task teams 

to ‘explore appropriate university models’ for the establishment of a university in the Northern 

Cape, and the Northern Cape Provincial Government’s own task team will report to the national 

group. The Premier of the province is committed to getting the university up and running ‘in the 

shortest time possible’. While pursuing this goal, the provincial government has also called on ‘big 

businesses’ and state‐owned enterprises to ‘play a key role in skills development to help us 

provide the technical skills required by the provincial economy’. 

The recapitalisation of the further education and training (FET) sector and technical secondary 

schools has been a major drive in recent years. The Northern Cape has two FET colleges. With 

approximately R4‐million available in bursaries, attendance at these institutions has grown 

dramatically. The Northern Cape Urban FET College comprises two campuses in Kimberley: City 

Campus and Moremogolo Campus. City Campus has three departments: business studies, 

engineering studies and a business unit that organises short courses in partnership with public and 

private partners. Moremogolo offers business studies or skills training. The Northern Cape Rural 

FET College has campuses at Kathu, Upington, De Aar, Kuruman and Namaqualand. These colleges 




December 2011 

offer courses in finance, economics and accounting, engineering, IT and computer science, 

management, hospitality, marketing, and tourism. 

According to the PGDS the province is currently involved with a mass literacy campaign and Adult 

Basic Education Training (ABET) program that seeks to increase the literacy rate in the province. 

The province’s intake for the Kha Ri Gude Mass Literacy Campaign 26 was 6 500 participants for 

2010, and it is part of the province’s goal in meeting the Millennium Development Goals of halving 

illiteracy by 2014. This mass literacy campaign must enrol at least 10 000 participants for the next 

five years. 

The Northern Cape schools have embarked on the Eco‐Schools program 27 so fast that they have 

become national leaders in this regard. The Department of Environment and Nature Conservation 

had 19 schools registered and 13 more were evaluated. Approximately R11‐billion has been 

allocated by the provincial government over a three‐year period to 2012/13 in order to improve 

literacy and numeracy and to improve matric results. The matric class of 2010 improved the 

provincial pass rate from 61.3% to 72.3%. 

E.2.6 LITERACY AND EDUCATION LEVELS 

According to the LED Strategy the adult education attainment levels in the Northern Cape are on 

average higher than the adult education attainment levels of South Africa. Approximately 19.7% 

of the Northern Cape adults have no schooling in comparison to South Africa’s 18.1%. The 

Northern Cape Province has the second lowest amount of adult individuals (5.5%) that obtained a 

tertiary education in South Africa (refer to table below). 

Table E.19: Adult Education levels of South Africa per province, 2007 (Source: Quantec Research, 

2009 as cited in the LED Strategy). 

AREA NO 

SCHOOLING 

SOME 

PRIMARY 

COMPLETE 

PRIMARY 

(GRADE 7) 

SOME 

SECONDARY 

COMPLETE 

SECONDARY 

(GRADE 12) 

HIGHER 

(TERTIARY) 

South Africa 18.1% 16.4% 6.6% 30.4% 19.2% 7.8% 

Western Cape 6.1% 15.8% 8.2% 36.0% 21.6% 10.5% 

Eastern Cape 22.6% 19.9% 7.6% 29.3% 13.5% 6.1% 

Northern Cape 19.7% 22.1% 8.1% 28.7% 14.6% 5.5% 

Free State 16.3% 22.2% 8.2% 30.8% 15.8% 5.6% 

KwaZulu‐Natal 22.2% 17.7% 6.1% 28.3% 18.2% 6.1% 

North West 20.0% 20.4% 7.1% 29.0% 17.0% 5.2% 

Gauteng 9.1% 11.8% 5.8% 33.6% 26.3% 11.3% 

26 

The Kha Ri Gude Mass Literacy Campaign was launched in February 2008, with the intention of enabling 4.7 

million adults above the age of 15 years to become literate and numerate in one of the eleven official languages. 

The campaign makes specific efforts to target vulnerable groups. Currently, 80% of the learners are women, 8% 

are disabled and 25% are youth, and 20% are above the age of 60. Kha Ri Gude is available at no cost to adults 

who have little or no education. Learners are required to commit themselves to attending classes for 240 hours. 

To ensure that learners fulfil this commitment, classes and are held in communities, at times which are 

convenient to the learners, and take place in homes, churches, community centres, prisons, etc. These learning 

groups play a significant role in community social cohesion. By the end of 2009, South Africa will have achieved 

an additional 1 million newly literate people. 

27 

Eco‐Schools operate in more than 46 countries worldwide and is a program of the Foundation for Environmental 

Education. Eco‐schools aim at improving environmental management and environmental learning at the school, 

its aim is also to draw tourists to their respective areas as this program is an international program. 



90 






91 

December 2011 

Mpumalanga 28.5% 16.2% 6.1% 25.9% 16.5% 5.6% 

Limpopo 32.8% 14.0% 5.6% 25.6% 14.1% 6.6% 

The table below gives the Percentage of the adult education levels on district levels for the 

Northern Cape in 2007. It is evident that Pixley ka Seme had the lowest adult education 

attainment levels in the Northern Cape with 27.3% of the adult population having no form of 

schooling, whilst John Taolo Gaetsewe is second with 25.4% having no schooling. The highest 

number of the adult population with tertiary education (6.4%) is located in Frances Baard. 

Table E.20: Adult Education on district level, 2007(Source: Quantec Research, 2009 as cited in the 

LED Strategy). 

DISTRICT 

MUNICIPALITY 

NO 

SCHOOLING 

SOME 

PRIMARY 

COMPLETE 

PRIMARY 

(GRADE 7) 

SOME 

SECONDARY 

COMPLETE 

SECONDARY 

(GRADE 12) 

HIGHER 

(TERTIARY) 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 25.4% 25.8% 6.4% 24.5% 13.0% 4.9% 

Namaqua 11.5% 21.7% 11.6% 35.3% 14.2% 5.7% 

Pixley ka Seme 27.3% 23.5% 7.6% 24.5% 11.8% 5.4% 

Siyanda 17.0% 24.3% 9.1% 29.1% 14.85 4.6% 

Frances Baard 18.2% 18.4% 7.1% 31.7% 16.9% 6.4% 

According to the LED Strategy, the province moved from second position in 2000, to the first 

position in 2001 (84.3%), 2002 (90%) and 2003 (90.9%), achieving the top matriculation results 

amongst all nine provinces. There has been a decline in matric pass rates between 2004 and 2008 

(i.e. 83.4% to 72.6%), however, the overall number of candidates that wrote full examination 

annually since 1996, increased gradually and reached a peak in 2003 with 90.7% and declined to 

70.3% in 2007. Since 2001, access to higher education in the province has been supported and 

encouraged through the awarding of the Premier’s bursary fund. In 2007, the number of students 

and the allocated budget more than doubled to 736 (in 2006 it were 322 students) and R16.9 

million (in 2006 it was R5.6 million). 

E.2.7 SKILL LEVELS 

The LED Strategy provides estimates of the different skills levels of the formal employees on 

national and provincial level. A ‘skill’ is a necessary competency that can be expertly applied in a 

particular context for a defined ‘purpose’ and ‘competence’ and has three elements (LED 

Strategy): 

• Practical competence: The ability to perform a set of tasks. 

• Foundational competence: The ability to understand what we ourselves or others are 

doing and why. 

• Reflexive competence: The ability to integrate or connect our performance with an 

understanding of the performance of others, so that we can learn from our actions and are 

able to adapt to changes and unforeseen circumstances. 

The table below illustrate the skills level from high to semi/unskilled of South Africa and the 

various provinces. The Northern Cape has the smallest portion (11.1%) of highly skilled formal 

employees in South Africa and Gauteng has the highest (14.3%). Furthermore, the Northern Cape 

has the second largest portion of semi and unskilled formal employees in the country. It can be 

concluded that the Northern Cape Province has a low skills base. A lack of skilled people may 

directly result in firms, sectors and the country being unable to implement planned growth 




education is required. 



92 

December 2011 

strategies as well as experiencing productivity, service delivery and quality problems (LED 

Strategy). 

Table E.21: Employment by skill on national and provincial level, 2007 (Source: Quantec Research, 

2009 as cited in the LED Strategy). 

AREA HIGHLY SKILLED SKILLED 28 SEMI 29 ‐AND 

UNSKILLED 30 

South Africa 12.8% 43.3% 44.0% 

Western Cape 12.4% 43.3% 44.3% 

Eastern Cape 13.0% 44.3% 42.6% 


Free State 11.2% 39.9% 48.8% 

KwaZulu‐Natal 12.6% 43.9% 43.5% 

North West 11.2% 36.9% 51.9% 

Gauteng 14.3% 46.2% 39.5% 

Mpumalanga 11.6% 41.3% 47.2% 

Limpopo 11.75 41.5% 46.9% 

Table E.22: Formal employment by skills on district level, 2007 (Source: Quantec Research, 2009 

as cited in the LED Strategy). 

DISTRICT HIGHLY SKILLED SKILLED SEMI‐ AND UNSKILLED 


Namaqua 10.8% 32.4% 56.8% 

Pixley ka Seme 10.9% 35.4% 53.7% 

Siyanda 10.0% 34.9% 55.1% 

Frances Baard 14.6% 38.1% 47.4% 

From the above table it is clear that John Taolo Gaetsewe district had the highest portion of highly 

skilled formal employees (15.7%) followed by Frances Baard (14.6%). The highest portion of semi‐ 

and unskilled formal employees were present in the Namaqua district (56.8%) 

The PGDS stipulates a number of interventions to grow the skill levels in the province, such as the 

following: 

a) Human Resource Development Strategy (Education): The Human Resource Development 

strategy of the Northern Cape is informed by the South Africa’s Human Development 

Strategy, adopted by Cabinet, and reflects the need to ensure that the skills and capacity 

base of the country is matched to the requirements for building and sustaining economic 

growth and development. The Provincial Growth and Development Strategy will develop 

partnerships with the tertiary and academic sector, the private sector, schools, NGOs, etc. 

28 A skilled employee is a person who has undergone training or education in and/or outside his/her work 

environment and who is in possession of a minimum level of Secondary qualification to qualify for their 

occupation. An employee in this category must have undergone at least two years’ study or training after having 

completed grade 12. 

29 A semi‐skilled employee is a person who acquired his/her expertise through a relatively short training period 

(single days or weeks) after which the required tasks could be efficiently performed. He/she must possess basic 

literacy and numeracy prior to training, but Primary education is sufficient as a prerequisite for training. 

30 Unskilled employees are persons who have not undergone any formal training or of whom no minimum level of 






December 2011 

The Provincial Growth and Development Strategy will also ensure that it meets its 

obligations and requirements in respect of legislation such as the Skills Development Act 97 

of 1998, and will act as a catalyst for industry‐based skills development. 

b) Skills Development Fund: The National Skills Fund will be significantly increased to ensure 

that more learnrships and internships are registered for Financial Management and 

Information Technology. The Northern Cape requires more apprenticeships in e.g. diesel 

mechanics, welding and plating, heating, air‐conditioning and ventilation, etc. 

c) Improving the supply‐side of high level knowledge and skills: Labour demands in the 

province need to be based upon the requirements emerging from the economic sectors of 

agriculture, mining, manufacturing, tourism and hospitality services, trade and finance and 

construction. A complete analysis of the labour and skills demands of the province, with 

due cognisance of the possible labour market changes that could emerge from the 

development potential of the province, need to inform a comprehensive strategy on the 

development and retention of high quality knowledge and skills in the Northern Cape. This 

requires the necessary commitment from government, labour and the private sector over 

the long‐term. The province has a general shortage of research and development skills. 

Compared to other provinces, where higher education and research facilities have formed 

part of their economies for many years, the Northern Cape has difficulty in accessing these 

services. Further education and training (FET), Higher education and training (HET) and 

development of maths, science and technology opportunities in the province over the next 

five years should be high on the development agenda. Every attempt should be made to 

encourage research and development in the province and in this regard, the National 

Institute for Higher Education (NIHE) should take the lead. 

d) Provincial Human Resource and Skills Development Strategy: The provincial strategy is 

attuned to the unique nature and needs of the province. The Human Resource 

Development Strategy for the Northern Cape Province is informed by the critical challenges 

that the province faces. The strategy in underpinned by key principles to guide its focus 

and direction. These principles remain sensitive to the broader transformation and redress 

imperatives that continue to guide the development efforts of the provincial Government. 

The strategy takes on board the view that its success will hinge on the availability of 

appropriate institutional structures for its implementation, monitoring and evaluation. 

Central to this strategy is the conviction that enhances the general and specific 

competencies of all citizens as a necessary response to high levels of unemployment in an 

attempt to interface the supply for skills and the market demands for skilled labour. The 

assistance and support of national government programs in terms of targeted skills 

development in the province (e.g. SMME development, entrepreneurship development, 

export development assistance, amongst others) would be invaluable in the social and 

human capital building process. 

According to the PGDS the biggest challenge facing the Northern Cape Province in the next decade 

is to build the economy. This process can only be successful if productivity increases and this is 

more likely through the enhancement of human and social capital. To ensure that people have 

the necessary mix and level of knowledge, skills, abilities and attributes one needs to promote 

access to knowledge and improve the work force productivity. However, the education and 

training system that has been inherited has a number of shortcomings, some of which are: 

• Lack of adequate planning for future skills requirements. 

• Inadequately training for the unemployed 

• Inequality in education that has left a highly differentiated education system. 

93 






December 2011 

The PGDS states a number of strategies to better education in the Northern Cape, such as: 

(i) Access to Quality Life Long learning: The key focus areas for access to quality lifelong 

learning should be Early Childhood Development (ECD), General and Further Education, 

Adult Basic Education and Training (ABET) and the promotion of Mathematics, Science and 

Technology in the education curriculum. A large Percentage of children growing up in 

abject conditions of extreme poverty remain at the risk of poor adjustment to school, 

increased class repetition and school drop‐out, highlights the critical nature of early 

childhood development provisioning in the province. 

(ii) Improve Early Childhood Development: Early Childhood Development (ECD) is one of the 

key priorities of the government for the next five years (MTSF). Central to this program is 

the provision of a good foundation for children entering the schooling system, which has 

proven to be important for school readiness and future success in their scholastic career. 

The challenge is to help break the cycle of poverty by increasing access to ECD programs, 

particularly for poor children in the urban and rural areas. During 2009, the Northern Cape 

Department of Education had 355 public primary schools, of which 278 offered Grade R. 

Though schools are generally eager to introduce Grade R classes, the greatest challenge 

faced in this regard is the unavailability of adequate infrastructure for the expansion of 

Grade R to meet the 2014 target. 

(iii) Improve the quality of Basic Education: Teachers should be present at school for at least 

seven hours, and should spent at least 6.5 hours teaching daily. The Northern Cape basic 

education department should ensure regular monitoring of the curriculum coverage by 

visiting school at least once a year. The Northern Cape Department of Education must 

deliver easy to read books (grade 1‐7), and text books (grade 10‐12) in key subjects to 

schools. 

(iv) Adult Basic Education and Training (ABET): The ABET program is a vehicle for broadening 

the provincial skills base and for allowing more people the opportunity to participate and 

contribute meaningfully to economic growth and development. A review of literacy rates in 

the province clearly indicates huge challenges despite the significant progress made in the 

past fifteen years. It further emphasizes the need to expand ABET provisioning from 

providing mere literacy and basic education programs to increasingly provide relevant and 

responsive skills programs in this sector. The beneficiaries of the program are the out of 

school youth and adults, specifically the historically disadvantaged. 

(v) Maths, Science and Technology: The Provincial Maths, Science and Technology strategy 

seeks to develop a numerically and mathematically literate, scientifically literate and 

technologically fluent society. This would inform the key focus areas for general and 

further education development in the Northern Cape, with the aim of empowering 

individuals to participate in the emerging knowledge and skills based economy. This would 

allow us to ultimately participate more competitively at national and international market 

levels. The Northern Cape strategy on Maths, Science and Technology seeks to further 

encourage partnership with the private sector and the department of education continues 

to support educators to attain qualifications towards Bachelors of Science Degree in 

Mathematics and Science Education. Further, it seeks to assist learners in obtaining 

bursaries to study for Bachelor of Science and Engineering Degrees as well as the National 

Diploma in electronic engineering. 

94 




E.3 GENERAL SOCIO‐ECONOMIC INFORMATION 

E.3.1 SERVICE STANDARDS: HOUSING 

31 

These refer to the following dwellings: 

• Traditional dwelling/hut/structure made of traditional materials. 

• Informal dwelling/shack in back yard. 

• Informal dwelling/shack not in back yard 

• Caravan or tent 

32 

These refer to the following dwellings: 

• House or brick structure on a separate stand or yard 

• Flat in block of flats 

• Town/cluster/semi‐detached house (simplex, duplex, triplex) 

• House/flat/room in back yard 

• Room/flatlet not in back yard but on share property 


95 


December 2011 

Housing is one of the basic human needs that have profound impact on health, welfare, social 

attitudes and economic productivity of the individual. It is also one of the best indicators of a 

person’s standard of living and of his or her place in society. In achieving the Millennium 

Development Goals, the South African government is to ensure that its citizens live within good 

housing conditions. In order to achieve this goal, the government wants to eliminate all informal 

dwellings, bucket type of toilets, and ensure that all citizens have access to electricity for lighting, 

and access to clean, safe water within a reasonable distance (StatsSA, 2007). According to the 

Census 2005 and Community Survey 2007, the Northern Cape has 245 086 and 264 653 

households respectively (refer to Table E23 below): 

Table E.23: Number of households in the districts of the Northern Cape for 2001 and 2007 

(Source: Community Survey, 2007). 

REGION CENSUS 2001 

(DECEMBER 2005) 

Northern Cape 245 086 

(991 919 persons) 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 44 218 

(191 539 persons) 

Namaqua 27 776 

(108 111) 

Pixley ka Seme 41 135 

(164 607 persons) 

Siyanda 48 100 

(202 160 persons) 

Frances Baard 83 857 

(325 503 persons) 

COMMUNITY SURVEY 2007 

264 653 

(1 058 060 persons) 

42 151 

(173 454 persons) 

36 437 

(126 494 persons) 

43 285 

(166 849 persons) 

59 893 

(238 063 persons) 

82 887 

(353 200 persons) 

The table below illustrates the percentages of households living in informal 31 and formal 32 

dwellings in South Africa. 

Table E.24: Households living in formal and informal dwellings in South Africa (Source: 


PROVINCES FORMAL DWELLINGS INFORMAL DWELLINGS 




Eastern Cape 54.7% 8.0% 

Free State 71.0% 18.4% 

Gauteng 73.5% 22.7% 

KwaZulu‐Natal 60.5% 8.6% 

Limpopo 83.2% 5.6% 

Mpumalanga 77.0% 11.7% 

North West 66.5% 23.8% 


Western Cape 83.4% 14.2% 

South Africa 70.6% 14.4% 



96 

December 2011 

Form the above table it is evident that 80.4% of households live in formal dwellings, it is more 10% 

higher than the South African average, and approximately 10% live in informal dwellings. 

According to the Community Survey (2007) fourteen of the 27 local municipalities had percentages 

below the provincial average regarding formal dwellings: Kai!Garib (67.7%), Dikgatlong (67.6%), 

Kgatelopele (66.4%), Gamagara (65.4%), Joe Morolong (65.5%), Magareng (80%), //Khara Hais 

(79.7%), Tsantsabane (73%), Khai‐Ma (74%), Ga‐segonyana (79.9%), !Kheis (70.4%), Phokwane 

(76.8%), Kamiesberg (77%) and Richtersveld (78.6%). 

Table E.25: General dwelling information of the district municipalities (Source: Community 

Survey, 2007). 

DISTRICT MUNICIPALITY FORMAL DWELLINGS INFORMAL DWELLINGS 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 70.9% 8.5% 

Namaqua 85.5% 5.1% 

Pixley ka Seme 93.9% 3.2% 

Siyanda 92.7% 6.4% 

Frances Baard 83.3% 13.3% 


According to the Community Survey of 2007, there is a total housing backlog in the Northern Cape 

of approximately 51 570 houses. Furthermore, the Community Survey 2007 estimates that there 

is currently 27 735 informal housing units and 24 174 traditional dwellings and backyard houses. 

In terms of the information provided by StatsSA, the total informal dwellings in the Northern Cape 

was estimated to be 26 581 during the 1996 census and 26 601 during the 2001 Census (PGDS). 

Although the housing backlog is calculated at 51 750 dwelling units, a portion of the backlog was 

already addressed in the 2007/2008 and 2008/2009 financial years, which leaves the province with 

a current backlog figure of 45 994. The housing backlog is made up of as follows: 

Table E.26: Household backlog per district municipality (Source: Community Survey, 2007). 

DISTRICT MUNICIPALITY TOTAL NO. OF HOUSEHOLDS NEED 

(COMMUNITY SURVEY, 2007) 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 36 439 5 259 

Namaqua 43 285 5 065 

Pixley ka Seme 59 891 15 419 

Siyanda 82 887 13 561 

Frances Baard 42 148 12 266 

TOTAL 264 650 51 570 




December 2011 

According to the Community Survey, the area of the highest housing need is in Siyanda (30%), 

followed by Frances Baard (27%) and then John Taolo Gaetsewe (24%). 

In the 2009/2010 financial year, the Northern Cape built 4 463 houses and serviced 1 794 sites in 

all the five districts of the province. Furthermore, 3 567 beneficiaries received title deeds. All 

housing beneficiaries received basic services of sanitation, water and electricity. In the 2010/2011 

financial year, the province will be able to only prioritise the upgrading of informal settlements 

both in urban and rural areas. It will deliver 2 739 homes and provide title deeds. The province 

will continuously link human settlement development to job creation, skills development, poverty 

reduction and local economic development in order to build sustainable human settlements 33 . 

The accurate long‐term planning and development of housing projects are hindered by the 

discrepancies between the 2001 Census estimates and the Community Survey of 2007. Due to the 

discrepancies it is important that a detailed housing survey and strategic plan be undertaken, and 

than national, provincial and local government spending on housing be adjusted in accordance 

with the findings of such a survey. 

E.3.2 SERVICE STANDARDS: SEWAGE REMOVAL 

Sewerage and sanitation are basic needs of communities which can pose serious health and 

hygiene risks for communities and the environment at large if not properly managed and 

monitored. Safe, hygienic and attractive toilets are the most obvious outcome of successful 

sanitation projects. 

As stated by the Centre for Public Service Sanitation (CPSI) (2004) 34 good sanitation is essential for 

the dignity, health and well‐being of everyone. Good sanitation extends far beyond access to an 

acceptable toilet and the safe disposal of human waste, it includes practices that support good 

hygiene and a healthy living environment. Sanitation improvement is about more than providing a 

toilet infrastructure. It has a major public and primary health component, and calls for close co‐ 

ordination between technical, health and social development personnel. Sanitation also straddles 

several sectors – housing and settlement development, water services, water resource and 

environment management, primary and preventative health care, education, local economic 

development, municipal finance, and so on. 

Good toilets are necessary, but not sufficient, for managing human waste safely. Cholera, for 

example, can be spread through poor hygiene, even where there are good water and sanitation 

facilities. Diarrhoeal diseases spread through poor sanitation and hygiene kill more children under 

five than just about any other single cause. Worms, parasites and faecal‐oral diseases cause 

lasting damage to the growth and development of small children, and undermine the 

development potential of our country. Poor sanitation raises particular risks for people who are 

HIV positive as their immune systems are less resistant to infections and disease. Good sanitation 

is about putting barriers in place to prevent the transmission of disease‐causing organisms found 

in waste (CPSI, 2004). 

33 

http://www.northerncapebusiness.co.za/government‐departments/598627.htm ‐ accessed on 14 September 

2011. 

34 

CPSI, 2004: Sanitation: Innovation Insights. www.cpsi.co.za 



97 






98 

December 2011 

The district and local municipalities are primarily responsible for the delivery of bulk 

infrastructure, such as water services, sanitation, waste water treatment works, and reticulation 

systems and electrification. Two critical challenges to accelerating basic services are the lack of 

critical infrastructure in rural areas and the proliferation of informal settlements in urban areas. 

The population of the Northern Cape which is mainly rural in nature, still experiences delays due 

to the lack of bulk infrastructure in their areas. A key assumption informing the review of the 

inter‐governmental fiscal system is that resource allocation of local government is not sufficient. 

The poor state of bulk infrastructure in some municipalities, particularly the water services, 

sanitation and sewage treatment plants, indicates a need for a much tighter enforcement of a 

regulatory framework backed by more appropriate delegations (PGDS). In the Northern Cape, 

approximately 57% of all households have access to appropriate sanitation (a flush or chemical 

toilet). The Siyanda District has the highest number of households to have access to appropriate 

sanitation, whilst the John Taolo Gaetsewe has the lowest at 27.7% and the Pixley ka Seme has the 

second lowest number of households with proper sanitation services. The table below illustrates 

the household access to appropriate sanitation services per district in the Northern Cape. 

Table E.27: Household Access to appropriate sanitation per district, 2007 (Source: Community 

Survey, 2007). 

AREA PERCENTAGE OF APPROPRIATE SANITATION 

South Africa 52.8% 

Northern Cape 57.0% 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 27.7% 

Namaqua 61.9% 

Pixley ka Seme 52.2% 

Siyanda 66.9% 

Frances Baard 66.5% 

It is evident that the access of sanitation services in the Northern Cape is however 4.2% higher 

than the national average which is at 52.8%. 

Table E.28: Standard of Sewage Removal per district municipality (Source: Community Survey, 

2007). 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 

(42 151) 

Namaqua 

(36 437) 

Pixley ka Seme 

(43 285) 

Siyanda 

(59 893) 

Frances Baard 

(82 887) 

SEWAGE REMOVAL 

SANITATION AVAILABILITY PER HOUSEHOLD 

Flush Dry toilet Pit with Pit without Chemical Bucket None 

ventilation ventilation 

14 222 6 907 6 550 9 302 67 186 4 917 

26 537 4 785 2 466 507 100 880 1 161 

29 568 1 179 2 907 1 973 256 4 920 2 483 

42 597 1 814 4 081 2 364 42 2 950 6 045 

66 224 1 671 4 505 3 605 390 2 813 3 680 

Approximately 7% of all households in the Northern Cape have no sewage removal facilities, and 

the Pixley ka Seme has the highest number of households with the bucket system in the Northern 




December 2011 

Cape. In 2007/2008, the Department of Housing and Local Government allocated an amount of R1 

million for bucket eradication in Pixely ka Seme. 

In 2007/2008, the South African government allocated R1 billion for the eradication of the bucket 

system under the Municipal Infrastructure Grant (MIG) program. However, this amount of money 

has proved to be apparently insufficient due to unexpected challenges encountered by 

municipalities during the implementation of bucket eradication projects. 

It is evident from the Community Survey (2007) that in the entire Northern Cape, from 2001 to 

2007, the bucket system has decreased from 10% to 4.4%; households with no toilets has 

decreased from 13.1% to 6.9%; and households with pit latrines have decreased from 18.4% to 

14.4%%. However, since the eradication of the bucket system is a national priority, more 

emphasis should be placed on budgetary allocation to increase flush and chemical toilets for 

households. 

In the John Taolo Gaetsewe SDF (2007) it is stated that eco‐toilets should be invested as a 

sanitation provision option in the district, but also in the Province as a whole because water is a 

scarce resources not only on provincial but also on national level. Flush toilets are thus becoming 

more of a luxury and alternative sanitation should only contribute to minimising/preventing 

ground water pollution, but should be capable of totally eliminating any possibilities thereof. 

Furthermore, in government sanitation programs the main focus has been on the provision of 

waterborne sanitation or Ventilated Improved Pit (VIP) toilets since they are the minimum RDP 

standard regarding sanitation. VIP toilets are able to provide an extremely effective sanitation 

solution to the vast majority of rural and peri‐urban households. The Mvula Trust 35 has 

implemented the VIP toilet design widely in the Northern Cape, especially in the John Taolo 

Gaetsewe Municipality. The VIP toilet have unfortunately also the stigma of being a ‘poor man’s 

solution’ to the sanitation backlog, which has tarnished the image of this basically sound 

technology. 

Table E.29: Top sewage concerns per district municipality of the Northern Cape (Source: 


DISTRICT MUNICIPALITY SEWAGE CONCERNS 

Johan Taolo Gaetsewe • Overall, pit latrines without ventilation occurs moist in the district, followed by flush 

toilets connected to sewerage systems. 

• Doubts have been raised on the environmental acceptability of the VIP toilet, 

especially in terms of its potential to contribute to ground water pollution. 

Namaqua • The remote villages and small farm settlements are mostly unserviced, and this is 

challenging due to the dispersed nature of settlements and poor availability of 

general infrastructure. 

• The topography of certain areas is also cites as challenge to basic services. 

Pixley ka Seme • Appropriate sanitation is at 52.2% considering the provincial average of 57%. 

• The Bo Karoo area (previous DMA) has very poor service and infrastructure levels. 

Siyanda • The majority of households have access to basic services in the district. 

• The appropriate sanitation is at 66.9% for the district. 

35 

The Mvula Trust is South Africa’s leading water and sanitation NGO. Its mission is to improve the health and 

livelihoods of poor and disadvantaged South Africans using community‐based approaches to facilitate the 

delivery of integrated and sustainable water, sanitation and related services while ensuring that people’s voices 

are heard. http://www.mvula.co.za/ 



99 






December 2011 

Frances Baard • Approximately 20% of households do not have access to adequate sanitation. 

• The households still requiring adequate sanitation are likely to the most 

marginalised, spatially and sociio‐economicially. 

• According to the Frances Baard SDF (2007), alternative sanitation systems should 

be investigated such as methane gas digesters, biolytic, or enviro‐loos. The 

advantage of methane gas digesters is that they are serving permanent residential 

populations (i.e. not holiday residents) and they also provide an energy source for 

other uses such as cooking. All three of the systems have the added advantage in 

that they are waterless. 

E.3.3 SERVICE STANDARDS: WATER RETICULATION 

The Northern Cape is known as province where water is scare. Several communities are 

experiencing water shortages, and economic development relies on water being available. A total 

of 280 communities in the Northern Cape are dependent on groundwater which affects 465 000 

people (DWAF, 2008) 36 . Water services delivery is performed by 31 Water Services Authorities in 

the Northern Cape via 155 drinking water supply systems. The total design water capacity 

available is approximately 577.5 million litres per day, but the average output volume is 

approximately 402.1 million litres per day (DWAF, 2011) 37 . 

According to the LED Strategy approximately 93.5% of households have access to piped water, and 

most municipalities provide 6 kl free basic water per household per month (refer to Table E.27 

below). Municipalities that provide more than 6kl free basic water per month to indigent 

households are Sol Plaatjie, //Khara Hais, Magareng, Gamagara and Karoo Hoogland. Only 

Kamiesberg provides less than 6 kl free water per month. In municipalities where water is not 

metered, such as parts of Ga‐Segonyana and in Joe Morolong, consumers are not charged for 

water consumption, and thus all receive water for free. 

Table E.30: Percentage of Household Access to Piped Water on district level, 2007 (Source: LED 

Strategy, 2007). 

AREA PERCENTAGE OF PIPED WATER 




Namaqua 91.6% 


Siyanda 89.4% 


According to the table above, the Northern Cape’s percentage of households that have access to 

piped water is approximately 93.5%, its 12.2% higher than the national average. Frances Baard 

has the highest households that have access to piped water and the John Taolo Gaetsewe has the 

lowest percentage. 

The table below of the Community Survey (2007) illustrates the standard of water reticulation for 

2001 and 2007 for the district municipalities in the Northern Cape. It is evident that access to 

running water in the Northern Cape has improved by 0.4% from 2001 to 2007, and that 

36 DWAF, 2008: Regional and internal bulk water services: Northern Cape summary report. 

37 http://www.dwa.gov.za/Documents/BD/BDNC.pdf ‐ accessed on 13 September 2011. 

100 






101 

December 2011 

approximately 94.4% people have access to piped water. The Northern Cape is above the national 

average of South Africa which was 84.5% (2001) and 88.6% (2007). The John Taolo Gaetsewe 

district’s access to piped water has increased by 9.3%, whilst the rest of districts all showed a small 

decline in 2007, but they are still above the national average. 

Table E.31: Standard of Water Reticulation (2001 and 2007) (Source: Community Survey, 2007) 

WATER RETICULATION 

NUMBER OF PERCENTAGES OF HOUSEHOLDS WITH ACCESS TO RUNNING WATER 

John Taolo Namaqua Pixley ka Siyanda Frances Northern 

Gaetsewe 

Seme 

Baard Cape 

Piped water inside 

dwelling 

14.4 47.4 

CENSUS 2001 

32.5 35.8 40.3 34.3 


yard 

13.7 39.2 48.5 43.5 41.2 37.7 

Public tap 

< 200m 

25.2 5.7 8.8 8.2 7.7 10.9 

Public tap 

>200m 

29.3 3.6 7.3 7.3 7.9 11.1 

TOTAL Piped water 82.6 95.9 97.1 94.8 97.1 94.0 

COMMUNITY SURVEY 2007 


dwelling 

23.0 64.4 51.4 51.9 55.3 50.0 


yard 

19.1 28.0 39.2 33.0 30.4 30.3 

Piped water form 

access point outside 

the yard 

49.8 3.1 4.7 7.9 10.2 14.1 

TOTAL Piped water 91.9 95.5 95.3 92.8 95.9 94.4 

The PGDS states that several municipalities realised that they could not address the water and 

sanitation needs without upgrading or refurbishment of the water treatment works and the sewer 

treatment works. This has a serious effect on the pace at which backlogs are addressed. The 

province is currently three years from the target date and an action plan is required to ensure that 

all role‐players are aligned and challenges addressed to achieve the targets. 

There are serious discrepancies between the data of the Community Survey 2007, and LED 

Strategy. For instance, the LED Strategy indicates an estimate of 78.2% for access to piped water 

for the John Taolo Gaetsewe while the Community Survey (2007) states a figure of 91.9%, which is 

a difference of 13.7%. Due to the discrepancies between the LED Strategy and the Community 

Survey, it is important that a detailed study is undertaken pertaining to access to water in the 

Northern Cape. The Census 2011 will provide better information and data. 

E.3.3.1 BLUE DROP STATUS 

The Blue Drop Certification system is a campaign by the Department of Water Affairs that 

encourages local municipalities to improve their water quality management while empowering 

consumers with the right information approximately what is coming out of their taps. Water 

Services Authorities that are to be awarded Blue Drop Status are required to comply with 95% of 

the weighted criteria in the biannual assessment as prepared by the Department of Water Affairs. 






102 

December 2011 

The Blue Drop results for 2011 indicate that municipal drinking water quality management in 

Northern Cape vary from excellent to good, with 4 systems that need attention, as indicated in the 

Provincial Performance log. The Northern Cape is taking a position amongst the lower performing 

provinces in the country. The overall provincial Blue Drop score is estimated as 62.07%. However, 

a continued increase is noted from 2009 and is still continuing to 2011. This trend represents one 

of the more progressive inclines in Blue Drop performances in the country. Blue Drop certificates 

have been awarded to in 2011: 

• Frances Baard District Municipality for the Koopmansfontein System (95%). 

• Kgatelopele Local Municipality for the Danielskuil System (95%). 

E.3.3.2 WATER NEEDS ON FORMAL AND INFORMAL STANDS 

Municipalities in the Northern Cape were requested to indicate where the water needs on formal 

and informal stands are situated. Based on the information obtained the water needs on formal 

stands are currently at 6 071, and on informal stands 3 426. 

Table E.32: Water needs in the district municipalities of the Northern Cape (Source: PGDS). 

DISTRICT MUNICIPALITY NEEDS 

NEEDS 

FORMAL 

INFORMAL 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 5 560 770 

Namaqua 252 131 

Pixley ka Seme 72 667 

Siyanda 588 575 

Frances Baard 229 1 282 

Northern Cape 6 701 3 425 

Since 2008, the water needs on formal stands decreased with 1 905 while the water needs on 

informal stands increased with 773 households. The increase can be due to the establishment of 

new informal settlements. The total cost to eradicate the household water needs were calculated 

at R13 000 per household and it is estimated that the total cost will be approximately R87 million. 

Table E.33: Top water concerns per district municipality of the Northern Cape (Source: PGDS). 

DISTRICT 

WATER/PIPED WATER CONCERNS 

MUNICIPALITY 

Johan Taolo 

• Households in general have good access to piped water, except Joe Morolong 

Gaetsewe 

Municipality. 

Namaqua • The villages and small farm settlements are remote and are relatively unserviced. 

• Poor infrastructure although 91.6% of the households have access to piped water. 

Pixley ka Seme • Feasibility studies are required to investigate alternatives to provide additional water. 

• The Pixley ka Seme region is heavy dependent on groundwater to supply 

community/household water needs 

• A temporary or permanent shallow ground table exists which serves as a water supply 

for the population and may be easily polluted. 

Siyanda • Approximately 89.4% of all households have access to piped water. 

Frances Baard • It is estimated that 95.3% have access to piped water. 

• According to the Frances Baard SDF (2007), an investigation into the extent to which 

alternative technology such as rainwater harvesting, combined with grey and black 

water recycling could contribute to reduce water costs, and particularly the ongoing 

operation costs from conventional systems is required. 






103 

December 2011 

Water demand management is meant to be strategy that stresses making better use of water 

already available due to a reduction in physical and/or economic waste. The need for water 

demand management (WDM) is essential and should enjoy a high priority, and the needs must be 

balanced with efficiency and sustainability objectives. All districts in the Northern Cape have 

settlements with great water shortages that could be addressed through regional bulk water 

schemes (DWAF, 2008): 

a) In the John Taolo Gatesewe district, Joe Morolong municipality experiences water 

problems. 

b) In the Frances Baard district, only Holpan is known to have a shortage of water. 

c) In the Namaqua district, the water resources challenges exist in the Kamiesberg 

Municipality as well in Port Nolloth, Witbank and in Calvinia. 

d) Siyanda district has several communities with water problems, especially Kenhardt, Mier 

and Riemvasmaak. 

e) In the Pixley ka Seme district several communities are experiencing water problems, and 

most towns rely on groundwater. Providing water to these communities will affect the 

neighbouring communities’ water supply and hence challenges are investigated in an 

integrated approach. 

E.3.4 SERVICE STANDARDS: TELECOMMUNICATIONS 

South Africa’s telecommunications network is the largest and most developed in Africa, and ranks 

ahead of countries such as China, Italy and India as stated in the World Economic Forum’s Global 

Technology Report 2007/08. A reliable and cost‐effective telecommunications sector is vital for 

economic growth. According to a report published in 2007 by the Human Sciences Research 

Council, the Northern Cape registered only slightly below the national average in terms of the 

general population’s access to landlines. 

One in five (22.4%) of households in the Northern Cape were found to have landline access, 

compared to the 23.1% of South Africa’s average. This places the Northern Cape ahead of the 

North West, Mpumalanga, Limpopo and the Eastern Cape. These figures are higher in the urban 

regions of the province, with Kimberley for example, mentioned alongside Cape Town, 

Johannesburg and Durban for its higher concentration of households with access to a landline, 

superior infrastructure and service options (Northern Cape Business, 2011). 

In the rural communities access is low, with households and individuals primarily relying on mobile 

phones for their telecommunications needs. Telkom remains the primary fixed‐line 

communications provider in South Africa and in the Northern Cape. Vodacom remains the market 

leader in mobile phones, followed by MTN and Cell C. In the Northern Cape, approximately 61.8% 

of households have access to a mobile phone (Northern Cape Business, 2011). Household access 

to telecommunication facilities is summarised by the table below: 

Table E.34: Percentage of household access to telecommunication facilities per district (Source: 

Community Survey, 2007 as cited in the PGDS). 

AREA ACCESS TO CELL ACCESS TO ACCESS TO TELEPHONE 

PHONE 

INTERNET 






Namaqua 56.6% 5.1% 31.5% 

Pixley ka Seme 55.6% 4.9% 21.5% 

Siyanda 57.8% 4.4% 20.3% 

Frances Baard 65.9% 7.8% 26.4% 



104 

December 2011 

It is evident from the above table that Frances Baard has the most percentages of household 

access to cell phones, internet and telephone. Furthermore, all district municipalities have 

households were the access to mobile phones far outweighs access to landlines and telephones. 

However, the access to internet is very limited and needs improvement since the information age 

and technology acquires internet access. 

Although most households have access to cell phones, only 5.4% of households have access to the 

Internet. According to the LED Strategy, Telkom’s strategy over the past few years has been to 

focus on its delivery only in the ‘high growth residential areas’. Therefore, it could be argued that 

until the capital costs of establishing fixed‐line infrastructure are reduced, the province will 

continue to suffer from poor access to fixed lines and the local population will continue relying on 

cell phone providers to offer them a means of communications. 

E.3.5 SERVICE STANDARDS: ROADS AND STREETS 

Transport is a supportive sector which plays a key role in meeting objectives such as economic 

growth, improved access to employment opportunities and increased social integration. 

Transport, both public and private, is a primary spatial structuring element providing access and 

mobility to both urban and rural communities. One of the underlying success factors of any 

regional economy relates to the movement of goods, people and services. It is important that the 

role and functioning of the different modes of transport and the impact on the infrastructure are 

clearly understood in order to focus different investment on the areas of opportunity and need. 

E.3.5.1 MODE OF TRANSPORT 

According to the table below, the largest portion of the population approximately 65% travels to 

school and work by foot, of which the African population (33.6%) and Coloured population (29.4%) 

are biggest groups. More than 17% of the population in the Northern Cape travel by car, either as 

passenger or driver. Approximately 63.6% of all drivers of a car come from the white population 

group, whilst only 32.7% of whites travel by passenger in a car. 

Table E.35: Availibility of transport (Source: SA Census, 2005). 

MODE OF TRANSPORT AFRICAN/ COLOURED INDIAN/ WHITE TOTAL 

BLACK 

ASIAN 

On foot 161 599 141 666 396 13 541 317 202 

Bicycle 2 580 2 861 11 2 427 7 879 

Motorcycle 423 426 3 654 1 506 

Car as driver 5 477 9 605 410 27 112 42 604 

Car as a passenger 11 841 15 668 431 13 589 41 529 

Minibus/taxi 19 915 11 566 76 955 32 512 

Bus 13 038 13 434 27 2 407 28 906 

Train 448 341 7 86 882 

Other 3 755 3 820 13 321 7 909 

*Approximately 510 990 people are not applicable to this sector, it includes children etc. 




December 2011 

Public transport which includes travelling by bus, taxi and train is the third most popular mode of 

transport at approximately 13% of the total. The African (7%) and Coloured (6.5%) population are 

the largest users of public transport. 

The lack of effective transportation systems is one of the major problems that hinders the full 

development of rural areas. It restricts the mobility of communities and thereby decreases the 

opportunity to participate in activities necessary for socio‐economic development. This lack of 

opportunity in turn maintains, if not actually produces, many of the social and economic problems 

characteristic of rural areas (PGDS). 

E.3.6 SERVICE STANDARDS: REFUSE REMOVAL 

Refuse removal and management are of the most critical issues in municipal service delivery and 

can have seriously adverse implications for the environment if refuse is not collected and disposed 

of properly. It entails the collection of household and industrial refuse and the management 

thereof to such a standard that no negative environmental influences occur. Legislation, defining 

refuse types, e.g. hazardous and non‐hazardous, and their management, the selection criteria for 

establishing waste disposal erven, site registration, etc., needs to be strictly adhered to. Strictly 

speaking, the establishment of cemeteries also resort under waste disposal erven, with basically 

the same legislation applicable. Refuse not disposed of at a recognised (registered) waste disposal 

site is considered illegal dumping (John Taolo Gaetsewe SDF, 2007). . 

There are 130 waste disposal sites in the Northern Cape Province, of these 130 sites, 84 are 

municipal sites, 46 are mine or privately owned; 85 are permitted, while 45 are not permitted 38 . 

According to the PGDS, 23.1% of households in the Northern Cape are without access to adequate 

refuse collection services. 

According to the LED Strategy approximately 62.2% of households in the province have refuse 

removed by a local authority (refer to Table E32 below). In 2007, the Northern Cape Province 

refuse removal average was 7.8% higher than the South African average of 54.8%. Gauteng at 

80.9% and the Western Cape at 87.6% were first and second respectively with the Northern Cape 

sitting at third regarding refuse removal in the country (LED Strategy). Furthermore, John Taolo 

Gaetsewe has the lowest refuse removal in the province with Frances Baard the best at 77.4%. 

Table E.36: Household refuse removal by local authority, 2007 (Source: Community Survey, 2007 

as cited in the PGDS). 

AREA REFUSE REMOVAL BY 

LOCAL AUTHORITY 




Namaqua 70.9% 


Siyanda 63.7% 


38 

http://www.jgi.co.za/news_detail.php?recordID=2008050101 – accessed on 15 September 2011. 



105 






December 2011 

From the table below it is evident that in 2007, more than 72% of all households had their refuse 

removed by the local authority and/or private company. This estimate is 10% higher than the 

estimate given by the Northern Cape Province. However, it is clear from the Community Survey 

that only 3% have no refuse disposal, with Frances Baard having the largest households with no 

refuge removal. Furthermore, in general the refuse disposal facilities have increased for all district 

municipalities from 2001 to 2007. 

Table E.37: Households by type of refuse disposal of district municipalities in the Northern Cape 

(2001 and 2007) (Source: Community Survey, 2007). 

DISTRICT REMOVED BY LOCAL AUTHORITY/PRIVATE 

NO REFUSE DISPOSAL 

MUNICIPALITIES 

COMPANY 

CENSUS 2001 COMMUNITY CENSUS 2001 COMMUNITY 

SURVEY 

2007 

SURVEY 2007 

John Taolo Gaetsewe 19.9 31.0 9.5 3.1 

Namaqua 75.6 88.5 2.5 0.8 

Pixley ka Seme 70.9 80.1 3.1 2.4 

Siyanda 65.0 72.9 2.1 3.3 

Frances Baard 75.3 81.2 5.5 4.0 

Northern Cape 62.6 72.1 4.8 3.0 

E.3.7 SERVICE STANDARDS: ELECTRICITY AND ENERGY 

According to the LED Strategy, all municipalities provide free basic electricity to households with 

electricity connections and most indigent households receive 50 KwH per month. Exceptions are 

Nama Khoi that provides 6 KwH, Thembelihle 20 KwH, Siyathemba 54 KwH and Mier provides 

more than the required 55 KwH. Furthermore, the LED Strategy states that 70% of all households 

in the Northern Cape have access to electricity. 

The Statistics South Africa and the Community Survey (2007) differentiates between the 

percentage of households using electricity for lighting, cooking, and heating. According to the 

Community Survey (2007) the following percentages per province of households that used 

electricity for lighting, cooking and heating in 2007 (refer to the table below). 

Table E.38: Households using electricity for lighting, cooking and heating of the provinces in South 

Africa (Source: Community Survey, 2007). 

EASTERN 

CAPE 

FREE 

STATE 

GAUTENG KWAZUL 

U‐NATAL 

LIMPOPO MPUMA‐ 

LANGA 

NORTH 

WEST 

NORTHERN 

CAPE 

WESTERN 

CAPE 

Lighting 65.9 86.6 83.3 71.5 81.2 82.2 82.5 86.8 93.9 

Cooking 45.3 75.2 81.3 61.0 40.3 55.7 65.8 77.2 88.8 

Heating 29.3 54.6 76.7 56.9 36.8 45.0 58.9 64.9 80.0 

In 2007, the percentage of households in the Northern Cape using electricity for lighting, cooking 

and heating is higher than the national average of 80.0%, 66.5% and 58.8% respectively. 

According to the LED Strategy approximately 70.0% of all households in the Northern Cape have 

access to electricity, this is higher than the national average of 66.2% (refer to Table E.35 below). 

John Taolo Gaetsewe has the lowest percentage of household access to electricity with the 

Namaqua (74.7%) the highest percentage access to electricity. Except for John Taolo Gaetsewe all 

the other district municipalities have a household access of electricity higher than the national 

106 






107 

December 2011 

average. According to the LED Strategy, the Northern Cape’s household access to electricity is 

better than Eastern Cape (45.5%), Free State (68.3%), KwaZulu‐Natal (59.3%), North West (68.9%), 

Mpumalanga (64.5%), and Limpopo (58.6%). 

Table E.39: Household Access of electricity services on district level, 2007 (Source: Community 

Survey, 2007 as cited in the LED Strategy). 

REGION PERCENTAGE OF HOUSEHOLD ACCESS 




Namaqua 74.7% 


Siyanda 72.1% 


The table below illustrates that for 2007 in the Northern Cape, most households use electricity for 

lighting (86.77%), followed by cooking (77.20%) and heating (64.89%). It is also apparent 

approximately 10% of all households use wood for cooking and 24.5% for heating purposes. 

Table E.40: Provision of Electricity for entire Northern Cape (Source: Community Survey, 2007). 

ELECTRICITY 

Availability of Electricity for Lighting, Cooking and Heating 

LIGHTING COOKING HEATING 

Energy Source Households % Households % Households % 

Electricity 229 641 86.77% 204 338 77.20% 171 757 64.89% 

Gas 687 0.25% 10 810 4.08% 3 338 1.26% 

Paraffin 6 133 2.3% 21 105 7.97% 14 933 5.64% 

Candles 25 189 9.51% ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 

Wood ‐ 26 478 10.0% 64 934 24.5% 

Coal ‐ 598 0.22% 2 780 1.05% 

Animal dung ‐ 276 0.10% 504 0.19% 

Solar 1 380 0.52% 509 0.19% 455 0.17% 

Other 1 623 0.61% 540 0.20% 5 949 2.24% 

TOTAL 264 653 100 264 654 100 264 650 100 

Electrification of households is speeding up in the Northern Cape. A good deal of progress has 

been made in bringing services to the citizens of the province in South Africa with the most 

remote communities. The National Department of Energy has set the date 2012 for achieving 

universal access to services and 15 priority municipalities in the Northern Cape have been 

identified for connections to the grid in 2011. 

E.3.8 SERVICE STANDARDS: HEALTH 

The Northern Cape Province has 15 hospitals, 25 community hospitals and community health 

centres and 136 fixed clinics. The vision of the Department of Health in the Northern Cape is to 

‘achieve excellent, holistic, people‐centred and affordable health care in the Northern Cape’. The 




publications/district‐health‐barometer‐200809 



108 

December 2011 

Northern Cape Department of Health in its Vision 2014 highlighted a number of objectives for the 

year 2014: 

• Expand sites for the comprehensive plan for HIV/AIDS Care, Management and Treatment in 

all districts. 

• Increase access to specialised care by developing Upington and De Aar into full secondary 

level hospitals. 

• Ensure that Emergency Medical Services (EMS) respond to emergency calls within 15 

minutes in urban areas and 40 minutes in rural areas with a well‐equipped fleet that is 

staffed by skilled and caring personnel. 

• Build 30 new district hospitals 

• Build 20 new community health centres 

• Build 130 clinics replacing old ones 

• Build new secondary and tertiary hospitals 

The Extended Program on Immunisation (EPI) aims to prevent and reduce childhood illnesses that 

cab be prevented by immunisation. Immunisation against polio, measles, diphtheria, whooping 

cough (pertussis), tetanus, hepatitis B, haemophilia influenza type B and TB remain the most cost 

effective health intervention currently available. In 2007, the immunisation status of children in 

South Africa (under the age of one) fully immunised was 97.3%, which was higher than the 

Northern Cape (90%) (LED Strategy). The status of health of a population is directly related to and 

indicative of the socio‐economic conditions and the environment. According to the Health 

Systems Trust (2009) 39 the facilities and beds in the Northern Cape is as follows: 

Table E.41: The number of public facilities in the Northern Cape Province (Source: Health Systems 

Trust, 2009). 

NUMBER OF HEALTH FACILITIES AND NUMBER OF PUBLIC SECTOR 

NUMBER OF PRIVATE SECTOR 

BEDS 

FACILITIES (2009) AND BEDS (2009) FACILITIES AND BEDS (2009) 

Clinics 126 

Community Health Centres 24 

Mobile Services 32 

District Hospital 18 

Regional Hospital 2 

Provincial Tertiary Hospital 0 

Central Hospital 0 

Specialised Hospital 3 

Private hospitals 4 

Beds 1 922 335 

The top causes of death per 100 000 people in the Northern Cape are respiratory, natural/non‐ 

natural causes, cardio‐vascular, notifiable medical conditions, cardio‐vascular, carcinoma, gastro‐ 

intestinal, blood disease, birth complications and circulatory. These differ significantly from those 

for the rest of the country. The province’s epidemiological profile dictates the government to put 

much effort on implementing the strategies that reduce HIV/AIDS and TB incidences. 

According to the Frances Baard SDF (2007) the provincial maternal health estimate of 167.2 per 

100 000 in 2003/2004 is higher than the national estimate of 123.7 per 100 000 live births in 2003. 

Maternal deaths are due to oedema, proteinuira and hypertension disorders in pregnant women. 

39 Health Systems Trust 2008/2009: The District Health Barometer 2008/09. HealthLink. http://www.hst.org.za/ 






109 

December 2011 

The PGDS states that child mortality forms 11% of the total provincial mortality, and the three top 

causes of death for the ages of 0 to 14 years are intestinal infectious diseases (18.7%), influenza 

and pneumonia (8.6%) and respiratory and cardiovascular disordes specific to peri‐natal projects 

(8.2%). The increase in HIV/AIDS prevalence in the age group 20 to 34 years is a sign that the 

economically active population is under threat, and it is therefore critical that the province 

through its partners put much effort to reduce the rate of HIV and TB infections in this age group 

and also prolong the lives of the infected. According to the LED Strategy, the Northern Cape had a 

lower HIV/AIDS prevalence (7.7%) than South Africa (12.4%) in 2007. 

Table E.42: Top ten causes of death in the Northern Cape (Source: StatsSA as cited in the PGDS). 

Top ten causes of death, 2000 (MRC % Top ten causes of death, 2008 (StatsSA % 

Report) 

Report) 

HIV and AIDS 13.9 Tuberculosis 11.6 

Stroke 8.7 Influenza and Pneumonia 6.5 

Ischaemic heart disease 8.7 Intestinal infectious diseases 4.9 

Tuberculosis 7.4 Other forms of heart diseases 4.3 

Lower respiratory infections 4.8 Cerebrovascular diseases 4.1 

Homicide/Violence 4.8 Chronic lower respiratory diseases 3.5 

Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease 4.4 HIV 2.8 

Hypertensive heart diseases 3.6 Hypertensive diseases 2.7 

Diarrheal diseases 3.5 Diabetes mellitus 2.7 

Road traffic accidents 2.8 Certain disorders involving the immune 

mechanism 

2.6 

Other natural causes 45.9 

Non‐Natural 8.4 

The enormity of the HIV and AIDS challenge in Africa and in South Africa is unique thus making 

implementation models from other continents difficult to replicate in Africa. Research shows 

there is a high level of HIV/AIDS awareness in the Northern Cape. Already in 1999, it was found 

that almost every one of the 4 000 youths interviewed had heard of HIV/AIDS. In 2002, the 

Northern Cape had the highest percentages of respondents (78%) who know where to obtain 

Voluntary Counselling and Testing (VCT) services. However, this is not always the case for those 

people living on farms in the province (Pixley ka Seme SDF, 2007). 

During 2005/2006 a total of 37 223 people received pre‐test counselling, and over 38 000 people 

tested for HIV/AIDS at Northern Cape public health facilities between January and December 

2006. This is a testing rate of 51.7% per 1000 people in Frances Baard, 19.1 per 1000 tested in 

Namaqua. The Pixley ka Seme is 50.9 persons per 1000, which is almost as high as in Frances 

Baard at 51.7. 

In fact, the Northern Cape is the province with the third lowest HIV/AIDS prevalence in South 

Africa – Western Cape has 5.9% and Limpopo has 6.8%. Furthermore, in 2007, the percentage of 

HIV/AIDS prevalence of district municipalities is as follows: 

• Johan Taolo Gaetsewe District had the highest HIV/AIDS prevalence at 9.7%. The Ga‐ 

Segonyana Local Municipality has a 10.3% prevalence of HIV/AIDS. 

• Namaqua District has the lowest (5.1%) prevalence of HIV/AIDS with the Khai‐Ma being the 

local municipality with highest HIV/AIDS prevalence at 8.3%. 






December 2011 

• Pixley ka Seme has a HIV/AIDS prevalence of 5.9% with the Umsobomvu Local Municipality 

with a HIV/AIDS prevalence of 7.7%. 

• Siyanda District has a HIV/AIDS prevalence of 6.6% with the Tsantasabane and Kgatelopele 

Local Municipalities having a HIV/AIDS prevalence of 8.3% and 8.4% respectively. 

• Frances Baard has a HIV/AIDS prevalence of approximately 9.1% but all the local 

municipalities have a HIV/AIDS prevalence of greater than 8.6%. 

In 1994, all forms of TB were the scourge of the Northern Cape. The South African Health Systems 

Trust found that during the period 1998‐2006, TB in the Northern Cape was almost 30% higher 

than the national average. One of the many results of seasonal and migrant working is the 

increase of the TB defaulter rate. The incidence rate has increased to 665.4 per 100 000 in 2006 

from 300 per 100 000 in 1998. According to TB case smear treatments, the Pixley ka Seme has 

8.7%, the Frances Baard has 6%, followed by Siyanda, John Taolo Gaetsewe and Namaqua at 5.9%, 

4.1% and 2.1%, respectively. 

However, the HIV/AIDS prevalence of the Northern Cape increased from 0.9% in 1995 to 7.7% in 

2007. Since 1997, TB has been and is still the leading cause of death in the province. According to 

the PGDS TB is still the number one killer disease in the Northern Cape, and improved TB 

surveillance and intensified case finding activities have contributed to increased number of TB 

cases over the past 5 years. Most of the cases are from Frances Baard and Siyanda with Namaqua 

having diagnosed the least of the cases. 

Despite the fact that there is an increase in the number of new TB cases cured at first attempt, the 

Province is registering an increased number of Multi‐Drug Resistant (MDR) TB. The Siyanda 

district has over the last three years, reported high MDR TB numbers. In this district, primary MDR 

TB (infection of others by MDR TB without first contracting ordinary TB) is amongst families and 

close‐knit communities. Prison conditions can stimulate the spread of TB through overcrowding, 

poor living ventilation, weak nutrition and inadequate or inaccessible medical care. These factors 

also promote the spread of drug‐resistant TB. The spread of XDR TB at Upington Correctional 

services is a source of concern. Isolation facilities and screening of TB in correctional services need 

to be improved. HIV and TB co‐infection rates remain high in the province. 73.5% of TB patients 

were reported to be HIV positive during 2009. The most affected are people in their productive 

years between ages 25‐ 49 years, women and children are particularly most vulnerable. The 

vulnerability of these groups will have to be addressed if one were to succeed in transforming the 

society of the Northern Cape into one achieving a unified, effective response to the epidemic 

(PGDS). 

Home‐based care has been introduced to take care of people at their homes within the 

community. Home based care is not exclusively for person infected with HIV/AIDS, however most 

programs are supporting patients infected and affected by HIV/AIDS. By 2002, the Department of 

Social Services had trained 101 volunteers in the Northern Cape, and training was provided by St 

John’s Ambulance, St Theresa Hospice in Kimberley and Hospice De Aar. Currently there are 

approximately 60 listed organisations that provide home‐based care services in the Northern Cape 

Pixley ka Seme SDF, 2007). Organisations such as Itshireletse, Pelonomi, Thusanang, Tshepang, 

etc. provide valuable services such as orphans and foster care, HIV/AIDS and TB awareness 

programs, legal services, and basic gardening equipment for vegetable gardens etc to communities 

in the Northern Cape (USAid, 2009) 40 . 

40 USAid, 2009: Pepfar: Activities in Northern Cape Province. Fiscal Year 2009. 

110 




December 2011 

Approximately 22 drop‐in‐centres were established and are supported nationally. These are 

physical structures where a comprehensive range of services are rendered with a specific focus on 

meeting the needs of children, orphans, women and the frail, through programs such as after 

school care, day care for HIV/AIDS infected children, provision of emotional support to 

beneficiaries by social workers and, linking and referring beneficiaries to social security grants and 

other services and government departments for further assistance and support. Short term 

support rendered includes provision of immediate food relief in the form of food parcels, school 

feeding schemes and soup kitchens (Pixley ka Seme SDF, 2007). In the Northern Cape, this type of 

facility can be successful in poor, rural communities where the needs of vulnerable groups are met 

holistically 41 . 

E.4 COMPREHENSIVE RURAL DEVELOPMENT 

E.4.1 THE COMPREHENSIVE RURAL DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM (CRDP) 

The CRDP opts for a definition of rural areas from the 1997 Rural Development Framework, 

adopted by the Government in 1997. These are described as ‘sparsely populated areas in which 

people farm or depend on natural resources, including villages and small towns that are dispersed 

throughout these areas. They include large settlements in the former homelands, created by 

apartheid removals, which depend on migratory labour and remittances for their survival.’ The 

CRDP is aimed at being an effective response against poverty and food insecurity by maximizing 

the use and management of natural resources to create vibrant, equitable and sustainable rural 

communities. 

The vision of government is to create vibrant, equitable and sustainable rural communities 

through social cohesion and development. CRDP is focused on enabling rural people to take 

control of their destiny, thereby dealing effectively with rural poverty through optimal use and 

management of natural resources. This will be achieved through a co‐ordinated and integrated 

broad‐based agrarian transformation as well as strategic investment in economic and social 

infrastructure that will benefit entire rural communities. This also calls for improved integration 

and co‐ordination of services in development planning and social facilitation. The CRDP therefore 

focuses on the following areas: 

a) Land and Agrarian Transformation; 

b) Social Transformation; 

c) Economic Development. 

In order for the CRDP to succeed, the commitments and actions of the sector departments need to 

be co‐ordinated in accordance with the principle of co‐operative governance. This principle has 

been given a legal foundation by the Intergovernmental Relations Framework Act (Act 13 of 2005). 

This collaboration needs to focus on achieving the following: 

(i) Joint planning, resource allocation and collaborative implementation of agreed rural 

initiatives. 

(ii) Partnerships with local government and alignment with Integrated Development Plans 

(IDPs). 

(iii) Increased Public Private Partnerships (PPPs) in support of rural development. 

41 

http://www.age‐in‐action.co.za/NC%20Background.htm – accessed on 16 September 2011. 



111 




December 2011 

(iv) Enhancing the role of Non‐governmental organisations (NGOs), civil society and traditional 

authorities in the implementation of the CRDP. 

When considering the principle of co‐operative governance within the context of the Northern 

Cape Province, a rural development program and strategy is needed which is consistent with the 

objectives as outlined in the National Comprehensive Rural Development Program (NCRDP). 

The mandate of the Northern Cape provincial government has been extended to include rural 

development. The strategies and resources which are geared towards improving functionality and 

efficiency of various economic sectors in the province will also accommodate rural development 

initiatives. Rural development is about human development of the province rural motive for 

change that also includes agricultural development and land redistribution. A key concern is that 

impoverished people remain in economically stagnant rural areas notwithstanding the fact that it 

would be beneficial to relocate to more economically vibrant areas. The challenge remains to 

develop strategies of the prevention of the economic degradation of certain rural areas. The mari‐ 

culture industry in the coastal region of the Namaqualand District may serve as an example of such 

preventative economic measures which could be undertaken in this regard. Another intervention 

regarding rural renewal is the Northern Cape spatial development framework (SDF) which 

recommends mechanisms to bring about alignment between infrastructure investment and 

development programs within localities. Furthermore the focus is on the establishment of 

urban/rural linkages in this regard. There should be clear criteria developed to monitor and 

evaluate the long‐term sustainability thereof. 

Through the CRDP government will make strategic investments in economic and social 

infrastructure such as roads, bridges, water services, sanitation, housing, clinics, irrigation 

development, livestock handling facilities and tourism facilities. The CRDP will impact in three 

phases, viz.; incubator/nursery stage–meeting basic human needs as driver; entrepreneurial 

development stage–infrastructure development as driver; emergence of industrial and financial 

sectors – driven by SMME’s and village markets. 

The rationale for selection of CRDP implementation sites are the convergence with other 

government anti‐poverty initiatives such as ISRDP and war on poverty, the state of local 

government report, the municipal turn‐around strategy, population density and distribution, 

provincial indices of multiple deprivation for South Africa and the Human Development Index of 

an area. 

E.5 LAND REFORM 

Since 1994, South Africa has embarked on a program of land reform designed to redress the grave 

racial imbalance in holding and secure the land rights of historically disadvantaged people. The 

Constitution of South Africa 108 of 1996, sets out legal basis for land reform, particularly in section 

25 of the Bill of Rights, which protects property rights from arbitrary interference but also places a 

clear responsibility on the state to carry out land and related reforms and grants specific rights to 

victims of past discrimination. South African land reform policy has been pursued under three 

broad headings (May and Lahiff, 2006) 42 : 

a) Restitution, which provides relief for certain categories of victims of forced dispossession. 

42 

May, H. and Lahiff, E. 2006: Land Reform in Namaqualand, 1994‐2005: A review. Journal of Arid Environments. 



112 




Cape – 17 March 2011. 



113 

December 2011 

b) Redistribution, a system of discretionary grants that assists certain categories of people to 

acquire land, largely through the market. 

c) Tenure reform, intended to secure and extend the tenure rights of the victims of past 

discriminatory practices. 

A number of land restitution and land redistribution cases have been made in the Northern Cape. 

During the period of 1994 to 2009, a total of 264 729 hectares of land has been acquired and 

transferred as a result of the Redistribution Program (PGDS). Most of the land in the Northern 

Cape consists of agricultural land, and in 2009, 3 707 land restitution claims have been settled. 

Approximately R1 billion has been spent by government in acquiring land in the province. 

Furthermore, according to Shushu (2011) 43 approximately 466 576 hectares of land has been 

transferred to approximately 21 805 beneficiaries. This points to remarkable progress made due 

to the various policy interventions of government. The most significant of land restitution cases in 

the year under review was the settlement of the Gatlhose community in the John Taolo Gaetsewe, 

the Gatlhose community lost 49 000 hectares of their land, and now the community on the 

different locations have opted for a combination of financial compensation, alternative land for 

agricultural purposes, housing development and development of infrastructure like schools and 

clinics. An amount of R197 million has been budgeted to purchase land in the 2011/2012 financial 

year and R32 million is set aside for recapitalisation of distressed farms. To date the land 

redistribution programs has resulted in 1.6 million hectares of land being transferred to 29 005 

beneficiaries. 

The national target for land reform is the redistribution of 30% of productive agricultural land by 

2014. According the LED Strategy, the Northern Cape has delivered 1 061 638 hectares of land to 

previous disadvantage communities through the Land Redistribution programs from 1994 to 2008. 

The following table illustrates the land distributed in 5 year intervals in each district municipality: 

Table E.43: Land Redistribution per district municipality (Source: LED Strategy). 

DISTRICT MUNICIPALITY HECTARES BENEFICIARIES 

1994‐1999 


Namaqua 44 971 58 

Pixley ka Seme 4 474 98 

Siyanda 14 153 483 

Frances Baard 20 706 1 339 

TOTAL 86 585 2 019 

1999‐2004 


Namaqua 161 216 410 

Pixley ka Seme 33 123 139 

Siyanda 31 925 479 


TOTAL 240 063 1 820 

2004‐2008 


Namaqua 235 564 1 134 

43 Shushu, G.N.J 2011: Budget speech by MEC for Agriculture, Land Reform and Rural Development in the Northern 




Pixley ka Seme 145 650 1 693 

Siyanda 317 301 2 213 


TOTAL 734 990 5 411 

GRAND TOTAL 1 061 638 9 250 



Map E.1: Land reform in the Northern Cape (Source: PGDS). 

December 2011 

The Northern Cape Economic Development Agency (NCEDA) collaborates with institutions that are 

ready to rejuvenate the Northern Cape agriculture sector by introducing high‐value crops that will 

boost the economy of the province. The NCEDA agriculture project represents an outstanding 

opportunity for economic development and empowerment in the Northern Cape, with a focus on 

revitalising land reform projects. According to the LED Strategy, the following three projects are 

being run presently: 

• Riemvasmaak and Onseepkans: 

The area is one of the few in southern Africa where citrus can be produced free of ‘citrus 

black spot’ and therefore products from this area will enjoy preferential access into 

Europe, the USA and Japan, compared to all the other citrus areas in the country. There is 

a need to access land for production of pomegranates (2 000 ha), figs (500 ha), grapefruit 

(2 000 ha). 

• Lower Majeakgoro Community Project: 

This is a farm north of Hartswater, and is a land restitution project bought by the 

Department of Land Affairs for the community of Lower Majeakgoro. The previous farmer 

had been successfully producing deciduous fruits (i.e. apricots, peaches and plums), and 

pecan nuts of export quality for a number of years. The farm is already accredited for 

export, and has 63 ha of land with water rights. 

• Women in agriculture and rural development (WARD): 

114 






115 

December 2011 

The Vaalharts area in particular is suitable for pecan nuts, only 4 001 ha is harvested in 

Vaalharts. The WARD project has proposed an area of land that consists of 83 ha at the 

Vaalharts area, and NCEDA is to facilitate the acquisition of that land. 

Overall, it can be said that considerable progress has been made in terms of land reform in 

Namaqualand since 1994. One of the major achievements has been the development of a clear 

vision, comprehensive framework and specific institutional mechanisms for land reform in the 

area. This has contributed substantially to the sequencing and relatively smooth implementation 

of the program. Unlike most other parts of the country, Namaqualand has seen local government 

playing a key role in the design and the implementation of the process, particularly through the 

inclusion of land matters in their Integrated Development Plans. 

In 2002, an innovative R230 million table‐grape empowerment project was signed on 500 ha along 

the Orange River near Upington. It is the largest BEE transaction in the South African agricultural 

sector, and includes role‐players such as the Industrial Development Corporation, the Black 

Management Forum Investment company and agricultural group Karsten Boerdery 44 . Karsten 

group head, Piet Karsten sees the venture could emerge as a model for land reform and rural 

development as it embraces both empowerment and community involvement 45 . 

The Northern Cape Department of Agriculture, Land Reform and Rural Development (DALR), the 

national Department of Water Affairs, Orange River Cellars and the Blocuso Trust (made up of 400 

beneficiaries from three communities near Keimoes) have teamed up in a private‐public 

partnership that aims to bring greater numbers into ownership of vineyards. With the private 

company supplying vinestock and agreeing to buy the grapes, the two departments put up R21‐ 

million in funding and the project is on course to reap its first harvest in 2011. Shares in Orange 

River Cellars will be issued commensurate with the size of the grape harvest delivered to the 

company. The DALR has also set aside R7.1‐million for the purchase of land for emerging wine 

farmers in 2010. The five‐year plan is to have 780 hectares of vines planted with a projected yield 

of 25 550 metric tons. 

This joint land reform venture is called Keboes Fruit Farm (Pty) – Raap en Skraap and is located 

220 km from Upington in the direction of Onseepkans. It empowers people financially, but more 

importantly, empowers people to empower themselves. This is done by finding the fine balance 

between productivity, social accountability and creating opportunities for people to grow. It also 

includes social development programs such as AIDS awareness programs and literacy classes, 

framing techniques etc 46 . 

The multimillion Rand investment funded by Karsten Farms Group (50% share), BMFI, a Black 

Empowerment Company (27%) and the Workers’ Trust (23%). The workers’ shares will be 

warehoused in a trust operated by the government‐run Industrial Development Corporation for a 

period of 10 years during which time the members must pay for the shares registered to them. 

They will finance this by government land grants or through dividends received as shareholders. 

44 

Karsten Farms (Pty) Limited (Karsten or the company) is the parent company of the largest table grape exporter 

in South Africa. In addition to grapes, Karsten produces dates, apples, melons and citrus on a total 1 527 

hectares. The Karsten Group is also heavily involved in a project to produce substantial amounts of biodiesel 

from oil seeds, harvested from desert plants cultivated on large tracts of desert land. 

45 

http://www.engineeringnews.co.za/print‐version/r230m‐tablegrape‐empowerment‐deal‐announced‐2002‐11‐01 

‐ accessed on 22 September 2011. 

46 

http://www.karsten.co.za/framework/empowerment‐keboes‐farms.php ‐ accessed on 22 September 2011. 




September 2011. 



116 

December 2011 

While some shareholders will be employed on the new farm, many will continue to work on other 

Karsten Farm Units but will receive a dividend from the Keboes project 

ees at all levels: 

47 . The first phase of 270 

ha of newly planted vineyards with an output of approximately 3 700 tonnes of grapes is now 

under production at the farm, Raap en Skraap. This will be increased to 500 ha over the next four 

to five years with the planting of a further 130 ha at Raap en Skraap followed by 100 ha at 

Kanoneiland. This project will create 250 new permanent jobs as well as 920 seasonal jobs for 

seven months of the year. The Keboes Farm management integrates Karsten Farms’ holistic 

approach to the welfare and development of its employ 

• Technical skills training is provided in‐house and by external training companies. 

• Workers are encouraged to become actively involved in business issues. 

• Life‐skills training improves family relationships and social life as well as physical and 

mental health. 

• Each farm has a health centre. 

• Education is provided from crèche to secondary level as well as adult literacy classes. 

• Quality infrastructure is provided for housing, training and sports facilities. 

Keboes Fruit Farms is a participant in the Thandi Initiative, a project of the Capespan Foundation 

which co‐ordinates the social investment programs of the Capespan Group, the largest exporter of 

fresh fruit from South Africa. Produce from empowerment farms is sold under the Thandi brand, a 

Xhosa word that means ‘we bring love’. Thandi Initiative producers have the benefit of being 

linked in to Capespan Group’s established marketing and distribution network that works on 

behalf of its growers to secure the best price. The Thandi Initiative is developing a process in 

which, over a period of years, workers’ trusts will be able to increase their shareholding and 

eventually have the option of buying out the other shareholding groups to become sole owners of 

the farm company. Many of the government projects to hand over land to formerly 

disadvantaged groups have failed because the new owners initially lacked both commercial 

experience and access to capital and markets. Fruit production for export, in particular, is a very 

competitive market with extremely high quality standards and requires high capital investment. 

The empowerment farm concept is an alternative model of land redistribution that is contributing 

to the realisation of government targets. 

The Department of Agriculture has prioritised the following projects: 

a) Training of local communities in the ‘four‐door garden’ system, whereby families can grow 

fruit and vegetables throughout the year in four door‐sized vegetable patches, thereby 

alleviating hunger in areas worst affected by poverty. 

b) Expanding value‐chain by establishing agro‐processing centres and agro‐tourism projects. 

c) Improving the cost‐efficiency of farming by researching and developing creative land 

reform processes and more efficient fuel/energy and irrigation systems. 

d) Ensuring that the beneficiaries of land reform are adequately skilled to grow the right crops 

using appropriate methods and produce crops of a good quality (in the past, lucern and 

paprika community farms have produced very poor quality produce). 

e) Rooibos Tea Project in Nieuwoudtville has created 73 temporary jobs in construction and 

80 permanent jobs. In total 276 temporary jobs have been created since 2009. 

f) The vineyard development scheme, which aims to develop 700 ha of new vineyards before 

2014 for the production of grapes for processing into wine, raisins and juice, and is 

expected to create 202 job opportunities during the 2011/2012 financial year. 

47 http://www.fairtrade.org.uk/producers/grapes/keboes_fruit_farms_south_africa/default.aspx ‐ accessed on 25 






December 2011 

g) The Riemvasmaak Irrigation Development is expected to create 322 jobs over the next 

three years. 

h) Beef production and Heuningvlei Bulk Water Infrastructure development project in 

Magareng has an investment value of R196 million and is expected to create at least 215 

job opportunities in the next three years. 

i) Poultry development with emphasis on Warrenton Super Chicken is to create 50 job 


j) Increased vegetable production through intensive production units such as Tswaraganang 

Hydroponics Project in Frances Baard is anticipated to create 150 job opportunities in the 

next three years. 

k) Ostrich and poultry production in the Pixley ka Seme of approximately R5 million providing 

32 job opportunities. 

BOX 4 

SUMMARY OF KEY SOCIAL & HUMAN ASPECTS 

a) Create incentives and opportunities for commercial banks to extend their input into LED and 

to unlock benefits associated with banking charters more efficiently. 

b) Develop an empirical spatial premise and rational for the provision of basic household 

services, training and education facilities, health services, etc. throughout the province. 

c) Ensure access to affordable energy services. Distribute information on costs associated with 

different energy sources and the best options for different uses, e.g. heating, cooking and 

lighting. 

d) Ensure that new mines adopt a strategy that would ensure ongoing socio-economic 

development and environmental rehabilitation. 

e) Eradicate gaps (lack of co-operation and communication) between the different sectors active 

in the Northern Cape as well as between the communities. 

f) Explore models for public-private partnerships (e.g. the Karsten Women Trust). 

g) Facilitate education to eradicate the notion of living from hand to mouth. 

h) Formulate a strategy for promotion of entrepreneurship and associated development 


i) Legislative processes that stifle sustainable development should be identified and reviewed. 

j) Promote job creation in the green jobs industries (e.g. manufacturing of solar water heaters, 

maintenance of wind generators and solar energy infrastructure). 

k) Proved guidelines for formulation of strategies to sustain socio-economic development after 

the life-span of projects. 

l) Provide a spatial rationale for the restoration of traditional parameters of settlements as a 

basis for community revitalisation. 

m) Provide broad guidelines for improvement of subsidised housing – district and local 

municipalities must adopt such guidelines in their SDFs. These must be mandatory. 

n) Provide strategies for the enhancement of entrepreneurship and associated development 


o) Provide strategies to ensure that communities benefit meaningfully from larger-scale physical 

development (e.g. the Sustainable Development Initiative {SDI} model). 

117 








December 2011 

This section addresses the key aspects of the economy of the Northern Cape with specific reference to the: 

a) Economic sectors that are the drivers of the economy and the generator of the Financial (Monetary) Capital 

which plays a critical role in any economy, enabling the other types of capital to be owned and traded, for 

example, through shares, bonds or banknotes. 

b) Key issues to be addressed in order to ensure the ongoing growth and sustainability of the various economic 

sectors and the economy as a whole. 

NOTE: There are significant discrepancies between the estimates provided by the LED Strategy and the PGDS with 

regards to the importance percentages of the different economic sectors in the province. For the purpose of this 

document the figures and estimates provided by the LED Strategy are used. 

F.1 ECONOMIC SECTORS 

The Northern Cape economy has shown significant recovery since 2000/2001 when it had a 

negative economic growth rate of ‐1.5% (LED Strategy). The provincial economy reached a high of 

3.7% in 2003/2004 and remained the lowest of all provinces. The Northern Cape is also the 

smallest contributing province to South Agfrica’s economy (only 2% to South Africa GDP per region 

in 2007). The figure below illustrates the GDP per region from 2001 to 2009 of the Northern Cape 

and South Africa. 

Figure F.1: The Northern Cape growth rate of the GDP per region between 2001 and 2009 

(Source: PGDS). 

From figures provided by the LED Strategy the community, social and personal services sector is 

the biggest employer and industry in the province at 23.1%, followed by the agricultural sector 

(19.5%), wholesale and retail trade (15.4%), manufacturing (11.2%) and mining and financial 

118 






119 

December 2011 

services both at 9.1%. The tertiary sector provides 52.5% of all employment, the primary sector 

follows at 28.6% and the secondary sector is 19.0%. 

Table F.1: Employment by Economic Sector and Industry (Source: Community Survey, 2007 as 

cited in the LED Strategy). 

INDUSTRY PERCENTAGE OF EMPLOYMENT IN INDUSTRY 

PRIMARY SECTOR 

Agriculture and Hunting 19.5% 

Mining and Quarrying 9.1% 

SECONDARY SECTOR 

Manufacturing 11.2% 

Electricity, gas and water supply 1.0% 

Construction 6.8% 

TERTIARY SECTOR 

Wholesale and Retail Trade 15.4% 

Transport, Storage and Communication 4.8% 

Financial, Real Estate, Business Services 9.1% 

Community, Social and Personal Services 23.1% 

Table F.2 below illustrates that agriculture, the wholesale and retail trade, and transport and 

communication sector have a healthy growth rate. Although the mining industry forms 23 % of the 

total GDP for the province, it employs only 9.1 % of all employees in the province. The community 

services employ 23% of the total working population and forms the largest percentage (27.9%) of 

total GDP for the province. The construction industry is the only industry with a negative growth 

rate between 2001 and 2008. 

Table F.2: Northern Cape Sectoral Economic Trends (Source: LED Strategy). 

ECONOMIC SECTOR GDP 2008 

(R’000) 

% OF TOTAL 

GDP 

AVERAGE 

ANNUAL 

GROWTH 

RATE (2001‐ 

2008) 

EMPLOYMENT 

PER SECTOR 

(2007) 

% OF TOTAL 

EMPLOYMENT 

Agriculture 2 528 8.3 5.6 40 510 19.5 

Mining 7 038 23.0 3.1 18 976 9.1 

Manufacturing 2 471 8.1 1.9 23 264 11.2 

Electricity & Water 619 2.0 0.1 2 003 1.0 

Construction 818 2.7 ‐0.9 14 160 6.8 

Wholesale & Retail trade 2 802 9.2 6.0 32 047 15.4 

Transport & communication 2 921 9.6 5.6 10 070 4.8 

Finance services 2 809 9.2 4.2 18 932 9.1 

Community services 8.532 27.9 5.3 48 069 23.1 

TOTAL 30 539 100.0 4.1 208 030 100.0 

As stated previously, there are percentage discrepancies between the LED and PGDS pertaining to 

importance of the economic industry in the province. The PGDS states the following with regards 

to the most important industries in the province for 2009, namely: 

a) The mining sector is the cornerstone of the provincial economy and is responsible for 

almost a quarter (24.6%) of the provincial value addition. 

b) Finance, real estate and business services are the second highest contributing industry at 

approximately 13%. 






December 2011 

c) The wholesale, and retail trade, restaurant and general government which contribute 

approximately 11%. 

Table F.3: Key Economic Industries in the Northern Cape (Source: PGDS). 

INDUSTRY 

120 

CURRENT PRICES – PERCENTAGE CONTRIBUTION 

2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 

Primary Industries 34.6 33.3 32.1 30.4 31.6 33.4 35.5 33.5 

Agriculture 5.6 8.5 8.3 6.5 6.9 8.1 7.9 7.4 

Mining and Quarrying 28.9 24.8 23.9 23.8 24.7 25.3 27.6 26.1 

Secondary Industries 6.5 6.6 6.8 6.4 6.4 6 5.9 6.9 

Manufacturing 3.4 3.5 3.3 3.3 2.9 2.5 2.4 2.2 

Electricity and Water 1.9 2 2.2 1.9 2.1 2 1.9 2.8 

Construction 1.2 1.1 1.3 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.7 1.9 

Tertiary Industries 49.9 50.8 50.8 52.4 50.4 49.4 49.1 50.4 

Wholesale and retail trade, hotels and restaurant 9.1 10.5 10.7 10.6 11 10.8 11.2 9.9 

Transport and Communications 8.6 8.6 8.3 8.6 8.3 7.3 7.3 7.4 

Finance, real estate and business services 11.9 10.9 12.2 12.2 12.8 13.2 12.5 12.6 

Personal services 8 8.3 8.4 8.5 8 7.7 7 8.1 

General government services 12.2 12.5 11.1 12.6 10.3 10.4 11.2 12.3 

The PGDS states that from local production, 66% is consumed locally, 10% exported to other 

provinces while the remaining 2% gets consumed by other countries. In terms of imports as a 

percentage of total demand, 16.4% of Northern Cape total demand is imported. 

According to LED Strategy, the province has comparative advantages in the following four 

economic sectors in relation to the South African economy (in descending order): 

a) Mining. 

b) Agriculture. 

c) Community services. 

d) Transport and communication. 

Key aspects of the the primary economic sectors of the Northern Cape are summarised in the 

chapters below. 

F.1.1 MINING SECTOR 

The LED Strategy states that mining and quarrying is the most important economic sector in the 

Northern Cape, contributing 21.5% to the GGP in 2008, and the industry revolves mostly around 

the production of ores, minerals and semi‐precious stones (refer to Table F.4). The exceptional 

mineral wealth of the Northern Cape Province has ensured the importance, both nationally and 

internationally, of the province’s mining industry. All five district municipalities are affected by the 

mining industry and mining plays an important role in their economic development. 

The minerals economy of the Northern Cape is a hundred and fifty years old and the Northern 

Cape produced in 2008 approximately 37% of South Africa’s diamond output, 44% of its zinc, 70% 

of its silver, 84% of its iron‐ore, 93% of its lead and 99% if its manganese (PGDS). Prior to 1994, 

the economy of the Northern Cape was confined mainly to primary mining activities, in which 

diamond mining predominated. 






121 

December 2011 

According to the LED Strategy (2001) in 2007, the production and pricing of the most significant 

minerals in terms of the various possible opportunities and programs identified in the Northern 

Cape are indicated below (refer to Table F.4). 

Table F.4: Mineral Production and Pricing, 2007 (Source: LED Strategy). 

LOCAL SALES EXPORT SALES TOTAL SALES 

MINERAL TOTAL MASS VALUE UNIT MASS VALUE UNIT MASS VALUE 

PRODUCT 

SALES 

SALES 

Non 

14.02 m 

Alluvial 

Diamonds 

carats 

Alluvial R1.07 m 

diamonds carats 

Marine 0.155 m 

diamonds carats 

Silver 69 800 kg 3 700 kg R10.9 m R2 951 / 76 900 kg R244.1 m R2 916 / 80 500 kg R235 m 

kg 

kg 

Copper 117.1 kt 76.6 kt R4.0 b R52 583 / 37.3 kt R1.8 b R48 917 / 113.8 kt R5.8 b 

t 

t 

Iron ore 42 083 kt 12 407 kt R1.7 b R141 / t 29 725 kt R11.7 b R393 / t 42 132 kt R13.3 b 

Manganese 5 996 kt n/a R0.9 b n/a 3 681 kt R2.6 b R714 / t n/a R3.6 b 

Zinc 30.9 kt 30.1 kt R0.4 b R13 959 / 0.2 kt R7.0 m R44 065 / 30.2 kt R0.4 b 

t 

t 

Salt 411.5 

kt449.8 KT 

449.8 kt R0.1 b R227 / t 0 0 0 449.8 kt R0.1 b 

Natural Gas 1 234 kt 1 234 kt R1.7 b R1 335/t 0 0 0 1 243 kt R1.7 b 

It is important to note that the Northern Cape mining value chain is predominantly concentrated 

around exploration, shaft set‐up and mining. Processing does not take place in the province and 

therefore various value‐adding opportunities go lost (LED Strategy). The primary minerals are 

summarised below. 

a) Iron Ore: The Northern Cape produces more than 84% of South Africa’s iron ore. The 

province has two major iron belts, from Postmasburg to Hotazel, and one belt running 

through Sishen and Kathu. The Sishen‐Saldanha railway line takes ore to the coast. The 

following upgrades are currently underway with the iron ore mines in the province, namely 

(Northern Cape Business, 2011): 

• Sishen: Employing more than 9 000 people and with an open pit extending more 

than 12km, everything about Sishen mine is huge. Kumba intends applying new 

technologies to material that previously was dumped as waste, with the goal of 

extracting up to 13 million tons of usable iron ore. 

• Kolomela (formerly Sishen South): By early 2011 this large Kumba project was 45% 

complete and on course for completion in 2012. R3‐billion has already been spent 

with a further R4.8‐billion committed for the future. The aim is to mine nine million 

tons of iron ore per year by 2013. The project has a life of mine of 30 years and 

more than 700 houses will be built around the town of Postmasburg. 

• Khumani: Assmang is set to spend R5.5 billion on increasing production of iron ore 

at Khumani from 10 million tons per annum to 16 million tons per annum. 

b) Manganese: The Northern Cape has the world’s wealthiest manganese deposits and it is 

estimated that South Africa has approximately 80% of the world’s manganese reserves. 

The overwhelming majority of the world’s manganese comes from the Postmasburg and 

Kalahari regions of the Northern Cape. Most of manganese ore deposits are located in the 






December 2011 

John Taolo Gaetsewe district, and it contributed approximately 27% to the Northern Cape 

mining industry in 2007 (LED Strategy). 

Hotazel has extensive manganese reserves and some of the best quality in the world, and it 

recently opened a new manganese mine, Tshipi é Borwa. The Tshipi e Ntle Manganese 

Mining (Tshipi) inititiative, which is a joint venture between Pallinghurst Co‐Investors and a 

black empowerment company representing several groups called Ntsimbintle Mining, will 

spend R1.45‐billion on the project. Indications are that Tshipi can produce approximately 

2.2 million tons of ore per year, for approximately 60 years (Northern Cape Business, 

2011). 

The Kalagadi manganese project involves the construction of a manganese mine and a 

sister plant near Hotazel, and was initiated by Kalagadi Manganese Ltd, a company with 

women in many leadership positions. The Industrial Development Corporation (IDC) is a 

10% shareholder in this project by virtue of its investment of approximately R60‐million in 

start‐up costs. In 2010 the IDC announced a further injection of R2.3‐billion in the project, 

which will have total costs when complete of approximately R12‐billion. The production 

capacity at the mine will have to be three million tons a year to produce the projected 2.4 

million tons of sinter at the plant. Approximately 700 000 tons from the plant will be used 

to feed a new ferromanganese smelter complex to be built at the Coega Industrial 

Development Zone in the Eastern Cape. Work on the smelter is expected to begin in May 

2011 and is planned to produce 320 000 tons of high‐carbon ferromanganese per annum 

(Northern Cape Business, 2011). 

c) Copper: The largest copper mines are near Areachap north of Upington, and deposits also 

found in various locations in the Namaqua district, especially around Nababeeb and 

Aggeneys. 

d) Lead: The Namaqua District Municipality accounts for 93% of South Africa’s lead 

production with the Gamsberg mine being one of the world’s major producers of zinc. 

Furthermore, the Black Mountain mine near Aggeneys produces lead, copper, zinc and 

silver by mining various deposits in the area. 

e) Zinc: The Northern Cape is responsible for approximately 18% of South Africa’s total copper 

production, with the two most prominent mines in Nababeep and Aggeneys. The 

Carolusberg Mining Complex has copper reserves of 37.5 million tons, while the Nigramoep 

deposit has 15 million tons. Zinc is less abundant than the lead deposits, but the province 

is still responsible for approximately 43% of South Africa’s overall zinc production. Various 

untapped mineral deposits of zinc is located at Gamsberg and Aggeneys. 

f) Diamonds: In addition to the kimberlite pipes (i.e. Kimberley Big Hole) and frissures; river 

and coastal deposits are also present in the Northern Cape. Diamonds have been 

recovered along the Orange, Buffels, Spoeg, Horees, Groen, Doorn and Swart Rivers in the 

province, while coastal deposits have been found at the Orange River Mouth to Lamberts 

Bay. The most important alluvial diamond mining activities take place on a 250 km stretch 

of the Namaqualand coast. The concession areas are arranged in numbered 30 km wide 

coastal perpendicular strips. The following are the most important mines along the coast: 

• Koringnaas Complex between Micthells and Somnaas Bay. 

• The Buffels Island Complex near Kleinzee. 

• The Buffels Marine Complex situated at the mouth of the Buffels River. 

• The Alexander Bay area between Port Nolloth and the Orange River mouth. 

Alluvial diamond mining occurs in the Pixley ka Seme district along the banks of the Vaal 

River, and one of the most prominent mines are found at Saxendrift. South Africa’s 

second‐biggest diamond mine, Finsch, at Danielskuil (165k m west of Kimberley) produced 

122 






123 

December 2011 

approximately 2 334 000 carats of diamonds in 2007, and it producers more diamonds that 

most other areas in the province. 

There are approximately five diamond kimberlite pipes extensively mined around 

Kimberley, i.e. De Beers, Kimberley, Bultfontein, Dutoitspan and Wesselton. Only 

Bultfontein, Dutoitspan and Wesselton are currently in operation. The Messina mine 

comprises various mining leases and free holdings on various farms approximately 60 km 

west of Warrenton (LED Strategy). 

g) Limestome and Gypsum: Limestone and its derivative lime are important industrial 

minerals for the manufacture of Portland cement, as a flux for the production of pig iron 

and non‐ferrous metals, and thirdly in agriculture where it is used primarily as a fertiliser 

and to neutralise acid soils. Limestone is also used in water treatment and purification as 

well as sewage treatment. The Northern Cape is a major producer of cement and lime. 

The major limestone resource in the Northern Cape occurs in a 150 km long belt only a few 

kilometres wide, that extends along the western edge of the Ghaap Plateau from 

Griquatown in the south to Kuruman in the north. Within this belt, the strata dips gently to 

the west and the limestone is present in large lenses up to 10 km long and 200 m thick 

(Northern Cape Mineral Strategy, 2003). The Bushmanland area in Namaqua has some of 

richest gypsum deposits in South Africa, especially the mine near Van Wyk’s vlei. 

h) Other minerals and associated products: Various other minerals are also mined in the 

province such as Kieselguhr, Wollastonite, Beyllium, Flouorspar, Molybdenum, Uranium, 

Feldspar, Mica, and Tantalum, and however these deposits are small. Silver is also mined 

near Aggeneys. Small scale mining of Kieselguhr takes place at Kuruman and Olifantshoek, 

and apparently some 10 000 tons of Kieselguhr deposits occur in the western part of the 

John Taolo Gaetsewe district. Untapped Kieselguhr deposits occur near Springbok. Salt is 

extensively mined at Groot Witpan and Witpan, northwest of Upington. The Siyanda 

district has various untapped mineral deposits throughout the district. 

i) Semi‐precious stones: Semi precious stones such as Jasper and Suglite are mined at 

Kuruman and Hotazel. Blue tiger eye, Yellow tiger eye, Jasper and Rose quartz are 

mined at various locations in the Pixley ka Seme district. 

Table F.5: Key mining concerns per district municipality of the Northern Cape (Source: PGDS). 

DISTRICT 

MINING CONCERNS 

MUNICIPALITY 

Johan Taolo a) Lack of beneficiation from mining operation and it has huge impact on local economic 

Gaetsewe development. 

b) Big mining companies make it difficult for smaller mining operations to function. 

c) Expansion of iron ore mining can implicate logistical issues for the mining sector in the 

province. 

d) The proposed development of iron ore and managenese smelters are extremely capital‐ 

intensive and the power needed for such an operation might not be feasible. 

Namaqua a) There is a severe lack of mining infrastructure, expect for the Black Mountain and Gamsberg 

mining activities. 

b) Certain mineral deposits are of low grade or low density and are not economically viable to 

mine. 

c) Transport of raw materials can be a problem due to the remote locations of mines and the 

distance to processing plants. 

d) The entry market for certain commodities are risky. 

e) Issuing of mining permits can be a long and bureaucratic process. 

f) Illegal mining occurs in certain parts of the district. 

g) Lack of capital. 

h) There is no beneficiation from mining in certain areas of the district. 






December 2011 

Pixley ka Seme a) Processing of mining rights and permits can be a bureaucratic process. 

b) There is an extensive black market for semi‐precious stones. 

c) Processing of semi‐precious stones (especially tiger’s eye) is not done in the district or 

province. 

Siyanda a) Beneficiation from major export commodities in the district is slow. 

b) Gravel roads to slat mines are in a bad shape with lack of funding for maintenance. 

c) Issuing of mining permits is problematic. 

Frances Baard a) Logistical problems between mines and the market. 

b) Illegal diamond mining and trading. 

c) Lack of capital. 

d) Mining sector decline. 

e) Mining permit constraints. 

f) Lack of well‐structured and practical strategies for development through mining. 

g) Lack of beneficiation in the mining sector. 

Map F.1: Location of mining operation concentrations in the province in 2011 (Source: DRDLR). 

F.1.2 AGRICULTURE AND AGRO‐PROCESSING SECTOR 

The agricultural sector contributed 5.8% to the Northern Cape GDP per region in 2007 which was 

approximately R1.3 billion, and it employs approximately 19.5% of the total formally employed 

individuals (LED Strategy). 

Commercial agriculture production in the Northern Cape is the dominant land‐use activity. 

However much of the province is classified as being semi arid to arid and this means that the vast 

majority what is classed as farmland is only suitable for extensive livestock production. There are 

exceptions, however, notably along the Orange and Vaal Rivers, where intensive irrigated 

124 




December 2011 

agriculture is practised and a range of high‐value crops is produced. The Northern Cape main 

agricultural produce is as follows (LED Strategy): 

a) High‐value horticultural products such as table grapes, sultanas and wine grapes, as well as 

dates, nuts, cotton, fodder, and cereal crops are grown along the Orange River. 

b) The area watered by the Vaalharts irrigation scheme, centred around towns of Hartswater 

and Jan Kempdorp, produces large quantities of wheat, fruit, groudnuts, maize and cotton. 

c) In the vicinity of Douglas, at the confluence of the Vaal and Orange Rivers, vegetables and 

cereal crops predominate 

d) The province is also known for its production of wool, mohair, karakul, Karoo lamb, ostrich 

meat and venison. 

e) The Northern Cape is also a major exporter of dried fruit, table grapes, and meat, all of 

which command premium prices in international markets and make a siginifcant 

contribution to South Africa’s foreign exchange earnings. 

According to Makiti Guides and Tours (2008), approximately 2% of the province is used for crop 

farming, mainly under irrigation – Orange River Valley and Vaalharts Irrigation Scheme. 

Approximately 96% of the land is used for stock farming, including beef cattle and sheep or goats, 

as well as game farming. 

The Northern Cape is enjoying a tremendous growth in value‐added activities, including game‐ 

farming. Food production and processing for the local and export market is also growing 

significantly. The economy of a large part of the Northern Cape, the interior Karoo, depends on 

sheep‐farming, while the kakakul‐pelt industry is one of the most important in the Gordonia 

district of Upington. The province has fertile agricultural land, and in the Orange Valley, especially 

at Upinton, Kakamas and Keimoes, grapes and fruits are cultivated intensively. Wheat, fruit, 

peanuts, maize and cotton are produced at the Vaalharts Irrigation Scheme near Warrenton 48 . 

Agriculture’s contribution to regional gross domestic product (RGDP) was 8% in 2008, but the 

effects of the global economic crisis have served to reduce this to some extent. With a large 

number of people employed in the sector and the number of people dependent on subsistence 

agriculture, this presented a major challenge, prompting the provincial government to intervene 

to help poor rural people. The primary agricultural enterprises of the Northern Cape include the 

following: 

a) Livestock: The Northern Cape contributes to 3% of national cattle (beef) numbers, 25% of 

national sheep numbers, 8% of national goat numbers and 2% of national pig numbers, and 

it shows the importance of livestock farming in the Northern Cape. 

b) Wine: The Northern Cape’s Orange River wine region accounts for 25.6% of South Africa’s 

Colombard vines and 10% of Chenin Blanc. According to SA Wine Industry Statistics 

(SAWIS), the Orange River region has 4.96% of the total hectares of grapes in South Africa, 

and 3.49% of the total number of vines. Grapes are cultivated on a total of 794 farms along 

the Orange River, comprising a total of 17 200 hectares. 

c) Cotton: Of South Africa’s 97 148 bales of cotton (200kg each) produced in 2010/11, the 

Northern Cape was responsible for 43 246 bales. This represented a 153% rise over the 

previous season’s yields, according to Cotton SA. With 7 324 hectares under irrigation, the 

province produces excellent yields. The biggest area for cotton cultivation is the Vaalharts 

region. 

48 

http://www.southafrica.info/about/geography/northern‐cape.htm ‐accessed on 12 August 2011. 



125 




December 2011 

d) Rooibos Tea: The volume of tea cultivated by the Nieuwoudtville project supported by the 

Illima‐Letsema program has risen from 70 tons to more than 300 tons. The R54‐million 

tea‐making factory in the town was completed in early 2011, adding 217 jobs to the 40 

already created by the project. 

e) Fruit: A host of vine‐fruit products are cultivated in the Northern Cape, including sundried 

Thompson seedless raisins, dipped Orange River sultanas, golden sultanas, muscat raisins, 

and monuca raisins. Approximately 80% of vine fruit grown in South Africa is exported, 

primarily to Europe but also to Japan, Taiwan, Korea, Canada and the USA. The province 

has more than 16 500 vines on 9 486 hectares and produces 44% of South Africa’s table 

grapes. The provincial government intends boosting local economic development through 

various projects. These include: 

(i) Citrus production: an experienced operator is sought to partner with emerging 

farmers in the Riemvasmaak region. 

(ii) Pomegranate, black fig and citrus farming: an experienced partner is needed to 

work with women farmers in the Onseepkans region. 

(iii) Fruit for export: as part of the Majeakgoro project in Hartswater 70 % of the sultana 

grapes grown in the Lower Orange River Region are used for vine‐fruit products. 

There are some 1 250 sultana‐grape growers in the province producing three 

sultana‐type grapes which rank among the best in the world: the Sultana Clone H5; 

a new hybrid called Merbein Seedless, which has proved resistant to splitting after 

rain; and the most popular type, the 143B. 

f) New products: A number of supplementary products are being cultivated or harvested 

from natural stocks, including: 

(i) Known in Namaqualand as kougoed, and more formally as Sceletium tortuosum, the 

succulent plant has been licensed by the Biodiversity Act and will be developed and 

sold as Zembrin by local company HGH Pharmaceuticals and US company PL 

Thomas. 

(ii) The Northern Cape has several plants that have the potential to produce 

commercial products. The Council for Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR) has 

developed a diet drug from the plant Hoodia (Ghaap). 

(iii) Rose geranium essential oils are cultivated at Onseepkans, where the CSIR and the 

National Department of Science and Technology (DST) have established an essential 

oils plant. Good sunlight, well‐drained soils and irrigation water from the Orange 

River make the cultivation of oils an attractive option in the chosen area. It is a 

market with huge potential, with the industry growing by nearly 10% per annum. 

F.1.3 FISHING AND MARICULTURE SECTOR 

The Northern Cape coast is considered one of the richest marine ecosystems in the world with the 

waters being unpolluted, nutrient‐rich and abundant in marine life. Port Nolloth is the hub of the 

fishing industry on this stretch of the west coast. A number of changes has happened the last 

number of years with increased quotes been awarded to land and process fish in the Northern 

Cape. Stricter enforcement of quota rules, as from 1998, means that at least 65% of the catch, 

which totals approximately 7 085 tons (mainly hake), are landed in the Northern Cape. This opens 

up the possibility for more fish processing plants around the expanded harbour at Port Nolloth. A 

growing mariculture industry with, among others, abalone being farmed for export to the Far East, 

is being established in the region 49 . 

49 

http://www.southafrica.info/business/investing/opportunities/ncape.htm ‐ accessed on 15 August 2011. 



126 




15 August 2011. 



127 

December 2011 

The PGDS states that in the Northern Cape, aquaculture development as a sector is a way of 

diversifying agriculture in the province. The potential of value addition activities in the sector is 

very high. The irrigation agriculture and storage dams on farms offer an opportunity for farmers 

to diversify their operations to incorporate aquaculture. Fish products are not just consumed by 

humans, but processed and incorporated into other products such as animal feed, fertilsers, etc. 

For example fish can be processed by smoking, canning, filleting and salting. 

F.1.3.1 AQUACULTURE AND MARICULTURE 

In the 1980s, aquaculture was in its infancy, globally. Today, it accounts for close to 50 million 

tons annually, making up nearly half of all fish products consumed. Of this, Africa, has a 1 % 

market share and South Africa accounts for approximately 1 % of the African slice. In Chile, 

aquaculture, created over 40 000 new direct and indirect jobs over the past 15 years. Although 

Chile’s conditions are not directly similar to South Africa’s, their regulatory environment, together 

with their market, marine science (and thus sustainability) and engineering experiences hold 

lessons for South Africa (TIPS, 2008) 50 . Mariculture (i.e. growing and farming of marine 

organisms) 51 is a global growth industry and certain areas along the Namaqualand coast have 

great potential for this. Mariculture development in the Northern Cape has therefore been and 

will continue to be predominantly shore based and although it is a comparatively new industry it is 

one with tremendous growth potential, particularly when it involves the cultivation of high value 

species for export. Recent advances in technology development and the penetration of certain 

overseas niche markets has effectively kick‐started the South African mariculture industry 52 . 

F.1.3.2 CURRENT INITIATIVES 

According to Northern Cape Business 53 the following initiatives have taken place in the Northern 

Cape regarding mariculture, namely: 

a) Kleinzee is already the site of an abalone farm, the first phase of which will produce 100 

tons per annum. Seven seaweed‐production dams for feeding, water purification and 

heating have been built to support the project. It is calculated that approximately 182 jobs 

will be created. 

b) A joint venture by the National Department of Science and Technology, the Fishing and 

Mariculture Development Agency (FAMDA) and HIK Abalone is running an abalone project 

in Hondeklip Bay with the intention of producing 120 tons of abalone for sale. 

c) The 2 000 hectares of kelp beds on the Northern Cape coastline offers an attractive 

investment proposition since there is a growing domestic and international demand for 

kelp. 

50 TIPS, 2008: Potential for a South African Aquaculture Industry on the Northern Cape’s Namaqualand Coast. 

Second Economic Strategy: Addressing inequality and economic management. Feike Natural Resource 

Management Advisors. September 2008. 

51 Mariculture was recognised for the first time in law by the Marine Living Resources Act 18 of 1998. Under the 

“objectives and principles” informing the Act, it is stated that the Minister shall have regard for the ‘need to 

utilise marine living resources to achieve economic growth, human resource development, capacity building 

within the fisheries and mariculture branches, employment creation and a sound ecological balance consistent 

with the development objectives of the national government’. 

52 http://www.gone‐fishing.co.za/category/uncategorized/page/2/ ‐ accessed on 16 September 2011. 

53 http://www.northerncapebusiness.co.za/pls/cms/ti_secout.secout_prov?p_sid=41&p_site_id=164 – accessed on 




activities.pdf 



128 

December 2011 

d) The Northern Cape Provincial Government has invested R20 million in a mariculture park at 

Port Nolloth. Students from Hondeklip Bay and Port Nolloth were enrolled at the 

University of Stellenbosch for relevant certificate courses and the John Ovenstone factory 

is now the site of small‐scale hatcheries for abalone and oysters. Premier Fishing has a 

lobster factory in Port Nolloth. 

F.1.4 ENERGY SECTOR 

Winkler (2005) 54 states that energy is critical to virtually every aspect of the economic and social 

development of South Africa. Depending on the way it is produced, transported and used, 

however, it can contribute to both local environmental degradation, such as air pollution, and 

global environmental problems, principally climate change. Providing affordable, adequate, and 

reliable modern energy supplies to most South Africans remains a major challenge, even though 

access to electricity has increased from one‐third to two‐thirds of the population since 1994. 

Current methods of producing and using energy have environmental and health effects that 

increasingly endanger welfare, and the key challenge is to move to cleaner energy supply and more 

efficient use, while continuing to extend affordable access to modern energy services, in particular 

for poor rural and urban communities. 

South Africa’s energy economy is dominated by coal, that commodity accounting for 

approximately 75% of primary energy production. Within the primary energy framework, coal 

provides for 95% of electricity generation. Moreover, coal and gas provide for 35% of liquid fuel 

requirements courtesy of the synthetic fuel industries such as SASOL and PetroSA 55 . The South 

African economy produces and uses a large amount of energy, is highly energy‐intensive, and is 

heavily dominated by the extraction of raw materials and primary processing. The energy sector 

contributes approximately 15% to the Gross Domestic Product, and employs approximately 250 

000 people. Energy provision and use are crucial to South Africa’s overall development, especially 

given the desire to attract foreign investment in the industrial sector. The demand for energy is 

expected to grow, with the energy sector remaining of central importance to the country’s 

economic growth. 

With an increasing demand in energy predicted and growing environmental concerns about fossil 

fuel based energy systems, the development of large‐scale renewable energy supply schemes is 

strategically important for increasing the diversity of domestic energy supplies and avoiding 

energy imports while minimizing the environmental impacts. The major energy challenges are 

securing energy supply to meet growing demand, providing everybody with access to energy 

services and tackling the causes and impacts of climate change (PGDS). 

A number of feasibility studies have been conducted in the Northern Cape, suggested by many as 

being the ideal location for various forms of alternative energy. In 2010 the Industrial 

Development Corporation spent R33‐million on investigating photo‐voltaic, thermal, solar and 

wind power. 

54 

Winkler, H. 2005: Renewable energy policy in South Africa: policy options for renewable electricity. Energy 

Policy. Elsevier. 

55 

http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/sdissues/energy/op/ccs egm/presentations papers/surridge paper sa 






129 

December 2011 

Eskom generates approximately 95% of the electricity used in South Africa and approximately 45% 

of the electricity used elsewhere in Africa. Eskom, as a state‐owned enterprise, has a greater role 

to play than merely the supply of electricity. Eskom generates, transmits and distributes electricity 

to industrial, mining, commercial, agricultural and residential customers and redistributors 

(Northern Cape Business, 2011). Eskom with a generating capacity of 35 200 MW from 20 power 

stations is one of the largest utilities in the world. Power generation is primarily coal‐fired, but 

also includes a nuclear power station at Koeberg in the Western Cape, two gas turbine facilities, 

two conventional hydroelectric plants and two hydroelectric pumped‐storage stations (LED 

Strategy). 

Electricity cannot be stored in large quantities and generally must be used as it is generated. 

Therefore, electricity is generated in accordance with supply‐demand requirements. The demand 

for electricity in South Africa has been growing at approximately 3% per annum. This growing 

demand, fueled by increasing economic growth and social development within Southern Africa, is 

placing increasing pressure on South Africa’s existing power generation capacity. Coupled with 

this, is the growing awareness of environmental impact, climate change and the need for 

sustainable development. 

Eskom’s only current power station in the Northern Cape includes one of two conventional hydro‐ 

stations on the Orange River, the Vanderkloof power station. The Vanderkloof power station is 

located at Petrusville and has 240 MW installed capacity comprising two 120 MW units. In order 

to reinforce the existing transmission network and to ensure a reliable electricity supply in the 

Northern Cape, Eskom is currently proposing the construction of a 400 kV transmission power line 

from Ferrum Substation (near Kathu/Sishen) to Garona Substation (near Groblershoop). The total 

length of the power line is approximately 155 km. According to the LED Strategy, the Sol Plaaitjie 

and //Khara Hais local municipalities had the highest electricity usage in 2005, and it is evident 

that the urban areas have higher access to electricity in comparison to rural areas in the province. 

There is currently a national electricity supply shortage and the country is now in a position where 

it needs to commission additional plants urgently. As a result, renewable energy projects are 

considered to be high priority (LED Strategy). 

Low‐income households rely on wood, coal and paraffin as energy sources. These energy sources 

contribute to high levels of indoor pollution. Of serious concern are particulates, carbon 

monoxide, respiratory illness, and fires. Quantified impacts of the external cost of household fuels 

reveal that greater damages are from candles, paraffin and the use of wood as fuel. 

A key challenge which the Northern Cape Provincial and Local government must overcome is 

securing access to reliable, sustainable and affordable energy services to realize sustainable 

economic growth and development. Innovation and new energy technologies are therefore 

essential to make progress on these issues, as they also create jobs and income and therefore 

alleviate poverty. The goals of securing supply, providing energy services, tackling climate change, 

avoiding air pollution and reaching sustainable development in the province offer both 

opportunities and synergies which require joint planning between local and provincial government 

as well as the private sector (PGDS). 

The PGDS states that renewable energy is an initiative to diversify the economy and thereby 

promote the green economy in the province. It is therefore vital to conceptualise the term green 

economy so as to fully understand the economic parameters in which renewable energy exists. 

Greening the economy is characterized by substantially increased investments in economic sectors 






130 

December 2011 

that build on and enhance the earth’s natural capital or reduce ecological scarcities and 

environmental risks. These investments are driven by or supported by national policy reforms and 

the development of international policy and market infrastructure. 

The White Paper on Renewable Energy (2003) has set a target of 10 000 GWh of energy to be 

produced from renewable energy sources (mainly biomass, wind, solar, and small‐scale hydro) by 

2013. Achieving the target will: 

a) Add approximately 1.667 MW new renewable energy capacity with a net impact on GDP as 

high as R1.071 billion a year. 

b) Create additional government revenue of R299 million. 

c) Stimulate additional income that will flow to low‐income households by as much as R128 

million, creating just over 20 000 new jobs. 

d) Contribute to water savings of 16.5 million kilolitres which translates into a R26.6 million 

saving. 

F.1.4.1 SOLAR ENERGY 

As stated in Chapter C.1 the average daily solar radiation in South Africa varies between 4.5 and 

6.5 kWh/m 2 with the Northern Cape’s radiation between 8.501 and 9.500 kWh/m 2 . There are two 

main technologies for producing electricity from solar radiation, namely concentrating solar power 

(CSP) 56 , also known as solar thermal energy, and solar photovoltaics (PV) 57 . The total area of high 

radiation in South Africa amounts to approximately 194 000 km 2 and it includes the Northern 

Cape. If the electricity production per km 2 of mirror surface in a solar thermal power station is 

30.2 MW and only 1 % of the area of high radiation is available for solar power generation, then 

generation potential is already approximately 64 GW. A mere 1.25 % of the area of high radiation 

could thus meet projected South African electricity demand in 2025 (80 GW). This would, 

however, require large investments in transmission lines from the areas of high radiation to the 

main electricity consumer centres (Pegels, 2009) 58 . 

According to the Northern Cape Business (2011), the competitive advantages of the Northern 

Cape for solar power are also the following: 

• Relative closeness to the national power grid compared to other areas with comparable 

sunshine. 

• Water from the Orange River. 

• Access to two airports. 

• Good major roads. 

• A flat landscape. 

The implementation of large CSP plants has been proposed as one of the main contributors to 

greenhouse gas emission reductions in South Africa. Various solar parks and CSP plants have been 

proposed in the Northern Cape, including 59 : 

56 

CSP technology uses mirrors (called heliostats) to concentrate the thermal energy of the sun and heat a transfer 

fluid (i.e. molten salt). The heat energy is then used to produce steam, with which electricity is generated in 

conventional turbines. 

57 

Photovoltaic panels normally use silicon to convert the solar radiation directly into electricity. 

58 

Pegels, A. 2009: Prospects for Renewable Energy in South Africa: Mobilising the private sector. DIE. (Discussion 

Paper, 23/2009). 

59 

http://www.northerncapebusiness.co.za/special‐features/941417.htm ‐ accessed on 15 September 2011. 




on 20 September 2011. 



131 

December 2011 

a) A 100 MW Concentrated Solar Power (CSP) which will be constructed by ESCOM near 

Upington (//Khara Hais SDF, 2009). 

b) Mining companies in the Northern Cape are looking to CSP plants to provide power for 

their operations. Engineering company Group Five announced in 2011 that they were 

investigating the construction of a 150 MW plant near Kathu, the area where billions of 

Rands are being spent to extract more iron ore for export to China. 

c) The Industrial Development Corporation is supporting a number of projects in the 

province. These include a 100 MW plant conceived by Abengoa Solar, a Spanish company 

with a global presence, and a Solafrica scheme to spend more than R3 billion on a CSP 

plant at Groblershoop. 

d) Chinese investors are targeting De Aar as the site of other solar projects. 

F.1.4.2 WIND ENERGY 

The PGDS states that there is considerable potential for wind energy sources in the Northern 

Cape. In fact, wind power potential is good along the entire coast of South Africa, and especially 

along the West Coast of the Northern Cape. As stated in Chapter C.1 good wind power potential 

exists along the entire Namaqualand coast and in certain parts of the interior of the province. 

The upper limit of wind energy available to be captured in South Africa is estimated at 3 GW. 

Taking a conservative estimate of 30% conversion efficiency and 25% capacity factor, it is 

estimated that wind power could supply at least 1% of South Africa’s projected electricity 

requirements (19 800 GWh) in 2002. This excludes the offshore wind energy potential which 

should also be assessed (White Paper of Renewable Energy, 2003). 

According to Northern Cape Business (2011) a number of wind energy projects are poised to take 

off. Some projects are anticipated to start soon at 60 : 

a) Witberg and in the Roggeveld near Sutherland (G7 Renewable Energies). 

b) Sutherland and Victoria West (Mainstream Renewable Power SA). 

c) De Aar (Mulilo Renewable Energy with China Guodian Corporation). 

d) Namaqualand (De Beers, with ESKOM and other companies). 

F.1.5 TOURISM 

The Northern Cape tourism industry experienced a slight growth over the past five years, reaching 

2.9% in 2007. The tourism sector in the Northern Cape is estimated to contribute 6% to provincial 

GGP. The Northern Cape has an average annual growth of 17% in national visitors and 25% annual 

growth in international visitors (LED Strategy). Other tourism figures for the Northern Cape 

include: 

• In terms of tourism revenue, the Northern Cape Province captured a mere 0.7% of South 

Africa’s total tourism revenue in 2008, which was a 0.4% decline from 2007. 

• In comparison with the other provinces, the Northern Cape captured the least significant 

portion of bed nights spend in South Africa at 0.9%, or approximately 684 000. This was a 

0.5% decrease from 2007. 

60 http://www.northerncapebusiness.co.za/pls/cms/ti_secout.secout_prov?p_sid=123&p_site_id=164 – accessed 






December 2011 

• In terms of total foreign visitors, 1.3% visited the Northern Cape in 2008, which was a 1.2% 

decline from 2.5% in 2007. The Northern Cape consequently received the least significant 

number of foreign tourists. 

The Northern Cape is a unique part of South Africa that has a lot on offer for the tourist. Tourist 

destinations abound in the Northern Cape, and attract a large number of local and international 

visitors. Tourist attractions range from nature and wildlife conservation destinations, natural 

wonders, historic sites, festivals, cultural sites, stars gazing, adventure tourism, agricultural 

tourism, ecotourism, game farms, hunting areas, etc. 

Although the tourism offering is already well developed and there has been considerable 

investment in infrastructure in recent years, the potential for Northern Cape to capture more of 

the domestic and international tourism market is immense. According to the 15‐year review of 

the Northern Cape published in March 2009, tourist numbers into the province have shown a 

steady rise over the last five years, with the biggest percentage increase occurring in the third 

quarter of 2006, namely 4.1%. Bed nights sold decreased in more recent times due to the global 

recession, but the overall picture for tourism in the Northern Cape looks good. The sector’s direct 

contribution to provincial gross domestic product (PGDP) is about 6%. 

According to the World Tourism Organisation (UNWTO), tourism is ‘number one in the 

international services trade’ counting for 40 % of global trade in services and 6 % of total world 

trade 61 . It is important to emphasise the following aspects of the tourism industry (Ferguson, 

2007) 62 : 

a) The tourism industry directly provides approximately 3 % of the global employment, or 192 

million jobs – equivalent to one in every twelve jobs in the formal sector. The International 

Labour Organisation (ILO) predicts that this share is likely to rise to 251.6 million jobs by 

2010, or one in every eleven formal sector jobs. 

b) Tourism also has an indirect impact beyond employment through tourism‐related goods 

and services, air travel and global consumption patterns. The relevance of tourism for 

61 Over the past six decades, tourism has experienced continued growth and diversification to become one of the 

largest and fastest growing economic sectors in the world. Tourism has become one the major international 

trade categories. Today, the export income generated by international tourism ranks fourth after fuels, 

chemicals and automotive products. For many developing countries, it is one of the main income sources and 

the number one category, creating much needed employment and opportunities for development. The 

following key figures illustrate the growth of the global tourism industry: 

a) From 1950 to 2007, international tourist arrivals grew from 25 million to 903 million (up 6.6% on 2006). 

b) The overall export income generated by these arrivals (international tourism receipts and passengers 

transport) grew at a similar pace, outgrowing the world economy, exceeding US$ 1 trillion in 2007, or almost 

US$ 3 billion a day. 

c) Between 1995 and 2007 growth averaged over 4% a year, in spite of the stagnation between 2001 and 2003 

due to terrorism, SARS and the economic downturn. 

d) By 2010, international arrivals are expected to reach 1 billion, and 1.6 billion by 2020. 

e) In 2007, just over half of all international tourist arrivals were motivated by leisure, recreation and holidays 

(51%) – a total of 458 million. Business travel accounted for some 15% (138 million), and 27% represented 

travel for other purposes, such as visiting friend and relatives, religious seasons/pilgrimages, health 

treatment, etc. (240 million). The purpose of visit for the remaining 7% of arrivals was not specified. 

f) The African continent was one of the best performers in 2007, with a growth of 7% to 44 million arrivals. The 

region confirmed its good momentum averaging 7% growth a year since 2000. International tourism receipts 

increased by 8% (in real terms) and reached US$ 28 billion (UNWTO, 2008: Tourism Highlights 2008 – 

www.unwto.org). 

62 Ferguson L 2007: The United Nations World Tourism Organisation (Abstract). New Political Economy. 12(4). 

132 




December 2011 

global political economy can no longer be ignored by analysts wishing to account for 

changing global patterns in poverty and inequality. Despite this, with a handful of 

exceptions, tourism as a significant feature of contemporary global political economy has 

thus attracted little attention in the field of international political economy. The United 

Nations World Tourism Organisation is an institution that promotes the spread of the 

tourism industry across the globe. Its role can be understood in a number of ways: 

(i) As a campaigning organisation for the tourism industry; 

(ii) As a donor for tourism development projects – important for the Biosphere 

Reserve; and 

(iii) As a primary source of research and statistics on global tourism. 

According to the World Travel and Tourism Council (2011) 63 that the direct contribution of Travel 

and Tourism to South Africa’s GDP is expected to be R143.5 billion (5% of the total GDP) in 2011, 

and is expected to increase by 5% per annum till 2021. Furthermore, the total contribution of 

Travel and Tourism economy is estimated to have employed 1, 334 000 people or 10.1% of the 

country’s formal workforce. It is also estimated that in 2011, tourism is to generate 594 000 jobs 

(4.5% of total employment). This includes employment by hotels, travel agents, airlines and other 

passenger transportation services (excluding commuter services). 

The PGDS states that tourism is one of the key sectors with the capacity to ‘grow, transform and 

diversify the provincial economy’. According to the PGDS, the vision for tourism is underpinned by 

a number of broad, essential and specific drivers. The ‘broad drivers’ consider the ‘big picture’ 

focusing on tourism’s contribution to a larger development purpose and include: 

• Contributing to overall economic growth in the Northern Cape and South Africa. 

• Working towards social upliftment and poverty alleviation through facilitating job creation. 

• Striving for more equitable ownership and participation in tourism through transformation. 

The essential drivers of the tourism sector in the Northern Cape and relate to aspects such as: 

a) Increasing visitor numbers, visitors spend and length of stay. 

b) Facilitating greater private sector investment in tourism product and small enterprise 

development. 

c) Facilitating responsible development of tourism that is commercially viable, environmental 

conscious and culturally sensitive. 

d) Branding and marketing of the Northern Cape. 

The Northern Cape has a comparative economic advantage in the form of a defined type of 

tourism vested in the following: 

Eco‐tourism opportunities 

(i) Unique sectoral or nature‐based routes. 

(ii) National parks, nature reserves and game reserves. 

(iii) Natural and cultural manifestations. 

(iv) Festivals and cultural events. 

F.1.6 SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 

The Northern Cape holds a significant comparative economic advantage in a number of 

enterprises in the science and technology sector. These include the following: 

63 

World Travel and Tourism Council, 2011: South Africa: Travel and Tourism Economic Impact. www.wttc.org 



133 




F.1.6.1 SOUTHERN AFRICAN LARGE TELESCOPE (SALT) 



134 

December 2011 

Sutherland is home to the Southern African Large Telescope (SALT) which has a hexagonal mirror 

array that measures 11m across. This is the largest facility of its type in the southern hemisphere 

and one of the top 10 facilities in the world. SALT is an international collaboration that includes 

scientists and academics in Germany, India, Poland, the UK and the USA. It allows astronomers to 

examine the scale and age of the universe, the life and death of stars and the earliest galaxies. 

The site was established in the early 1970s at an altitude of 1 759m and the night skies are among 

the world’s clearest and darkest. Furthermore, the weather conditions are good and stable which 

enhances its viewing opportunities (Northern Cape Business 2011/2012). The SALT facility is 

operated under contract to the South African Astronomical Observatory (SAAO). 

According to the LED Strategy, this technological breakthrough can produce significant new 

tourism opportunities in the Namaqua district and the province as a whole. These opportunities 

include star‐gazing tours, research opportunities, etc. Furthermore, the value of SALT to the 

disciplines of astronomy and astrophysics is immense and could ensure a constant stream of 

international scientists, visitors, and travellers. 

F.1.6.2 SQUARE KILOMETRE ARRAY (SKA) 

Currently, South Africa is bidding against Australia to host a R14.5 billion radio telescope on a huge 

site near Carnarvon in the Pixely ka Seme District. The Square Kilometre Array (SKA) telescope will 

be world’s most sophisticated telescope and the decision about whether this new telescope will 

be located in the Northern Cape is to be taken in 2012. The size and scope of the project means 

that winning the bid will have significant economic implications for the province. The speed of the 

computers that will operate at SKA will be extremely fast – SKA is expected to collect more data in 

one week than humankind has collected in its entire history, and mankind will have its first clear 

pictures of what the universe looked like 13.7 billion years ago (Northern Cape Business 

2011/2012). 

In 2007, the Karoo Radio Astronomy Reserve was established under the Astronomy Geographic 

Act 21 of 2007. This world‐leading piece of South African legislation designed to preserve the 

scientific integrity of the reserve. The Act ensures the preservation and protection of areas within 

South Africa that are uniquely suited to ground‐based astronomy. An area of 12.5 million hectares 

around the proposed core of SKA will be protected as a radio‐astronomy reserve with strict 

regulations controlling the generation and transmission of interfering radio signals in the reserve 

and the area around it (refer to Map F.2 below). 

The intention is to locate the SKA core near Carnarvon with outlying stations in Botswana, Ghana, 

Kenya, Madagascar, Mauritius, Mozambique, Namibia and Zambia. Added together, the combined 

collecting area of these antennas will be roughly one square kilometre. The antennas would be 

connected via a super‐fast data communications network to an extremely large and powerful 

computer in the Northern Cape, and the telescope would be controlled and operated remotely 

from Cape Town, where the operations and science centre would be located. The SKA will be one 

of the largest scientific research facilities in the world and, if awarded to South Africa, would 




http://www.ska.ac.za/download/fact_sheet_skasite_2011.pdf 


135 


December 2011 

consolidate the southern African region as a major international hub for astronomy and cutting‐ 

edge technology 64 . 

Map F.2: Astronomy Reserve in the Northern Cape with the core site of SKA (Source: SKA Africa, 

www.ska.ac.za) 

The location of the candidate core site in the Karoo was chosen because of the following attributes 

(SKA Africa Brochure, 2011) 65 : 

a) The radio frequency interference (RFI) environment is intrinsically quiet because of the 

remoteness of the site and the shielding effect of the flat‐topped hills surrounding the 

area. 

b) The area is far from centres of economic activity and has a very low and decreasing rural 

population. 

c) The climate is benign with no extreme weather conditions (e.g. high winds or extreme 

diurnal temperature variations). 

d) The site is at a 1 000 metre elevation with a flat topography. 

e) The water vapour content in the troposphere is low. 

f) Despite being remote, the area is well‐served with essential infrastructure, including all‐ 

weather roads and national grid electrical power, and is easily accessible from major 

settlements. 

g) Required land, labour and services available and very affordable. 

64 http://www.dst.gov.za/other/ska ‐ accessed on 15 September 2011. 

65 SKA Africa Brochure, 2011: An outstanding and affordable site for the SKA: Fact Sheet 4. 






December 2011 

h) The astronomical ‘richness’ of the southern skies and strong tradition of astronomy in 

South Africa. 

i) Very little light pollution. 

j) Excellent academic infrastructure to support SKA science and technology. 

The benefits of the SKA to the Northern Cape and South Africa are multi‐faced and include the 

following: 

(i) Upgrading of a 10Gb cable will ensure that previously high‐speed unconnected 

communities have better broadband access. 

(ii) Helping build up educational resources in the area, forming partnerships with the private 

sector to support local schools and working closely with the Northern Cape Department of 

Education. 

(iii) Promotong education and training (the SKA SA initiative has already provided more than 

270 science and engineering bursaries from undergraduate to post‐doctoral level). 

F.1.6.3 KAROO ARRAY TELESCOPE 

South Africa is building the Karoo Array Telescope (MeerKAT) which is a precursor instrument for 

the SKA, but will in its own right be amongst the largest and most powerful telescopes in the 

world. MeerKAT is to be built in the same radio astronomy reserve near Carnarvon where the 

proposed SKA will also be situated, over the next five years. Consisting of 64 dishes, each 13.5m in 

diameter, with the first to be in place by 2013 and the project will be complete by the end of 2016. 

The intention is that MeerKAT will develop technologies appropriate to the SKA. This will include 

the use of composite, one‐piece reflectors, single‐pixel wideband receivers, low‐cost, high‐ 

reliability cryogenic systems, and reconfigurable digital‐processing systems (Northern Cape 

Business 2011/2012). 

Astronomical tourism has already created good economic spinoffs. Two Sutherland entrepreneurs 

rehabilitated the conservation land around the SALT facility, which has now become the site of 

guided tours and accommodation venues have flourished in recent times. A satellite visitors’ 

centre will be built in the township of Schietfontein (Northern Cape Business, 2011). According to 

the LED Strategy there is also potential for an astronomy route (i.e. star gazing route) between De 

Aar, Carnarvon, Williston, and Loxton. 

F.2 DEVELOPMENT REGIONS AND CORRIDORS 

Economic development opportunities are the key determinant in the settlement pattern described 

in Section D. Economic development, in turn, typically responds to the availability of 

Environmental Capital (e.g. water, suitable agricultural soil, mining resources, etc.) and 

Infrastructural Capital (e.g. roads, electricity, bulk engineering services, etc.). Over time, this has 

resulted in the evolusion of distinct Development Regions and Corridors. 

The development regions and corridors constitute a clustering of nodes and the creation of a 

system that will synergise the capacity of stakeholders and entities within these nodes to ensure 

institutional and leadership capacity that will lead to regional equity. The table and map below 

summarise and illustrate the spatial context of the current development regions and corridors of 

the Northern Cape. 

136 




Map F.3: Development regions and corridors of the Northern Cape (Source: PGDS). 

Table F.6: Development regions and corridors of the Northern Cape (Source: PGDS). 



December 2011 

REGION AND 

DESCRIPTION 

CORRIDOR 

FISHING AND 

The Namaqualand coast is the centre of the fishing and mariculture sector, and this 

MARICULTURE 

corridor has the primary node at Port Nolloth followed by the secondary nodes of 

Hondeklip Bay and Alexander Bay. 

GAMAGARA CORRIDOR This is the mining belt in the John Taolo Gaetsewe and Siyanda districts and run form 

Lime Acres and Danielskuil to Hotazel in the north. This corridor focus on the 

tremendous iron ore and manganese reserve in the area and being able to develop the 

area to facilitate this development, but also to create a simultaneous parallel socio‐ 

economic contexts to provide for the community in 30 or so years when the mineral 

reserves are depleted. 

KIMBERLEY FOOD This follows a food producing area from Hartswater, Jankempdorp through to Prieska 

CORRIDOR 

via Hopetown and Douglas. 

NAMAQUA INDUSTRIAL The Namaqua district has a multitude of industrial minerals such as granite, slate, mica, 

MINERALS CORRIDOR clay, etc. The intention is to have a central processing and logistics hub for the different 

industries and to make operators more competitive. 

SKA CORRIDOR It is the area around Carnarvon and Williston but extends to include areas up to De Aar 

and Upington. It spans across the district municipalities of Namaqua, Siyanda and 

Pixley ka Seme. 

SOLAR CORRIDOR Some of the best solar radiation areas on this planet is found in the area from Prieska to 

Upington and along to Riemvasmaak. 

TOURISM: LAKE GARIEP The Northern Cape, Free State and Eastern Cape Provinces are combined into this 

corridor and it is centred around Lake Gariep. This area has great tourism potential. 

137 






138 

December 2011 

TOURISM: N1 This corridor connects Gauteng, Free State, Eastern Cape and Western Cape with 

Colesburg as anchor for this initiative. 

TOURISM: N7 This corridor stretches from Cape Town through the Namaqua desert up to Namibia. It 

is world famous for its empty spaces, flower blooms and unspoilt scenery. 

UPINGTON 

MANUFACTURING AND 

ELECTRONICS IDZ 

The Upington Airport has been earmarked for a cargo hub for manufacturing related to 

local agriculture production, electronic goods production, SKA‐related and solar energy 

goods and services. Furthermore, the airport is already a facility that exports large 

amounts of agricultural produce. The Upington area has also been earmarked for a 

number of solar plants. 

F.3 SUPPORTING PROVINCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICE BASE 

The province and, in particular, the Development Regions and Corridors are supported by a 

generally adequate infrastructural network and bulk services base. The key components are 

summarised and illustrated in the chapters below. 

The Northern Cape will spend R4.5 billion on infrastructure by 2014. The improvement of the 

Northern Cape’s transport network and infrastructure is seen as central to growing and 

transforming the region’s economy. About R4.5‐billion will be spent in the period 2009‐2014 on 

infrastructure. The provincial government aims to create 100 000 jobs between 2009 and 2014. 

This is in addition to the R787‐billion that national government has set aside for infrastructure 

spending, a portion of which will be spent in the Northern Cape. The key agent for implementing 

these measures in the Northern Cape is the Department of Roads and Public Works (DRPW). 

F.3.1 TRANSPORT 

Transport is a supportive sector which plays a key role in meeting objectives of economic growth, 

access to employment opportunities, and social integration. Transport, both public and private, is 

a primary spatial structuring element providing access and mobility to both urban and rural 

communities. One of the underlying success factors of any regional economy relates to the 

movement of goods, people and services. It is important that the role and functioning of the 

different modes of transport and the impact on the infrastructure are clearly understood in order 

to focus different investment on the areas of opportunity and need. 

F.3.1.1 ROADS 

The Northern Cape is a huge province but it is well served by transport links. The main national 

highways include (Makiti Guides and Tours, 2008) (refer to Table F.7 and Map F.4): 

Table F.7: Primary roads in the Northern Cape. 

ROUTE DESCRIPTION 

N1 Main route between Gauteng and the Western Cape via Bloemfontein. 

N7 Main route between the Western Cape and Namibia through Namaqualand. 

N10 Main route from the Eastern Cape passing De Aar, Prieska and Upington up to 

Namibia. 

N12 Main route between Gauteng and the Western Cape via Kimberley. 

N14 Linking Springbok on the N7 in the west with Kuruman N7 via the northern areas 

along the Orange River in the vicinity of Keimoes and Upington. 






December 2011 

Primary regional roads include the: 

a) R360: Main route to the Kgalagadi Transfrontier Park via Upington. 

b) R27: Main route from Upington via Calvinia and Nieuwoudtville to the N7 (i.e. the main 

road between Upington and the Western Cape). 

c) R63: Main route between Calvinia and Britstown via Carnarvon and Williston. 

F.3.1.2 AIRPORTS 

Map F.4: Transport network of the Northern Cape. 

The Northern Cape’s two major airports run by Airports Company South Africa (ACSA) received 

expensive upgrades in 2008/09 with R17‐million being spent on Kimberley and R31‐million on 

Upington, where a business park may be constructed alongside the airport. Signs that the 

recession had lifted were seen in arrival figures for both airports in the 2010/11 financial year. 

Both recorded arrival figures more in line with the statistics for 2008/09, rather than the low 

figures for 2009/10. Kimberley Airport caters for about 65 000 arrivals every year. 

Upington Airport has a varied and important role in the regional economy. With a long runway 

built to cater for transcontinental flights (at nearly 5km, the runway can accommodate space 

shuttles needing to make emergency landings), Upington is being considered as a regional cargo 

hub. Currently, about a million tons of grapes pass through the airport, and good quantities of 

fruit and fish also form part of the cargo load. Tourists use the airport for access to the Kgalagadi 

and Augrabies Falls National Parks. As it is situated in an area with clean desert air, the airport is 

139 




20 August 2011. 



140 

December 2011 

suitable as a facility for the long‐term parking of mothballed aircrafts. Airlink flies to Upington and 

the charter company Walker Flying Services is based there. 

The Airports Company of South Africa (ACSA) has identified Upington as an alternative or 

supplement for Oliver Tambo Airport for cargo traffic. According to ASCA the feasibility of 

upgrading of the airport to cater for the demand in international freight transport of the local 

table grape industry and others is being explored. The establishment of an International 

Development Zone (IDZ) at the Upington airport has been proposed to further enhance its 

strategic importance for the local, regional and provincial economy. An adequate volume of cargo 

is generated in the western and eastern region of South Africa and Nambia to warrant the 

establishment of a cargo hub at Upington (//Khara Hais SDF, 2009). 

The benefits for cargo airlines and importers and exporters would be greater when using the 

Upington Airport, as there is less congestion and quicker airport turnaround times, shorter‐to‐ 

market timeframes which would enhance product freshness by one day, and improved supply‐ 

chain performance. It is also envisaged that, once a regular service by a reputable airline is 

established, many new projects will start up and many new projects will start up and many 

existing commodities will grow in volume. In particular, meat exports from Groblershoop will 

double and Namibian meat exports will come to Upington (Davenport, 2006) 66 . 

The Northern Cape has many good landing strips. The Sishen airfield is a licensed aerodrome and 

serves the mining industry in the north‐eastern part of the province, while the Namaqua District 

Municipality has three good airstrips at Calvinia (a private field which is 1 250m long), Springbok 

and Alexander Bay. The Gariep Dam airstrip is tarred and with a 1 360m runway it can cater for 

Learjets 67 . 

F.3.1.3 RAILWAYS 

The rail network in the Northern Cape spanned approximately 2 816 km of which 1 557 km was 

electrified and 1 303 km was diesel operated. The mining industry was served by two major rail 

lines – the Sishen‐Saldanha (orex) line and the Hotazel‐Sishen‐Port Elizabeth managenese line. 

The rural areas had historically relied on branch lines for freight transport for agriculture and also 

small scale mining. Most of these branch lines had closed or experienced drastic reduction in the 

frequency of services (PGDS). 

The Northern Cape has two of the most significant railway structures in South Africa, namely the 

junction at De Aar, which binds the whole western side of the country, and the Sishen‐Saldanha 

railway line. De Aar, already an important terminus, is being targeted as the site of a freight 

intermodal terminal. A detailed proposal has been put to the provincial Freight Logistics Forum. 

De Aar has 110km of rail lines. 

The key task of the Sishen‐Saldanha railway line is to transport iron ore from mines in the 

Northern Cape to the Port of Saldanha. The province’s manganese is transported via the general 

freight line to Port Elizabeth but the port city’s inability to cope with increased volumes is leading 

66 

Davenport, J. 2006: Study finds that a cargo hub at Upington would boost Northern Cape economy. Engineering 

news. 2 June 2006. 

67 

http://www.northerncapebusiness.co.za/pls/cms/ti_secout.secout_prov?p_sid=43&p_site_id=164 –accessed on 






December 2011 

to a re‐think. Both the existing line and the handling facility in Port Elizabeth will have to be 

upgraded to be able to cope with 12 to 14 million tons per annum or the Sishen‐Saldanha line will 

have to start carrying manganese as well. 

Transnet Freight Rail (TFR), which operates the line to Saldanha on the West Coast, has committed 

to a R8.7‐billion upgrade of the rail corridor. This is to cater for increased volumes being produced 

by mining companies such as Kumba Iron Ore. All told, the iron‐ore channel is being extended 

from 38 million tons per year to 60 million tons per year. The line is being upgraded, new rolling 

stock added and new loops are being added to service the new iron‐ore mines mentioned in the 

mining sector overview elsewhere in this publication. 

Upington is the location of rail connections to Karasburg in Namibia and Keimoes and Kakamas 

due west of Upington. There is also a connection to De Aar in the south which, in turn, links to 

railways to Johannesburg, Kimberley and Cape Town. 

F.3.1.4 HARBOURS 

Port Nolloth, which is essentially a fishing harbour, is the province’s biggest facility and harbour 

town. The Western Cape ports of Saldanha and Cape Town are used extensively for exporting 

mining, agricultural and manufactured products from the Northern Cape. 

The fishing harbous of Port Nolloth and Hondeklip Bay have both experienced degradation of their 

basic infrastructure in recent years in parallel with the decline of the fishing industry in 

Namaqualand. At present, the Hondeklip Bay facility is non‐utilised with the jetty having been 

seriously damaged by winter storms a few years ago. The Port Nolloth harbour is currently utilized 

by a number of shallow‐water diamond concession vessels but is used only sporadically by small 

in‐shore fishing vessels. The Port Nolloth harbour is in need of rehabilitation as part of the 

provincial strategy to promote the town as a regional fishing node. A plan for this has been 

devised and private sector interest has been shown in co‐financing rehabilitation work as part of a 

regional fishing project. 

As stated in the PDGS, many of the Northern Cape’s primary agricultural and mineral production 

are produced in localities distant from markets and from points of export. The province’s ability to 

effectively and efficiently convey goods by both road and rail is crucial for the further economic 

development of the province. Indeed the continued viability of certain existing economic activities 

and the development of new ones depend on the availability of cost‐effective freight transport 

and logistics systems. There is, therefore, a need for a clear freight strategy that will ensure that 

goods are efficiently transported to the various markets. 

F.3.2 WATER DISTRIBUTION NETWORK 

The province’s two perennial rivers, the Orange and the Vaal, feed the agriculture and alluvial 

diamond industries in the province. Most of the Northern Cape rivers are characterized by 

irregular flows and are punctuated by episodes of excessive flooding that cause damage to 

irrigation equipment, bridges and property. 

In order facilitate equitable and sustainable provision of water throughout the Province the 

Department of Water Affairs (DWA) prepared and implemented a comprehensive water plan and 

141 






December 2011 

strategiy (refer to Map F.5 below). This plan is to give effect to the Water Allocation Reform (WAR) 

which aims to: 

a) Take steps to meet the water needs of the HDIs and the poor. 

b) Ensure participation by these groups in water resource management. 

c) Promote the sustainable use of water resources. 

d) Promote the beneficial and efficient use of water in the public interest. 

Map F.5: Provincial water plan and strategy (Source: Department of Water Affairs). 

142 






BOX 5 

SUMMARY OF KEY ECONOMIC ASPECTS 

December 2011 

a) Consider proposed nuclear power installation at Hondeklipbaai. 

b) Consideration enlargement of Boegoeberg dam and Prieska dam. 

c) Create opportunities for communities to become involved in operation of tourism facilities, providing services to the 

industry and acting as suppliers to the industry. 

d) Ensure that new development is subject to the availability of resources, with specific reference to water and bulk 

services infrastructure. 

e) Establishing stronger backward and forward linkages between sectors to ensure stronger multipliers. 

f) Explore need and desirability of a safe deep-water harbour at Port Nolloth. 

g) Facilitate preparation of holistic strategy for promotion of the Port Nolloth Fishing Node. 

h) Facilitate joint venture business arrangements between fishing companies to create a ‘critical mass’ of fish that would 

make fishing and fish processing more economically viable in the Port Nolloth area. 

i) Facilitate support for development of a small-scale experimental factory at Port Nolloth or Hondeklipbaai. 

j) Increase awareness, branding and marketing initiatives in the tourism industry to attract more tourists locally and 

internationally. 

k) Increase spectrum of tourist attractions and activities in focus areas to induce tourists to stay longer and encourage 

returns. 

l) Prepare long-term tourism plans and strategies, including precautionary measures and guidelines to reduce negative 

impact of development, with specific reference to visual impact in resource areas. 

m) Prioritise construction and upgrading of Hotazel-McCarthy’s Rest road and Hotazel-Vanzulsrus road that link Northern 

Cape with Botswana (crucial for enhancing the tourism sector of the province and the country). 

n) Prioritise construction of Vioolsdrif dam. 

o) Promote development of both ferrous and non-ferrous metals, as well as dimension stone. 

p) Provide a plan for supporting bulk services and infrastructure, including roads, electricity, water and telecommunication. 

q) Provide a spatial framework that indicates appropriate development regions and corridors based on the comparative 

economic advantages of the subject areas. 

r) Provide strategy to ensure that infrastructure spending has a long-term focus which is not subject to short-term political 

cycles and IDP budgets only. 

s) Reflect critical shortages and focal areas for bulk infrastructure provision. 

t) Reflect the importance of the envisaged solar power industry. 

u) Revisit study on desirability of development of cargo facilities and chartered cargo air services out of Alexander Bay, 

Upington and Kimberley airports (previous work was not conclusive). 

v) Stipulate off-sets for detrimental impacts of mining on agriculture with specific reference to water pollution, dust, 

deterioration of roads, etc. 

w) Unlock potential of tourism markets, especially in rural areas where new product opportunities for cultural, adventure 

and ecotourism exist. 

143 






SECTION G: PGDS INTERVENTIONS 


144 

December 2011 

This section comprises a summary of the interventions listed in the PGDS that have to be provided for in the PSDF. 

Many of the proposed interventions do not have any spatial implications. However, they all a bearting on the key 

imperatives for sustainable development, namely human well‐being, environmental integrity and economic efficiency. 

Volume 4 of the PSDF will therefore address such non‐spatial issues and interventions such as many of those listed in 

the PGDS. 

G.1 KEY INTERVENTIONS PROPOSED BY PGDS 

An analysis of the socio‐economic situation and indicators of the Northern Cape indicates that the 

most significant challenge that the government and its partners in growth and development are 

confronted with is the reduction of poverty. All other societal challenges that the province faces 

emanate predominantly from the effects of poverty. While addressing poverty attention needs to 

be given to a range of societal problems that includes the following: 

a) Reducing the backlog of basic needs such as water, sanitation and housing; 

b) Improving and increasing access to health, education and social services; 

c) Decreasing the prevalence rate of TB, HIV and AIDS; 

d) Creating opportunities for employment; 

e) Reducing contact crime; and 

f) Targeting vulnerable groups. 

The only effective means by which one can reduce poverty is through long‐term sustainable 

economic growth and development. To create the conditions that allow the poor to break the 

cycle of poverty and to ensure economic growth and development, it is vital to develop the human 

and social capital of the people of the province. This would require: 

• Creating opportunities for lifelong learning; 

• Improving the skills of the labour force to increase productivity; and 

• Increasing accessibility to knowledge and information. 

An analysis of the economic situation and indicators reflects opportunities for potential growth in 

the following sectors: 

(i) Agriculture. 

(ii) Fishing and Mariculture. 

(iii) Mining and mineral processing. 

(iv) Manufacturing. 

(v) Tourism. 

(vi) Energy. 

The PGDS subsequently provides strategic interventions for all of the primary sectors referred to 

above. The key interventions proposed by the PGDS for the various key sectors or are listed in the 

tables below. 




Table G.1: Strategic interventions in agriculture. 

STRATEGIC INTERVENTION ELEMENT SUB‐ELEMENT 

Create a transformed and 

vibrant agricultural sector 

that contributes to the 

provincial economic growth, 

job creation and food 

security 



Land reform and promotion of 

optimal and sustainable 

agricultural production 

Marketing support to improve 

market access by small holder 

farmers 

Promotion and support of agri‐ 

businesses and agro‐processing 

Ensure sustainable use and 

management of natural 

resources. 

Technology development and 

transfer 

Implement integrated food 

security program 

Development of farm workers 

and dwellers to enhance their 

livelihood and full participation 

in the sector 

Table G.2: Strategic interventions in mining and mineral processing. 

145 

December 2011 

Acquire and redistribute strategically located 

land 

Revitalisation of inactive and distressed farms 

Facilitate the participation and ownership of 

market channels by small farmers. 

Co‐ordinate and facilitate the establishment of 

agro‐processing industries 

Improve efficiency of water use in the sector 

through appropriate technologies 

Implement the LandCare program to promote 

and support the protection of agricultural land 

Conduct research to provide producers with 

innovative solutions 

Establishment of households, community and 

institutional food production initiatives and 

revival of dormant projects to enable own food 

production and improve income 

Capacity building of farm‐workers and farm 

dwellers and co‐ordinate the expansion of 

services to farm workers and dwellers 


Promote economic growth 

through minerals exploitation 

and development. 

Promote the development of 

synergies between the mining 

and other economic activities 

Promote the role mines play in 

terms of rural economic 

development 

Promote further large‐scale 

mining development 

Complementary economic opportunities 

between mining and other economic sectors on 

a regional basis 

Ensure compliance to Social and Labour plans 

Northern Cape as an exploration target 

Ensuring suitable infrastructure to sustain 

longer term mining develop in the Northern 

Cape 

Provincial Mining and Minerals Development 

Forum 

Regional Small‐Scale Mining and Minerals 

Development Centres 

Increased rail capacity for mineral exports 

Support small‐scale mining 

development 

Enhancing logistics for minerals 

development 

Minerals tax development Appropriate taxation options for the Northern 

Cape minerals sector 

Promoting industrial Promote backward, forward and side‐stream 

development 

beneficiation 

and minerals economic linkages and multipliers 




Table G.3: Strategic interventions in tourism. 


Promote and develop the 

Northern Cape as a globally 

competitive tourism resource 

and destination. 

Table G.4: Strategic interventions on energy. 



146 

December 2011 

Tourism Product Development Customised experiences through product 

packaging 

Match products to markets 

Expand and develop product portfolio 


Promote the use of 

alternative energy in the 


Establishment of Northern 

Cape as a Solar Energy Hub 

Establish a 100 MW CSP plant in the Siyanda 

region 

Establish 2 MW CSP plant in Siyanda region in 

the province 

Production of Solar Water geysers 

Creation of wind energy farms Support the initiative to start a 400 MW wind 

farm on the West Coast and other possible 

viable farms 

Research on possible other Promote the use of biomass in the province 

energy sources 

Promotion of environmental Ensure that all building plans in the province 

friendly building regulations adhere to energy efficiency principles 

To investigate the sale of Facilitate the sale of carbon credits 

carbon credits 

Table G.5: Strategic interventions on enterprise development. 


Establish, develop and support 

SMMEs and Cooperatives 

Financial and non‐financial 

support for existing SMMEs 

and Cooperatives 

Table G.6: Strategic interventions in science and technology. 

Non – Financial support: 

Business plans development 

Financial and business management skills 

training through SEDA 

Financial Support 

Referrals of business plans and funding 

requests to funding institutions such as KHULA, 

FB SMME Trust, NDA, CIS, NYDA, ABSA SMME 

Fund, etc. 


Enhance quality and quantity of Water demand management Curtail water losses at water resources level 

water resources 

Revitalisaion of 3 irrigation schemes 

Establishment of 3 new irrigation schemes 

Construct gauging weirs capable of accurately 

measuring flow of 50 cumec and less at 

identified key sites within stretch of 1400 km of 

Orange River length. 

Diversification (b) Desalination and recycling 

strategies developed: 3 Municipalities 

supported with desalination projects. 




Reduce greenhouse gas 

emissions, climate change 

impact and improve 

air/atmospheric quality 

Reduce greenhouse gas 

emissions, climate change 

impact and improve 

air/atmospheric quality 



147 

December 2011 

Water resources protection Priority wetland in Northern Cape rehabilitated 

Implementation of Working for wetlands 

program through the rehabilitation of priority 

wetland, development of rehabilitation plan 

Proclaim 1 wetland of national importance as 

protected area and manage effectively 

Regulation of water quality Assess water treatment works 

% of water treatment works complying with 

enforcement measures to meet drinking water 

quality standards 

Assessment of waste water treatment works 

(WWTW) 

Determine the percentage of waste water 

treatment works (WWTW) complying with 

enforcement 

standards 

measures to meet effluent 

Monitor mines for non‐compliance in 

Reduced CO2 emission 

accordance with water license conditions 

Reduction of total emissions of CO2 by 34% by 

2020 and 42% by 2025 and % of government 

owned monitoring stations reporting to SAAQIS 

Development and implementation of NCape 

GHG mitigation plan developed and 

Atmospheric pollutants 

implemented according to the agreed upon 

GHG mitigation targets for key sectors in the 

province 

100% provincial compliance with Ambient Air 

Quality Standards by 2020 

Develop and implement Air Quality 

Management Plans for 3 Priority Areas in 


Licensing Authorities (Provinces; Metros and 

District municipalities) implement the new 

Atmospheric Emission Licensing system 

Grow and develop the National Ambient Air 

Quality Monitoring Network and the South 

African 

(SAAQIS) 

Air Quality Information System 

Develop and rollout strategies and action plans 

to address air pollution in dense low‐income 

communities and from non‐industrial and/or 

non‐point sources (e.g. coal, paraffin, wood, 

veld fires, construction activities, un‐surfaced 

haul roads, etc.) 

Minimize Mine Dust related exposure 

Implement 

monitoring 

the minimum frequency of 

Research project on health impacts of mining 

tailing dumps on communities 

Determine number of derelict and/or 

ownerless mines in the Province and their 

impact on the environment 

Generation of renewable power 

Implementation of Industrial Policy Action Plan 




Sustainable environmental 

management 



Renewable energy deployed 

Identified climate change and 

adaptation framework 

Rehabilitation and restoration 

of degraded ecosystems 

Deforestation & improved 

forest management 

Less waste that is better 

managed 

Efficient management of the 

environmental impacts from 

mining and related activities 

Efficent and sustainable land 

use management 

148 

December 2011 

(IPAP) and green economy plan and strategy 

development 

Establish the Northern Cape as Solar Hub in SA 

Roll out solar geyser project in respect to 

Government Housing Project 

Identification of Climate Change impacts and 

integration of adaptation framework into 

provincial climate change response strategy 

and 8 provincial sector plans by 2014 

Rehabilitation of land affected by degradation 

in ha. 

Prevent deforestation 

Cleaning/elimination of alien plants 

Promote community‐based natural resource 

management 

Reforestation (trees planted for carbon 

storage) 

Transfer indigenous forest assets transferred 

from DAFF to appropriate government 

conservation agencies 

Municipalities in the Northern Cape 

implementing National Policy on Free Basic 

Refuse Removal (FBRR) ‐ 60% of households 

provided with basic waste collection services 

by 2014 

Increase percentage of licenced landfill sites to 

75% of all landfill sites by 2014 

10% municipal waste diverted from landfills for 

recycling by 2015 

Develop and implement waste minimization 

standards and targets 

Establish Waste Recycling Enterprises/ Projects 

in 5 Districts 

Identifying of derelict and ownerless mines and 

rehabilitation and remediation of land 

National areas identified for restricted mineral 

development negotiated and published 

Comparison of 'environmentally sensitive 

areas' and 'mineral development priority 

areas', public and stakeholder consultation, 

reach consensus on provincial restricted 

mineral development areas for gazetting 

Province participates in and is consulted for 

development and implementation of regulatory 

system for environmental management of 

mining 

Municipalities with credible spatial 

development frameworks that are informed by 

strategic environmental assessment (SEA) or 

Environmental Management Framework (EMF) 

Develop and implement District Environmental 

Management Frameworks for 5 District 

Municipalities 

Integration of environmental issues into land 

use planning in each of the Municipalities 






149 

December 2011 

Protect biodiversity Land mass under conservation Declaration of priority areas for expansion of 

protected areas network – 56088 ha by 2011 

Improvement in management of Protected 

areas (5 Provincial nature reserves) – 68% by 

2012 

Implement the Biodiversity Stewardship 

Program to contribute to the Land Mass under 

conservation in the form of Nature Reserves 

and protected environments – 137 203 ha 

Proceed with the declaration of priority areas 

for expansion of protected areas in the coastal 

zone 

Proclaim Orange River Mouth (ORM ‐ estuary) 

as protected area ‐ 1863.76 ha 

1 wetland proclaimed 

ORM and wetland maintained 

Strengthening environmental 

legislation compliance and 

enforcement 

Protected ecosystems and 

species 

Valuing the ecosystem 

services 

Environmental legislation 

compliance and enforcement 

Assist with development and implementation 

of national Biodiversity management plans for 

2 species under formal protection 

Develop and implement regulations and tools 

to prevent, control or eradicate Alien and 

Invasive Species 

Habitat loss reduced through protection of 

threatened or protected ecosystems 

Reduction of number of species on the red date 

list (proportion of species threatened with 

extinction) through targeted protection of 

priority habitats 

Gazetting of Namaqua Bioregional Plan 

Development and gazetting of Provincial 

Conservation Plan 

2 Wetland of national and international 

importance with management plan in place 

Environmental benefits related to the provision 

of resource‐based services better understood, 

communicated and incentivised 

Designation of Environmental Management 

Inspectorate (EMI) 

Environmental sustainability Scaling up environmental education, awareness 

and voluntary activism: Environmental Sector 

Skillls Plan (ESSP) fully implemented by 2014 

Implement Ecoschool program in all schools in 

the province – 300 by 2014 

Establish and roll out Rural Environmental 

Voluntary Activist Group – 5 communities by 

2013 

Creating work opportunities 75 000 EPWP work opportunities by 2014 

Implement greening projects (planting 

indigenous trees) and street cleaning in the 

municipalities 

Implement coast care program at all South 

African beaches ‐ Litter picking and scrubbing 

of beach facilities 




Table G.7: Strategic interventions in local economic development. 


Local Economic Development Aligned and integrated LED 

planning and strategies for all 

spheres of government 

capitalizing on competitive 

and comparative position of 

municipalities and effectively 

communicating and 

marketing this information 



Public and private sectors to 

approach LED in partnership 

150 

December 2011 

Ensure all plans relevant to economic 

development be aligned and thus can be 

integrated 

Creating broad level of LED awareness, 

knowledge and competence – LED capacity 

building 

To have local, district and provincial LED for as 

where local economy and investment 

environment are combinetly planned on and 

approved 

Project and enterprise support capitalising on 

opportunities identified from LED strategies 

and plans 

Table G.8: Strategic interventions in comprehensive rural development program. 


Comprehensive Rural 

Development Program (CRDP) 

Vibrant, equitable and 

sustainable rural communities 

and food security for all 

Revitalization of rural areas Social transformation 

Economic development 

Agrarian reforn 

Sustainable agrarian reform, Clarify the land reform status quo in the 


Establish available support service capacity and 

budgets and conduct gap analysis 

Improved access to affordable Innovation for alternative low carbon rural 

and diverse food 

economies. 

Rural services and sustainable 

livelihoods 

Rural job creation linked to 

skills training and promoting 

economic livelihoods 

Enabling institutional 

environment for sustainable 

and inclusive growth 

Co‐ordinate effective 

implementation of the 

provincial rural development 

Provision of prioritized settlement support 

services to land reform projects, CRA’s and 

farm workers. 

Measures to target rural towns in decline. 

Deepen skills in transdisciplinary planning, 

program 

Management and monitoring and the 

mitigation of hazards and risk. 

Maximise learning from existing pilots. 

Promote and support the establishment of 

district development coalitions. 

Pilot practical measures to improve information 

and knowledge management for planning, 

implementation and monitoring. 

Co‐ordinate the Comprehensive Rural 

Development Program. 




strategy 



Reduce unemployment in the 

current poverty nodes 

Establishment of coordination 

structures 

Table G.9: Interventions in transport operations. 

151 

December 2011 

Revitalisation of rural towns 

Compile baseline of jobs created per CRDP site 

per sector 

Establishment of agri‐parks 

Increase the number of employees on 

commercial farms 

Facilitate Institutional arrangement in rural 

communities to enhance sustainable inclusive 

growth 


To reduce the infrastructure 

backlog for economic growth 

and development by 2014. 

Promoting an efficient and 

effective transport system 

Improving road infrastructure 

development and integrating 

it into the infrastructure 

planning activities in the 

province 

Improving built infrastructure 

development and integration 

into the infrastructure 

planning activities in the 

province 

Improving bulk infrastructure 

development and integration 

into the infrastructure 

planning 

province 

activities in the 

Improving the levels of 

mobility, infrastructure 

development and synergies in 

the transport planning 

activities in the Province 

Redevelopment of unutilized 

and expansion of transport 

infrastructures 

Enhancing competitiveness 

through cost effective 

transport 

An integrated road infrastructure planning 

approach 

An integrated built infrastructure planning 

approach 

Sanitation infrastructure 

Water infrastructure 

Electricity infrastructure 

Integrated transport planning approach and 

support to all planning authorities 

Development of the Upington Cargo Hub 

Expansion of transport infrastructure and 

facilities for economic growth 

Re‐introducing rail as an alternative mode to 

road freight transport 

Promotion of airport and air service 

development 

Rehabilitation and redevelopment of harbours 

and other terminal points 

Support the efficient transport of freight 






BOX 6 

SUMMARY OF KEY PGDS INTERVENTIONS 

December 2011 

a) Create a transformed and vibrant agricultural sector with an increasing contribution to the provincial economic 

growth, job creation and food security. 

b) Create work opportunities through innovative use of resources and sustainable development. 

c) Develop an efficient and effective transport system. 

d) Develop vibrant, equitable and sustainable rural communities. 

e) Enhance quality and quantity of water resources. 

f) Ensure on-going and sustainable environmental management. 

g) Establish, develop and support SMMEs and cooperatives, and community initiatives. 

h) Promote and develop the Northern Cape as a globally competitive tourism resource and destination. 

i) Promote economic growth through sustainable minerals exploitation and development. 

j) Promote innovative and sustainable Local Economic Development. 

k) Promote the use of alternative energy in the Northern Cape. 

l) Protect biodiversity as an imperative for environmental sustainability. 

m) Reduce greenhouse gas emissions, climate change impact and improve air/atmospheric quality. 

n) Reduce the transport infrastructure backlog for economic growth and development by 2014. 

o) Strengthen environmental legislation compliance and enforcement. 

p) Support coherent implementation of the Comprehensive Rural Development Program (CRDP). 

152 








December 2011 

This section lists the key aspects identified in Sections B to G and that are to be addressed in Volume 3 Spatial 

Directives and Guidelines and Volume 4 Strategies, Programs and Projects. Although not explicitely divided into 

Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats the latter dimensions are embodied in the categorisation of the 

aspects and the strategies to be formulated to address them. 

H.1 CATEGORIES OF KEY ASPECTS 

The key aspects listed in Sections B to G were identified through the process summarised in 

Chapter A.2. For ease of reference the aspects were listed in accordance with the broad categories 

indicated by the figure below. 

1. CONTEXT 

2. ENVIRONMENT 

3. SETTLEMENT 

4. SOCIAL & HUMAN 

5. ECONOMY 

6. PGDS INTERVENTIONS 

7. GENERAL ASPECTS 

Figure H.1: Categories of key issues. 

The table below listes the key aspects to be addressed in Volume 3 Spatial Directives and 

Guidelines and in Volume 4 Strategies, Programs and Projects respectively and indicates the 

Volume of the PSDF in which the various aspects are to be addressed. 

153 




Table H.1: Key aspects to be addressed in Volume 3 and Volume 4. 



154 

December 2011 

CATEGORY KEY ASPECTS 

1. CONTEXT a) Align PSDF with development directives and objectives of adjoining 

countries and provinces. 

Aspects in this b) Consider traditional parameters as a key criterion in the demarcation of 

category relate to the municipal boundaries. 

locational and the c) Enhance management of Kgalagadi and Richtersveld Transfrontier 

administrative status Conservation Areas. 

of the Province at the d) Include municipalities in formulation and establishment of cross‐border 

international, national, agreements (currently primarily the function of national government). 

provincial and local e) Interrogate boundaries of John Gaetsewe District Municipality against inter 

level.. 

alia traditional domain parameters. 

f) Interrogate cross‐border arrangements with Namibia with specific 

reference to the Noord‐Oewer / Vioolsdrift irrigation scheme, cross‐frontier 

conservation schemes, and cross‐frontier economic schemes such as the 

proposed film industry. 

g) Interrogate the delineation of the provincial, district, municipal and ward 

boundaries. 

h) Provide appropriate spatial context and orientation for the Northern Cape 

in terms of international agreements, protocols and conventions. 

i) Strengthen historical binds between the Karas Region of Namibia and the 

Northern Cape Province ‐ aspects identified for further action are (i) the 

education and training sector, with the focus on ensuring that best practice 

is shared in skills development for economic growth, (ii) further 

development of the Nama language and culture, (iii) exchange of learners’ 

support material and teacher development programs. 

2. ENVIRONMENT a) Consider designation of agricultural reserves in areas of high‐potential 

agricultural soils with adequate irrigation water. 

This section relates to b) Create appropriate ecological linkages between conservation areas. 

the natural and c) Designate coastal zone as a core conservation area. 

cultural environment d) Institute standard development approach along the Orange River by all 

and the associated relevant municipalities. //Khara Hais SDF is to serve as a model in this 

resources with specific regard. 

reference strategies e) Enhance sustainable use of formal conservation areas and their resources. 

for the conservation f) Enhance viability and sustainability of the Richtersveld Botanical and 

thereof as an Landscape World Heritage Site which is the core of the Succulent Karoo 

imperative for Biodiversity Hotspot. 

sustainability. g) Explore desirability of implementing strategies such as Protected Nature 

Areas and Special Management Areas in collaboration with organised 

agriculture and the Department of the Environment. 


i) Land‐use along the coastline must be addressed in a similar manner by all 

relevant municipalities and stakeholders. 

j) Preparation and implementation of an efficient Water Demand 

Conservation Strategy must be mandatory on all municipalities. 

k) Promote cross‐border conservation initiatives – explore the merit and 

desirability of UNESCO biosphere reserves. 


m) Protect high‐potential agricultural land through appropriate land‐use 

designation. 

n) Provide for biodiversity conservation in terms of SANBI’s ‘critical 

biodiversity area’ (CBA) indicators. 




3. SETTLEMENT 

This category primarily 

refers to the 

development and/or 

restoration of urban 

areas in terms of 

defined guidelines and 

through efficient and 

equitable 

appropriation of the 

available public and 

private resources. 


This category relates 

to the social and 

human capital of the 

province and how 

these are to be 

developed and utilised 

through innovative 

strategies, programs 

and projects. 



155 

December 2011 

o) Provide guidelines for the re‐use and/or the more sustainable use of 

resources. 

p) Provide innovative strategies to help conserve conservation‐worthy 

habitats on private land. 

q) Provide land‐use plan as a basis for integration of mining activities with 

conservation. 

r) Provide strategy to off‐set loss of conservation‐worthy habitat through 

mining through ex‐situ conservation projects. 

s) Standardise land‐use planning and management by municipalities and other 

stakeholders. 

t) //Khara Hais Tourism Plan is to serve as a model for municipal tourism 

planning. 

a) District and local SDFs should incorporate place‐specific guidelines for 

architecture and landscaping premised upon historic design precedents and 

vernacular. 

b) Formulate guidelines for the preparation of a provincial climate‐neutrality 

strategy in terms of international best practice. 

c) Indicate actions to be taken by municipalities to enhance the status of 

settlements as it relates to development potential and human needs. 

d) Indicate investment typologies required by the various municipalities and 

settlements. 

e) Planning and design of industrial and mining infrastructure have to be 

undertaken in accordance with dedicated design criteria. 

f) Provide a spatial plan for bulk services and infrastructure for settlement 

priorities. 


h) Provide a spatial premise and rationale for decision‐making as it relates to 

the appropriation of government funds. 

i) Provide a spatial premise and rationale for decision‐making as it relates to 

the private sector investment in development. 

j) Provide broad guidelines for improvement of subsidised housing – district 

and local municipalities must adopt such guidelines in their SDFs. These 

guidelines must be mandatory. 

k) Provide framework for performance management of municipalities and 

settlements. 

l) Provide spatial structuring elements to facilitate sustainable urban 

development. 

a) Create incentives and opportunities for commercial banks to extend their 

input into LED and to unlock benefits associated with banking charters 

more efficiently. 

b) Develop an empirical spatial premise and rational for the provision of basic 

household services, training and education facilioties, health services, etc. 

throughout the province. 

c) Ensure access to affordable energy services. Distribute information on 

costs associated with different energy sources and the best options for 

different uses, e.g. heating, cooking and lighting. 

d) Ensure that new mines adopt a strategy that would ensure ongoing socio‐ 

economic development and environmental rehabilitation. 

e) Eradicate gaps (lack of co‐operation and communication) between the 

different sectors active in the Northern Cape as well as between the 

communities. 

f) Explore models for public‐private partnerships (e.g. the Karsten Women 

Trust). 




5. ECONOMY 


to the key aspects of 

the economic 

environment and the 

associated forms of 

capital which are 

imperatives for long‐ 

term sustainability of 

province as a whole. 



156 

December 2011 


h) Formulate a strategy for promotion of entrepreneurship and associated 

development opportunities. 

i) Legislative processes that stifle sustainable development should be 

identified and reviewed. 

j) Promote job creation in the green jobs industries (e.g. manufacturing of 

solar water heaters, maintenance of wind generators and solar energy 

infrastructure). 

k) Proved guidelines for formulation of strategies to sustain socio‐economic 

development after the life‐span of projects. 

l) Provide a spatial rationale for the restoration of traditional parameters of 

settlements as a basis for community revitalisation. 

m) Provide broad guidelines for improvement of subsidised housing – district 

and local municipalities must adopt such guidelines in their SDFs. These 

must be mandatory. 

n) Provide strategies for the enhancement of entrepreneurship and associated 


o) Provide strategies to ensure that communities benefit meaningfully from 

larger‐scale physical development (e.g. the Sustainable Development 

Initiative {SDI} model). 


b) Consideration enlargement of Boegoeberg Dam and Prieska Dam. 

c) Create opportunities for communities to become involved in operation of 

tourism facilities, providing services to the industry and acting as suppliers 

to the industry. 

d) Ensure that new development is subject to the availability of resources, 

with specific reference to water and bulk services infrastructure. 

e) Establishing stronger backward and forward linkages between sectors to 

ensure stronger multipliers. 

f) Explore need and desirability of a safe deep‐water harbour at Port Nolloth. 

g) Facilitate preparation of holistic strategy for promotion of the Port Nolloth 

Fishing Node. 

h) Facilitate joint venture business arrangements between fishing companies 

to create a ‘critical mass’ of fish that would make fishing and fish processing 

more economically viable in the Port Nolloth area. 

i) Facilitate support for development of a small‐scale experimental factory at 

Port Nolloth or Hondeklipbaai. 

j) Increase awareness, branding and marketing initiatives in the tourism 

industry to attract more tourists locally and internationally. 

k) Increase spectrum of tourist attractions and activities in focus areas to 

induce tourists to stay longer and encourage returns. 

l) Prepare long‐term tourism plans and strategies, including precautionary 

measures and guidelines to reduce negative impact of development, with 

specific reference to visual impact in resource areas. 

m) Prioritise construction and upgrading of Hotazel‐McCarthy’s Rest road and 

Hotazel‐Vanzulsrus road that link Northern Cape with Botswana (crucial for 

enhancing the tourism sector of the province and the country). 

n) Prioritise construction of proposed Vioolsdrif dam. 

o) Promote development of both ferrous and non‐ferrous metals, as well as 

dimension stone. 

p) Provide a plan for supporting bulk services and infrastructure, including 

roads, electricity, water and telecommunication. 

q) Provide a spatial framework that indicates appropriate development 




6. KEY PGDS 

INTERVENTIONS 



to general key issues 

that emerged from the 

PSDF process and 

from the terms of 

reference stated in the 

Service Level 

Agreement. 



157 

December 2011 

regions and corridors based on the comparative economic advantages of 

the subject areas. 

r) Provide strategy to ensure that infrastructure spending has a long‐term 

focus which is not subject to short‐term political cycles and IDP budgets 

only. 



u) Revisit study on desirability of development of cargo facilities and chartered 

cargo air services out of Alexander Bay, Upington and Kimberley airports 

(previous work was not conclusive). 

v) Stipulate off‐sets for detrimental impacts of mining on agriculture with 

specific reference to water pollution, dust, deterioration of roads, etc. 

w) Unlock potential of tourism markets, especially in rural areas where new 

product opportunities for cultural, adventure and ecotourism exist. 

a) Create a transformed and vibrant agricultural sector with an increasing 

contribution to the provincial economic growth, job creation and food 

security. 

b) Create work opportunities through innovative use of resources and 





f) Ensure on‐going and sustainable environmental management. 

g) Establish, develop and support SMMEs and cooperatives, and community 

initiatives. 

h) Promote and develop the Northern Cape as a globally competitive tourism 

resource and destination. 

i) Promote economic growth through sustainable minerals exploitation and 

development. 




m) Reduce greenhouse gas emissions, climate change impact and improve 

air/atmospheric quality. 

n) Reduce the transport infrastructure backlog for economic growth and 

development by 2014. 


p) Support coherent implementation of the Comprehensive Rural 

Development Program (CRDP). 

a) Provide a manual for alignment of national, provincial and local level policy. 

b) Improve communication between Provincial Government and 

municipalities pertaining to planning, land‐use, etc. 

c) Provide guidelines to ensure compliance of SDFs of district and local 

municipal with PSDF. 

d) Provide guidelines for training, education and mentorship with regard to 

implementation of PSDF and its strategies (land use planning is challenging 

due to a lack of institutional capacity). 

e) Undertake inventory of available institutional capacity (i.e. what type of 

professionals are available and where). Provincial Government should help 

to address shortcoming and build capacity. 

f) Provide spatial and policy framework for integration of sectoral interests. 

g) Provide guidance pertaining to long‐term management of the coastal zone 

through the implementation of appropriate overlay zones. 




H.2 WAY FORWARD 



December 2011 

h) Identify and address legislation and policy that create barriers for 


H.2.1 METODOLOGY FOR PHASE 3 AND PHASE 4 

The process and methodology for the preparation of Volume 3 and Volume 4 was presented to by 

the Project Management Committee. Key steps to be taken include: 

a) Further consultation with: 

(i) Departments & sectoral institutions 

(ii) Municipalities regarding area‐specific goals, objectives & implementation strategies 

(iii) Public & other general stakeholders 

b) Further interrogation of: 

(i) Sectoral strategies & action plans 

(ii) IDPs & SDFs of district and local municipalities 

c) Investigating key themes and aspects identified in context of: 

(i) Terms of Reference in the Service Level Agreement. 

(ii) Supplementary aspects listed in Annexure A of the Terms of Reference. 

(iii) Objectives stated in the approved Inception Phase Report dated 24 February 2011. 

d) Preparing a ‘package of plans’ and ‘policies & strategies’ in a standard format 

The figure below provides a synopsis of the methodology and process to be followed. 

Step 1: Collation & Interpretation of Info from Vol 1 & 2 

Step 2: Swot Analysis to determine Priority Issues 

Step 3: Determine Spatial Vision that addresses Priority Issues 

Step 4: Based upon Spatial Vision & through on‐going Stakeholder 

Consultation, prepare the following: 

VOLUME 3: 

‘Package of Plans’ which serve as 

spatial directives 

NORTHERN CAPE 

PSDF 

VOLUME 4: 

‘Non‐spatial’ policy & strategies 

under sectoral programs 

Figure H.2: Basic steps towards preparation of Volume 3 and Volume 4. 

158 

1. Priority Matrix 

2. Spatial Structuring 

Elements 

3. Spatial Planning 

Categories 




H.2.2 SUBMISSION TO PROJECT STEERING COMMITTEE 



159 

December 2011 

This draft of Volume 2 will be presented for consideration to the Project Steering Committee on 29 

November 2011. The report needs to be considered in context of the following principles: 

a) Volume 2 is an inventory of the key economic, social, infrastructural and environmental 

characteristics of the province to be addressed in Volumes 3 and 4. The information was 

drawn from the data provided by the DRD&LR and the various sectors, the stakeholder 

consultation process undertaken, and additional sources explored by the service provider. 

b) The written content, maps and figures presented in Volume 2 are, in general, direct quotes 

from the above information base and therefore do not necessarily represent the quality 

and format that will characterise the work of the service provider in Volume 3 and 4 and in 

the final PSDF document. 

c) The significance of perceived inaccuracies should be adjudicated in context of their 

potential to have a meaningful effect on the PSDF as a whole. 

d) Section H: Summary of Key Aspects is the primary component of Volume 2. Committee 

members need to ensure that all their sectoral interests have been listed in this section. 

e) The process of preparing Volumes 3 and 4 would involve ongoing information‐gathering. It 

would therefore not be practical and appropriate to, at this stage, consider Volume 2 as a 

final and complete product. Volume 2 should rather be seen as ‘work in progress’ to be 

completed together with Volumes 3 and 4. 

f) The Project Management Committee accordingly recommends that Volume 2 be approved 

by the Project Steeering Committee. 

DENNIS MOSS PARTNERSHIP 

NOVEMBER 2011 






SECTION I: REFERENCE FRAMEWORK 

160 

December 2011 

Alexander, D. 1990. Bioregionalism: Science or Sensibility? Environmental Ethics 12(2) 161‐173. 

Atkinson, D. 2008. Promoting the second economy in small and medium‐sized towns. Pretoria: The 

Presidency. 

Badcock, B. 2002. Making sense of cities: A geographical survey. London: Edward Arnold. 

Berg, P. 2002. Bioregionalism (a definition) http://www.diggers.org/freecitynews/‐ 

discl/00000019.htm 

Binns‐Ward, A.G. 2005: Ex Parte: Lagoon Bay Lifestyle Estate (Pty) Ltd & Mr M E Botha. In Re: 

Appropriate Consideration of Development Applications. Furnished to: Jan S De Villiers, Tyger 

Valley. 

Birdlife International 2011: Important Bird Areas factsheet: Orange River Mouth Wetland. 

http://www.birdlife.org/datazone/sitefactsheet.php?id=7098 

Botes, A. 2011: Budget speech by MEC for Social development by Alvin Botes. 5 April 2011. 

http://www.info.gov.za/speech/DynamicAction?pageid+461&sid=17611&tid=31597 

Brand, F. 2002: Application for the development and management of specified coastal areas – 

Namakwa District Municipality. Coastal Management Plan, Namakwa. 

Carter, H. 1981. The study of Urban Geography. London: Edward Arnold. 

Case, K.E. and Fair, R.C. 1999: Principles of Economics (5 th ed). Prentice‐Hall. 

CEPF, 2003: The Succulent Karoo Hotspot: Ecosystem Profile: Critical Ecosystem Partnership Fund. 

http://www.cepf.net. 

Clarke, B.M., Meyer, W.F., Ewart‐Smith, C., Pulfrich, A. and Highes, J. 1999: Integrated overview f 

diamond mining in the Benguela Current Region. Synthesis and assessment of information on the 

BCLME Thematic Report 3. Benguela Current Large Marine Ecosystem Project. 

Chapin III, F.S., Zaveleta, E.S., Eviners, V.T., Naylor, R.L., Vitousek, P.M., Reynolds, H.L., Hooper, 

D.U., Lavorel, S., Sala, O.E., Hobbie, S.E., Mack, M.C., and Diaz, S. 2000. Consequences of changing 

biodiversity. Nature Insight, 405 (6783): 234‐242. 

Cheshire, P. 1990. Explaining the recent performance of the European Community’s major urban 

regions. Urban Studies 27: 311‐33. 

Chittenden Nicks de Villiers Africa, 2007: Frances Baard District Municipality Spatial Development 

Framework, October 2007. 






December 2011 

Colvin, C., Le Maitre, D., Saayman, I., and Hughes, S. 2007: Introduction to Aquifer Dependent 

Ecosystems in South Africa. WRC TT 301/07. 

CPSI, 2004; Sanitation: Innovation Insights. www.cpsi.co.za 

CSIR, 2004: State of the Environment Report (SOER): The Northern Cape Province of South Africa. 

Department of Tourism, Environment and Conservation: Kimberley. 

CSIR, DME and Eskom, 2001: South African Renewable Energy Resource Database. 

www.csir.co.za/environmentek/sarerd/contact.html 

CSIR, 2002: Sustainability analysis of human settlements in South Africa. BOUTEK: Pretoria. 

Cowan, G.I. (ed) 1993: South Africa and the Ramsar Convention. DEAT. Pretoria. 

Diederichs, N., O’Regan, D., Sullivan, C., Fry, M., Mander, M., Haines, C‐J., and McKenzie, M. 2005: 

Orange River Basin: Baseline Assessment Report. NeWater. 

Denzin, N.K., and Lincoln, Y.S., 1994: Handbook of qualitative research (first edition). Sage 

Publications. University of California. 

Department of Agriculture, 2003: LandCare Areawide Planning. Resource Conservation. Western 

Cape Provincial Department of Agriculture. Elsenburg. 

Department of Economic Affairs and Tourism, 2003: Fishing and Mariculture Sector Development 

Strategy. Northern Cape Province. June 2003. 

Department of Environmental Affairs and Tourism, 2001: A Bioregional Approach to South Africa’s 

Protected Areas – 2001/2002. Pretoria. 

Department of Environmental Affairs and Tourism, 2000: White paper for sustainable coastal 

development in South Africa. Coastal Management Policy Program. 

Department of Environmental Affairs and Tourism (DEAT), 1998: A National Strategy for IEM in 

South Africa, Discussion Document. DEAT, Pretoria. 

Department of Minerals and Energy, 2003: White Paper on Renewable Energy. November 2003. 

Department of Provincial and Local Government (DPLG), 2000: IDP Guide Pack. Formeset Printers 

Cape (Pty). Supported by the German Agency for Technical Co‐operation (GTZ). 

Department of Water Affairs and Forestry, 2008: Integrated water quality management plan for 

the Vaal River system: Water Quality Management Strategy. Directorate National Water 

Resource Planning. 

Department of Water Affairs and Forestry, 2008: Regional and internal bulk water services: 

Northern Cap summary report. 

161 






December 2011 

Department of Water Affairs and Forestry, 2005: Olifants/Doorn Water Management Area 

Internal Strategic Perspective. Report No. PWMA 17/000/00/0305. 

Department of Water Affairs and Forestry, 2004: Internal Strategic Perspective – System: 

Overarching. February 2004. P RSAD000/00/0104. 

Development Planning Indaba Report, 2004. Government. Sun City: North West Province, 29‐30 

March 2004. 

Dumanski, J. and Smyth, A.J. 1993: The issues and challenges of sustainable land management. 

International Workshop on Sustainable Land Management for the 21 st century, University of 

Lethbridge. http://www.fao.org/docrep/T1079E/T1079E00.htm 

Earl, A., Malzbender, D., Turton, A. & Manzungu, E. 2005: A Preliminary Basin Profile of the 

Orange/Senqu River. INWENT. 

Eekhout, S., King, J.M. & Wackernagel, 1997: Classification of South African rivers. Volume 1. DEAT, 

Pretoria. 

Enviro‐Fish Africa, 2003a. State of Play Report. Northern Cape Provincial Coastal Management 

Program. Prepared for the Department of Agriculture, Land Reform, Environment and 

Conservation. Kimberley. 

Erasmus, B.P.J 2004: On Route in South Africa. Jeppestown: Jonathan Ball Publishers. 

Evans, H.E. 1992. A virtuous circle model of rural‐urban development: Evidence from a Kenyan 

small town and its hinterland. Journal of Development 28: 640‐667. 

FAMDA, 2002: Northern Cape Experimental Mussel Harvesting Management Plan. Compiled by 

the Fishing and Mariculture Development Company of the Northern Cape (FAMDA) in consultation 

and approval of the Department of Marine and Coastal Management. 

Ferguson, L. 2007: The United Nations World Tourism Organisation (Abstract). New Political 

Economy. 12(4). 

Ferris, L. 2000: The Conceptualisation of Environmental Justice within the context of the South 

African Constitution. Unpublished LLD dissertation, University of Stellenbosch. In Currie, I. and De 

Waal, J. 2005: The Bill of Rights Handbook. Fifth Edition. Juta and Co. Ltd, Wetton. 

Forum for the Future, 2010: The Five Capitals Model – a framework for sustainability. 

http://www.forumforthefuture.org/projects/the‐five‐capitals 

Gaile, G.L. 1992. Improving rural‐urban linkages through small‐town market based development. 

Third World Planning Review 14: 131‐148. 

Health Systems Trust 2008/2009: The District Health Barometer 2008/09. HealthLink. 

http://www.hst.org.za/publications/district‐health‐barometer‐200809 

Hartshorne, T.A. 1980. Interpreting the city: An urban geography. New York: John Wiley 

162 






December 2011 

Hinderink, J & Titus, M.J. 2002. Small town and regional development: Major findings and policy 

implications from comparative research. Urban Studies 39: 379‐391. 

Hoffman, T. and Ashwell, A. 2001: Nature Divided: Land degradation in South Africa. University 

of Cape Town. 

Hoyt, H. 1939. The structure and growth of residential neighbourhoods in American cities. 

Washington, DC: Federal Housing Administration. 

ISSD, 1995. Youth source book on Sustainable Development. http://iisd.ca/youth/ysbk000.htm 

IUCN, 1980. World conservation strategy: Living resource conservation for sustainable 

development. IUCN, Gland, Switzerland. 

Kostka, B 2002: Namaqualand – A short history of nearly everything. 

http://www.stripedmouse.com/documents/HistoryofNamaqualand.pdf 

Kelbaugh, D. 1997: Common Place: Toward neighborhood and regional design. Seattle: University 

of Washington Press. 

King, N.A., Maree, G., and Muir, A. 2009: Freshwater Systems: Chapter 13. In Fuggle, R.F, and 

Rabie, M.A. Environmental Management in South Africa (2 nd ed). Cape Town: JUTA. 

//Khara Hais Municipality, 2009: //Khara Hais Municipality Spatial Development Framework – 24 

April 2009. Prepared by Dennis Moss Partnership. 

Laker, G. 2009: Why ORP was never expanded. Water Research Commission. Waterwheel 

September/October. 

Lebert, T. (ed) 2007: A National Review of the Comprehensive Agricultural Support Program. 

Department of Agriculture. Umhlaba Rural Services. 

Lynch, K. 1984: Good City Form. MIT Press. New York. 

Lynch, K. 1998: Good City Form. MIT Press. New York. 

Loheed, B., Howard‐McHugh, S. and Stein, N. 2011: City as Change: Collaborations for Sustainable 

Urban Life. Presented to the Massachusetts Historical Society Environmental History Seminar. 

Earthos Institute. 

Makiti Guides and Tours, 2008: Northern Cape: Province Overview. 

http://www.culturalguiding.com/Courses/NorthernCapeProvince/ProvinceOverview/ProvinceOver 

view/1486.pdf ‐ accessed on 13 August 2011. 

Margules, C.R. and Pressey, R.L. 2000. Systematic Conservation Planning. Nature Insight, 405 

(6783): 243‐253. 

163 






December 2011 

Markusen, A. & Gwiasda, V. 1994. Multipolarity and the layering of functions in world cites: New 

York City’s struggle to stay on top. International Journal of Urban and Regional Research 18: 168 ‐ 

193. 

May, H. and Lahiff, E. 2006: Land Reform in Namaqualand, 1994‐2005: A review. Journal of Arid 

Environments. 

McKibben, B. 1999: The end of nature. New York. Anchor. 

McTaggert, W. R. 1993: Bioregionalism and Regional Geography: Place, People and Networks. 

Canadian Geographer 37(4): 307‐319. 

Mebratu, D. 1998: Sustainability and sustainable development: Historical and conceptual 

overview. Environmental Impact Assessment and Review, 18:493‐520. 

Miller, K. 1996: Balancing the Scales: Guidelines for increasing biodiversity’s chances through 

bioregional management. Washington: World Resources Institute. 

Moore, R.L. & Graefe, A.R. 1994. Attachments to recreation settings: the case of rail‐trail users. 

Leisure Science 16: 17‐31. 

Moughtin, C. 1997: Urban Design – Green Dimensions. Architectural Press, Oxford. 

National Urban Development Framework. 2009. Working draft prepared for Co‐operative 

Governance and Traditional Affairs and the Presidency, in partnership with the Cities Network. 

Nel, E. 2005. Local Economic Development in South African small towns. In Nel E & Rogerson C.M. 

(eds): Local economic development in the developing world: the experience of Southern Africa, 253. 

New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction Press. 

Norberg‐Schulz, C. 1993. Genius Loci: Towards a phenomenology of architecture. Rizzoli 

International Publications, Inc. New York. 

Northern Cape Business, 2011: The Guide to Business and Investment in the Northern Cape 

Province. Department of Economic Development and Tourism. Northern Cape Province. 

2011/2012 Edition. 

Northern Cape Government, 2011: Northern Cape Provincial Growth and Development Strategy. 

Draft 4. 

Northern Cape Rural Development Strategy Papers. 2010. Strategy Paper 3. 

Northern Cape Tourism Authority, 2011. Inabus Tours: http://www.inabustours.com/ 

NorthernCape.pdf. 

Oranje, M., van Huyssteen. E. & Meiklejohn, C. 2008. The National Spatial Development 

Perspective (NSDP) and assumptions on small town economic investment by government. Position 

paper at a Workshop hosted by department of Science and Technology. 

164 




Pacione, M. 2001. Urban Geography – A global perspective. London: Routledge 



165 

December 2011 

Pegels, A. 2009: Prospects for Renewable Energy in South Africa: Mobilising the private sector. 

DIE. (Discussion Paper, 23/2009). 

Pfueller, S. 2008: Role of bioregionalism in Bookmark Biosphere Reserve, Australia. 

Environmental Conservation 35(2): 173‐186. 

Phethogo Consulting, 2007: Kgalagadi District Municipality Spatial Development Framework 

2006/2007. 

Pixley ka Seme District Municipality, 2007: Pixley ka Seme District Municipality Spatial 

Development Framework, 9 November 2007. 

Rondinelli, D.A. 1988. Market town and agriculture in Africa. The role of small urban centers in 

economic development. African Urban Quarterly 3: 3‐10. 

Rolston, H. 1994: Conserving natural value: Perspectives in biological diversity series. New York: 

Columbia University Press. 

Shushu, G.N.J., 2011: Budget Speech by MEC of Agriculture, Land Reform and Rural Development 

in the Northern Cape, 17 March 2011. 

SKA Africa Brochure, 2011: An outstanding and affordable site for the SKA: Fact Sheet 4. 

http://www.ska.ac.za/download/fact_sheet_skasite_2011.pdf 

Smith, R., Simard, C., and Sharpe, A., 2001: A proposed approach to environment and sustainable 

development indicators based on capital. Prepared for the National Round Table on the 

Environment and the Economy’s Environment and Sustainable Development Indicators Initiative. 

Schmithusen, J. 1964: Was ist eine Landschaft. Erdkundliches Wissen. 

Smith, R.H.T. 1965. Method and purpose in functional town classification. Annals of the 

Association of American Geographers 55: 539‐48. 

Spatial Development Initiatives, 2003. Profile of the Gariep SDI. 

http://www.africansdi.com/members/iii/sdi.nsf/d2f50fb68dib021142556c3f00611326/325ae8f10 

3631d5242256cda0033cf94a!OpenDocument. 

State of the Environmental Report (SOER), 2005: Northern Cape Province. Department of 

Tourism, Environment and Conservation. CSIR Environmentek. 

Statistics South Africa, 2011: Revised Census 2011 – Strategy Document (2010018‐v.4.3). 

http://www.statssa._gov.za/census2011/documents/Population_Census_2011_Strategy_V4.3.1_2 

.pdf 

Statistics South Africa, 2008: Community Survey 2007: Statistical Release Basic Results 

Municipalities. P0301.1. www.stats.gov.za 






166 

December 2011 

Tacoli, C. 2004: Rural‐Urban linkages and Pro‐Poor Agricultural Growth: An Overview. Prepared 

for OECD DAC POVNET. Helsinki Workshop, 17‐18 June 2004. 

Tapscott, C. 1999: An overview of the socio‐economics of some key maritime industries in the 

Benguela Current region. A report prepared on behalf of the Benguela Current Large Marine 

Ecosystem Project. Windhoek. 

The Presidency, 2006: National Spatial Development Perspective (NSDP). Policy Co‐ordination and 

Advisory Service. Republic of South Africa. 

TIPS, 2008: Potential for a South Africa Aquaculture Industry on the Northern Cape’s 

Namaqualand Coast. Second Economic Strategy: Addressing inequality and economic 

management. Feike Natural Resource Management Advisors. September 2008. 

Tuan, Y.F. 1977. Space and Place: The perspective of experience. Minneapolis: University of 

Minnesota Press. 

UN Millennium Project, 2005: Investing in Development: A Practical Plan to Achieve the 

Millennium Development Goals. New York. 

USAid, 2009: Pepfar: Activities in Northern Cape Province. Fiscal Year 2009. 

Van den Berg, S., Siebrits, K. and Lekezwa, B. 2009: Efficiency and equity effects of social grants in 

South Africa. Stellenbosch Working Papers 15/10. 

Van der Merwe, I.J., and Zietsman, H.L. 2011. Development Potential of Urban Settlements in the 

Northern Cape. A research study undertaken for Dennis Moss Partnership. August 2011. 

Van der Merwe, I.J, Ferreira, S.L.A. and Zietsman, H.L. 2005: Growth Potential of towns in the 

Western Cape. Centre for Geographical Analysis. Stellenbosch University. 

Van der Merwe, I.J. 1983. Die stad en sy omgewing. Stellenbosch: University Publishers. 

Urban‐Econ Development Economists, 2011: Northern Cape Local Economic Development 

Strategy. January 2011. 

Van Wyk, J. 1999. Planning Law: Principles and Procedures of Land‐use Management. Juta & Co. 

Wagner, H.R. 1983: Phenomenology of consciousness and sociology of the life‐world: An 

Introductory study. Edmonton: University of Alberta Press. 

Wandschneider, T. 2003: Small Towns and Local Economic Development in India, NRI Report 2767, 

World Bank and Natural Resources Institute: Kent. 

Weliwita, A. & Okpala, D. 2004: Promoting positive rural‐urban linkages for sustainable 

development. Habitat Debate 10, UN‐Habitat. 

Winkler, H. 2005: Renewable energy policy in South Africa: policy options for renewable 

electricity. Energy Policy. Elserivier. 






December 2011 

World Travel and Tourism Council, 2011. South Africa: Travel and Tourism Economic Impact. 

www.wttc,org 

WRI, IUCN, and UNEP. 1992: Global Biodiversity strategy: Guidelines for action to save, study and 

use earth’s biotic wealth sustainably and equitably. Washington: World Resources Institute. 

WWF, 2008: Nama Karoo. In: Encyclopaedia of Earth. Cutler, J.C. (ed). Environmental 

Information Coalition, National Council for Science and the Environment. 

http://www.eoearth.org/article/Nama_Karoo 

Wynberg, R. 2002: A decade of biodiversity conservation and use in South Africa: tracking 

progress from the Rio Earth Summit of Johannesburg World Summit on Sustainable Development. 

South African Journal of Science. 98: 233‐243. 

167 


ANNEXURE 1 

Record of Public Participation 

September 2011

ANNEXURE 1.1 

Presentation made in Kuruman 

5 September 2011

ANNEXURE 2 

Study report: Development Potential of Urban 

Settlements in the Northern Cape. Van der Merwe, 

I.J., and Zietsman, H.L. 2011

ANNEXURE 3 

Minutes of Project Management Committee 

Meeting on 1 November 2011 regarding Volume 2

ANNEXURE 4 

Inventory of Completed Tasks and Way Forward 

Volume 1 & 2

ANNEXURE 5 

Agenda of Project Steering Committee Meeting 29 

November 2011

ANNEXURE 6 

PPT Presentation to Project Steering Committee on 

29 November 2011

ANNEXURE 7 

PPT Presentation (Way Forward) to Project Steering 

Committee on 29 November 2011

ANNEXURE 8 

Minutes of Project Steering Committee Meeting 29 

November 2011

ANNEXURE 9 

Northern Cape PSDF DVD

NORTHERN CAPE PROVINCIAL SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK 

RECORD OF PUBLIC PARTICIPATION 

SEPTEMBER 2011 

1 INTRODUCTION 

First‐round public meetings were held in Kimberley, De Aar, Upington, Springbok and Kuruman. 

The meeting in Kuruman was not originally provided for in terms of the Service Level Agreement. 

However it was agreed between Mr. Gerhard de Bruin of the Department of Rural Development 

and Land Reform and the ervice provider that such a meeting be held as part of the process. 

Notwithstanding significant efforts by the Office of the Premier, the Department of Rural 

Development and Land Reform and the ervice provider, the attendance was not satisfactory (with 

the possible exception of Upington). However, this is normally the situation with meetings of this 

nature and should not be considered a significant shortcoming and a threat to the ultimate 

outcome of the process. The key objectives for this round of meetings were to create a sense of 

enthusiasm for the PSDF and to provide an opportunity for identification and discussion of key 

issues. These objectives have been achieved to a meaningful extent. 

The key aspects presented and the subsequent stakeholder comment were categorised in 

accordance with the approved focal areas of Volume 1 of the PSDF, namely: 

a) Land‐use planning in terms of a standard procedure. 

b) Establishment of integrated land management areas. 

c) Ensuring high‐quality settlement and infrastructural development. 

d) Ensuring appropriateness of provincial, municipal and neighbourhood boundaries. 

e) Regional development, government spending and performance management. 

f) Enhancing opportunities for private sector investment. 

As per the instruction of the Department of Rural Development and Land Reform, the various 

presentations, to some extent, addressed site‐specific issues. Accordingly, the comments received 

responded to the presentation and focussed primarily on the local environment. However, a 

number of generic issues have been identified that are of importance to the province as a whole. 

The record of proceedings is as follows: 

17 Market St • P.O. Box 371 • Stellenbosch 7599 • SOUTH AFRICA 

Tel: +27 (0)21 887 0124 • Fax: +27 (0)21 886 5393 • email: info@dmp.co.za • website: www.dmp.co.za 

Dennis Moss Planners & Architects (Pty) Ltd. Reg. No. 2003/007711/07 

Directors: DF Moss, URP (SA) BA M (URP) M SAPI • GC de Klerk, URP (SA) B Econ M (URP) M SAPI • M Le Roux-Cloete, Pr Arch, BAS, B Arch (UCT), MIArch, CIA 

SW vd Merwe, Pr Sci Nat, NHD (Nature Conservation) SACNASP • JMH Lackay, Pr S Arch, T MIArch • PJ Niemann, Pr Arch, B Arch (UFS) MIArch, CIA

2 KIMBERLEY PUBLIC MEETING (16 AUG 2011): KEY ASPECTS PRESENTED AND COMMENT 

MADE BY PARTICIPANTS 

2.1 Key aspect presented: Undertaking land‐use planning in terms of a standard procedure. 

Comment received: 

a) Land‐use designation must provide for protection of high‐potential agricultural 

land. 

2.2 Key aspect presented: Establishment of integrated land management areas. 


a) Desirability of implementing strategies such as Protected Nature Areas and Special 

Management Areas must be explored in collaboration with organised agriculture. 

b) PSDF must provide for biodiversity conservation in terms of SANBI’s ‘critical 


c) Cross‐border conservation initiatives must be promoted – the merit and desirability 

of UNESCO biosphere reserves must be explored. 

2.3 Key aspect presented: Ensuring high‐quality settlement and infrastructural 

development. 


a) PSDF must provide broad guidelines for improvement of subsidised housing – 

district and local municipalities must adopt such guidelines in their SDFs. 

b) Place‐specific planning and design criteria are to be formulated by district and local 

municipalities. 

2.4 Key aspect presented: Ensuring appropriateness of provincial, municipal and 

neighbourhood boundaries. 


a) Traditional parameters to be considered as a key criterion in the demarcation of 

municipal boundaries. 

2.5 Key aspect presented: Regional development, government spending and performance 

management. 


a) Dedicated study report on settlements which forms part of the PSDF is to be used 

during the preparation of SDFs of district and local municipalities. 

b) Clear guidelines are to be provided for the use of the settlement report for the use 

of resources and performance management. 

c) Consideration should be given to the enlargement of Boegoeberg Dam and the 

Prieska Dam. 

d) Infrastructure spending should have a long‐term focus and should not be subject to 

short‐term political cycles and IDP budgets only. 

2.6 Key aspect presented: Enhancing opportunities for private sector investment. 


a) Entrepreneurship and associated development opportunities must be supported. 

b) Communities should benefit meaningfully from larger‐scale physical development. 

2.7 General comment received: 

2

a) How will conflict between national, provincial and local policy be avoided? 

b) What is the relationship between existing policy and legislation and the PSDF? 

c) Municipalities should focus on the re‐use of resources, specifically water. 

3 DE AAR PUBLIC MEETING (17 AUG 2011): KEY ASPECTS PRESENTED AND COMMENT 




a) Land use planning is challenging due to a lack of institutional capacity. PSDF must 

provide training, education and mentorship in this regard. 

b) An inventory of available institutional capacity is needed – what type of 

professionals are available and where. Provincial Government should help to 

address shortcoming and build capacity. 



a) PSDF must provide for biodiversity conservation in terms of SANBI’s ‘critical 


c) PSDF must provide innovative strategies to help conserve conservation‐worthy 


c) Sustainable use of formal conservation areas and their resources must be 

enhanced. 

3.3 Key aspect presented: Ensuring high‐quality settlement and infrastructural development. 


a) Guidelines for improvement of subsidised housing as presented must be mandatory 

on district and local municipalities. 




a) Municipalities must be encouraged to function across their boundaries. 

b) All stakeholders should think and participate beyond their areas of jurisdiction as it 

relates to the PSDF process. 


management. 


a) Although the jurisdictional area of the Northern Cape Province was enlarged the 

population became less. It seems as if the Treasury disregard the fact that these 

populated areas must still be provided with basic services. 

b) Provision must be made for infrastructure development in order to facilitate new 




3

a) Educate local communities in order to eradicate the notion of living from hand to 

mouth. 

b) Government must function like a business. 

c) Commercial banks must be encouraged to extend their input into LED and the 

benefits associated with banking charters must be used more efficiently. 

d) Entrepreneurship and associated development opportunities must be supported. 

e) Current legislative process creates barriers for future development. 


a) Communication between Provincial Government and municipalities pertaining to 

planning, land‐use, etc. has to be improved. 

b) The local Economic and Development Cluster should be extended in order to create 

institutional capacity for the administration of the PSDF. 

c) Future invitations to attend PSDF workshops must clearly state who are required to 

attend and why. 

d) The preparation and implementation of an efficient Water Demand Conservation 

Strategy should be mandatory on all municipalities. 

4 UPINGTON PUBLIC MEETING (18 AUG 2011): KEY ASPECTS PRESENTED AND COMMENT 




a) Development along the Gariep River must be addressed in a similar manner by all 

relevant municipalities. 

b) //Khara Hais SDF is currently under revision. Are there any new aspects in the PSDF 

that are to be addressed as part of the revision? 

c) //Khara Hais SDF is to serve as a model for planning of district and local 


d) //Khara Hais Tourism Plan is presented as a model for tourism planning in the Green 

Kalahari and beyond. 



a) PSDF must provide innovative strategies to help conserve conservation‐worthy 


c) Innovative strategies are to be formulated to promote cross‐border land‐use and 

conservation in support of the Green Kalahari concept. 





b) District and local SDFs should incorporate place‐specific guidelines for architecture 

and landscaping. 



4


a) Municipalities must be encouraged to function across their boundaries in particular 

as it relates to the use of common resources such as the Gariep River. 

b) Appropriateness and efficiency of cross‐boundary (e.g. with Namibia and Botswana) 

agreements must be investigated. 

c) Municipalities must be included in formulation and establishment of cross‐border 

agreements (currently primarily the function of national government). 


management. 


a) Desirability of new development should be strictly subject to the availability of 

resources, with specific reference to water and bulk services infrastructure. 

b) PSDF must reflect the importance of the envisaged solar power industry. 



a) Government must fulfil its function as land‐use co‐ordinator. 

b) Gaps (lack of co‐operation) exist between the different sectors active in the 

Northern Cape as well as between the communities. How will such entities be 

involved in the PSDF and future governance? 

c) Commercial banks must be encouraged to extend their input into LED and the 


d) The Sustainable Development Initiative (SDI) model promoted by the //Khara Hais 

SDF should be adopted by the PSDF. 

e) Entrepreneurship and associated development opportunities must be supported. 

f) Legislative processes that stifle sustainable development should be identified and 

reviewed. 

g) The Karsten Women Trust should be considered as a model for public‐private 

partnerships. 



planning, land‐use, etc. must be improved. 

b) Brilliant presentation on a document (i.e. the PSDF) that has the potential to 

provide the Northern Cape with an appropriate way forward. 

c) Development of green energy industry tends to be hampered due to all interested 

parties not working together. Constructive participation of all relevant departments 

and stakeholders is imperative. 

d) Important that all district and local municipal SDFs must strive to achieve the goals 

and objectives of the PSDF. How they will achieve this must be clearly indicated in 

the lower sphere documents. 

e) How will the Provincial Government ensure that district and local SDFs are drafted 

in furtherance of the PSDF? 

f) Tension between Integrated Development Plans and SDFs must be addressed. 

g) How will comments and information received during the PSDF‐process be 

coordinated? 

5

5 SPRINGBOK PUBLIC MEETING (23 AUG 2011): KEY ASPECTS PRESENTED AND COMMENT 


5.1 Key aspect presented presented: Undertaking land‐use planning in terms of a standard 

procedure. 


a) Land‐use along the coastline must be addressed in a similar manner by all relevant 


b) Consideration should be given to designating the coastal zone as a core 

conservation area. 

c) Appropriate ecological linkages should be created between conservation areas. 

These should be managed for the purposes of biodiversity conservation and 

sustainable agriculture and tourism. 



a) The Northern Cape incorporates the Richtersveld Botanical and Landscape World 

Heritage Site which sits in the heart of the Succulent Karoo Biodiversity Hotspot. 

PSDF must enhance long‐term sustainability of the world heritage site. 



c) Cross‐border conservation initiatives must be promoted – the merit and desirability 

of UNESCO biosphere reserves must be explored. 






and landscaping with specific reference to those inspired by the Nama culture and 

the Griqua culture. 




a) Appropriateness and efficiency of cross‐border arrangements with Namibia must be 

investigated with specific reference to the Noord‐Oewer / Vioolsdrift irrigation 

scheme. 

b) PSDF must enhance management of Richtersveld Transfrontier Conservation Area. 

c) Emphasis should be placed on the economic potential of tourism and the associated 

agencies. 

d) Consolidation of planning already done on the Orange River Mouth Ramsar Site and 

the Richtersveld Ais‐Ais Transfrontier Park. 

e) The Karas Region of Namibia and the Northern Cape Province share historical bonds 

with regard to its history, people and culture. To this end, some of the areas 

identified for further action are (i) the education and training sector, with the focus 

on ensuring that best practice is shared in skills development for economic growth, 

(ii) the further development of the Nama language and culture, (iii) exchange of 

learners’ support material and teacher development programs. 

6

f) The proposed Vioolsdrift dam should be considered a priority. 


management. 


a) Desirability of new development should be strictly subject to the availability of 

resources, with specific reference to water and bulk services infrastructure. 

b) PSDF must reflect the importance of the envisaged solar power industry. 

c) Development of the karakul industry, ostrich farming, the irrigation possibilities 

derived from the Gariep River, the commercialisation of goats and exchange around 

veterinary services are focus areas of implementation. 

d) Apart the diamond industry, there exist opportunities for the further development 

of both ferrous and non‐ferrous metals, as well as dimension stone. 



a) Commercial banks must be encouraged to extend their input into LED and the 


b) Legislative processes that stifle sustainable development should be identified and 

reviewed. 

c) A model community trust should be developed in order to optimise the distribution 

of benefits that result from the use of community‐based resources. 

d) Due consideration should be given to the proposed nuclear power installation at 

Hondeklipbaai. 

e) The proposed Gamsberg mine should adopt a strategy that would ensure ongoing 

socio‐economic development and environmental rehabilitation. 




b) Communication with local communities, education and mentorship regarding land‐ 

use planning and implementation is of key importance. 

c) PSDF must enhance integration of sectoral interests. 

d) Restoration of degraded areas in coastal zone must be priority. 

e) PSDF must provide guidance pertaining to long‐term management of the coastal 

zone through the implementation of appropriate overlay zones. 

7

6 KURUMAN PUBLIC MEETING (5 SEPTEMBER 2011): KEY ASPECTS PRESENTED AND 

COMMENT MADE BY PARTICIPANTS 



a) Land‐use planning and management must be standardised throughout 


b) Consideration should be given to designating agricultural reserves in areas where 

high‐potential agricultural soils and irrigation water occur. 

c) Appropriate ecological linkages should be created between conservation areas. 

These should be protected from development. 

d) SDF of John Taolo Gaetsewe District Municipality should be aligned with the PSDF to 

the extent possible. 

e) A dedicated SPC has to be created for mining. 



a) Viability of establishing a Special Management Area (SMA) over areas such as the 

Kuruman Country Club and groups of game farms. 



c) Land‐use plan of the PSDF is to provide a basis for integration of mining activities 

with conservation. 

d) Loss of conservation‐worthy habitat through mining could be off‐set through ex‐situ 

conservation projects. 






and landscaping premised upon historic design precedents and vernacular. 

c) Planning and design of industrial and mining infrastructure have to be undertaken 

in accordance with dedicated design criteria. 




a) Appropriateness of the John Gaetsewe District Municipality boundaries has to be 

interrogated against inter alia traditional domain parameters. 

b) Merging of local municipalities should be considered where appropriate. 


management. 


a) An integrated water, growth and development strategy is a key requirement. 

b) PSDF must reflect critical shortages and focal areas for bulk infrastructure provision. 

c) PSDF is to stipulate off‐sets for detrimental impacts of mining on agriculture with 

specific reference to water pollution, dust, deterioration of roads, etc. 

8



a) Legislative processes that stifle sustainable development should be identified and 

reviewed. 

b) PSDF should focus on removing planning obstacles for sustainable land‐use (e.g. 

mining) in terms of sound business principles. 

c) There is no efficient strategy through which the benefits from mining can reach the 

affected communities and environment. A model community trust should be 

developed in order to optimise the distribution of benefits that result from the use 

of community‐based resources. 

d) Industries should formulate strategies to sustain socio‐economic development after 

the life‐span of projects. 


a) Capacity of municipalities with regard to land‐use management and general 

governance has to be improved. Specific reference is made to the capacity to 

facilitate the use of resources to the benefit of all concerned. 

b) Communication between Provincial Government and municipalities pertaining to 


c) Communication with local communities, education and mentorship regarding land‐ 

use planning and implementation is of key importance. 

d) PSDF must enhance integration of sectoral interests. 

The various presentations and an abriged report of the meetings have been loaded on the 

website. 


9

NORTHERN CAPE PROVINCIAL SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT 

FRAMEWORK / DEVELOPMENT & RESOURCE MANAGEMENT PLAN 

Stakeholder Participation Meeting 

John Taolo Gaetsewe District 

Kuruman 

5 September 2011 

Provincial Spatial Development Framework/Development & Resources Management Plan 

1

1. 

DIAGNOSTIC REPORT : NATIONAL 

PLANNING COMMISSION 

Presented by Dr Jaco Mostert 

Northern Cape Provincial 

Government 

INTRODUCTION TO MEETING 

PRESENTATIONS @ KURUMAN 

JOHN TAOLO GAETSEWE DISTRICT 

5 SEPTEMBER 2011 

2. 

NORTHERN CAPE PROVINCIAL 

SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT 

FRAMEWORK 

Presented by SW van der Merwe 



2

AGENDA POINTS 

1. Opening and background 

2. Attendance register 

3. Setting the scene – What is the PSDF? 

4. Summary of progress to date - Volume 1 

5. Practical application of the PSDF 

6. Area specific needs and priorities 

7. Way forward 

8. Closure 


3

THE COMMISSION 

Office of the Premier of the Northern Cape & the Department of Rural 

Development and Land Reform jointly commissioned the preparation of a 

Provincial Development and Resource Management Plan / Provincial Spatial 

Development Framework for the Northern Cape. i.e. 

Required & prepared in terms of: 

The Northern Cape PSDF 

Northern Cape Planning and Development Act 7 of 1998 

Municipal Systems Act 32 of 2000 


4

OBJECTIVE OF MEETING 

Objective is to: 

a) Introduce the PSDF so as to promote a sense of ownership and enhance implementation efficiency. 

b) Encourage all stakeholders to think about the nature and quality of their places in a fresh manner and to 

express their meanings, wishes and aspirations. 

c) Provide opportunity for on‐going stakeholder input. 

PSDF, on its own, will not have any influence –it depends on committed leadership, good governance, 

integration of sectoral interests, full involvement of stakeholders !! 

“I have seen countries change, not because of the powerful, but because of ordinary people doing counter‐ 

cultural things. We must not depend on the powerful to change our country, we must depend on our own 

goodwill”. 

Professor Jonathan Jansen 


5

WHAT IS THE PSDF ? 

An over‐arching provincial policy and strategy that: 

1. Provides direction and guidance pertaining to future land use in the province. 

2. Reconciles and provides spatial context for provincial sectoral strategies. 

3. Promotes a ‘developmental state’ in accordance with legislation policy. 

4. Aligns environmental management in the Northern Cape with applicable international 

agreements, protocols and conventions. 

5. Gives effect to the overarching intent of the Northern Cape Provincial Growth and 

Development Strategy (PGDS) to ‘build a prosperous, sustainable and growing provincial 

economy to eradicate poverty and improves social development’. 

PSDF embodies integrated land‐use planning, i.e 

‘a participatory planning process aimed at integrating sectoral strategies, optimal allocation of 

resources between sectors and geographic areas and across the population in a manner that 

promotes sustainable growth, equity and the empowerment of the poor and marginalised’ 


6

CONTEXT AND STATUS OF THE PSDF 

PSDF is highest order in ‘package’ of land use frameworks & plans for the province 

& its component municipalities. 

Serves as manual for the preparation of the district and local municipal SDFs, 

providing for: 

Common vision and focus 

Standard format 

Autonomy and status of the various spheres of government are not 

undermined. 

NSDP 

PSDF 

DISTRICT MUNICIPALITY SDP 

LOCAL MUNICIPALITY SDP 


7

FORMAT & STRUCTURE OF THE PSDF 

VOLUME 1: CONTEXT & OVER‐ARCHING POLICY 

Context, policy and principle framework, and procedural guidance for the preparation of Volumes 2, 3 

and 4. 

VOLUME 2: PROFILE & ASPECTS ADDRESSED 

Key aspects to be addressed by the PSDF. Includes empirical evaluation of the growth potential of 

urban settlements. 

VOLUME 3: SPATIAL DIRECTIVES & GUIDELINES 

Spatial directives and guidelines for land‐use in province. Consists of a ‘package’ of plans. 

VOLUME 4: STRATEGIES, PROGRAMS & PROJECTS 

Strategies regarding key issues that emerged from inter alia the PSDF process, the PGDS, and the 

input provided by other sources. 


8

VISION FOR THE PSDF 

PSDF draws upon the vision of the Northern Cape PGDS, i.e…. 

’building a prosperous, sustainable growing provincial economy to eradicate poverty 

and improve social development’. 

Accordingly, the following cryptic vision was set for the PSDF, namely: 

‘….Enhancing our future….’ 


9

OVERARCHING GOAL 

‘…..TO PROMOTE SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT ….’ 

i.e. 

…..development that meets the needs of the present generation without 

compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs….. 

PGDS states that: 

sustainable social and economic development is imperative in order to address the 

most significant challenge facing the Northern Cape, i.e. poverty 

& 

the only effective means by which we can reduce poverty is through long‐term 

sustainable economic growth development. 


10

KEY ASPECTS OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 

Sustainable development occurs: 

At the intersection of three global imperatives, i.e. environmental 

integrity, human well‐being & economic efficiency. 

Where the three imperatives interact within an ‘interactive zone’. No 

sustainability outside this ‘interactive zone’. 

Sustainable development approach advocated by the PSDF constitutes the enhancement of human well‐ 

being and environmental integrity through the efficient use of the inherent resources (capital) of the 

province. 

Forms of capital 

Environmental 

Human 

Infrastructural 

Monetary 

Based upon the following principles: 

• Sustainable development cannot be ‘delivered’ to passive recipients –it has to be implemented in a 

participative and integrated manner. 

• Requires positive interventions and active participation of all concerned in a spirit of partnership. 

• Has to be ‘financed’ in an innovative manner. 


11

PLANNING & IMPLEMENTATION CONTEXT 

GLOBAL 

Agreements & conventions 

NATIONAL 

Legislation and policy 

PROVINCIAL 

Legislation & Policy 

DISTRICT 

SDFs & IDPs 

DISTRICT 

SDFs & IDPs 


12

PLANNING APPROACH ADOPTED 

PSDF prepared in terms of bioregional planning principles adapted to suit the site‐specific 

requirements of the Northern Cape. 

WHAT IS BIOREGIONAL PLANNING ?? 

‘Planning and land management that promote sustainable development within a specific 

geographical area (i.e. the bioregion), the boundaries of which are determined in 

accordance with environmental, social and economic criteria’ 

Place‐specific planning that recognise unique characteristics of planning area at all levels. 

Based upon local and global best‐practice , knowledge, science & technology. 

……It is not about solving problems for people, but rather creating circumstances for 

people to solve their own problems in a way that acknowledges the uniqueness and value 

of each person and place….. 

Bioregion is defined as a ‘geographical space that contains one whole or several nested 

ecosystems characterised by landforms, vegetative cover, human culture and history as 

identified by local communities, governments and scientists’. 


13

KEY ASPECTS, POLICY & PROCEDURAL GUIDELINES IN THE PSDF 

1. Land‐use planning in terms of a standard procedure. 

2. Establishment of integrated land management areas. 

3. Ensuring high‐quality settlement and infrastructural development. 

4. Ensuring appropriateness of provincial, municipal and neighbourhood 

boundaries. 

5. Regional development, government spending and performance management. 

6. Enhancing opportunities for private sector investment. 


14

1. LAND‐USE PLANNING 

Based upon a model comprising a matrix of: 

Core nature areas & protective buffer areas 

Agricultural areas 

Urban ‐related areas 


15

LAND USE INDICATED BY SPATIAL PLANNING CATEGORIES 

CATEGORY DESCRIPTION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA & PURPOSE 

Category A Designated Core 

Conservation Area 

(including the 

sensitive coastal 

zone) 

a) Areas of high conservation importance to be protected from 

development. 

b) Generally only non‐consumptive land‐uses allowed conditionally. 

Category B Buffer Area a) Areas that serve as a buffer between Category A and Category C 

areas. 

b) Providing an appropriate interim classification for conservation‐ 

worthy areas that do not have statutory protection, including 

ecological corridors and areas worthy of rehabilitation. 

c) Appropriate sustainable development and non‐consumptive land‐ 

uses may be allowed conditionally. 

Category C Agricultural areas Rural areas where extensive and intensive agriculture is practiced. 

Category D Urban‐related areas Areas accommodating a broad spectrum of urban‐related development 

and associated services and infrastructure. 

Category E Industrial areas 

(including mining) 

Category F Surface infrastructure 

and buildings 

Areas accommodating industrial activities and associated infrastructure 

and where very high intensity of human activity and consumptive land‐use 

occur. 

All surface infrastructure and buildings not catered for in the above 

categories, including roads, railway lines, power lines, communication 

structures, etc. 


16

CONCEPT PROVINCIAL LAND‐USE (SPC) PLAN 


17

SPCs & SUB‐CATEGORIES FOR MUNICIPAL LAND‐USE PLANNING 

Provincial SPC plan is to serve as a 

basis for detailed designation at the 

district and local level in accordance 

with defined Sub‐Categories. 

Municipalities are allowed to adapt 

the Sub‐Categories to cater for 

local, site‐specific circumstances 

Include all land zonings that are 

provided for under the existing 

zoning scheme regulations. 


18

MAPPING OF SPCs & SUB‐CATEGORIES 

Cadastral Unit 

Scale 

District 

Municipality Scale 


Local Municipality 

Scale 

SPCs 

ITEM SPC 

ZONING: DEPT. 

AGRICULTURE 

Farmstead D.g 

Crops 

Grazing 

Plantation 

Farm Roads 

4X4 Trail 

Streams 

Fences 

C.b 

C.a 

B.d 

F.e 

F.f 

B.c 

F.k 

19

EFFECTIVE INFORMATION MANAGEMENT: KEY ELEMENT OF THE PSDF 

To be achieved through a Spatial Planning Information System (SPIS) the objectives of 

which are to: 

a) Enable district and local municipalities to use PSDF information and vice versa. 

b) Enable district and local municipalities to undertake efficient planning & land 

use management 

c) Provide information that is easy to use and maintain by authorities. 

d) Centralise & standardise applications and procedures. 

e) Align applications and procedures with the SPCs and Sub‐Categories. 

f) Provide departments with shared access to the same up‐to‐date data. 

g) Provide an improved service to the community. 

h) Serve public interest by making relevant information accessibile. 

i) Provide guidance pertaining to planning and design of developments. 


20

2. ENSURING HIGH QUALITY DEVELOPMENT 

1. PSDF provides guidance to ensure that development is of a quality that promotes environmental 

integrity. 

Based upon the principles of ‘critical regionalism’ which promotes a return to the development of 

high‐quality settlements. 

Premised upon ‘The Big Five’ principles that guide the planning, design and management of 

development, namely: 

1. Sense of place 

2. Sense of history 

3. Sense of nature 

4. Sense of craft 

5. Sense of limits 


21

2 PSDF provides Spatial Structuring Elements to ensure that development is of a quality that 

promotes environmental integrity. 

URBAN EDGE 

SPATIAL STRUCTURING ELEMENTS 

PRECINCTS 2 

NODES 3 

ACTIVITY CORRIDOR 4 

ACTIVITY STREET 5 

MUNICIPAL OPEN SPACE SYSTEM 6 


1 

22

A MODEL FOR SUBSIDISED HOUSING: RESULT OF INNOVATIVE PLANNING & DESIGN 


23

A MODEL FOR SUBSIDISED HOUSING: RESULT OF INNOVATIVE PLANNING & DESIGN 


24

3. ESTABLISHING INTEGRATED LAND MANAGEMENT AREAS 

1. Biosphere Reserves ‐ ‘areas of 

terrestrial and coastal/marine 

ecosystems, or a combination thereof, 

which are internationally recognised 

within the framework of UNESCO's MaB 

Program’. Supported by UNESCO’s World 

Network of Biosphere Reserves. 

2. System of Protected Nature Areas – established in terms of NEMA to protect 

important biodiversity sites. 

3. Special Management Areas – ‘areas of excellence and good practice’, where the ethos 

of sustainable development is served in practice’. Established by landowners to 

promote sustainability of land use. Supported by SANBI, UNESCO, UNDP, etc. 


25

4. INTERROGATING PROVINCIAL & MUNICIPAL BOUNDARIES 

PSDF guides interrogation of boundaries of administrative areas (including the province, 

municipalities, wards and other settlement domains) with the objective to: 

a) Facilitate co‐operation in ‘over‐lapping areas’. 

b) Inform future municipal demarcation with the aim to reconcile municipal boundaries 

with bioregional parameters. 

Based upon the following principles: 

Important that boundaries correspond with the parameters set by the economy, social 

constructions and ecosystems, i.e. bioregional boundaries 

Mismatches may exist between statutory administrative boundaries and the domains 

people regard as their home territory, as well as ecosystem boundaries. 

The SDFs of local municipalities is the ideal scale at which the detailed interrogation and 

review of current boundaries should be undertaken. 


26

NATIONAL/PROVINCIAL AREAS OF OVERLAP ADDRESSED BY THE PSDF 


27

5. REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT, GOVERNMENT SPENDING & PERFORMANCE 

MANAGEMENT 

PSDF provides a basis for: 

1. Assessing & determining status of towns 

2. Prioritising government spending & LED to best benefit of province as a whole. 

3. Preparing IDPs and prioritising IDP spending. 

4. Indicating what type of development and investment are required and how the municipal 

budget should be allocated to eradicate backlog or weaknesses. 

5. Measuring performance of district and local municipalities. 

Which should be 

the capitol ?? 

6. Municipalities to improve their performance and status on a continual basis. 


28

BASIS FOR FORMULATION OF PROPOSALS 

Scientific and empirical evaluation of the settlement system with the aim to: 

a) Determine the growth & development potential & level of human needs of municipalities & 

settlements. 

b) Classifying the towns and settlements according to development and investment categories. 

Category 1 Town 













High nor Low as it relates to Development 

Potential & Human Needs 








• Monetary Capital 



• Monetary Capital 





• Discretion of government 

as it relates to investment 

required. 

29

BASIS FOR FORMULATION OF PROPOSALS 

Profile of local municipalities and towns are indicated by a group of indicators (bottom axis of 

histogram) 

Development status, strengths and weaknesses of municipalities and towns are indicated as a value 

on the vertical index above or below the provincial mean (the zero line). 

30

6. ENHANCING OPPORTUNITIES FOR & MAXIMISING EFFECT OF PRIVATE 

SECTOR DEVELOPMENT 

PSDF proposes that development facilitation and funding to be based upon the 

SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT INITIATIVE (SDI) 

which requires: 

Government to create the climate and conditions that are favourable to investment 

and economic growth. 

Government to encourage creation of partnerships between stakeholders to help 

give effect to sustainabultimately in the provision of services throule development. 

Latent capital (resources) to be unlocked to ensure that local communities receive 

meaningful benefit from such capital (not only through ‘trickling‐down’). 


31

KEY ASPECTS OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT INITIATIVE (SDI) 

An over‐arching socio‐economic development and environmental rehabilitation strategy that is enabled 

and funded through the utilization of the resources (capital) vested in a defined area consistent with the 

international definition of sustainable development. 

It capitalises on the efficient use of resources for the benefit of the developer, affected local 

communities and the environment. 

SDIs should be undertaken in close collaboration with the LED Forums and be supportive of LED 

objectives. 

The over‐arching objective of the SDI approach is to promote sustainable development through the 

following: 

Ensuring that large‐scale resource use contributes, in a sustainable manner, to socio‐economic 

growth and environmental rehabilitation. 

Building upon and promoting the comparative economic advantages of the area within which the 

SDI is undertaken. 

Unlocking the latent value of the land available for the core projects of the SDI. 

Utilizing the natural resource base in a sustainable manner. 

Ensuring an acceptable return on capital invested by the core project investors. 

Ensuring that local communities are recognised as partners in the planning and development 

process. 


32

CONCLUSION 

PSDF provides for the following: 

a) Directives pertaining to the desired scale, format and location of development. 

b) Directives for development and use of capital for the benefit of all inhabitants. 

c) Opportunities for innovative land use as a primary economic driver. 

d) Opportunities for public/private/community partnerships for the promotion of LED. 

e) Promotion of all economic sectors. 

f) Certainty regarding the future development of the Northern Cape and its component 

places. 

g) Protection and enhancement of the interests of all property owners. 

PSDF aims to provide 

……’ incentive and security for investment’……. 

….capital flows to 

opportunity, 

stability and quality 

!!!…. 

Page 33

FOCAL AREAS FOR PUBLIC COMMENT 

1. Unique characteristics to be restored and/or managed. 

2. Comparative and competitive economic advantages to be unlocked or utilised. 

3. Key aspects that are of provincial and broader significance, including: 

Economic 

Social 

Environmental. 

Infrastructural. 

ETC. !!!! 


34

VOLUME 1 

CONTEXT & OVER‐ARCHING POLICY 

VOLUME 2 

PROFILE & ASPECTS ADDRESSED 

VOLUME 3 

SPATIAL DIRECTIVES & GUIDELINES 

VOLUME 4 

STRATEGIES, PROGRAMS & PROJECTS 

WAY FORWARD 

APPROVAL & IMPLEMENTATION IN JUNE 2012 

Stakeholder consultation on aspects to 

be addressed. 

Stakeholder consultation & formulation 

of spatial directives & guidelines. 

Stakeholder consultation & formulation 

of strategies & guidelines . 


35

Mr. Gerhard de Bruin 

Nat. Dept. Rural Development and Land 

Reform 

Directorate Spatial Planning and 

Information 

30 Du Toitspan Road 

KIMBERLEY 8301 

Tel: 053 832 5084 

Fax: 086 560 5196 

E‐mail: 

GJdeBruin@ruraldevelopment.gov.za 

CONTACT DETAIL & WEBSITE 

Ms. Tania Volschenk 


P.O. Box 371 

STELLENBOSCH 7599 

Tel: 021 887 0124 

Fax: 021 886 5393 

E‐mail: taniav@dmp.co.za 

www.northerncapepsdf.co.za 


36

CLOSURE 


37

Development Potential of 

Urban Settlements in the Northern Cape 

A research study undertaken for Dennis Moss Partnership by: 

Prof IJ van der Merwe & Prof HL Zietsman 

August 2011 

i

CONTENTS 

Maps……………………………………………………………………………………………………………...iv 

Tables…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… v 

Addenda…………………………………………………………………………………………………………vi 

CHAPTER 1: SETTING THE SCENE – DECLINING SETTLEMENTS 

1.1 Context of the study ....................................................................................................... 1 

1.2 Objectives of the urban audit ......................................................................................... 2 

1.3 Structure of the report .................................................................................................... 2 

CHAPTER 2: CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK – INSTITUTIONAL AND THEORETICAL 

GUIDELINES 

2.1 Academic literature review ............................................................................................ 4 

2.1.1 Defining rural development ........................................................................................... 4 

2.1.2 The role of small towns in regional and rural development ........................................... 6 

2.1.3 Criteria influencing growth and development of towns ............................................... 10 

2.2 Relevant policy documents .......................................................................................... 13 

2.2.1 National Spatial Development Perspective .................................................................. 13 

2.2.2 Northern Cape Provincial Growth and Development Strategy .................................... 18 

CHAPTER 3: RESEARCH METHODOLOGY – CREATING AN URBAN INVESTMENT 

TYPOLOGY 

3.1 Selection of towns ........................................................................................................ 21 

3.2 Selection and derivation of quantitative indicators ...................................................... 26 

3.3 Indices for present status of towns and municipalities ................................................. 28 

3.4 Change indices for municipalities ................................................................................ 35 

3.5 Composite indices ........................................................................................................ 37 

3.6 Presenting the quantitative profiles .............................................................................. 38 

3.6.1 Cross-sectional profiles of towns ................................................................................. 38 

3.6.2 Cross-sectional profiles of municipalities .................................................................... 56 

3.6.3 Temporal profiles of municipalities ............................................................................. 70 

3.7 Qualitative evaluation .................................................................................................. 76 

CHAPTER 4: RESULTS – MESSAGE FROM THE TOWN PROFILES 

4.1 Integrating town development indicators ..................................................................... 77 

4.2 Integrating municipality development indicators ......................................................... 83 

4.3 Observations from the development profiles ............................................................... 85 

4.4 Internal focus on individual town profile ..................................................................... 90 

4.5 Case study: Development profile of Springbok ........................................................... 96 

CHAPTER 5 – CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 

5.1 General investment typology ..................................................................................... 100 

ii

5.2 Proposed leader towns ................................................................................................ 103 

5.3 Salient research results ............................................................................................... 104 

5.4 Recommendations ...................................................................................................... 106 

5.5 Future study and investigation ................................................................................... 107 

CONSULTED LITERATURE…………………………………………………………………………109 

iii

MAPS 

Figure 1.1 Research agenda ................................................................................................. 3 

Figure 3.1 Towns and administrative units of the Northern Cape Province ...................... 22 

Figure 3.2 Northern Cape Province municipal boundaries (2007 and 2011) .................... 23 

Figure 3.3 Development potential index of towns in the Northern Cape Province ........... 50 

Figure 3.4 Human development needs index of towns in the Northern Cape Province .... 51 

Figure 3.5 Composite resources index of towns in the Northern Cape Province .............. 52 

Figure 3.6 Composite infrastructure index of towns in the Northern Cape Province ........ 53 

Figure 3.7 Composite economic activities of towns in the Northern Cape Province ........ 54 

Figure 3.8 Scatter diagram of development potential and human needs typology of towns 

in the Northern Cape Province ......................................................................... 55 

Figure 3.9 Investment typology of towns in the Northern Cape Province ........................ 56 

Figure 3.10 Development potential index of local municipalities in the Northern Cape 

Province............................................................................................................ 60 

Figure 3.11 Human development needs index of local municipalities in the Northern Cape 

Province............................................................................................................ 61 

Figure 3.12 Composite resource index of local municipalities in the Northern Cape 

Province............................................................................................................ 62 

Figure 3.13 Composite infrastructure index of local municipalities in the Northern Cape 

Province............................................................................................................ 63 

Figure 3.14 Composite economic index of local municipalities in the Northern Cape 

Province............................................................................................................ 64 

Figure 3.15 Scatter diagram of development potential and human needs typology of 

municipalities in the Northern Cape Province ................................................. 65 

Figure 3.16 Investment typology of local municipalities in the Northern Cape Province ... 66 

Figure 3.17 Development potential index of towns and local municipalities in the Northern 

Cape Province .................................................................................................. 67 

Figure 3.18 Human needs index of towns and local municipalities in the Northern Cape 

Province............................................................................................................ 68 

Figure 3.19 Investment typology of towns and local municipalities in the Northern Cape 

Province............................................................................................................ 69 

Figure 3.20 Development potential index change between 2001 and 2007 of local 

municipalities in the Northern Cape Province (2007 boundaries) ................... 73 

Figure 3.21 Development potential index change between 2001 and 2007 of local 

municipalities in the Northern Cape Province (2011 boundaries) ................... 74 

Figure 3.22 Human development needs change index between 2001 and 2007 of local 

municipalities in the Northern Cape Province ................................................. 75 

Figure 4.1 Urban population distribution of the Northern Cape towns (2001) .................. 81 

Figure 4.2 Spatial town concentrations in the Northern Cape ........................................... 86 

Figure 4.3 Example of a town in ‘very high development’ class and its municipality ...... 91 

Figure 4.4 Example of a town in a ‘high development’ class and its municipality ........... 92 

Figure 4.5 Example of a town in an ‘upper-medium development’ class and its 

municipality...................................................................................................... 93 

Figure 4.6 Example of a town in a ‘lower-medium development’ class and its 

93municipality.................................................................................................. 94 

Figure 4.7 Example of a town in a ‘low development’ class and its municipality ............ 95 

iv

TABLES 

Table 2.1 Development Potential Categories suggested by the NSDP ............................ 15 

Table 3.1 List of towns and municipalities in the Northern Cape Province ..................... 24 

Table 3.2 Summary of indicator groupings for towns and municipalities ....................... 27 

Table 3.3 Summary of indicator groupings for change at municipality level .................. 28 

Table 3.4 Variables for towns and municipal indices ....................................................... 31 

Table 3.5 Variables for municipal change indices (2001 – 2007) .................................... 36 

Table 3.6 Ranks and map classes of composite indices of towns .................................... 39 

Table 3.7 Investment classification of towns based on development potential and human 

needs typology ................................................................................................. 43 

Table 3.8 Ranks and map classes of local municipalities ................................................. 57 

Table 3.9 Investment classification of municipalities based on development potential and 

human needs typology...................................................................................... 58 

Table 3.10 Ranks and map classes of change between 2001 and 2007 for local 

municipalities ................................................................................................... 70 

Table 3.11 Typology of municipalities based on development potential and human needs 

typology............................................................................................................ 71 

Table 4.1 Integrated town profiles .................................................................................... 77 

Table 4.2 Frequencies of town population classes ........................................................... 80 

Table 4.3 Cross-tabulation of town development classes ................................................. 82 

Table 4.4 Integrated municipal profiles ............................................................................ 83 

Table 4.5 Frequencies of municipal population classes ................................................... 84 

Table 4.6 Cross-tabulation of municipality development ................................................ 84 

Table 4.7 Urban concentration groups .............................................................................. 86 

Table 4.8 Cross-tabulation of town and municipality development classes ..................... 89 

Table 4.9 Cross-tabulation of town and municipality need classes .................................. 90 

Table 4.10 Selected towns and municipalities for histogram display ................................ 90 

Table 5.1 Proposed investment strategy for the Northern Cape towns .......................... 100 

Table 5.2 Suggested investment categories .................................................................... 103 

v

ADDENDA 

1. Data Matrix 

1.1 Town profiles 

1.2 Municipality profiles 

1.3 Municipality change profiles 

2. Tables 

2.1 Composite town indices 

2.2 Cross tabulation on town indices 

2.3 Composite municipality indices 

2.4 Cross tabulation on municipality indices 

3. Maps 

3.1-3.8 Composite Town Indices 

3.9-3.16 Composite Municipality Indices 

4. Questionnaire 

vi

CHAPTER 1 

SETTING THE SCENE: DECLINING SETTLEMENTS 

1.1 Context of the Study 

The settlement system in the Northern Cape is characterised by many small isolated and fairly 

inaccessible urban and quasi-urban settlements scattered across the vast area of the province. 

Many of these settlements find it hard to provide basic services and sufficient income 

generating opportunities to their inhabitants. 

A general consensus in the international literature is that sustainable rural development is 

closely bound to a vibrant and functional urban settlement system. Villages, towns and cities 

are the “engine rooms” that drive regional development and economic growth. Unfortunately 

not all urban settlements have the same growth potential. Growth trends fluctuate over time 

due to many influencing factors. In a large province such as the Northern Cape these centres 

make a special contribution towards meeting the general needs in both the towns, as well as in 

the surrounding rural communities. They also affect global links, the national spatial economy 

and sustainable regional development in the province. The Northern Cape Province 

accommodates some 115 urban settlements of various sizes (mapped in Figure 3.1), some of 

which have a solid economic base which stimulate energetic growth. Other towns are steadily 

losing economic power, service-ability and infrastructural strength. This situation poses the 

self-evident question whether there is an effective remedy for such a distressful picture? 

A starting point would be the application of a comprehensive evaluation and monitoring of 

the performance patterns of the province’s settlements in order to ascertain how the various 

communities could be optimally supported by a system of dynamic town structures. The 

problem should no longer be addressed in an ad hoc and superficial way. A systematic urban 

audit on the role and functioning of the urban system within a developmental context is 

essential in order to create an appropriate database to support informed strategic decisionmaking 

by relevant role players in the province. A Provincial Spatial Development 

Framework (PSDF) within the Northern Cape regional context must nurture sustainable urban 

and rural development over the long term as a high priority. Towns with a real potential for 

growth must be identified accountably in terms of their demonstrated capacities in the interest 

of the region as a whole. Several towns in the Northern Cape are for some time already 

1

struggling to survive – to the detriment of the broader regional economy, quality of life and 

rural development in the province. 

1.2 Objectives of the Urban Audit 

This urban audit investigates the challenges and problems of urban development in the 

Northern Cape. But this process must be carried out within the framework of existing national 

and provincial policy strategies, as well as recognised development theory. The overall aim of 

this study is to determine the growth performance and development potential of the urban 

settlements in the province, with a focus on their role in the creation of a dynamic urban and 

rural development system. More specifically this will include the following specific 

objectives: 

i. Identify criteria and indicators for assessing the urban growth/development potential 

from relevant academic literature and policy documents. The National Spatial 

Development Perspective (NSDP) and the Northern Cape Provincial Growth and 

Development Strategy (PGDS) provide valuable guidelines in this regard; 

ii. Statistically measure and compare the growth performance of the urban 

settlements and local municipalities in the Northern Cape; 

iii. Qualitative assessment of the economic base and place identity of these localities by 

engaging local stakeholders – in the process communities will have the opportunity to 

make input regarding their municipality/town’s growth potential. 

iv. Index and categorise these settlements according to their development potential and 

human needs levels; 

v. Make appropriate recommendations for appropriate decision-making and 

investment strategies to facilitate comprehensive rural development and performance 

management in the towns and municipalities. 

1.3 Structure of the Report 

The sequence and structural components of the report are illustrated in Figure 1.1 and offered 

in the following five chapters: 

2

Chapter Chapter 1 

Chapter 2 

Chapter 3 

Chapter 4 

Chapter 5 5 

115 Towns 

32 Municipalities 

Figure 1.1: Research agenda 

Setting the scene 

(Context and objectives) 

Conceptual Framework 

(Guidelines) 

Quantitative 

Indices 

Data Matrix 

59+57+27 Indicators 

Spatial Patterns (inter) 

Town Profiles (intra) 

Synthesis 

(Categorising) 

Recommendations 

(Investment Priorities) 

Qualitative 

Assessment 

3

CHAPTER 2 

CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK: INSTITUTIONAL AND THEORETICAL 

GUIDELINES 

It is imperative for an empirical analysis of this nature to be aligned with national and 

international norms regarding town development and associated urban growth dynamics. For 

that reason a synoptic overview of relevant international literature and national policy 

documents is provided. 

2.1 Academic Literature Review 

In order to provide a conceptual framework for investigating the growth potential of towns in 

the Northern Cape, this chapter starts with a short survey on the definition of the concepts 

‘development’, ’capital investment’ and ‘potential’. Secondly, the role that small towns play 

in regional and rural development as well as the factors that influence their growth dynamics 

is summarised. Thirdly, we focus on the role and guidelines contained in the institutional 

policy documents relevant for the construction of the Northern Cape PSDF. 

2.1.1 Defining Rural Development 

There is a lack of a common understanding and agreement on the definition of economic 

development amongst stakeholders. This is manifested in the persistence of unhelpful 

dichotomies in the development discourse: i.e. pro-growth vs. pro-poor; urban vs. rural; town 

vs. township; environment vs. development; big vs. small business; formal vs. informal 

business, etc. This in turn leads to a lack of consensus on what needs to be done and an 

absence of a common agenda. What is needed is an integration of these concepts (EDA 

Discussion Document, Western Cape, 2011). The following definitions will give an indication 

of the development scenario that can be expected from the Northern Cape PSDF. 

(i) Development: This is a process through which ‘things’ are changing to an improved state. 

The process of economic and social transformation is based on a set of complex cultural 

and environmental factors and their interactions. Development comprises different 

manifestations: 

• Economic development is about cities and regions continually improving their 

investment climate and business-enabling environment to enhance their 

competitiveness, to retain jobs and improve incomes. It is, therefore, the increase in 

4

the standard of living in a region’s population with sustained growth, usually from a 

lower-level economy to a higher-income economy. This typically involves 

improvements in a variety of indicators such as literacy rates, life expectancy, poverty 

rates, GDP and other aspects such as leisure time, environmental quality, freedom, 

social justice, and economic wellbeing. 

• Social development is a related process which results in the transformation of social 

structures in a manner which improves the capacity of the society to fulfil its 

aspirations. A region’s economic development, therefore, is linked to its human 

development, which encompasses, among other things, health and education. These 

factors are closely related to economic growth so that development and growth go 

hand in hand. (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Economic_development). 

• Rural development in general denotes the actions and initiatives taken to improve the 

standard of living in non-urban neighbourhoods, countryside, and remote villages. 

These communities demonstrate a low population density ratio. Agricultural activities 

are prominent whereas economic activities relate to the primary sector, production of 

food stuffs and raw materials. Rural development actions mostly aim at the social and 

economic development of the areas. Rural development aims at finding ways to 

improve the quality of life with participation of the rural people themselves so as to 

meet the required needs of the rural area. As such, local people themselves have to 

participate in creating their own comprehensive rural development landscape. In this 

context many approaches and ideas have been developed and followed in the past, i.e. 

the “bottom-up approach”, “participatory rural appraisal”, “rapid rural appraisal” and 

“rural-urban linkage development perspective” etc. 

(http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rural_development). 

(ii) Development Capital: The Northern Cape PSDF proposes to employ a model of the 

various forms of “development capital” vested in the region in order to reach its goals and 

objectives pertaining to sustainable development in the towns. The “Five Capitals Model” 

(Forum for the Future, 2010) suggests the following capital components in this regard: (i) 

Natural Capital; (ii) Human Capital; (iii) Social Capital; (iv) Manufactured 

(Infrastructure) Capital; and (v) Financial (Monetary) Capital. 

• Human Capital refers to people’s health, education, training, knowledge, skills, 

spirituality and motivation, which are needed for a flourishing economy, productive 

work, poverty reduction and capacity for human relationships. 

5

• Social Capital concerns investments by institutions that help us maintain and develop 

human capital e.g. families, communities, municipalities, trade unions, hospitals and 

schools. This means access to varied and supportive opportunities for work, health, 

living conditions, etc. 

• Manufactured (Infrastructure) Capital comprises material goods or fixed assets 

which contribute to the production process and service provision rather than being the 

output itself – e.g. tools, machines and buildings. The main components include 

buildings and infrastructure such as roads, communications, waste disposal, water 

systems, etc 

• Natural Capital of the physical environment refers to the natural resources (matter 

and energy) and processes that are needed to maintain life and to produce/deliver 

goods and services. They include renewable resources (such as fresh water, fisheries 

and wood) and non-renewable resources (such as mineral deposits). 

• Financial (Monetary) Capital plays a critical role in any economy, enabling the 

other types of capital to be owned and traded, for example, through shares, bonds or 

banknotes. 

It is only when the networked relations and correlations among these five capitals are 

recognised and operational, that a sustainable economy and a “happy” society can be 

created in the Northern Cape. 

(iii) Potential: The term “potential” can linguistically be defined as latent excellence or 

ability that may be developed, or is capable of becoming but not yet in existence. The 

implications of this concept for the development potential of the Northern Cape will become 

evident in the coming chapters. 

2.1.2 The role of small towns in regional and rural development 

The role of small- and medium-sized towns has received renewed interest and recognition 

globally as bridges on the rural-urban development continuum. In a well-balanced settlement 

system they act as infrastructural clusters and growth engines for regional development 

(Weliwita & Okpala, 2004). During the 1980s many academics, regional planners and policy 

makers reached consensus that small towns played an essential role as service centres in the 

development of a region through their economic base, production linkages, as well as trickledown 

effects (Van der Merwe, 1983; Rondinelli, 1988; Evans, 1992; Gaile, 1992). Lately a 

team of geographers from Utrecht University (Netherlands) has been conducting an 

international comparative research programme, determining the role of a small town in the 

6

development of its rural hinterland under certain conditions (Titus and Hinderink, 1998). 

Public funds should be applied for the improvement of a small town’s structure and 

functioning (e.g. investment in market support, provision of water and electricity, 

development of housing and new industrial areas) only if the basic rural development 

conditions are found to be suitable (Hinderink & Titus, 2002). The basic driving force behind 

a town’s growth is provided by its specific economic activities, which generate job 

opportunities, capital, buildings and infrastructure (Badcock 2002: 66). 

The potential contribution of small rural towns to local economic development has probably 

not been sufficiently recognised in rural development strategies. There is scope for a more 

positive and dynamic approach, which duly recognises the existing and potential economic 

and social role of rural towns and attaches greater importance to these locations as entry 

points for policy, investment, job creation, enterprise development and service delivery. 

Analysis of key sub-sectors can offer significant insights into commodity flows across the 

rural and urban spaces, as well as these towns’ role as market and distribution centres 

(Wandschneider, 2003) 

In order to produce a balanced set of criteria to credibly rank the growth potential of towns in 

the Northern Cape, a series of national and international case studies on the ranking of central 

place towns were examined. These methods were initially highly subjective, but ranking 

studies gradually became statistically more objective. Lately subjective and statistical 

techniques became much more integrated. At the same time the ranking mechanisms shifted 

away from a single criterium towards a more comprehensive multidimensional set of criteria 

(Van der Merwe et al, 2005). Van Lindert and Verkoren’s (1997) set of town criteria includes 

the population profile, the morphological structure, the economic profile, the service 

infrastructure and the social structure of the respective towns. Henderink and Titus’s (2002) 

criteria refer to the towns’ rural hinterland, the natural resource base, population density, 

market accessibility, political and economic structures, income distribution, as well as 

purchasing power of the population which can be considered in determining the growth 

potential of towns. In a World Bank study on India (Wandschneider, 2003) factors such as 

markets, raw materials, labour, infrastructure and management were emphasised. In a South 

African rural town study Local Economic Development initiatives was linked to factors such 

as labour and energy costs, infrastructure, markets, education and training, capacity and 

employment opportunities (Lloyd & Horn, 2001). 

7

It is now widely recognised that an economic, social and environmental interdependence 

exists between urban and rural areas and the “rural-urban linkage development perspective” 

is increasingly becoming the accepted approach in developing countries. Rural-urban linkage 

generally refers to the flow of monetary capital, people, goods and information between urban 

and rural areas. Infrastructure such as transportation, communications, energy and basic 

services, form the backbone of the urban-rural development linkage approach. Adequate 

investment in this domain improves rural productivity and better access to markets, jobs and 

public services (Weliwita & Okpala, 2004). 

Recent developments in the urban and rural development literature focus on Sustainable Degrowth 

(Schneider et al, 2010), New Ruralism, Agricultural Urbanism, Post-Productivist 

Landscapes, and Slow City Development (Stellenbosch University & CSIR, 2010). Especially 

“New Ruralism” is quite relevant and is defined as a framework for creating a bridge between 

sustainable agriculture and new urbanism. The theory is that sustainable agriculture can assist 

in bringing cities nearer to earth, with a greater commitment to the ecology and the economy 

of the surrounding rural hinterland on which the cities depend. Linked to this is the notion of 

place-making/sense of place, which can assist agriculture to shift its narrow production focus 

to a more broad-based resource-preservation value approach. 

According to Tacoli (2004), the spatial aims of regional planning policies assume that small 

and intermediate urban centres contribute to regional and rural development in four main 

ways, namely by being centres: 

(i) Of demand and markets for rural agricultural produce and products; 

(ii) In which rural non-farm activities and employment can grow and consolidate; 

(iii) Where goods and services to surrounding rural areas are produced and distributed; 

(iv) That attract rural migrants from the surrounding rural areas in order to decrease 

the labour pressure on larger urban centres. 

The recent move to a global economy has been painful for many towns because of the loss of 

manufacturing jobs, the vulnerability of export agriculture, and the increased competition in 

the energy and mining sectors. Larger commercial towns seem to have a built-in growth 

dynamic, based on a sufficient level of diversification. Nel (2005) identifies several noticeable 

changes taking place in small towns: 

8

• The collapse of many once-prosperous mining towns and the demise of railway towns. 

• The decline in agricultural output in many areas or the shift to new rural activities such as 

game farming, which have significantly reduced reliance on local small centres as points 

of sale and service supply. 

• Advances in transport technology and changes in retail patterns, which have facilitated 

access to the more distant regional centres and displaced the role of the small agricultural 

service centres. 

• A positive trend is the growth of tourist towns and towns in areas of natural beauty. 

• Growth of the larger centres has extended service fields and a diversified economy and 

has often displaced and absorbed the functions of smaller towns in their area. 

• In many of the smaller centres, there is an artificial economic dependence on state welfare 

on the part of the town’s people, the loss of many formal sector job opportunities, 

continuing poverty and the out-migration of the skilled. 

• As result of the amalgamation of smaller centres under a single authority, the loss of local 

government status has weakened many towns. 

Atkinson (2008) stresses the following arguments in aid of struggling towns: 

• There is a need for productive government spending in small and medium-sized towns. 

The future of small and medium-sized towns should be understood in relation to the 

spatial strategies of national and provincial governments (i.e. NSDP and PGDS). It will be 

argued that these towns require some level of productive government spending – i.e. 

expenditure which will raise local production and multipliers. 

• To stimulate local economies and to bring additional private sector capital into small and 

medium-sized towns, the comparative advantages of such towns need to be analysed. 

Much more effort needs to be done to investigate and promote the real economic drivers 

of a town and its hinterland. 

• To understand the comparative advantage of these towns, there is no “one-size-fits-all” 

solution to small and medium-sized settlements. This means that every town should be 

understood in its regional context. 

• Efforts should be made to bring services for the second economy into these towns. An 

injection of funding is required to stimulate the local economy. 

9

2.1.3 Criteria influencing growth and development of towns 

Towns originate to meet a particular need or provide a specific service for a specific 

community at an appropriate location. In this process urban settlements can be classified into 

a variety of functional types. The majority of towns in the Northern Cape fall into the group 

of central places, being service centres or market towns that meets the needs of the rural 

farming community for goods and services (Van der Merwe et al, 2005). Other settlements 

may have much more specific functions, such as those focussing on mining activities or 

tourism attractions. It is a well-known fact that not all towns grow at a uniform rate or to the 

same size. Certain economic functions offer more opportunities for growth and prosperity than 

others. Over time natural resources may become exhausted and spatial economic relations 

could change due to technological innovations or altered political and economic policies. 

Some urban settlements may be adversely affected and stagnate or decline while others may 

flourish, giving rise to regional inequalities and a sub-optimal functional settlement system. 

Certain growth energy is inherent in an urban settlement’s location. A town’s location with 

respect to infrastructure, main transport routes, natural resource base and large population 

concentrations influences its growth trend in a specific manner. Settlements are thus 

encouraged where there are better living, working, marketing, labour and investment 

opportunities. Such opportunities usually exist in towns close to metropolitan centres and 

secondary centres as the towns benefit from the big city’s population concentrations, 

economic agglomerations, overflow effects and positive externalities. The expansion and 

improvement of transport systems have also contributed towards a reduction of distance as a 

barrier in the development and growth of towns. Small and medium-sized settlements located 

on traffic nodes or along prominent transport corridors should be among the first to intercept 

or channel extensive economic activities away from the more isolated towns. 

Apart from the population migration patterns to and from towns, there is also inherent growth 

energy for a town in the natural increase of its inhabitants. In this regard the particular 

demographic and socio-economic structures (i.e. race, sex, age, occupation, income and level 

of education) have an effect on the birth and death rates of a town. A large and growing 

population, however, does not guarantee healthy economic growth, especially if the 

inhabitants are not able to apply economic initiative and labour force productivity. If the 

Human Development Index (HDI) of a settlement is very low, a large and growing population 

can become a huge economic burden for a town and inhibit its development. 

10

Probably the most prominent requirement for urban change and development is the capacity 

for management and leadership by means of productivity, new strategies, new technologies 

and capital investment. The quality of the human resource base and associated behaviour 

patterns and leadership are important factors that can influence the growth energy of a town. 

Individuals, entrepreneurs, companies and government institutions have the ability to stifle or 

stimulate the growth of a settlement through their decisions. The three imperatives of 

sustainable development (economic viability, social equity and ecological integrity) are 

equally relevant in this regard. The strong link between the development of small towns, the 

environment and the types of agricultural development and land tenure structures should also 

be incorporated. 

The most fundamental growth regulator of a town is its economic base. The basic driving 

force behind a town’s growth is provided by its economic activities, which generate job 

opportunities, capital investment and infrastructure. (Hoyt, 1939; Smith, 1965; Carter, 1981; 

Hartshorne, 1980; Cheshire, 1990; Markusen & Gwiasda, 1994; Badcock, 2002; and Pacione, 

2001). 

The diversity of economic activities (mixture of industrial, service and business composition), 

represented in a town usually holds the key to how well the urban economy performs. The 

functional classification of towns offers a very useful analytical instrument that can help to 

explain why settlements with a certain economic profile perform well or poor. (Cheshire 

1990; Markusen & Gwiasda 1994). From a conceptual perspective it is important to refer back 

to the export base theory, which states that job opportunities will increase most rapidly in 

those towns that can extend their comparative advantage by the production of goods and 

services for which there is the greatest demand on the world and national market. The extent 

to which an enterprise or economic activity can render a service and make sales outside of the 

town can be regarded as a measure of its contribution or importance to the growth of the 

settlement. Such activities bring new capital into circulation in the town by attracting it from 

outside – the so-called primary, propulsive, external or basic activities. Other activities are 

geared more towards meeting the needs of the local inhabitants and thus simply keep capital 

that is already in the town in circulation. This means that the existing situation is maintained 

without new growth – the so-called secondary, service, internal or non-basic activities. If the 

basic activities of a city expand, a chain reaction (multiplier effect) takes place, which also 

increases non-basic activities and thus leads to growth in the town. The basic/non-basic ratio 

11

for the economic activities of a town can be calculated quantitatively and this can be an 

indication of the town’s potential growth energy and economic links with its region. 

However, very detailed economic data is necessary for this operation. 

The most important cause behind the decline of many towns has to do with the reason for 

their existence or function within a changing technological framework in a globalised 

environment. It is obvious that a town that no longer fulfils an appropriate function will start 

to decline. The reason for the existence of many of the agricultural service centres in the 

Northern Cape area has been eroded by technological development, especially in the 

communication and transport sector (Van der Merwe et al, 2005). The mobility of people has 

increased as a result of better roads, extensive ownership of private vehicles, and access to the 

internet, which implied the relativisation of distance and greater human interaction 

possibilities. Lower order towns, with their limited variety of goods and services, can no 

longer compete with higher-order centres. In developing countries the population usually 

grows faster than the economy and the capacity of the urban economy cannot create sufficient 

job opportunities for the growing town population. The key question, then, has to do with how 

to create employment services and quality of life in such settlements. 

Quality of life is also related to the ‘sense of place’ experienced in a town. The extent to 

which an urban place developed a unique identity or spirit that differentiates it from other 

towns is an important gauge of the values and emotional well-being of the local community. 

This encourages a sense of belonging and personal identification with the specific town 

(Moore & Graefe, 1994; Tuan, 1977). ‘Sense’ depends on spatial form and quality, but also 

on the culture, temperament, status, experience, and purpose of the observer. Lynch (1998) 

describes sense as the degree to which a place can be clearly perceived and mentally 

differentiated and structured in time and space by its residents and the degree to which that 

mental structure connects with their values and concepts – the match between environment, 

one’s sensory capabilities, and one’s cultural constructs. The most basic form of sense is 

‘sense of place’. Identity is the degree to which a person can recognise a place as being 

distinct from other places and having a character of its own. Lynch (1998) refers to this 

quality as a convenient peg to hang personal memories, feelings and values on. 

In summary: Recent studies (Van der Merwe et al, 2005), which ranked towns for 

meaningful development assistance, demonstrated that the evaluation mechanism shifted 

away from a single criterion towards a more comprehensive multidimensional set of criteria. 

12

Van Lindert and Verkoren’s (1997) set of town criteria includes the population profile, the 

morphological structure, the economic activities, the service infrastructure and the social 

structure. Henderink and Titus (2002) refer to the role of small towns’ rural hinterland, natural 

resource base, population density, market accessibility, political economic structures, income 

distribution and purchasing power of the population as resources that can be considered in 

determining the growth potential of town. In Krige, Schur and Sipel’s (1998) analysis of small 

towns in the Free State, two sets of criteria were used: (i) the quantitative criteria included 

settlement type, demographic and economic trends, financial and management capacity, as 

well as access to services and housing; and (ii) a qualitative set of criteria included the level 

of community participation, sense of place, economic potential as well as delivery record on 

specific projects. 

On the basis of this academic literature study, as well as discussions with specialists in the 

field of small town and regional development, it is evident that the growth potential of 

individual towns in the Northern Cape province can best be evaluated comprehensively 

through a balanced set of multi-dimensional criteria that accounts for the diversity and 

complexity of comprehensive rural development and accompanying town growth. In the next 

chapter these criteria will be given empirical substance through a set of measurable indicators 

and variables in the data matrix developed for this study. 

2.2 Relevant policy documents 

South Africa in general and the Northern Cape in particular have been experiencing the trends 

of declining settlements for many decades already. The causes and factors influencing this 

phenomenon have been well documented in section 2.1. In the past authorities and other role 

players largely ignored this problem and treated all urban settlements in more or less the same 

way in terms of investment support. However, the situation has taken on such proportions that 

intervention has become essential. Several central government and Northern Cape provincial 

policy documents have explicitly addressed this problem recently. 

2.2.1 The National Spatial Development Perspective (NSDP, 2006), issued by the 

Presidency of South Africa, indicates a dramatic new approach in future policy directions 

with respect to investment and other support for national, regional and town development. 

In no country in the world is social and economic development evenly distributed in 

geographic space. Spatial disparities are a universal problem affecting all countries. South 

13

Africa is not unique. The NSDP (2006) is informed by international case studies which show 

the following observations: 

• Unfocused infrastructure spending does not necessarily result in improved GDP growth; 

• Regions which already have some economic success are more likely to grow than other 

regions; 

• Success is often achieved through focused and polarised investment; 

• Redirecting public investment from economically dominant regions to lagging regions has 

not automatically spurred economic activity in these regions. 

• The poor benefit when they have more options to which to turn, and more options are 

created in the profile of dynamic growth processes, not in the declining sectors that are 

left behind. 

The National Spatial Development Perspective, therefore, is underpinned by the following 

assumptions: 

• Location is critical for the poor to exploit growth opportunities; 

• The poor that are concentrated around vibrant economic centres have greater opportunity 

of gaining from economic growth; 

• Areas with demonstrated economic potential provide greater livelihood and income 

protection as well as a more favourable environment to combat poverty. 

The national space economy suggests the identification of localities (towns and cities) with 

development potential in terms of the following six categories (see Table 2.1) of development 

potential (NSDP, 2006): 

14

Table 2.1 Development Potential Categories suggested by the NSDP 

Category Description 

Innovation and experimentation Research and development and the application of technology to 

production processes. 

Production of high-value, differential goods All forms of production that focus on local and/or global niche 

Production of labour-intensive, massmarkets 

such as manufacturing, and some specialised agricultural 

or natural resource-based products. 

Industries in this category, such as iron and steel producers, and 

produced goods 

agricultural and mining activities, are highly dependent on 

proximity or good, cheap transport linkages, to the huge volumes 

of natural resources that they use in their production processes, as 

well as the availability of greater numbers of unskilled and semiskilled 

labour. 

Public services and administration 

Activities in this group tend to take place in larger towns and 

cities with significant public-sector employment and 

Retail and private sector services 

consumptions, supporting private-sector activities. 

These consist of retail, catering and personal services, both formal 

and informal. These are major components of any economy and 

of large employers of skilled and semi-skilled workers in most 

advanced economies. Such activities flourish in diverse 

settlements with large populations. 

Tourism These diverse set of activities, while generally less spatially 

focused than, the manufacturing and services sector, are 

nonetheless all dependant on a tourist-attractions (e.g. ecoscenery, 

culture, heritage); good transport routes; safety; and, in 

certain cases, high-quality medical services, restaurants, retail 

outlets and hotels. 

. 

These categories were developed to (i) enable an identification of areas of economic 

significance and enable comparison between areas; (ii) highlight key characteristics and the 

diverse and unique attributes of localities; and (iii) provide signals as to which sectors and 

institutions need to be supported to ensure the maintenance and growth of the areas of 

demonstrated economic significance. 

In order to identify the development potential of the respective urban settlements, the NSDP 

recommended the creation of a composite spatial profile of resource potential, existing 

economic activity and human needs. The results of such an analysis should be translated in 

specific potential categories. From such an analysis, broad guidelines can be put forward: 

• The further concentration of people in need in low potential areas should not be 

encouraged. Where possible, people should be assisted through social investment to 

become more mobile so that they may choose to move out of such an area. 

15

• Future economic growth should primarily be explored in those areas with a medium to 

high value resource base where there are economic potential to be exploited. Economic 

activity should be encouraged and supported by infrastructure (fixed) investment where 

there is already a medium to high level of economic activity and where (natural and 

human) resource potential is medium to high (NSDP, 2006). 

• Of course, this does not mean that localities not identified may not have potential, but that 

the current interpretation of the available data will need to be supplemented by more 

local area assessments of potential as required. In order not to discriminate against people 

who are currently locationally disadvantaged, it is proposed that the government seek to 

redress these inequities by maintaining the current distribution of fiscal resources to these 

areas, but that this investment be shifted to fewer fixed assets. This could mean that only a 

very basic level of infrastructural services (or mobile services) should be provided and 

that an additional social investment goes into skills development, labour-market 

information and other resources that will enable those living in these areas to become 

more mobile (NSDP, 2006). 

The NSDP’s reference to ‘fixed investment’ and ‘social investment’ relate to development 

capital theory (see section 2.1.1). The five types of capital assets explain the goods and 

services that are needed to improve quality of life and also to sustain urban and regional 

development (Forum for the Future, 2005). The underlying objective of any government 

policy for balanced development should identify and implement practices aimed at 

maintaining and, where possible, increasing the different types of capital stocks. The NSDP’s 

reference to social investment links to the human and social capital, while fixed 

infrastructural investment connects with manufactured capital. Social investment thus implies 

the allocation of capital to advance peoples’ socio-economic and cultural well-being. Public 

expenditure investment in quality education and health provision is a good example of social/ 

human capital being crucial in achieving substantial poverty reduction. 

Given the national government’s objectives of growing the economy, creating jobs, 

addressing poverty and promoting social cohesion, the NSDP (2006) assists local and 

provincial governments in confronting the following fundamental planning questions: 

• Where should government direct its investment and development initiatives to ensure 

sustainable and maximum impact? 

• What kinds of spatial forms and arrangements are most conducive to the achievement of 

the objectives of democratic nation-building, as well as social and economic inclusion? 

16

• How can government capitalise on complementarities and facilitate consistent decision 

making. 

In order to contribute to the broader growth and development policy objectives of 

government, the NSDP puts forward a set of five normative principles: ∗ 

(i) Rapid economic growth that is sustained and inclusive is a pre-requisite for the 

achievement of other policy objectives, among which poverty alleviation is a key facet. 

(ii) Government has a constitutional obligation to provide basic services (social capital) to 

all citizens (e.g. water, energy, health and educational opportunities) wherever they reside. 

(iii) Beyond this constitutional obligation, government spending on fixed investment 

(infrastructural capital) should be focused on localities of proven economic growth and 

development potential in order to gear up private-sector investment, to stimulate sustainable 

economic activities and to create long-term employment opportunities. 

(iv) Efforts to address past and current social inequalities should focus on people, not on 

places. In localities with high levels of need and low demonstrated economic potential, 

government should, beyond the provision of basic services, concentrate primarily on 

social/human investment by providing education, training, and social transfers. It should also 

reduce migration costs by providing better information regarding opportunities and 

capabilities. This could enable people to gravitate - if they choose so - to localities that are 

more likely to provide sustainable employment and economic opportunities. 

(v) In localities where there are high levels of need (poverty) and demonstrated high 

economic potential, this could be an indication for fixed and social investment to exploit the 

potential of those localities. 

(vi) In order to overcome the spatial distortions of apartheid, future settlement and 

economic development opportunities should be channelled into activity corridors and nodes 

that are adjacent to or link with national growth centres. Infrastructure investment should 

further support localities that may become major growth nodes in South Africa and the SADC 

region to create regional gateways to the global economy (Namibia and Botswana is quite 

relevant for the Northern Cape in this regard). 

While the idea of focusing government spending on fixed infrastructure in areas with some 

potential for economic development may seem to exclude other areas/towns from 

development, this is in fact not the case. Different regions and settlements have different 

economic potential and the spatial variations in the incidence of poverty are also vastly 

∗ The Northern Cape Provincial Growth and Development Strategy (which inspired the brief for this Provincial 

Spatial Development Framework) is perfectly in line with these NSDP principles (NC PGDS, Draft 3, 2010). 

17

different. The NSDP argues that these diverse and disparate spatial contexts suggest a policy 

approach that itself should be differentiated and conducive to the requirements of the different 

contexts. Hence, in areas of low or no economic potential, the path of development and 

poverty reduction should be through a focus on investment in human and social capital (e.g. 

education, training, social welfare, rural development planning, land and agrarian reform, 

expansion of agricultural extension services, etc). This means that each individual town 

should discover its real development potential and then grow to the maximum of that 

development level. It is important to stress that the NSDP does not in any way rule out 

investment in small towns per se. What matters is whether an area has the potential to grow 

economically in a sustainable way, create jobs and alleviate poverty. If a small town has such 

potential there is nothing that precludes such investment (Oranje et al, 2008). 

The NSDP is supported by the concept draft of the National Urban Development 

Framework (Dept of Co-operative Governance and Traditional Affairs, in conjunction with 

the Presidency and SA Cities Network, 2009.) The purpose of a national urban development 

framework is to provide a common view on how to strengthen the capacity of South Africa’s 

towns, cities and city-regions to realise their potential to support shared growth, social 

equity, as well as environmental sustainability as key components of our national agenda. 

Additional recommendations are also made for the differentiated support required by the 

different types of urban settlement, in line with the NSDP. 

2.2.2 Northern Cape Provincial Growth and Development Strategy (PGDS) 

In response to the social and economic development imperatives yielded by an analysis of the 

socio-economic profile of the province, the following primary development objectives have 

been identified in the Northern Cape PGDS (reviewed in 2010): 

• Promoting the growth, diversification and transformation of the provincial economy; 

• Reduction of poverty through social development; 

• Creating the required levels of human and social capital; 

• Improving the efficiency and effectiveness of governance and development institutions; 

and 

• Enhancing infrastructure for economic growth and social development. 

The PGDS cautions that certain sub-sectors of the mining industry in the Northern Cape have 

peaked and that downscaling is underway in especially the copper and diamond mining 

industries. This results in an urgent need to identify and promote alternative economic 

18

activities in these areas and towns which have been dependent on income from minerals in the 

past. Declining towns require an in depth assessment which includes a review of urban rural 

linkages and the development of clear criteria appraising their long term sustainability. When 

this is established dedicated measures will need to be put in place to rejuvenate them. It is 

likely that it may not be possible to turn certain of these rural towns which have lost the 

economic rationale for their existence around (NC Rural Development Strategy Paper, 2010). 

The envisaged Northern Cape Provincial Spatial Development Framework (PSDF) is to 

address the current situation in the Northern Cape as described in the province’s PGDS. The 

envisaged Northern Cape Spatial Development Framework should indicate as to what should 

develop where, how and when. It should provide a means to guide strategic decisions relating 

to the location and distribution of resources in time and geographic space. The PSDF will be 

an enabling mechanism that responds to and fully complies with the NSDP. This also 

corresponds with the Northern Cape PGDS which has committed the province to a vision of 

“building a prosperous, sustainable and growing provincial economy, to reduce poverty and 

improve social development”. It further clearly states that the PSDF must not only give effect 

to national spatial development priorities but it must also set out a series of provincial, district 

and local development priorities for the space economy of the Northern Cape. In so doing, the 

PSDF will provide a means to guide strategic decisions relating to the location and 

distribution of resources in time and geographic space. It should therefore aim to provide: 

• A long term spatial development vision that will promote balanced, integrated and 

sustainable human settlements; 

• Certainty and direction to investors by indicating preferred locations for development and 

where certain types of developments should not take place; 

• Guidelines for decision making (private and public); 

• Indication of priority areas for targeted public investment which will support the spatial 

development vision. 

A scientific and empirical evaluation of the growth potential of the urban settlements in the 

Northern Cape Province is essential, given the crucial role played by urban settlements in the 

spatial economy of the region. The results of this analysis will provide a solid base to inform 

the formulation of the PSDF and provide a rational for the optimal urban development of the 

province. It is on the basis of such a comprehensive analysis that competitive and comparative 

advantages within the province will be identified to give clear guidance to public and private 

investment decisions for promoting social, economic and environmental sustainability. The 

19

following empirical analysis of town development and needs in the Northern Cape Province 

should be considered against the above conceptual and institutional background. 

20

CHAPTER 3 

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY: CREATING AN URBAN INVESTMENT 

TYPOLOGY 

As the research agenda indicates (Figure 1.1), the data matrix for this study consists of a list 

of towns in the Northern Cape Province as cases/entities, each evaluated in accordance with a 

set of quantitative variables synthesized as indicators of urban development potential. Our 

explication of the data matrix commences with the selection of towns and the quantitative 

indicators decided upon. It then progresses through an explanation of the measurement 

methodology, followed by the presentation of the quantitative town profiles. 

3.1 Selection of Towns 

The brief for this research directed the study to the consideration of all urban places in the 

Northern Cape Province. The basis for the selection of urban places was the 2001 Population 

Census. Geographical units availed by this Census qualifying for inclusion were all ‘subplaces’ 

with area-types classified as ‘non-traditional’. There are 1107 such individual spatiostatistical 

units within this subset in the province. Single settlements often consisted of 

multiple polygons - consequently it was necessary to group these units to represent their 

respective urban areas. In order to do this, sub-places with similar ‘main-place’ names were 

grouped. Once this was completed, urban polygons belonging to the same urban settlement 

were recoded and their town names assigned. The total population was calculated for each of 

these settlements. The urban places were ranked on population size and all urban settlements 

exceeding 400 residents were selected for further analysis in the data matrix. These units 

were mapped and inspected for possible omissions and further grouping. Other ‘main places’ 

in the 2001 Population Census that were also grouped with their functional counterparts are 

former ‘black’ and ‘coloured’ townships. 

This procedure resulted in the creation of a final data matrix consisting of 115 urban places 

within 32 local municipalities in the Northern Cape Province for which data were collected 

from various sources to measure their growth potential. The map in Figure 3.1 displays the 

municipal boundaries and geographical distribution of these towns, while Table 3.1 lists the 

towns within their 32 encompassing municipal structures. ∗ 

∗ Figure 3.2 compares the 2007 municipal boundaries (upon which the data were collected for this study) with 

the 2011 boundaries. These boundary changes should be kept in mind when the interpretation of the final results 

takes place. 

21

Figure 3.1: Towns and administrative units of the Northern Cape Province 

22

Figure 3.2: Northern Cape Province municipal boundaries (2007 and 2011) 

23

Table 3.1: List of towns and municipalities in the Northern Cape 

District 

Town 

Population 

No. Town Local Municipality Municipality (2001) 

1 Boegoeberg !Kheis Siyanda 1584 

2 Gannaput !Kheis Siyanda 965 

3 Groblershoop !Kheis Siyanda 440 

4 Grootdrink !Kheis Siyanda 2183 

5 Stutterheim !Kheis Siyanda 3037 

6 Wegdraai !Kheis Siyanda 1553 

7 Karos //Khara Hais Siyanda 953 

8 Klippunt //Khara Hais Siyanda 1948 

9 Lambrechtsdrif //Khara Hais Siyanda 568 

10 Leerkrans //Khara Hais Siyanda 1064 

11 Louisvale //Khara Hais Siyanda 902 

12 Raaswater //Khara Hais Siyanda 1980 

13 Swartkop //Khara Hais Siyanda 1272 

14 Upington //Khara Hais Siyanda 61358 

15 Barkly West Dikgatlong Frances Baard 14062 

16 Delportshoop Dikgatlong Frances Baard 9253 

17 Holpan Dikgatlong Frances Baard 528 

18 Ulco Dikgatlong Frances Baard 1066 

19 Windsorton Dikgatlong Frances Baard 5074 

20 Britstown Emthanjeni Pixley Ka Seme 4028 

21 De Aar Emthanjeni Pixley Ka Seme 26027 

22 Hanover Emthanjeni Pixley Ka Seme 2693 

23 Dibeng Gamagara Kgalagadi 4020 

24 Dingleton Gamagara Kgalagadi 2866 

25 Kathu Gamagara Kgalagadi 8242 

26 Olifantshoek Gamagara Kgalagadi 7026 

27 Kuruman Ga-Segonyana Kgalagadi 31878 

28 Brandvlei Hantam Namakwa 2311 

29 Calvinia Hantam Namakwa 8459 

30 Loeriesfontein Hantam Namakwa 2347 

31 Nieuwoudtville Hantam Namakwa 1434 

32 Alheit Kai !Garib Siyanda 689 

33 Augrabies Kai !Garib Siyanda 2693 

34 Cillie Kai !Garib Siyanda 1527 

35 Kakamas Kai !Garib Siyanda 7306 

36 Keimoes Kai !Garib Siyanda 7311 

37 Kenhardt Kai !Garib Siyanda 3795 

38 Lennetsville Kai !Garib Siyanda 1499 

39 Loxtonberg Kai !Garib Siyanda 711 

40 Lutzburg Kai !Garib Siyanda 1305 

41 Marchand Kai !Garib Siyanda 1674 

42 Riemvasmaak Kai !Garib Siyanda 702 

43 Garies Kamiesberg Namakwa 1655 

44 Hondeklip Bay Kamiesberg Namakwa 540 

45 Kamieskroon Kamiesberg Namakwa 908 

46 Karkams Kamiesberg Namakwa 1292 

24

47 Kheis Kamiesberg Namakwa 444 

48 Klipfontein Kamiesberg Namakwa 463 

49 Koingnaas Kamiesberg Namakwa 721 

50 Leliefontein Kamiesberg Namakwa 807 

51 Nourivier Kamiesberg Namakwa 416 

52 Paulshoek Kamiesberg Namakwa 494 

53 Spoegrivier Kamiesberg Namakwa 456 

54 Carnarvon Kareeberg Pixley Ka Seme 5233 

55 Van Wyksvlei Kareeberg Pixley Ka Seme 1421 

56 Vosburg Kareeberg Pixley Ka Seme 1131 

57 Fraserburg Karoo Hoogland Namakwa 2406 

58 Sutherland Karoo Hoogland Namakwa 1983 

59 Williston Karoo Hoogland Namakwa 2846 

60 Blackrock Kgalagadi Kgalagadi 1005 

61 Hotazel Kgalagadi Kgalagadi 1220 

62 Van Zylsrus Kgalagadi Kgalagadi 851 

63 Danielskuil Kgatelopele Siyanda 10075 

64 Lime Acres Kgatelopele Siyanda 4079 

65 Aggeneys Khâi-Ma Namakwa 2054 

66 Onseepkans Khâi-Ma Namakwa 910 

67 Pella Khâi-Ma Namakwa 1423 

68 Pofadder Khâi-Ma Namakwa 2920 

69 Warrenton Magareng Frances Baard 18171 

70 Groot Mier Mier Siyanda 422 

71 Philandersbron Mier Siyanda 790 

72 Rietfontein Mier Siyanda 2151 

73 Buffelsrivier Nama Khoi Namakwa 1117 

74 Carolusberg Nama Khoi Namakwa 967 

75 Concordia Nama Khoi Namakwa 4031 

76 Kleinzee Nama Khoi Namakwa 2708 

77 Komaggas Nama Khoi Namakwa 3309 

78 Nababeep Nama Khoi Namakwa 5592 

79 Okiep Nama Khoi Namakwa 5250 

80 Springbok Nama Khoi Namakwa 10292 

81 Steinkopf Nama Khoi Namakwa 7261 

82 Vioolsdrif Nama Khoi Namakwa 492 

83 Hartswater Phokwane Frances Baard 5261 

84 Jan Kempdorp Phokwane Frances Baard 16448 

85 Pampierstad Phokwane Frances Baard 21129 

86 Petrusville Renosterberg Pixley Ka Seme 3584 

87 Phillipstown Renosterberg Pixley Ka Seme 2782 

88 Vanderkloof Renosterberg Pixley Ka Seme 1017 

89 Alexander Bay Richtersveld Namakwa 1455 

90 Eksteenfontein Richtersveld Namakwa 446 

91 Khubus Richtersveld Namakwa 1095 

92 Lekkersing Richtersveld Namakwa 420 

93 Port Nolloth Richtersveld Namakwa 5014 

94 Sanddrif Richtersveld Namakwa 1137 

95 Campbell Siyancuma Pixley Ka Seme 1769 

96 Douglas Siyancuma Pixley Ka Seme 15476 

25

97 Griekwastad Siyancuma Pixley Ka Seme 5211 

98 Schmidtsdrift Siyancuma Pixley Ka Seme 3249 

99 Marydale Siyathemba Pixley Ka Seme 2077 

100 Niekerkshoop Siyathemba Pixley Ka Seme 1998 

101 Prieska Siyathemba Pixley Ka Seme 11515 

102 Kimberley Sol Plaatje Frances Baard 185173 

103 Ritchie Sol Plaatje Frances Baard 11222 

104 Hopetown Thembelihle Pixley Ka Seme 8057 

105 Orania Thembelihle Pixley Ka Seme 516 

106 Strydenburg Thembelihle Pixley Ka Seme 2345 

107 Goedgedacht Tsantsabane Siyanda 539 

108 Groenwater Tsantsabane Siyanda 517 

109 Postmasburg Tsantsabane Siyanda 21232 

110 Loxton Ubuntu Pixley Ka Seme 771 

111 Richmond Ubuntu Pixley Ka Seme 4316 

112 Victoria West Ubuntu Pixley Ka Seme 5728 

113 Colesberg Umsobomvu Pixley Ka Seme 12761 

114 Norvalspont Umsobomvu Pixley Ka Seme 1014 

115 Noupoort Umsobomvu Pixley Ka Seme 6870 

From the province’s total population of 822 729 (2001 Population Census) 712 783 (87%) are 

urban dwellers in the 115 towns under investigation. 

3.2 Selection and derivation of quantitative indicators 

A set of 59 variables was identified for which information could be obtained for each of the 

115 selected towns. The choice of these variables was based on the brief of the study, the 

availability of data, as well as the criteria identified by the literature study discussed in the 

previous chapter. The intention was to measure the required criteria/dimensions of urban 

growth potential and human needs as comprehensively as possible. In line with the NSDP the 

variables were grouped into two major indicator dimensions representing (i) urban 

development/growth potential; and (ii) human development needs. The first major dimension, 

development potential, was divided into three representative sub-themes. These sub-themes 

were further subdivided into eight functional groups of indicators (see Table 3.2). 

26

Table 3.2: Summary of indicator groupings for towns and municipalities 

Natural Resources (11)∗ 

Human Resources (3) Composite Resource Potential 

Index (14) 

Transportation and 

Composite Infrastructure 

Communications (4) 

Institutional Services (8) 

Economic Sectors (5) 

Index (12) 

Composite Development 

Potential Index (40) 

Commercial Services (3) Composite Economic 

Market and Accessibility (4) 

Property Market (2) 

Activities Index (14) 

Human Development 

Composite Needs 

Needs (19) Composite Needs Index (19) Index (19) 

∗This number refers to the number of variables in each indicator group (See Table 3.4) 

Although the main focus of this study is to identify those towns in the province that have 

inherent positive growth and development potential, it is also incumbent upon the analysis to 

provide guidelines that will allow formulation of nuanced policies for handling places with 

low growth potential, but where human needs are high. To this end another set of variables 

measuring a fourth dimension on human development needs was derived. These themes and 

sub-themes not only comply with the requirements set out in the NSDP and Northern Cape 

PGDS policy documents, but also with the guidelines distilled from the international 

literature. 

Apart from giving a cross-sectional perspective on the status quo in the 115 urban places, the 

study also endeavours to add a regional and contextual element to the analysis by computing 

and mapping the same set of indices ∗ for the 32 local municipalities, principally based on 

2007 data. 

Change analysis at local municipality level is done by comparing 2001 data with 2007 data. 

Unfortunately not all variables included in the analysis for towns were available to measure 

changes at the municipal level between 2001 and 2007. Some variables are not meaningful at 

a municipal level for comparative purposes, such as the presence of a municipal seat, whilst 

others don’t change over time. The 27 variables in Table 3.3 were used for the measurement 

of change at municipal level. 

∗ In the case of municipalities, two variables (municipal seat and urban functional index) were not significant and 

omitted – thus leaving 57 variables for the measurements at municipal level and 59 at town level. 

27

Table 3.3: Summary of indicator groupings for change at municipality level. 

Human Resources (3) 

Composite Development Potential 

Economic Sectors (5) 

Index (10) 

Market Potential (2) 

Human Development Needs (17) Composite Needs Index (17) 

A detailed explanation of how the values for different variables in the data matrix were 

derived will now be provided. Combined quantitative indicators indexing each of the urban 

development dimensions were devised by standardizing the selected individual variables and 

summing the standardized z-scores to derive compound indices. Standardized z-scores are 

computed by the formula: 

z = ( x − x ) / sd 

ik 

Where: 

ik 

k 

k 

x ik = Raw value of variable k for town i 

x k = Mean value of variable k for all towns in the province 

sdk = Standard deviation of variable k. 

The z-score of variable k has an average value of zero and a standard deviation of 1.0. This 

means that towns that have values above the provincial average for a particular variable have 

positive z-scores, whereas towns that have negative z-scores have values below the provincial 

average. Those towns with values close to the average have small deviations from zero, 

whereas those that have large positive or negative z-scores are substantially above or below 

the mean for the province. As z-scores for different variables are comparable, these were 

aggregated to create the various indices. The index values represent the mean of the z-scores. 

See Table 3.4 for details regarding the specific variables used to create the compound indices 

for each of the levels of analysis. The table provides a brief explanation of the data sources 

and statistical procedures used to generate each of the variables for respectively the 115 towns 

and the 32 municipalities. Each of the indices and their derivation is discussed in the 

following section. 

3.3 Indices for present status of towns and municipalities 

Firstly the indicators for the “present” cross-sectional profiles of the towns and municipalities 

will be explained. 

28

Natural Resources index: The indicators of natural resource potential were derived from 

eleven variables (Table 3.4). These indicators assess the availability of water, agricultural, 

mineral and tourism potential as well as the environmental sensitivity of the municipal area to 

tourism and other economic activities. Natural resources are measured by the mean annual 

precipitation, proximity to perennial rivers, groundwater potential, presence of commercial 

crops, grazing capacity of the veld and presence of mineral deposits. Tourism potential is 

measured by the SA Terrain Index, number of cultural and heritage sites, conservation areas 

and a bio-sensitivity index. 

Human Resources index: The human resource potential indicators were measured by three 

variables (Table 3.4). The indicator assesses the size and quality of the labour force, defined 

as the size of the labour force between 15 and 65 years of age with education levels equal to 

or better than Grade 12, as percentage of the total labour force. The quality of the labour force 

is expressed as the number of white collar workers as percentage of the economically active 

population. 

Transportation and Communications index: Transportation and communication infrastructure 

are measured by four variables (Table 3.4). The variables assess the availability and 

accessibility of transport and communication infrastructure. These are measured by the 

presence and distance to national or main roads, airports and commercial harbours, as well as 

access to cell phone coverage. 

Institutional Services index: The provision level of public institutional services is measured 

by eight variables (Table 3.4). The indicators measure the types, strength and capacity of 

public service delivery to the communities. These are measured by the presence of municipal 

offices, as well as the provision of a variety of institutional services such as educational and 

medical facilities, postal, social security and police services. Local democratic involvement 

of the community is assessed by voter turnout in municipal elections. Additional to the 

number of police stations, police service effectively is also measured by crime rates (2009- 

2010). 

Economic Sectors index: The strength and size of the economic sectors are measured by five 

variables (Table 3.4). The indicators assess the strength of the local economy in terms of the 

size and composition of the labour force in the key sectors of the Northern Cape economy for 

29

generating jobs and income such as agriculture, fishing, mining and financial services. It also 

considers the diversity of the local economy and it is postulated that greater diversity is 

beneficial to shield against economic fluctuations so detrimental to undiversified mono- 

focussed economies, for example mining towns. The size of the regions economy is measured 

by the Gross Value Added Product of the local municipality in which the town is located. 

Commercial Services index: This index is devised to express the size of private commercial, 

financial and professional service functions offered by the towns in the study (Table 3.4). In 

the absence of data on the number and types of commercial activities the Urban Functional 

Index of towns in South Africa was used as a proxy. Size is measured by the total annual 

value of retail sales. 

Market and Accessibility index: The strength and size of a town’s market potential was 

measured by four variables (Table 3.4). The index combines measures of population size in 

towns with the total gross personal income of their inhabitants and the total household 

potential income. Accessibility to the markets is calculated as the sum of the weighted 

distance to the five major metropolitan centres in South Africa. 

Property Market index: The vitality of the property market in the respective towns and 

municipalities is measured by the annual number of property transactions as well as their 

average value (Table 3.4). It is assumed that a lively property market with high average values 

is indicative of thriving towns. 

Human Development Needs index: All the variables (nineteen) included in this index measure 

some aspect of vulnerability or development need (Table 3.4). Consequently, the size of 

those groups in society more often in need of some form of assistance is used to profile the 

towns. The proportion black and coloured population groups (generally considered apartheid 

victims), children and aged, female household heads, educationally deprived, lower income 

groups, the unemployed, unskilled, and recent in-migrants are typical indicators. Places with 

low Matriculation pass rates, high proportions under the mean level of living index, high rates 

of HIV/AIDS and high percentages receiving social grants are indications of high need. Other 

measures relate to housing conditions and access to domestic services such as water, 

sanitation and electricity. 

30

Table 3.4: Variables for towns and municipal indices 

URBAN GROWTH POTENTIAL 

Natural resources Nr Derivation methods and data sources Mun. 

Availability of water 1 Mean annual precipitation (mm) (SA Weather 

Bureau polygon shapefile) assigned to town 

Yes 

2 Towns: Proximity ( 4). (GIS analysis) (Mun: Length per 

100sq km) 

Yes 

3 Groundwater potential (in million cubic metres) 

per annum assigned to town by intersection of 

towns with groundwater potential polygon 

shapefile obtained from DWA. (Mun: 

Groundwater potential (in million cubic metres) 

per annum per sq km) 

Yes 

Agricultural potential 4 Perennial and annual commercial crops, National 

Land cover (2000). (Towns closer than 10 km 

from cultivated areas > 10 sq km). (Mun: Area of 

perennial & annual commercial crops as % of 

municipal area) (GIS analysis). 

Yes 

5 Weighted average grazing capacity (Large Stock 

Units) (LSU) in closest area (Within Thiessen 

polygon).(Dept. Agriculture) 

Mining potential 6 Status of mineral deposits (Number of working 

mines closer than 20 km (Mun: Status of mineral 

deposits as number of working mines per 100 sq 

km) (Council for Geoscience). 

7 Size of unexplored minerals (Average rank size of 

deposits closer than 20 km). (Council for 

Geoscience) 

Tourism Potential 8 Mean weighted SA Terrain Index (SATI) in 

closest area derived from ENPAT (2002 ) 

9 Number of cultural and heritage sites (excluding 

graves & burial sites) closer than 20 km derived 

from ENPAT (2002). (Mun: Number of cultural 

and heritage sites per 100 sq km) 

Environmental sensitivity 10 % Conservation/Protected areas in closest area 

(Thiessen polygon). (GIS analysis) 

11 Weighted mean bio-sensitivity index per town 

derived from ENPAT (2002) 

Human resources Nr Derivation methods and data sources Mun. 

Size of labour force 1 Total size (number) of the labour force 

(Population census 2001). (Mun: 2007 

Community Survey) 

Yes 

Quality of labour force 2 Labour force > 15 < 65 years with education levels 

equal to or better than Grade 12 as percentage of 

total labour force. (Population census 2001). 

(Mun: 2007 Community Survey) 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

31

Transportation and 

communications 

Accessibility to transport 

infrastructure 

3 White collar workers as percentage of 

economically active population. (Population 

census 2001). (Mun: 2007 Community Survey) 

Yes 

Nr Derivation methods and data sources Mun. 

1 Inverse of distance to nearest national or main 

road (km) x 100. (Mun: Average inverse of 

distance to nearest national or main road (km) x 

100. Calculated from all towns in the municipality 

(GIS analysis). 

2 Inverse of distance to nearest commercial harbour 

(km) x 1000. Average inverse of distance to 

nearest commercial harbour (km) x 100. 

Calculated from all towns in the municipality (GIS 

analysis). 

3 Inverse of distance to nearest scheduled airport 

(km) 100. Average inverse of distance to nearest 

scheduled airport (km) x 100. Calculated from all 

towns in the municipality (GIS analysis). 

4 Cell phone coverage (2010) (Number of networks 

present: MTN, Vodacom, CellC. (Mun: % of 

municipality covered) 

Institutional services Nr Derivation methods Mun. 

Municipal seat 1 Presence of seat No 

Public institutions 

represented 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

2 Number of secondary educational institutions. 

(National Dept. Education) 

Yes 

3 Number of post offices. (SA Postal Service) Yes 

4 Number of hospitals and clinics. (National Dept. 

of Health) 

Yes 

5 Number of police stations. (SA Police Service) Yes 

Social service organizations 6 Number of social grants pay points. (SA Security 

Agency) 

Safety and security 7 Crime: All occurrences per 100 people (2009- 

2010). Towns with no police stations get nearest 

town's stats. Pop totals based on 2004 Thiessen 

Polygons. (Mun: Aggregated per municipality 

from town data) (SA Police Services). 

Democratic status 8 Voter turnout (2009). (Demarcation Board) Yes 

Economic sectors Nr Derivation methods and data sources Mun. 

Diversity of economy 1 Concentration/diversity index based on labour 

distribution in economic sectors. (Population 


Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

32

Strength of primary and 

tertiary economic sectors 

2 Workforce in primary sectors (agriculture, forestry 

and fisheries) is calculated as percentage of 



3 Workforce in mining activities as percentage of 



4 Workforce in financial services as percentage of 


census 2001) 

Size of the economy 5 Total Gross Value Added product (GVA) (2004). 

(CSIR GAP) 

Commercial services Nr Derivation methods 

Presence of commercial and 

financial establishments 

1 Total annual value of retail sales (2010). (Global 

Insight) 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

2 Number of banks & ATMs (GIS data) Yes 

3 Urban Functional Index. (UFI). Number of 

commercial establishments as percentage of city in 

South Africa with highest tally) (CSIR GAP). 

Market potential and 

Accessibility 


Size of local population 1 Number of people per town. (Population census 

2001). (Mun: Number of people per municipality; 

2007 Community Survey) 

Yes 

Size of local personal income 2 Total rand value of personal monthly income per 

town. (Population census 2001). (Mun: total 

income per municipality; 2007 Community 

Household income potential 

index 

Access to primary 

metropolitan markets 

Survey) 

3 Market Potential Index computed by applying 

Population Potential Index Method to total 

household income values rather than population 

numbers. (GIS analysis) 

4 Weighted distance to major metropolitan areas 

(Sum of metro populations divided by the distance 

to the metros). (GIS analysis) 

Property Market Nr Derivation methods and data sources 

Size of property market 1 Number of property transactions (2008-2010) per 

100 km sq. (Knowledge Factory) 

2 Average value of property transactions (2008- 

2010). (Knowledge Factory) 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

HUMAN DEVELOPMENT NEEDS 


33

Racial composition 

(Empowerment eligibility) 

1 % Black and coloured population.(Population 


Family stability 2 % Female household heads. (Population census 

2001). (Mun: 2007 Community Survey) 

Age (Dependency) 3 % < 10 years old. (Population census 2001). 


4 % > 60 years old. (Population census 2001). 


Education (Employability) 5 % > 20 years old with primary education only. 



6 % Matric pass rate (2010). (National Dept. 

Education) 

Income (Welfare) 7 Average per capita personal income (Rand). 



8 % Population living below national Mean Level of 

Living (MLL) in 2004. (CSIR GAP) 

9 % Population receiving social grants (2010) 

(Towns with none get closest town's value) 

(Thiessen Pop 2004). (SA Security Agency) 

Occupation (Employability) 10 % Unskilled workers. (Population census 2001). 


Dependency ratios 11 % Unemployed as proportion of Labour force. 



Labour dependency ratios 12 Total number of persons supported by every 

person in the labour force, excluding him or 

herself. (Population census 2001). (Mun: 2007 


Health status 13 % Population with HIV/AIDS (2007). (Global 

Insight) 

Migration rates 14 % In-migrants past 5 years. (Population census 

2001). (Mun: 2007 Community Survey) 

Housing 15 % Population living in informal housing units. 



Access to domestic services 16 % Population with electricity in home. (Population 


17 % Population with running water in home. 



18 % Population with toilets in home. (Population 


Human Development Index 19 HDI is based on measuring of life expectancy, 

literacy levels and income (2010). (Global Insight) 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

34

3.4 Change Indices for Municipalities 

As mentioned previously, it was not possible to compute temporal change indices for the full 

complement of indicators. Consequently, change is measured on 27 variables, combined to 

four indicators, namely Human Resources, Economic Sectors, Market Size and Human 

Development Needs. The Human Resources, Economic Sectors and Market Potential is 

combined to obtain a composite Development Potential Index, representing the counterpart 

for the Human Needs Index. In most cases variables measure change between 2001 and 2007. 

Table 3.5 contains details regarding the specific variables used to create the change indices for 

the municipalities. The table provides a brief explanation of the data sources and statistical 

procedures used to generate each of the 27 variables. 

Human Resources Change: This index consists of three variables measuring change between 

2001 and 2007 in the total size and quality of the labour force. These change variables are 

computed from the variables used for the cross-sectional profiles of municipalities in 2001 

and 2007. 

Economic Sector Change: Five variables were used to compute this index. Four of these 

(Sector Diversity, Primary and Tertiary workforces) are similar to those used for the 2007 

municipal profiles. Temporal data for Gross Value Added values were not available. This 

variable is replaced by change in the value of total annual retail sales between 2000 and 2007. 

Market Potential Change: The size of markets was measured by two variables. These are 

measures of population size and total gross personal income of the inhabitants of local 

municipalities between 2001 and 2007. The accessibility measures are not incorporated as 

physical distances to metropolitan markets are invariant over time. 

Human Development Needs Change: Seventeen of the original nineteen variables used in the 

measurement for towns were used to measure change in the human needs levels of 

municipalities between 2001 and 2007. The two variables not included are the Matriculation 

pass rate and the Minimum Level of Living index. Apart from these all the change variables 

are based on the data from the 2001 and 2007 census and community surveys. 

35

Table 3.5: Variables for Municipal Change Indices (2001 – 2007) 

URBAN GROWTH POTENTIAL 

Human resources change Nr Derivation methods and data sources 

Change in size of labour 1 % Change in total size of the labour force (2001-2007) 

force 

Change in quality of labour 2 % Point change in labour force (Population >15 < 65 years with 

force 

education levels equal or better than Grade 12 as percentage of 

total labour force (2001-2007) 

3 % Point change in white collar workers (2001–2007) 

Economic sectoral change Nr Derivation methods and data sources 

Change in strength of 

1 % Change in Diversity/Concentration Index (2001 - 2007) 

primary and tertiary 

economic sectors 

2 % Point change of workforce in Primary activities (2001-2007) 

3 % Point change of workforce in Mining activities (2001-2007) 

36 

4 % Point change of workforce in Financial services (2001-2007) 

5 % Change in per capita total annual value of Retail Sales (2000- 

2007) 

Market potential change Nr Derivation methods and data sources 

Size of local population 1 Change in number of people per municipality (2001-2007) 

Size of local personal income 2 % Change in average Rand value of personal monthly income 

(2001-2007) 

HUMAN DEVELOPMENT NEEDS 

Nr Derivation methods and data sources 

Racial composition 

1 % Point change in black and coloured population (2001-2007) 

(Empowerment eligibility) 

Family stability 2 % Point change in female household heads (2001-2007) 

Age (Dependency) 3 % Point change in < 10 years old (2001-2007) 

4 % Point change > 60 years old (2001-2007) 

Education (Employability) 5 % Point change > 20 years old with primary education only 

(2001-2007) 

Income (Welfare) 6 % Point change in average per capita personal income (Rand) 

(2001-2007) 

7 % Point change in population receiving social grants (2007- 

2010) 

Occupation (Employability) 8 % Point change in unskilled workers (2001-2007) 

Dependency ratios 9 % Point change in unemployed (as proportion of labour force) 

(2001-2007) 

Labour dependency ratios 10 % Point change in total number of persons supported by every 

person in the labour force, excluding him or himself.(2001-2007)

Health status 11 % Point change in HIV/AIDS rates (2001-2007) 

Migration rates 12 % Point change in in-migrants past 5 years (2001-2007) 

Housing 13 % Point change in population living in informal housing units 

(2001-2007) 

Access to domestic services 14 % Point change in population with electricity in home (2001- 

2007) 

15 % Point change in population with running water in home (2001- 

2007) 

16 % Point change in population with toilets in home (2001-2007) 

Human Development Index 17 % Change in HDI (2001-2007) 

3.5 Composite Indices 

For the cross-sectional analyses of towns and municipalities the indices described in the 

previous sections were in turn combined to produce the following three composite indices in 

accordance with the NSDP stipulations. These composite indices aggregate the major urban 

developmental dimensions to enable the higher-level generalization required to classify the 

115 towns and 32 municipalities into useful typologies (see Table 3.2): 

1. Composite Resource Index: Natural Resources + Human Resources 

2. Composite Infrastructure Index: Transportation and Communication + Institutional 

Services. 

3. Composite Economic Index: Economic Sectors + Commercial services + Market and 

Accessibility Potential + Property Market 

At an even higher level of aggregation and generalization all the growth indicators were 

combined to create a single grand Index of Development Potential: Resource Index + 

Infrastructure Index + Economic Index. It was not necessary to further create a compound 

index of Human Needs as no sub-themes were distinguished within this dimension (Table 

3.2). 

By integrating the Development Potential Index with the Human Needs Index, towns and 

municipalities were classified into a Typology for Investment to provide a clearer insight into 

the development potential and the development needs of the various towns and local 

municipalities, as well as the investment policies required to manage urban growth and 

development in the province in future. Apart from the town indicators, indices computed for 

municipalities (cross-sectional and temporal) are used as contextual information for providing 

further investment guidelines to the various spheres of government on the type and locations 

for stimulating economic growth and social advancement. 

37

3.6 Presenting the quantitative profiles 

Addendum 1 presents a full inventory of the original quantitative data profiles of all 115 towns 

and 32 municipalities on all the indicators included in the GIS data matrix (9473 data cells). 

From this data input various output products were created to evaluate and classify the growth 

potential of the various towns and municipalities. 

3.6.1 Cross-sectional profiles of towns 

• From the variety of tabulation options for the 59 indicators, the ranking of the 115 towns 

according to the five composite indices (Table 3.6) were highlighted as the basic 

framework for the evaluation process in Chapter 4. The eight individual dimension indices 

and the full spectrum of each town in a comparable way are displayed in the tables of 

Addendum 3.1 and 3.2 respectively. The full spectrum of all 115 quantitative town 

profiles is furthermore presented in histogram format (Addendum 2. 1). 

• Furthermore, the spatial differentiation of the Development Potential and Human Needs 

scores of the individual towns were displayed in Figures 3.3 and 3.4. The three combined 

indices (Figures 3.5 – 3.7) and eight individual indices (Addendum 2.1 – 7.8) on which 

the Development Potential and Human Needs indices were based are presented in a 

further series of maps. On each map towns were classified into five development 

typologies according to the statistical procedures for map interval categorisation based on 

the attribute mean and a standard deviation of town values. The following five categories 

of development potential indices provide a framework to assign the individual 

development components and the towns’ attainable prospects for future growth or decline: 

(i) “Very Low” and “Low” growth potential: These towns possess limited economic and 

human resources, devoid of the potential to stimulate the urban economy in a significant way. 

The difference between ‘Low’ and ‘Very Low’ is only a degree variation. 

(ii) “Medium” growth potential: These towns’ development indices are roughly in line with 

the average value of the provinces’ aggregate on the 115 towns. Consistent and moderate 

growth prevails in these towns and certain sectors of the economy show signs of growth, or 

have the potential for it; 

(iii) “High” and “Very High” growth potential: These towns experience sustainable growth 

on the positive side of the provincial average. They already have an established and proven 

track record to operate as ‘growth engines’ at a certain level. They have the potential to grow 

38

at a sustainable and powerful rate in line with the capacity of their resources and to operate as 

service providers to a relatively extensive hinterland. The difference between ‘High’ and 

‘Very High’ status only lies in the diversity and intensity of the town dynamics. The meaning 

of “High” on the Development Potential scale and on the Human Needs scale respectively 

should be interpreted in a reciprocal way. 

The final integration of the towns’ ‘development potential’ and ‘human needs’ indices in 

investment groups are presented in Figure 3.8 and 3.9. On the first diagram the Development 

Potential and Human Needs scores were superimposed and plotted on a scatter diagram and 

the five typologies mapped spatially in Figure 3.9. This exercise led to a fivefold typology of 

the towns according to the integrated development and needs performance in the four 

quadrants and central grey base of the diagram. An investment type could be coupled with 

each town, applied to the quadrant that would best stimulate Infrastructure Capital and Social 

Capital investment. This is in line with the National Spatial Development Perspective (NSDP) 

and the Northern Cape PGDS guidelines in this regard. Table 3.7 summarise the results of the 

individual towns statistically. These visuals integrate the needs and development 

performances in a combined image by presenting it in both diagrammatic and map formats. 

These investment typologies represent the climax of the quantitative analysis. 

Table 3.6: Ranks and map classes of composite indices of towns 

Town Ranks (Best to Worst) 

Human Needs Development Potential 

Rank Town Class Town Class 

1 Koingnaas 1 Kimberley 1 

2 Kleinzee 1 Upington 1 

3 Alexander Bay 1 Kuruman 2 

4 Kathu 1 Springbok 2 

5 Aggeneys 1 Hartswater 2 

6 Lime Acres 1 Kathu 2 

7 Groblershoop 1 Ritchie 2 

8 Orania 1 Colesberg 2 

9 Blackrock 1 De Aar 2 

10 Hondeklip Bay 1 Jan Kempdorp 2 

11 Springbok 2 Pampierstad 2 

12 Ulco 2 Calvinia 2 

13 Carolusberg 2 Orania 2 

14 Port Nolloth 2 Douglas 2 

15 Hotazel 2 Hopetown 2 

16 Okiep 2 Noupoort 2 

17 Vanderkloof 2 Groblershoop 2 

18 Sanddrif 2 Barkly West 3 

19 Nababeep 2 Warrenton 3 

20 Danielskuil 2 Kleinzee 3 

39

21 Kimberley 2 Victoria West 3 

22 Kamieskroon 2 Keimoes 3 

23 Upington 2 Fraserburg 3 

24 Postmasburg 2 Lime Acres 3 

25 Garies 2 Sutherland 3 

26 De Aar 2 Nieuwoudtville 3 

27 Calvinia 2 Kakamas 3 

28 Concordia 2 Hanover 3 

29 Williston 2 Williston 3 

30 Dingleton 3 Petrusville 3 

31 Fraserburg 3 Postmasburg 3 

32 Steinkopf 3 Alexander Bay 3 

33 Kakamas 3 Richmond 3 

34 Sutherland 3 Carnarvon 3 

35 Pofadder 3 Olifantshoek 3 

36 Nieuwoudtville 3 Port Nolloth 3 

37 Komaggas 3 Prieska 3 

38 Vosburg 3 Dingleton 3 

39 Prieska 3 Loeriesfontein 3 

40 Carnarvon 3 Phillipstown 3 

41 Hartswater 3 Griekwastad 3 

42 Loeriesfontein 3 Okiep 3 

43 Groot Mier 3 Kamieskroon 3 

44 Keimoes 3 Nababeep 3 

45 Victoria West 3 Steinkopf 3 

46 Karkams 3 Vanderkloof 3 

47 Richmond 3 Garies 3 

48 Goedgedacht 3 Britstown 3 

49 Eksteenfontein 3 Carolusberg 3 

50 Raaswater 3 Karos 3 

51 Brandvlei 3 Delportshoop 3 

52 Hopetown 3 Norvalspont 3 

53 Olifantshoek 3 Loxton 3 

54 Niekerkshoop 3 Pofadder 3 

55 Douglas 3 Campbell 3 

56 Augrabies 3 Klippunt 3 

57 Karos 3 Kenhardt 3 

58 Griekwastad 3 Danielskuil 3 

59 Rietfontein 3 Louisvale 3 

60 Van Zylsrus 3 Brandvlei 3 

61 Khubus 3 Strydenburg 3 

62 Loxton 3 Ulco 3 

63 Petrusville 3 Van Wyksvlei 3 

64 Van Wyksvlei 3 Swartkop 3 

65 Britstown 3 Raaswater 3 

66 Gannaput 3 Vosburg 3 

67 Noupoort 3 Concordia 3 

68 Warrenton 3 Windsorton 3 

69 Loxtonberg 3 Holpan 3 

70 Ritchie 3 Leerkrans 3 

71 Buffelsrivier 3 Dibeng 3 

72 Dibeng 3 Koingnaas 3 

73 Kuruman 3 Hondeklip Bay 3 

74 Lekkersing 3 Sanddrif 3 

75 Lutzburg 3 Lambrechtsdrif 3 

76 Boegoeberg 3 Pella 3 

77 Jan Kempdorp 3 Niekerkshoop 3 

78 Vioolsdrif 3 Karkams 3 

40

79 Pampierstad 4 Vioolsdrif 3 

80 Phillipstown 4 Kheis 3 

81 Strydenburg 4 Marydale 3 

82 Hanover 4 Aggeneys 4 

83 Kenhardt 4 Hotazel 4 

84 Klippunt 4 Buffelsrivier 4 

85 Barkly West 4 Lutzburg 4 

86 Schmidtsdrift 4 Schmidtsdrift 4 

87 Stutterheim 4 Groenwater 4 

88 Delportshoop 4 Stutterheim 4 

89 Pella 4 Leliefontein 4 

90 Colesberg 4 Loxtonberg 4 

91 Klipfontein 4 Augrabies 4 

92 Campbell 4 Rietfontein 4 

93 Cillie 4 Van Zylsrus 4 

94 Leliefontein 4 Lennetsville 4 

95 Marydale 4 Grootdrink 4 

96 Onseepkans 4 Blackrock 4 

97 Lambrechtsdrif 4 Khubus 4 

98 Marchand 4 Komaggas 4 

99 Alheit 4 Alheit 4 

100 Lennetsville 4 Wegdraai 4 

101 Swartkop 4 Cillie 4 

102 Louisvale 4 Marchand 4 

103 Windsorton 4 Onseepkans 4 

104 Leerkrans 4 Goedgedacht 4 

105 Grootdrink 4 Paulshoek 4 

106 Wegdraai 4 Eksteenfontein 4 

107 Philandersbron 4 Gannaput 4 

108 Riemvasmaak 4 Groot Mier 4 

109 Norvalspont 4 Boegoeberg 4 

110 Spoegrivier 4 Nourivier 4 

111 Paulshoek 4 Lekkersing 4 

112 Holpan 5 Klipfontein 4 

113 Kheis 5 Philandersbron 4 

114 Nourivier 5 Riemvasmaak 4 

115 Groenwater 5 Spoegrivier 4 

Town Ranks (Best to Worst) 

Composite Resource 

Index 

Composite 

Infrastructure Index 

Composite 

Economic Activity 

Index 

Rank Town Class Town Class Town Class 

1 Kimberley 1 Kimberley 1 Kimberley 1 

2 Pampierstad 1 Upington 1 Upington 1 

3 Kathu 1 Calvinia 1 Ritchie 1 

4 Upington 1 Colesberg 1 Hartswater 1 

5 Groblershoop 1 De Aar 2 Jan Kempdorp 2 

6 Orania 1 Loeriesfontein 2 Kathu 2 

7 Springbok 1 Nieuwoudtville 2 Kuruman 2 

8 Kuruman 1 Springbok 2 Pampierstad 2 

9 Lime Acres 1 Victoria West 2 Douglas 2 

10 Kamieskroon 1 Carnarvon 2 De Aar 2 

11 Kleinzee 2 Williston 2 Hopetown 2 

12 Alexander Bay 2 Kuruman 2 Karos 2 

13 Sanddrif 2 Fraserburg 2 Springbok 2 

41

14 Nababeep 2 Noupoort 2 Colesberg 3 

15 Leliefontein 2 Pofadder 2 Orania 3 

16 Hartswater 2 Prieska 2 Warrenton 3 

17 Vanderkloof 2 Brandvlei 2 Strydenburg 3 

18 Postmasburg 2 Port Nolloth 2 Dingleton 3 

19 Ulco 2 Hopetown 2 Richmond 3 

20 Noupoort 2 Sutherland 2 Kakamas 3 

21 Okiep 2 Jan Kempdorp 2 Olifantshoek 3 

22 Carolusberg 2 Britstown 2 Postmasburg 3 

23 Barkly West 2 Richmond 2 Calvinia 3 

24 Koingnaas 2 Kakamas 2 Victoria West 3 

25 Garies 2 Olifantshoek 2 Louisvale 3 

26 Colesberg 2 Douglas 2 Lambrechtsdrif 3 

27 Keimoes 2 Phillipstown 2 Swartkop 3 

28 Warrenton 2 Keimoes 2 Klippunt 3 

29 Nourivier 2 Steinkopf 2 Raaswater 3 

30 Hanover 3 Kenhardt 2 Leerkrans 3 

31 De Aar 3 Barkly West 3 Griekwastad 3 

32 Dingleton 3 Garies 3 Lime Acres 3 

33 Karkams 3 Petrusville 3 Campbell 3 

34 Concordia 3 Griekwastad 3 Barkly West 3 

35 Calvinia 3 Hanover 3 Petrusville 3 

36 Douglas 3 Klippunt 3 Dibeng 3 

37 Pella 3 Hartswater 3 Fraserburg 3 

38 Petrusville 3 Delportshoop 3 Sutherland 3 

39 Jan Kempdorp 3 Van Wyksvlei 3 Carnarvon 3 

40 Port Nolloth 3 Norvalspont 3 Vanderkloof 3 

41 Steinkopf 3 Louisvale 3 Prieska 3 

42 Ritchie 3 Swartkop 3 Holpan 3 

43 Kheis 3 Warrenton 3 Williston 3 

44 Nieuwoudtville 3 Loxton 3 Danielskuil 3 

45 Sutherland 3 Niekerkshoop 3 Loxton 3 

46 Holpan 3 Raaswater 3 Phillipstown 3 

47 Paulshoek 3 Kleinzee 3 Keimoes 3 

48 Hopetown 3 Vosburg 3 Hanover 3 

49 Aggeneys 3 Strydenburg 3 Noupoort 3 

50 Hotazel 3 Groblershoop 3 Groblershoop 3 

51 Fraserburg 3 Campbell 3 Norvalspont 3 

52 Phillipstown 3 Okiep 3 Nababeep 3 

53 Hondeklip Bay 3 Leerkrans 3 Delportshoop 3 

54 Lekkersing 3 Danielskuil 3 Kenhardt 3 

55 Delportshoop 3 Dibeng 3 Britstown 3 

56 Windsorton 3 Kamieskroon 3 Windsorton 3 

57 Norvalspont 3 Alexander Bay 3 Schmidtsdrift 3 

58 Buffelsrivier 3 Kathu 3 Port Nolloth 3 

59 Loxton 3 Karos 3 Vosburg 3 

60 Williston 3 Orania 3 Van Wyksvlei 3 

61 Loeriesfontein 3 Carolusberg 3 Okiep 3 

62 Kakamas 3 Marydale 3 Groenwater 3 

63 Prieska 3 Lambrechtsdrif 3 Steinkopf 3 

64 Griekwastad 3 Lennetsville 3 Kleinzee 3 

65 Danielskuil 3 Dingleton 3 Stutterheim 3 

66 Victoria West 3 Ritchie 3 Brandvlei 3 

67 Eksteenfontein 3 Kheis 3 Ulco 3 

68 Britstown 3 Hondeklip Bay 3 Carolusberg 3 

69 Groot Mier 3 Postmasburg 3 Alexander Bay 3 

70 Blackrock 3 Windsorton 3 Nieuwoudtville 3 

71 Khubus 3 Lutzburg 3 Komaggas 3 

42

72 Olifantshoek 3 Loxtonberg 3 Vioolsdrif 3 

73 Richmond 3 Pella 3 Hotazel 3 

74 Pofadder 3 Stutterheim 3 Augrabies 3 

75 Komaggas 3 Groenwater 3 Loeriesfontein 3 

76 Vioolsdrif 3 Alheit 3 Lennetsville 3 

77 Campbell 3 Karkams 3 Lutzburg 3 

78 Carnarvon 3 Rietfontein 3 Marchand 3 

79 Rietfontein 3 Concordia 3 Cillie 3 

80 Klipfontein 3 Nababeep 3 Buffelsrivier 3 

81 Marydale 4 Vanderkloof 3 Boegoeberg 3 

82 Van Wyksvlei 4 Vioolsdrif 3 Grootdrink 3 

83 Vosburg 4 Van Zylsrus 3 Concordia 3 

84 Onseepkans 4 Grootdrink 4 Blackrock 3 

85 Spoegrivier 4 Wegdraai 4 Wegdraai 3 

86 Kenhardt 4 Lime Acres 4 Goedgedacht 3 

87 Karos 4 Augrabies 4 Paulshoek 3 

88 Schmidtsdrift 4 Koingnaas 4 Alheit 3 

89 Van Zylsrus 4 Gannaput 4 Pofadder 3 

90 Augrabies 4 Pampierstad 4 Niekerkshoop 3 

91 Brandvlei 4 Schmidtsdrift 4 Sanddrif 3 

92 Goedgedacht 4 Ulco 4 Loxtonberg 3 

93 Lutzburg 4 Aggeneys 4 Hondeklip Bay 3 

94 Loxtonberg 4 Holpan 4 Gannaput 3 

95 Klippunt 4 Cillie 4 Khubus 3 

96 Louisvale 4 Onseepkans 4 Aggeneys 4 

97 Niekerkshoop 4 Marchand 4 Van Zylsrus 4 

98 Strydenburg 4 Buffelsrivier 4 Marydale 4 

99 Grootdrink 4 Philandersbron 4 Eksteenfontein 4 

100 Raaswater 4 Goedgedacht 4 Garies 4 

101 Marchand 4 Boegoeberg 4 Riemvasmaak 4 

102 Philandersbron 4 Hotazel 4 Koingnaas 4 

103 Swartkop 4 Khubus 4 Kamieskroon 4 

104 Cillie 4 Blackrock 4 Pella 4 

105 Stutterheim 4 Groot Mier 4 Onseepkans 4 

106 Groenwater 4 Riemvasmaak 4 Lekkersing 4 

107 Dibeng 4 Komaggas 4 Spoegrivier 4 

108 Leerkrans 4 Klipfontein 4 Rietfontein 4 

109 Riemvasmaak 4 Eksteenfontein 4 Leliefontein 4 

110 Alheit 4 Leliefontein 5 Groot Mier 4 

111 Wegdraai 4 Spoegrivier 5 Philandersbron 4 

112 Boegoeberg 4 Sanddrif 5 Karkams 4 

113 Lambrechtsdrif 4 Lekkersing 5 Kheis 4 

114 Lennetsville 4 Paulshoek 5 Nourivier 4 

115 Gannaput 4 Nourivier 5 Klipfontein 4 

Table 3.7: Investment classification of towns based on development potential and human 

needs typology 

(a) SORTED BY TYPOLOGY 

Development Needs Development Investment 

Town Name 

Class Class and Needs Typology 

Barkly West 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Colesberg 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Delportshoop 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Douglas 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Hanover 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

43

Hopetown 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Jan Kempdorp 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Kuruman 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Norvalspont 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Pampierstad 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Ritchie 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Alexander Bay 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Calvinia 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Carolusberg 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

De Aar 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Garies 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Groblershoop 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Hartswater 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Kamieskroon 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Kathu 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Kimberley 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Kleinzee 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Lime Acres 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Nababeep 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Okiep 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Orania 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Port Nolloth 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Postmasburg 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Springbok 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Upington 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Vanderkloof 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Alheit 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Augrabies 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Boegoeberg 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Campbell 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Cillie 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Eksteenfontein 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Gannaput 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Goedgedacht 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Groenwater 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Grootdrink 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Holpan 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Kenhardt 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Kheis 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Khubus 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Klipfontein 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Klippunt 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Lambrechtsdrif 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Leerkrans 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Lekkersing 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Leliefontein 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Lennetsville 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Louisvale 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Loxtonberg 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Marchand 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Marydale 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Nourivier 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Onseepkans 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

44

Paulshoek 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Pella 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Philandersbron 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Riemvasmaak 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Rietfontein 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Schmidtsdrift 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Spoegrivier 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Stutterheim 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Swartkop 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Van Zylsrus 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Wegdraai 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Windsorton 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Aggeneys 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Blackrock 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Concordia 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Danielskuil 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Groot Mier 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Hondeklip Bay 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Hotazel 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Koingnaas 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Komaggas 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Sanddrif 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Ulco 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Brandvlei 2 1 3 Transitional 

Britstown 1 1 1 Transitional 

Buffelsrivier 2 1 3 Transitional 

Carnarvon 1 2 2 Transitional 

Dibeng 2 1 3 Transitional 

Dingleton 1 2 2 Transitional 

Fraserburg 1 2 2 Transitional 

Griekwastad 1 1 1 Transitional 

Kakamas 1 2 2 Transitional 

Karkams 2 1 3 Transitional 

Karos 1 1 1 Transitional 

Keimoes 1 2 2 Transitional 

Loeriesfontein 1 2 2 Transitional 

Loxton 1 1 1 Transitional 

Lutzburg 2 1 3 Transitional 

Niekerkshoop 2 1 3 Transitional 

Nieuwoudtville 1 2 2 Transitional 

Noupoort 1 1 1 Transitional 

Olifantshoek 1 1 1 Transitional 

Petrusville 1 1 1 Transitional 

Phillipstown 1 1 1 Transitional 

Pofadder 2 2 4 Transitional 

Prieska 1 2 2 Transitional 

Raaswater 2 1 3 Transitional 

Richmond 1 1 1 Transitional 

Steinkopf 1 2 2 Transitional 

Strydenburg 2 1 3 Transitional 

Sutherland 1 2 2 Transitional 

Van Wyksvlei 2 1 3 Transitional 

Victoria West 1 2 2 Transitional 

45

Vioolsdrif 2 1 3 Transitional 

Vosburg 2 2 4 Transitional 

Warrenton 1 1 1 Transitional 

Williston 1 2 2 Transitional 

46

(b) SORTED ALPHABETICCALY 


Town Name 


Aggeneys 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Alexander Bay 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Alheit 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Augrabies 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Barkly West 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Blackrock 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Boegoeberg 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Brandvlei 2 1 3 Transitional 

Britstown 1 1 1 Transitional 

Buffelsrivier 2 1 3 Transitional 

Calvinia 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Campbell 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Carnarvon 1 2 2 Transitional 

Carolusberg 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Cillie 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Colesberg 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Concordia 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Danielskuil 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

De Aar 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Delportshoop 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Dibeng 2 1 3 Transitional 

Dingleton 1 2 2 Transitional 

Douglas 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Eksteenfontein 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Fraserburg 1 2 2 Transitional 

Gannaput 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Garies 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Goedgedacht 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Griekwastad 1 1 1 Transitional 

Groblershoop 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Groenwater 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Groot Mier 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Grootdrink 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Hanover 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Hartswater 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Holpan 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Hondeklip Bay 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Hopetown 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Hotazel 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Jan Kempdorp 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Kakamas 1 2 2 Transitional 

Kamieskroon 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Karkams 2 1 3 Transitional 

Karos 1 1 1 Transitional 

Kathu 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Keimoes 1 2 2 Transitional 

Kenhardt 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Kheis 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Khubus 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

47

Kimberley 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Kleinzee 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Klipfontein 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Klippunt 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Koingnaas 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Komaggas 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Kuruman 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Lambrechtsdrif 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Leerkrans 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Lekkersing 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Leliefontein 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Lennetsville 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Lime Acres 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Loeriesfontein 1 2 2 Transitional 

Louisvale 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Loxton 1 1 1 Transitional 

Loxtonberg 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Lutzburg 2 1 3 Transitional 

Marchand 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Marydale 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Nababeep 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Niekerkshoop 2 1 3 Transitional 

Nieuwoudtville 1 2 2 Transitional 

Norvalspont 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Noupoort 1 1 1 Transitional 

Nourivier 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Okiep 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Olifantshoek 1 1 1 Transitional 

Onseepkans 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Orania 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Pampierstad 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Paulshoek 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Pella 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Petrusville 1 1 1 Transitional 

Philandersbron 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Phillipstown 1 1 1 Transitional 

Pofadder 2 2 4 Transitional 

Port Nolloth 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Postmasburg 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Prieska 1 2 2 Transitional 

Raaswater 2 1 3 Transitional 

Richmond 1 1 1 Transitional 

Riemvasmaak 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Rietfontein 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Ritchie 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Sanddrif 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Schmidtsdrift 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Spoegrivier 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Springbok 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Steinkopf 1 2 2 Transitional 

Strydenburg 2 1 3 Transitional 

Stutterheim 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Sutherland 1 2 2 Transitional 

48

Swartkop 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Ulco 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Upington 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Van Wyksvlei 2 1 3 Transitional 

Van Zylsrus 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Vanderkloof 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Victoria West 1 2 2 Transitional 

Vioolsdrif 2 1 3 Transitional 

Vosburg 2 2 4 Transitional 

Warrenton 1 1 1 Transitional 

Wegdraai 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Williston 1 2 2 Transitional 

Windsorton 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

49

Figure 3.3: Development potential index of towns in the Northern Cape Province 

50

Figure 3.4: Human development needs index of towns in the Northern Cape Province 

51

Figure 3.5: Composite resources index of towns in the Northern Cape Province 

52

Figure 3.6: Composite infrastructure index of towns in the Northern Cape Province 

53

Figure 3.7: Composite economic activities of towns in the Northern Cape Province 

54

Growth Potential Index 

0.8 

0.6 

0.4 

0.2 

0.0 

-0.2 

-0.4 

High Development Potential 

High Human Need 

Groenwater 

GROWTH POTENTIAL AND DEVELOPMENT NEEDS 

Kuruman 

Colesberg 

Ritchie 

Jan Pampierstad 

Kempdorp 

Hartswater 

De Aar 

Calvinia 

Kimberley 

Upington 

Springbok 

Orania 

Douglas 

Hopetown 

Noupoort 

Groblershoop 

Barkly West 

Warrenton 

Victoria Keimoes 

West 

Fraserburg 

Kleinzee 

Lime Acres 

Hanover Petrusville 

Nieuwoudtville 

Sutherland 

Kakamas 

Alexander Bay 

Olifantshoek 

Richmond Williston Postmasburg 

Alexander Bay 

Olifantshoek 

Richmond Williston Postmasburg 

Carnarvon 

Phillipstown 

Loeriesfontein 

Carnarvon Prieska 

Dingleton 

Port Nolloth 

Phillipstown Griekwastad 

Steinkopf 

Garies 

Kamieskroon 

Nababeep 

Vanderkloof 

Okiep 

Britstown 

Carolusberg 

Norvalspont 

Delportshoop 

Loxton 

Karos 

Campbell 

Pofadder 

Kenhardt Klippunt 

Louisvale 

Kenhardt Klippunt 

Louisvale Strydenburg 

Brandvlei 

Danielskuil 

Ulco 

Swartkop 

Van Wyksvlei Brandvlei 

Danielskuil 

Swartkop 

Van Wyksvlei 

Ulco 

Raaswater 

Vosburg 

Holpan Windsorton 

Vosburg Concordia 

Leerkrans 

Dibeng 

Hondeklip Bay 

Koingnaas 

Lambrechtsdrif 

Pella 

Sanddrif 

Kheis 

Marydale 

Vioolsdrif Niekerkshoop 

Karkams 

Aggeneys 

Schmidtsdrift 

Buffelsrivier 

Lutzburg 

Hotazel 

Leliefontein 

Stutterheim 

Loxtonberg 

Augrabies 

Grootdrink 

Lennetsville Van Rietfontein Augrabies 

Grootdrink 

Lennetsville Van Rietfontein Zylsrus 

Khubus 

Blackrock 

Alheit 

Komaggas 

Wegdraai 

Paulshoek 

Onseepkans 

Marchand 

Cillie 

Eksteenfontein 

Goedgedacht 

Gannaput 

Boegoeberg 

Groot Mier 

Nourivier 

Lekkersing 

Philandersbron 

Klipfontein 

Spoegrivier 

Philandersbron 

Riemvasmaak 

Development Needs Index 

High Development Potential 

Low Human Need 

Low Development Potential 

Low Development Potential 


Low Human Need 

-0.6 

-1.2 -1.0 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 

Figure 3.8: Scatter diagram of development potential and human needs typology of towns in the Northern Cape Province 

Kathu 

55

Figure 3.9: Investment typology of towns in the Northern Cape Province 

3.6.2 Cross-sectional profiles of municipalities 

The same procedures and outputs as described in the case of the towns (Section 3.6.1) were 

used to produce Table 3.8 and five composite maps (Figures 3.10 – 3.14). Further tables, 

maps and histograms for the 32 municipalities are presented in Addendum 2.9 – 2.16, 

Addendum 3.3 and Addendum 4.2. The final integration of the municipalities in specific 

development potential and human needs groups for investment purposes are presented in 

Figures 3.15 and 3.16, while Table 3.9 summarises the results statistically. As in the case of 

the towns, the 32 municipalities were classified into five development typologies. 

A combination of the towns’ and the municipalities’ Development Potential and Needs Level 

categories were superimposed in Figures 3.17 and 3.18 respectively. In the same way the 

56

investment typology for towns and municipality were integrated in Figure 3.19. These maps 

provide an overall view of an integrated regional landscape. 

Table 3.8: Ranks and map classes of local municipalities 

Municipality Ranks (Best to Worst) 


Rank Municipality Class Municipality Class 

1 Kgalagadi 1 Sol Plaatje 1 

2 Kgatelopele 2 //Khara Hais 2 

3 Richtersveld 2 Moshaweng 2 

4 Gamagara 2 Phokwane 2 

5 Namakwa 2 Nama Khoi 2 

6 Khai-Ma 2 Ga-Segonyana 2 

7 Sol Plaatje 2 Gamagara 3 

8 Nama Khoi 2 Richtersveld 3 

9 Siyanda 2 Kai !Garib 3 

10 Pixley ka Seme 2 Karoo Hoogland 3 

11 Hantam 2 Siyancuma 3 

12 Emthanjeni 2 Umsobomvu 3 

13 //Khara Hais 2 Kgalagadi 3 

14 Kamiesberg 3 Kgatelopele 3 

15 Tsantsabane 3 Emthanjeni 3 

16 Karoo Hoogland 3 Dikgatlong 3 

17 Siyathemba 3 Hantam 3 

18 Kai !Garib 3 Magareng 3 

19 Thembelihle 3 Kamiesberg 3 

20 Siyancuma 3 Tsantsabane 3 

21 Kareeberg 3 Thembelihle 3 

22 Ubuntu 4 Ubuntu 3 

23 Phokwane 4 Khai-Ma 4 

24 Frances Baard 4 Renosterberg 4 

25 Umsobomvu 4 !Kheis 4 

26 Dikgatlong 4 Pixley ka Seme 4 

27 Renosterberg 4 Siyanda 4 

28 Magareng 4 Siyathemba 4 

29 !Kheis 4 Frances Baard 4 

30 Mier 4 Mier 4 

31 Ga-Segonyana 4 Kareeberg 4 

32 Moshaweng 5 Namakwa 4 


Composite Resource Composite 

Composite Economic 

Index 

Infrastructure Index Activity Index 

Rank Municipality Class Municipality Class Municipality Class 

1 Sol Plaatje 1 Sol Plaatje 1 Sol Plaatje 1 

2 //Khara Hais 2 Moshaweng 1 //Khara Hais 2 

3 Richtersveld 2 //Khara Hais 2 Phokwane 2 

4 Nama Khoi 2 Kai !Garib 2 Kgalagadi 2 

5 Ga-Segonyana 2 Nama Khoi 2 Gamagara 3 

6 Phokwane 2 Karoo Hoogland 2 Moshaweng 3 

7 Magareng 2 Siyancuma 2 Nama Khoi 3 

57

8 Umsobomvu 2 Emthanjeni 2 Kai !Garib 3 

9 Kgatelopele 2 Richtersveld 2 Karoo Hoogland 3 

10 Gamagara 2 Ga-Segonyana 2 Ga-Segonyana 3 

11 Dikgatlong 3 Phokwane 3 Siyanda 3 

12 Siyancuma 3 Umsobomvu 3 Siyancuma 3 

13 Moshaweng 3 Dikgatlong 3 Kgatelopele 3 

14 Hantam 3 Gamagara 3 Richtersveld 3 

15 Kamiesberg 3 Mier 3 Pixley ka Seme 3 

16 Emthanjeni 3 Renosterberg 3 Tsantsabane 3 

17 Thembelihle 3 Ubuntu 3 Kamiesberg 3 

18 Tsantsabane 3 Kgatelopele 3 Hantam 3 

19 Kgalagadi 3 Hantam 3 Ubuntu 3 

20 Khai-Ma 3 !Kheis 3 Umsobomvu 3 

21 Kai !Garib 4 Tsantsabane 3 !Kheis 3 

22 Karoo Hoogland 4 Siyathemba 3 Emthanjeni 3 

23 Renosterberg 4 Magareng 3 Dikgatlong 3 

24 Siyathemba 4 Kamiesberg 4 Frances Baard 3 

25 Ubuntu 4 Khai-Ma 4 Thembelihle 3 

26 !Kheis 4 Thembelihle 4 Khai-Ma 4 

27 Pixley ka Seme 4 Kgalagadi 4 Renosterberg 4 

28 Frances Baard 4 Kareeberg 4 Magareng 4 

29 Siyanda 4 Frances Baard 4 Kareeberg 4 

30 Mier 4 Pixley ka Seme 4 Siyathemba 4 

31 Namakwa 4 Siyanda 5 Mier 4 

32 Kareeberg 4 Namakwa 5 Namakwa 4 

Table 3.9: Investment classification of municipalities based on development potential and 

human needs typology 



Municipality 


Umsobomvu 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Phokwane 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Moshaweng 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Ga-Segonyana 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Richtersveld 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Nama Khoi 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

//Khara Hais 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Sol Plaatje 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Gamagara 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Kgalagadi 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Ubuntu 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Kareeberg 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Renosterberg 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Siyathemba 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Mier 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

!Kheis 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Dikgatlong 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Magareng 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Frances Baard 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Hantam 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

58

Khai-Ma 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Emthanjeni 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Kgatelopele 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Namakwa 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Pixley ka Seme 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Siyanda 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Thembelihle 2 1 5 Transitional 

Siyancuma 1 1 5 Transitional 

Kai !Garib 1 1 5 Transitional 

Kamiesberg 2 2 5 Transitional 

Karoo Hoogland 1 2 5 Transitional 

Tsantsabane 2 2 5 Transitional 

(b) SORTED ALPHABETICALLY 


Municipality 


!Kheis 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

//Khara Hais 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Dikgatlong 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Emthanjeni 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Frances Baard 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Gamagara 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Ga-Segonyana 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Hantam 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Kai !Garib 1 1 5 Transitional 

Kamiesberg 2 2 5 Transitional 

Kareeberg 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Karoo Hoogland 1 2 5 Transitional 

Kgalagadi 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Kgatelopele 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Khai-Ma 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Magareng 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Mier 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Moshaweng 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Nama Khoi 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Namakwa 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Phokwane 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

Pixley ka Seme 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Renosterberg 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Richtersveld 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Siyancuma 1 1 5 Transitional 

Siyanda 2 2 4 Low Dev/Low Need 

Siyathemba 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Sol Plaatje 1 2 2 High Dev/Low Need 

Thembelihle 2 1 5 Transitional 

Tsantsabane 2 2 5 Transitional 

Ubuntu 2 1 3 Low Dev/High Need 

Umsobomvu 1 1 1 High Dev/High Need 

59

Figure 3.10: Development potential index of local municipalities in the Northern Cape Province 

60

Figure 3.11: Human development needs index of local municipalities in the Northern Cape Province 

61

Figure 3.12: Composite resource index of local municipalities in the Northern Cape Province 

62

Figure 3.13: Composite infrastructure index of local municipalities in the Northern Cape Province 

63

Figure 3.14: Composite economic index of local municipalities in the Northern Cape Province 

64

Development Potential Index 

0.6 

0.4 

DEVELOPMENT POTENTIAL AND DEVELOPMENT NEEDS 

High Development 

High Needs 

Moshaweng 

Phokwane 

Mier 

Ubuntu UbuntuThembelihle 

Thembelihle 

!Kheis 

Renosterberg 

Kareeberg 

Siyathemba 

//Khara Hais 

Kamiesberg Hantam 

Ga-Segonyana 

0.2 

0.0 

Kai !Garib 

SiyancumaKaroo 

Hoogland 

Umsobomvu 

Dikgatlong 

Emthanjeni 

Magareng 

Tsantsabane Kamiesberg Hantam 

Ga-Segonyana 

Kai !Garib 

SiyancumaKaroo 

Hoogland 

Umsobomvu 

Dikgatlong 

Emthanjeni 

Magareng 

Tsantsabane 

-0.2 

-0.4 

-0.6 

Frances Baard 

Low Development 

High Needs 

Figure 3.15: Scatter diagram of development potential and human needs typology of 

municipalities in the Northern Cape Province 

Nama Khoi 

Khai-Ma 

Pixley ka Seme 

Siyanda 

Gamagara 

Richtersveld 

Kgatelopele 

Kgalagadi 

Namakwa 

Low Development 

Low Needs 

-0.8 

-0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 

Development Needs Index 

Sol Plaatje 

High Development 

Low Needs 

65

Figure 3.16: Investment typology of local municipalities in the Northern Cape Province 

66

Figure 3.17: Development potential index of towns and local municipalities in the Northern Cape 

Province 

67

Figure 3.18: Human needs index of towns and local municipalities in the Northern Cape Province 

68

Figure 3.19: Investment typology of towns and local municipalities in the Northern Cape Province 

69

3.6.3 Temporal profiles of municipalities 

The same procedures and outputs (with minor adjustments as indicated in Section 3.4) as 

described in the previous sections on the cross-sectional profiles of the towns and 

municipalities, were implemented to measure the changes that took place in the development 

potential and human needs levels of municipalities between 2001 and 2007. Several tables 

(Table 3.10 and Addendum 3.4), and maps (Figures 3.20 – 3.22) were constructed to represent 

the “change” dimension in the 32 municipalities. The investment groups, based on the changeindicators, 

are listed in Table 3.11. 

The above-mentioned set of tables, maps and histograms will provide the scene from which 

the interpretation of the Northern Cape development landscape will take place. 

Table 3.10: Ranks and map classes of change between 2001 and 2007 for local 

municipalities 



Rank Municipality Class Municipality Class 

1 !Kheis 1 Ga-Segonyana 1 

2 Thembelihle 1 Namakwa 1 

3 Siyathemba 2 Umsobomvu 2 

4 Pixley ka Seme 2 Sol Plaatje 2 

5 Emthanjeni 2 Kgatelopele 2 

6 Khâi-Ma 2 //Khara Hais 2 

7 Kamiesberg 2 Kgalagadi 2 

8 Dikgatlong 2 Khâi-Ma 2 

9 Kai !Garib 2 Tsantsabane 3 

10 Sol Plaatje 2 Emthanjeni 3 

11 Magareng 2 Hantam 3 

12 Siyancuma 3 Siyancuma 3 

13 //Khara Hais 3 Gamagara 3 

14 Umsobomvu 3 Magareng 3 

15 Tsantsabane 3 Richtersveld 3 

16 Nama Khoi 3 Nama Khoi 3 

17 Richtersveld 3 Dikgatlong 3 

18 Hantam 3 Thembelihle 3 

19 Kgalagadi 3 Mier 3 

20 Phokwane 3 !Kheis 3 

21 Mier 3 Kamiesberg 3 

22 Gamagara 4 Siyanda 3 

23 Ga-Segonyana 4 Kai !Garib 3 

24 Siyanda 4 Phokwane 3 

25 Renosterberg 4 Moshaweng 4 

26 Karoo Hoogland 4 Renosterberg 4 

27 Kareeberg 4 Siyathemba 4 

70

28 Namakwa 4 Kareeberg 4 

29 Frances Baard 4 Ubuntu 4 

30 Moshaweng 4 Karoo Hoogland 4 

31 Ubuntu 5 Pixley ka Seme 4 

32 Kgatelopele 5 Frances Baard 5 

Table 3.11: Typology of municipalities based on development potential and human needs 

typology 


Development Needs Devlopment and 

Municipality 

Class Class Needs 

Khâi-Ma 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Umsobomvu 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Emthanjeni 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Siyancuma 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

//Khara Hais 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Tsantsabane 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Sol Plaatje 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Dikgatlong 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Magareng 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Richtersveld 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Hantam 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Kgatelopele 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Ga-Segonyana 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Gamagara 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Namakwa 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Kgalagadi 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Kamiesberg 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

Thembelihle 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

Siyathemba 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

Kai !Garib 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

!Kheis 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

Pixley ka Seme 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

Karoo Hoogland 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Ubuntu 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Kareeberg 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Renosterberg 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Mier 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Phokwane 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Moshaweng 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Siyanda 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Frances Baard 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Nama Khoi 1 1 Transitional 

71

(b) SORTED ALPHABETICALLY 

Development Needs Development and 

Municipality 

Class Class Needs 

!Kheis 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

//Khara Hais 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Dikgatlong 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Emthanjeni 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Frances Baard 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Gamagara 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Ga-Segonyana 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Hantam 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Kai !Garib 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

Kamiesberg 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

Kareeberg 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Karoo Hoogland 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Kgalagadi 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Kgatelopele 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Khâi-Ma 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Magareng 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Mier 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Moshaweng 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Nama Khoi 1 1 Transitional 

Namakwa 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Phokwane 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Pixley ka Seme 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

Renosterberg 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Richtersveld 1 1 Pos Dev/Neg Need 

Siyancuma 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Siyanda 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Siyathemba 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

Sol Plaatje 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Thembelihle 2 2 Neg Dev/Pos Need 

Tsantsabane 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

Ubuntu 2 1 Neg Dev/Neg Need 

Umsobomvu 1 2 Pos Dev/Pos Need 

72

Figure 3.20: Development Potential Index change between 2001 and 2007 of local municipalities 

in the Northern Cape Province (2007 boundaries) 

73

Figure 3.21: Development Potential Index change between 2001 and 2007 of local municipalities 

in the Northern Cape Province (2011 boundaries) 

74

Figure 3.22: Human Development Needs Change Index between 2001 and 2007 of local 

municipalities in the Northern Cape Province 

75

3.7 Qualitative evaluation 

In the methodology for any study on the growth potential of urban areas, the qualitative selfevaluation 

is instrumental in determining a comprehensive town profile, complementary to 

the quantitative profiles. In such a qualitative analysis the subjective perceptions of the town’s 

role-players are acknowledged. The main objective of such a self-evaluation process is to 

obtain the opinions of the local communities regarding the growth potential and sense of place 

of their towns. This implies that data had to be collected in a manner that would highlight the 

perceptions and general qualitative impressions of urban growth potential in what are 

generally referred to as “soft” indicators. These indicators represent local perceptions of what 

makes a town unique, its basis for existence (raison d'être), the sense of place that makes 

people “feel at home” and the “vibe” that generates or restricts economic activity. A 

questionnaire was therefore structured according to a participatory research approach to solicit 

the opinions of local inhabitants. The focus was on local input from the respective leaders in 

each of the 32 municipalities. The questionnaire and covering letter/guidelines are included as 

Addendum 5. It was distributed to all 32 Municipal Managers who had to ensure that the 

relevant stake-holders were involved. 

The general level of response was, with a few exceptions, of a low standard. After several 

reminders and follow-up actions, only 26 of the 32 municipal questionnaires were returned – 

from these only a small minority were completed in full. As a result of this poor response, the 

results only offered a minimal opportunity to be incorporated in the evaluating process. In 

follow-up stages of this study, the self-evaluation questionnaires should be combined with on 

site visits and personal interviews at each municipality. As it is now, most municipalities 

missed the opportunity to evaluate themselves and to highlight their town’s strong points for 

future development. In this way they can be exposed to the stark realities of economic growth 

and human development needs that exist in their urban environments. 

76

CHAPTER 4 

RESULTS: MESSAGE FROM THE TOWN PROFILES 

A town profile can potentially convey multiple messages at different levels and scales to 

inform the socio-political and economic decision-making process. The scope and complexity 

of the analytical profiles focus primarily on the dominant trends of the town and municipality 

profiles as it is disclosed in the composite indices and the related investment scenarios. The 

factual version of the findings will at this stage, therefore, highlight only the general trends 

from the statistical tables, maps and diagrams at a regional level and not so much at a detailed 

level of the individual towns. The latter analysis would be possible from these results, but 

requires a separate micro-scale internal town focus. (In this regard see the case study in 

Section 4.4) 

4.1 Integrating town development indicators 

As a point of departure the 115 towns were integrated in terms of their critical development 

characteristics in Table 4.1. This first-level integration of the town profiles (in alphabetical 

order) provides a comprehensive overview of the Northern Cape town landscape. 

Table 4.1: Integrated Town Profiles 

Population 

Development and 

Name 

Size Economic Base Need Development Need Investment Type 

Aggeneys Medium Mining Very Low Low Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Alexander Bay Small Mining Very Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Alheit Small Agriculture High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Augrabies Medium Agriculture Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Barkly West Large Mining High Medium High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Blackrock Small Mining Very Low Low Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Boegoeberg Small Agriculture Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Brandvlei Medium Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Social* 

Britstown Medium Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Social* 

Buffelsrivier Small Residential Medium Low Transition Social* 

Calvinia Large Service Centre Low High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Campbell Medium Mining High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Carnarvon Medium Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

Carolusberg Small Mining Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Cillie Small Agriculture High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Colesberg Large Service Centre High High High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Concordia Medium Mining Low Medium Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Danielskuil Large Mining Low Medium Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

De Aar Large Transportation Low High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Delportshoop Large Mining High Medium High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Dibeng Medium Residential Medium Medium Transition Social* 

Dingleton Medium Mining Medium Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

Douglas Large Agriculture Medium High High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Eksteenfontein Very Small Residential Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Fraserburg Medium Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

77

Gannaput Small Agriculture Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Garies Medium Service Centre Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Goedgedacht Very Small Residential Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Griekwastad Medium Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Social* 

Groblershoop Very Small Service Centre Very Low High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Groenwater Very Small Mining Very High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Groot Mier Very Small Residential Medium Low Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Grootdrink Medium Agriculture High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Hanover Medium Service Centre High Medium High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Hartswater Medium Agriculture Medium High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Holpan Very Small Agriculture Very High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Hondeklip Bay Very Small Fishing Very Low Medium Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Hopetown Large Service Centre Medium High High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Hotazel Small Mining Low Low Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Jan Kempdorp Large Agriculture Medium High High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Kakamas Large Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

Kamieskroon Small Residential Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Karkams Small Residential Medium Medium Transition Social* 

Karos Small Agriculture Medium Medium Transition Infra and Social* 

Kathu Large Mining Very Low High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Keimoes Large Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

Kenhardt Medium Service Centre High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Kheis Very Small Residential Very High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Khubus Small Residential Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Kimberley Very Large Regional Centre Low Very High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Kleinzee Medium Mining Very Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Klipfontein Very Small Residential High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Klippunt Medium Agriculture High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Koingnaas Small Mining Very Low Medium Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Komaggas Medium Mining Medium Low Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Kuruman Large Regional Centre Medium High High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Lambrechtsdrif Very Small Agriculture High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Leerkrans Small Agriculture High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Lekkersing Very Small Residential Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Leliefontein Small Residential High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Lennetsville Small Agriculture High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Lime Acres Medium Mining Very Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Loeriesfontein Medium Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

Louisvale Small Agriculture High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Loxton Small Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Social* 

Loxtonberg Small Agriculture Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Lutzburg Small Agriculture Medium Low Transition Social* 

Marchand Medium Agriculture High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Marydale Medium Service Centre High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Nababeep Medium Mining Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Niekerkshoop Medium Agriculture Medium Medium Transition Social* 

Nieuwoudtville Small Recreation Medium Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

Norvalspont Small Recreation High Medium High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Noupoort Medium Service Centre Medium High Transition Infra and Social* 

Nourivier Very Small Residential Very High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Okiep Medium Mining Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Olifantshoek Large Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Social* 

Onseepkans Small Agriculture High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

78

Orania Very Small Residential Very Low High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Pampierstad Large Residential High High High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Paulshoek Very Small Residential High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Pella Small Residential High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Petrusville Medium Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Social* 

Philandersbron Small Residential High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Phillipstown Medium Service Centre High Medium Transition Infra and Social* 

Pofadder Medium Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Basic* 

Port Nolloth Medium Transportation Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Postmasburg Large Mining Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Prieska Large Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

Raaswater Medium Agriculture Medium Medium Transition Social* 

Richmond Medium Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Social* 

Riemvasmaak Small Residential High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Rietfontein Medium Residential Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Ritchie Large Agriculture Medium High High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Sanddrif Small Mining Low Medium Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Schmidtsdrift Medium Residential High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Spoegrivier Very Small Residential High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Springbok Large Regional Centre Low High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Steinkopf Large Residential Medium Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

Strydenburg Medium Service Centre High Medium Transition Social* 

Stutterheim Medium Agriculture High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Sutherland Medium Recreation Medium Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

Swartkop Small Agriculture High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Ulco Small Mining Low Medium Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Upington Very Large Regional Centre Low Very High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Van Wyksvlei Small Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Social* 

Van Zylsrus Small Service Centre Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Vanderkloof Small Recreation Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Victoria West Medium Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

Vioolsdrif Very Small Transportation Medium Medium Transition Social* 

Vosburg Small Service Centre Medium Medium Transition Basic* 

Warrenton Large Agriculture Medium Medium Transition Infra and Social* 

Wegdraai Small Agriculture High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Williston Medium Service Centre Low Medium Transition Infra and Basic* 

Windsorton Medium Agriculture High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

∗ Towns in the transition zone (See Figure 3.8) 

The various population sizes of the urban settlements were categorised in five classes for 

comparison of the 115 towns as listed in Table 4.2 and Figure 4.1. 

A fundamental element of the individual town profiles was to expose the dominant economic 

base of each town to better understand and appreciate the towns’ development and socio- 

cultural potential. ∗ By evaluating each town’s rationale for existence, the individual 

∗ The important concept of ‘place identity’ (sense of place) is part of a qualitative initiative in a follow-up phase. 

It may happen that, although a specific town’s economic potential does not warrant government investment, its 

unique sense of place merits cultural preserving and enhancement as a specific asset. 

79

settlements were qualitatively categorised according to the following economic base 

categories. Although towns usually have more than one economic base function, in these 

cases only the predominant function is highlighted: 

• Service centre: Traditional central place towns serving the daily needs of a surrounding 

farming community, e.g. providing educational, religious, shopping and professional 

services. 

• Agriculture centre: Related to traditional service centres are those towns with a substantial 

component of agriculture activities within the town structure. 

• Residential centre: A dormitory town where people live permanently, but work elsewhere, 

or are jobless. 

• Recreational centre: Leisure activities undertaken by residents and tourists to exploit local 

natural and cultural recreation opportunities. 

• Mining centre: Towns where mining activities provide the resource base for economic 

development. 

• Transportation centre: Towns where road, rail, air or water activities play a dominant role 

in their economic functioning. 

• Regional centre: Towns serving several lower-order settlements with higher-order 

services and goods over a relatively extensive spatial sphere of influence. 

• Diverse centre: Towns with a well established and balanced economic base, incorporating 

a diversified amalgam of economic functions – such towns do not rely on only one or two 

sectors as their economic base. 

Table 4.2: Frequencies of Town Population classes 

Category Size Range Count % 

Very Small 400 - 609 16 13.9 

Small 610 - 1629 35 30.4 

Medium 1630 - 6699 41 35.7 

Large 6700-3570 21 18.3 

Very Large > 35370 2 1.7 

Total 115 100.0 

Number of Towns 

45 

40 

35 

30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

5 

0 

Small Very Small Medium Large Very Large 

80

Figure 4.1: Urban population distribution of the Northern Cape towns (2001) 

Table 4.3 reveals several cross-tabulations of the five Population Size classes with 

alternatively the 115 towns’ Economic Base classes (Table 4.3a), Human Need classes (Table 

4.3b), Development Potential classes (Table 4.3c) and Investment Types (Table 4.3d). 

81

Table 4.3: Cross-tabulation of Town Development classes 

a) Population Size and Economic Base 

Population Size 

Economic Base Very Small Small Medium Large Very Large Total % Total 

Service Centre 1 4 18 7 0 30 26.1 

Agriculture 2 13 9 4 0 28 24.3 

Mining 2 7 9 5 0 23 20.0 

Recreation 0 3 1 0 0 4 3.5 

Regional Centre 0 0 0 2 2 4 3.5 

Residential 10 8 3 2 0 23 20.0 

Transportation 1 0 1 1 0 3 2.6 

Total 16 35 41 21 2 115 100.0 

% Total 13.9 30.4 35.7 18.3 1.7 100.0 

b) Population Size and Human Need 


Human Needs Very Small Small Medium Large Very Large Total % Total 

Very Low (Best) 3 3 3 1 0 10 8.7 

Low 0 6 6 5 2 19 16.5 

Medium 5 13 20 11 0 49 42.6 

High 4 13 12 4 0 33 28.7 

Very High (Worst) 4 0 0 0 0 4 3.5 

Total 16 35 41 21 2 115 100.0 

% Total 13.9 30.4 35.7 18.3 1.7 100.0 

Development 

c) Population Size and Development Potential 


Potential Very Small Small Medium Large Very Large Total % Total 

Low (Worst) 9 17 8 0 0 34 29.6 

Medium 5 18 31 10 0 64 55.7 

High 2 0 2 11 0 15 13.0 

Very High (Best) 0 0 0 0 2 2 1.7 

Total 16 35 41 21 2 115 100.0 

% Total 13.9 30.4 35.7 18.3 1.7 100.0 

d) Population Size and Investment Type 


Investment Type Very Small Small Medium Large Very Large Total % Total 

Basic 2 5 3 1 0 11 9.6 

Basic* 0 1 1 0 0 2 1.7 

Social 11 17 11 0 0 39 33.9 

Social* 1 4 5 0 0 10 8.7 

Infra and Social 0 1 1 9 0 11 9.6 

Infra and Social* 0 2 6 2 0 10 8.7 

Infra and Basic 2 4 7 5 2 20 17.4 

Infra and Basic* 0 1 7 4 0 12 10.4 

Total 16 35 41 21 2 115 100.0 

% Total 13.9 30.4 35.7 18.3 1.7 100.0 

∗Towns in the transition zone (See Figure 3.8) 

82

4.2 Integrating municipality development indicators 

The same procedure and results as in the previous description of the town patterns were 

executed for the 32 municipalities. Table 4.4 integrates the municipal profiles on the critical 

development characteristics, while Table 4.5 categorises the population size classes. Table 4.6 

reveals the cross-tabulations of the five Population Size classes with respectively the 32 

municipalities’ Human Need classes (Table 4.6a), Development Potential classes (Table 4.6b) 

and Investment Types (Table 4.6c). 

Table 4.4: Integrated Municipal Profiles 

Development and Investment 

Name Population Need Development 

Need 

Type 

!Kheis Medium High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

//Khara Hais Very Large Low High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Dikgatlong Large High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Emthanjeni Large Low Medium Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Frances Baard Very Small High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Gamagara Large Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Ga-Segonyana Very Large High High High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Hantam Medium Low Medium Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Kai !Garib Large Medium Medium Transitional Infra and Social* 

Kamiesberg Small Medium Medium Transitional Basic* 

Kareeberg Very Small Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Karoo Hoogland Very Small Medium Medium Transitional Infra and Basic* 

Kgalagadi Very Small Very Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Kgatelopele Medium Low Medium Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

KhΓi-Ma Small Low Low Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Magareng Medium High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Mier Very Small High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Moshaweng Very Large Very High High High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Nama Khoi Large Low High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Namakwa Very Small Low Low Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Phokwane Large High High High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

Pixey Ka Seme Very Small Low Low Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Renosterberg Very Small High Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Richtersveld Medium Low Medium High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Siyancuma Large Medium Medium Transitional Infra and Social* 

Siyanda Very Small Low Low Low Dev/Low Need Basic 

Siyathemba Medium Medium Low Low Dev/High Need Social 

Sol Plaatje Very Large Low Very High High Dev/Low Need Infra and Basic 

Thembelihle Small Medium Medium Transitional Social* 

Tsantsabane Large Medium Medium Transitional Basic* 

Ubuntu Medium High Medium Low Dev/High Need Social 

Umsobomvu Medium High Medium High Dev/High Need Infra and Social 

∗ Municipalities in the transition zone (See Figure 3.15) 

83

Table 4.5: Frequencies of Municipal Population classes 

Category Size Range Count % 

Very Small 68380 4 12.5 

Total 32 100.0 

Number of Municipalities 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

Very Small Small Medium Large Very Large 

Table 4.6: Cross-tabulation of Municipality Development 

a) Population Size and Human Need 


Human Needs Very Small Small Medium Large Very Large Total % Total 

Very Low (Best) 1 0 0 0 0 1 3.1 

Low 3 1 3 3 2 12 37.5 

Medium 2 2 1 3 0 8 25.0 

High 3 0 4 2 1 10 31.3 

Very High (Worst) 0 0 0 0 1 1 3.1 

Total 9 3 8 8 4 32 100.0 

% Total 28.1 9.4 25.0 25.0 12.5 100.0 

b) Population Size and Development Potential 



Potential Very Small Small Medium Large Very Large Total % Total 

Low (Worst) 7 1 2 0 0 10 31.3 

Medium 2 2 6 6 0 16 50.0 

High 0 0 0 2 3 5 15.6 

Very High (Best) 0 0 0 0 1 1 3.1 

Total 9 3 8 8 4 32 100.0 

% Total 28.1 9.4 25.0 25.0 12.5 100.0 

c) Population Size and Investment Type 


Investment Type Very Small Small Medium Large Very Large Total % Total 

Basic 3 1 2 1 0 7 21.9 

Basic* 0 1 0 1 0 2 6.3 

Social 4 0 4 1 0 9 28.1 

Social* 0 1 0 0 0 1 3.1 

Infra and Social 0 0 1 1 2 4 12.5 

Infra and Social* 0 0 0 2 0 2 6.3 

Infra and Basic 1 0 1 2 2 6 18.8 

Infra and Basic* 1 0 0 0 0 1 3.1 

Total 9 3 8 8 4 32 100.0 

% Total 28.1 9.4 25.0 25.0 12.5 100.0 

∗ Municipalities in the transition zone (See Figure 3.15) 

84

4.3 Observations from the development profiles 

The following general observations can be derived from the results in the relevant tables and 

figures: 

(i) TOWNS 

• From Figure 3.3 and table 4.3c it is evident that the majority of the Northern Cape towns 

have a predominantly medium (56%) or low (30%) development potential ∗ status. Only 

17 towns were classified with a High or Very High development potential. These latter 

towns are the most likely engines to provide impetus to drive regional development for 

job creation, service provision and general quality of life in the Northern Cape rural 

environment. Strategic thinking should therefore focus on this group of settlements in 

particular. 

• Regarding human need indices, 37 towns registered with High and Very High needs 

levels (Table 4.3b). Their deficient quality of life situation deserves focussed attention in 

order to ascertain the nature and scope of the social capital investment requirements. 

• Within the context of the average population size, 80% of the 115 towns register a size of 

less than 6700 (Medium, Small and Very Small settlements). This reveals a very skewed 

town size distribution in the Northern Cape, with an overwhelming small town landscape 

– only 20% of the settlements had more than 6700 inhabitants in 2001 (Table 4.2). 

• The spatial distribution of towns in this vast area developed unevenly with four distinctive 

population concentrations (Figures 4.2 and Table 4.7): 

(i) The North-Eastern Kimberley corridor from Ritchie to Hartswater, with a diverse 

economic urban structure of administrative, mining and agriculture functions. 

(ii) The North-Eastern mining area between Blackrock/Hotazel and Postmasburg, with 

the potential to link up with the former concentration in a U-shape corridor, 

(iii) The central Orange River agricultural corridor from Boegoeberg to Augrabies. 

(iv) The Western mining area around Springbok. 

These four urban concentrations accommodate 49% of the province’s towns and 74% of the 

urban population. The Kimberley group of eleven towns on their own accommodate 40% of 

the provincial urban population. The rest of the towns (mostly Small and Very Small) are 

scattered with large distances in between (Figure 4.2). This unbalanced distribution pattern 

presents a huge challenge to the ability of the urban system to deliver services. 

∗ See Section 3.6 for a definition of the development classes. Negative z-scores in this context are values below 

the provincial average - therefore negative in relative terms and not necessarily in absolute terms. 

85

Table 4.7: Urban Concentration Groups (2001) 

Group 

Number of 

towns % Number Population % Population 

Kimberley (1) 11 9.6 287 387 40.3 

Kuruman (2) 12 10.4 92 699 13.0 

Upington (3) 23 20.0 104 522 14.7 

Springbok (4) 10 8.7 45 541 6.4 

Rest (5) 59 51.3 182 634 25.6 

Total 115 100.0 712 783 100.0 

Figure 4.2: Spatial town Consentrations in the Northern Cape Province 

86

• The unbalanced character of the towns is rooted in their reason for existence (Table 4.3a). 

The most prevalent economic base functions amongst the province’s towns are the 

combination of Agricultural/Service centres (50%) and Mining (20%). These functions are 

usually quite vulnerable to external economic forces and require special attention. 

• It is significant that the lower Development Potential categories correlate with smaller 

towns, while the larger towns demonstrate higher potential (Table 4.3c). In the case of 

Human Needs distribution, the pattern is not so marked although there is a tendency for 

the larger towns to be better off (Table 4.3b). 

• Regarding the proposed Investment Type (Table 4.3d) it is significant that 54% of the 115 

towns qualify for only Basic Service or Social Capital investment, as is suggested in the 

NSDP (See Section 2.2.1). Only 31 towns qualify for Infrastructural Capital investment. 

In Figure 3.8 they demonstrate clear signs of High Development Potential. Another 22 

towns also qualify for consideration in this category, but their position may change 

because of their ‘transitional status’ on the intersection point of the axes (Figure 3.8 and 

Table 3.7). Actually, there are 34 towns in flux in this grey area. These towns have a 

possibility of moving to any of the four quadrants in the short term if significant changes 

in the towns’ profile should occur. Therefore, the town profile results should be verified 

qualitatively and in consultation with local role players when investment decisions are 

necessary. 

(ii) MUNICIPALITIES 

• The 32 municipalities of the province provide the spatial and administrative structure 

within which the 115 towns operate at a regional scale. 

• The average population size of the municipalities is 33 000 inhabitants, with only four 

larger than 68 380 (Table 4.5). These are //Khara Hais, Ga-Segonyana and Moshaweng, 

while Sol Plaatjie is the primary administrative seat. 

• 26 (81%) of the units register Development Potential levels at the lower end, within Low 

and Medium categories (Table 4.6b), while 11 (34%) of the municipalities are classified 

with alarmingly High and Very High Human Needs (Table 4.6a). 

• When all towns and rural areas in each municipality is evaluated for an appropriate 

Investment Type it is disturbing that 19 (60%) of the units do not reach the required level 

for Infrastructure Capital Investment (Table 4.6c), although certain towns within its 

boundaries do qualify. The 10 municipalities located in the outright High Development 

Potential quadrants (Figure 3.15 and Table 4.4) are crucial for future provincial strategic 

87

decisions. These are: //Khara Hais, Gamagara, Ga-Segonyana, Kgalagadi, Moshaweng, 

Nama Khoi, Phokwane’ Richtersveld, Sol Plaatje and Umsobomvu. 

• An important component for the measurement of development potential is related to the 

temporal change as this is an indication of past growth patterns. In Table 3.10 and Figure 

3.20 the following municipalities obtained the best Development Potential levels: Ga- 

Segonyana, Namakwa, Umsobomvu, Sol Plaatje, Kgatelopele. //Khara Hais, Kgalagadi, 

Khai-Ma. 

(iii) SPATIAL PATTERNS 

• The spatial location of various groups of settlements described in the previous sections are 

of vital importance for the Provincial Spatial Development Framework (PSDF) of the 


• Table 3.6 and Figure 3.3 identifies which towns has the best Development Potential 

(Kimberley, Upington, Kuruman and Springbok), whilst those with the best Human Needs 

levels are Koiingnas, Kleinzee, Alexanderbaai and Kathu (Figure 3.5). Table 3.6 also 

indicates the worst-off Development Potential towns (Klipfontein, Philanderbron, 

Riemvasmaak and Spoegrivier) and towns with the worst-off Human Needs levels 

(Holpan, Kheis, Nourivier and Groenwater). 

• The spatial distribution patterns of towns according to the Development Potential Index 

(Figure 3.3) and according to their Human Needs Index (Figure 3.4) suggest certain 

salient trends. 

(i) Development Potential: Towns with High and Very High potential are more 

prevalent in the more productive eastern part of the province. The western part is 

not well endowed with High Potential towns. On the other hand, Low 

Development Potential settlements are mainly concentrated along the West Coast 

and the interior Karoo, the Orange River valley and a few isolated towns in the far 

north.. 

(ii) Human Needs: The neediest towns with the worst quality of life levels are also 

located in the eastern parts of the province, as well as along the Orange River 

valley and in southern Namaqualand. 

• The three Composite indices supporting the Development Potential structure of the towns 

are of great value to understand the individual profiles (Table 3.6 and Figures 3.5–3.7). It 

is mainly the western and north-eastern mining towns and the agricultural orientated 

towns in the Orange River valley that display the highest Resource Potential scores (i.e. 

88

Kimberley, Pampierstad, Kathu, Upington, Groblershoop, Orania and Springbok). In 

terms of the Infrastructure theme the larger established centres achieved the highest 

ratings (i.e. Kimberley, Upington, Calvinia, Colesberg and De Aar). With repect to 

Economic Activities, the same pattern is reflected in the larger centres, where a self- 

generating economy of scale is in operation (i.e. Kimberley, Upington, Kuruman, 

Pampierstad, De Aar and Springbok). In this regard it is significant that towns like 

Ritchie, Hartswater and Jan Kempdorp, with its irrigation-agricultural economic base, 

performed very competitively. ∗ 

• At a generalised level Table 3.8 and Figures 3.10–3.14 present the municipalities with 

good and poor development performance and municipalities with high and low human 

needs. In Figure 3.10 and Table 4.6b only six municipalities are rated High and Very High 

on the Development Potential scale. 

• As expected, the latter municipalities usually also accommodate the better-off 

Development Potential towns. While eight of the towns with High and Very High 

development potential are located in municipalities with equal development potential 

ratings, 82 of the Medium and Low Development Potential towns are located in 

municipalities with the same lower order status (Table 4.8). 

• On the other hand, the co-incidence of towns and municipalities with the same Human 

Need level is not so clear cut, i.e. 16 towns with Medium/Low/Very Low ratings are 

situated in municipalities with High Needs levels (Table 4.9). Eleven municipalities 

display High and Very High Needs scores. From Figure 3.18 it appears that the location of 

better-off towns and municipalities do not co-incide very well – an indication that poverty 

showes up throughout the province. Naturally, there are many exceptions to this broad 

generalisation patterns which should be explained for individual cases. 

Table 4.8 Cross-tabulation of Town and Municipality Development classes 

Town 


Municipality Development Class 

Class 

Low Medium High Very High Total 

Low 10 (45.4) 22 (31.9) 2 (9.1) 0 34 (29.6%) 

Medium 11 (50.0) 39 (56.5) 14 (63.6) 0 64 (55.7%) 

High 1 (4.6) 8 (11.6) 5 (22.7) 1 (50.0) 15 (13.0%) 

Very High 0 0 1 (4.6) 1 (50.0) 2 (1.7%) 

Total 22 (100.0%) 69 (100.0%) 22 (100.0%) 2 (100.0%) 115 (100.0%) 

∗ It should be pointed out that by using relative measures such as percentages and z-scores instead of absolute 

numbers as input for the calculation of indices, afforded smaller centres an equal opportunity to perform against 

the bigger centres. 

89

Table 4.9 Cross-tabulation of Town and Municipality Need classes 

Town Need 

Municipality Need Class 

Class Very Low Low Medium High Total 

Very Low 1 (33.3) 5 (11.6) 3 (7.3) 1 (3.6) 10 (8.7%) 

Low 1 (33.3) 12 (27.9) 4 (9.8) 2 (7.1) 19 (16.5%) 

Medium 1 (33.3) 18 (41.9) 17 (41.5) 13 (46.4) 49 (42.6%) 

High 0 8 (18.6) 14 (34.1) 11 (39.3) 33 (28.7%) 

Very High 0 0 3 (7.3) 1 (3.6) 4 (3.5%) 

Total 3 (100.0%) 43 (100.0%) 41 (100.0%) 28 (100.0%) 115 (100.0%) 

4.4 Internal focus on individual town profiles 

A local Development profile for each of the 115 towns and 32 municipalities, focussing on 

the results in the previous sections, creates the platform for a detailed diagnoses and future 

development strategy. By way of example a town profile and a corresponding municipality 

profile were selected (as indicated in Table 4.10) and displayed in the form of a set of 

histograms) Figures 4.3-4.7) for each of the development classes previously identified in 

Figure 3.3: 

Table 4.10: Selected Towns and Municipalities for histogram display 

Town Development Corresponding Figure nr 

Potential Municipality 

Upington Very High //Khara Hais 4.3 

Springbok High Nama Khoi 4.4 

Alexander Bay Upper-Medium Richtersveld 4.5 

Windsorton Lower-Medium Dikgatlong 4.6 

Riemvasmaak Low Kai !Garib 4.7 

90

Figure 4.3: Example of a town in a ‘Very High Development’ class and its municipality 

91

Figure 4.4: Example of a town in a ‘High Development’ class and its municipality 

92

Figure 4.5: Example of a town in an ‘Upper-Medium Development’ class and its 

municipality 

93

Figure 4.6: Example of a town in a ‘Lower-Medium Development’ class and its 

municipality 

94

Figure 4.7: Example of a town in a ‘Low Development’ class and its municipality 

95

4.5 Case study: Development profile of Springbok 

Springbok provides a case study on the methodology that could be executed on any other 

town or municipality in the province. The output in the form of tables, diagrams and maps for 

all 115 towns in the province could be subjected to the same methodology should the need 

arise. The town’s comprehensive development profile is presented for each of the nine 

Indicator groups, as well as the Composite Indicators (refer back to Table 3.2), and presented 

in a histogram (Figure 4.4). Each column represents the performance level a specific 

development component in relation to the Northern Cape provincial average (zero-line). 

Therefore these columns are an indication of each component’s relative position amongst the 

115 towns in the province, and should not be interpreted in absolute terms. 

At rank 4 on the overarching Development Potential scale (where position 1 represent the 

best situation), Springbok is characterised by a High profile, well articulated for a favourable 

development niche as a regional urban centre in the Western part of the Northern Cape and 

Namaqualand. The main contributors to this general standing are Human Resources, 

Institutional Services and Commercial Services (Figure 4.4): The town, therefore, scores very 

good on Composite Resources, as well as Composite Infrastructure indices. Market Size and 

Property Market display the weakest components in the town’s development profile and 

should be investigated further in s follow-up study. (The definitions of the individual 

indicators in Table 3.4 put these findings in perspective.) 

The Human Needs index has a strong Low poverty level at rank 11 (rank 1 indicates the best 

situation), implying that the quality of life in Springbok compares relatively favourable in 

relation to the provincial average. When the town’s specific Development Potential index is 

integrated with its Human Needs index, Springbok is a strong candidate for Infrastructure 

Capital Investment, supplemented by Basic Services upliftment if needed.(as suggested by the 

NSDP, 2006). This is because of the towns’ position in the High development potential and 

Low human needs quadrant (Figure 3.8) 

The town and municipality experience political and managerial stability, which should 

enhance the endeavours of economic development and strengthen democracy through 

community participation in a co-operative governance system. Being the head office seat of 

the Namaqua District Municipality and the Nama Khoi Local Municipality, Springbok 

functions as an administrative and regional service centre for the extensive Namaqualand in 

96

the western part of the Northern Cape Province. At the same time the town functions as a 

government sub-regional centre for several of the Northern Cape Provincial departments, 

including a regional office for the Premier. Springbok is located in a strategic position not 

only in relation to its surrounding hinterland, but also with regard to the N7 and N14 transport 

routes. These two national roads converge at the town, the N7 connecting the Western Cape 

with Namibia, while the N14 links Springbok with Upington/Kimberley and further eastwards 

to other provinces of South Africa. Springbok performs a prominent role along the West 

Coast/N7 Development Corridor between Cape Town and Namibia as indicated in the 

Western Cape PSDF (2005) policy document.. 

The town’s development profile in Figure 4.4 displays a reasonable diversified economic 

base, which is fundamental to the success of any regional urban center. This position points to 

a sound confidence level for sustained economic development outcomes, especially if the 

weaker components of the Composite Economic Activities indicator could be stimulated. For 

this purpose the already well established component of Human Resources, Institutional 

Services and Commercial Services should be further utilized. The regional development 

profile of the Nama Khoi municipality, in which the town is one of ten settlements, greatly 

reflects that of Springbok. 

The economic base of Springbok depends mainly on agriculture (stock framing), mining and 

tourism as the traditional anchor activities. It has a central market place character providing in 

the shopping, administrative, educational and other service requirements of the region. The 

downscaling of mining activities in the surrounding settlements over the past years not only 

resulted in job losses which impact negatively on families, but emphasizes the need for further 

diversification of the economy. Springbok has a well-developed business and service sector to 

meet the needs of the farming and surrounding mining communities of Aggeneys, Okiep, 

Kleinzee, Port Nolloth, Garies, Steinkopf, etc. This puts the town in a very suitable position to 

supply a wide hinterland with higher-order shopping goods and regional services. The range 

of its services transcends provincial and even international boundaries. The town’s diversified 

economy includes a range of retail shops, offices, as well as business and community services. 

A good infrastructure system already supports town development, while there is ample land 

available for future spatial expansion of the urban area. The settlement also has sufficient 

good-quality water sources such as from the Orange River for urban expansion. A possible 

97

ailway line connection, as well as the upgrading of the air strip in Springbok and the nearby 

Port Nolloth harbour, could further enhance the connectivity and transportation infrastructure. 

If a larger proportion of “drive-through visitors” can be converted into “overnight visitors”, 

the tourist component and the town’s economic base could be strengthened. Facilities and 

marketing campaigns should be initiated to persuade visitors to remain longer in the town. 

This will lead to new economic vitality in the growing eco-tourism sector, utilising the unique 

sense of place of the serene Namaqualand/Richtersveld with its distinctive topography, flora 

and cultural attributes. The overall arid nature of the area resulted in large farms with a 

sparsely distributed population over an extenxive area. This semi-desert situation however 

also created one of the most significant biodiversity areas in the world, which can be 

positively exploited for tourism and scientific purposes. 

Taking all the evidence into account, Springbok has a very promising development potential. 

The prospects for sustained economic growth and social needs development appear very 

favourable. Most of the development factors support the town’s undisputed niche as a 

regional urban centre for Namaqualand. 

The vision of the Namakwa municipal district creates a positive framework for development: 

“The establishment of a development-orientated and economically viable region to ensure 

sustainable growth in order to establish, improve and promote committed strong local 

structures, within the Namakwa region” (IDP, 2006: p6). Some of the public policy 

instruments built in these initiatives are: Integrated economic development; Effective service 

provision; Eradicating poverty; Private sector investment; Opportunities for local and external 

entrepreneurs through partnerships; Black Economic Empowerment; Job creation and 

infrastructure through LED initiatives; a SMME focus; skills and capacity building; Integrated 

spatial development linking Springbok and Bergsig in a north-south corridor; etc. A 

Shopping/Business Centre in Springbok is also in the planning phase for future development. 

The following integrative summary provides a synoptic guide of the town’s development 

profile: 

• Municipality: Nama Khoi (Local) and Namakwa (District) 

• Population size of town: 10 300 (2001) 

• Population size of local municipality: 41 000 (2001) 

• Economic base of town: Regional service centre (based on Agricultural/Mining/Tourism) 

98

• Place identity of town: Namaqualand’s serene natural and cultural heritage 

• Development Potential class (town): High (Rank 4 of 115 towns) 

• Development Potential class (local municipality): High (rank 5 of 32 units) 

• Change tendency of Development Potential (local municipality): Average to positive 

(Rank 16 of 32) 

• Human Needs class (town): Low (Rank 11 of 115 towns) 

• Human Needs class (local municipality): Low (Rank 8 of 32 units) 

• Change tendency of Human Needs (local municipality): Average to positive (rank 16 of 

32 units) 

• Suggested Investment Strategy (town): Infrastructure Capital, supplemented by Basic 

Services 

• Suggested Investment Strategy (local municipality): Infrastructure Capital, supplemented 

by Basic Services 

99

CHAPTER 5 

CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 

5.1 General investment typology 

• Table 5.1 summarises the proposed investment type for each of the 115 towns and 32 

municipalities according to the statistical prescriptions of the two respective scatter 

diagrams (Figures 3.8 and 3.9; 3.15 and 3.16). There are 41 towns where the town and 

municipality investment classes are in agreement and thus represent a higher degree of 

certainty on the suggested investment class. 

• Furthermore, the 29 towns in bold lettering (Table 5.1) represent situations where both the 

town and municipality investment classes possess a component of “infrastructure capital 

investment”, i.e. settlements with a higher development potential. 

• This procedure gives effect to the guidelines in the National Spatial Development Strategy 

(NSDP, 2006) and the Northern Cape Growth and Development Strategy (PGDS, 2010). 

Table 5.2 match the respective categories in this regard. 

• Such a clinical exercise, however, does not take all the complex nuances into 

consideration that characterise the different towns and municipalities. Therefore, this 

merely represents a ‘suggested model’ and point of departure for further discussion and 

negotiations with all the relevant role players. 

Table 5.1: Proposed investment strategy for the Northern Cape towns 

Town Town Investment Municipality Municipal Investment 

Agreement 

between town 

and 

municipal 

investment 

classes 

Aggeneys Basic Khâi-Ma Basic Yes 

Alexander Bay Infra and Basic Richtersveld Infra and Basic Yes 

Alheit Social Kai !Garib Infra and Social* No 

Augrabies Social Kai !Garib Infra and Social* No 

Barkly West Infra and Social Dikgatlong Social No 

Blackrock Basic Kgalagadi Infra and Basic No 

Boegoeberg Social !Kheis Social Yes 

Brandvlei Social* Hantam Basic No 

Britstown Infra and Social* Emthanjeni Basic No 

100

Buffelsrivier Social* Nama Khoi Infra and Basic No 

Calvinia Infra and Basic Hantam Basic No 

Campbell Social Siyancuma Infra and Social* No 

Carnarvon Infra and Basic* Kareeberg Social No 

Carolusberg Infra and Basic Nama Khoi Infra and Basic Yes 

Cillie Social Kai !Garib Infra and Social* No 

Colesberg Infra and Social Umsobomvu Infra and Social Yes 

Concordia Basic Nama Khoi Infra and Basic No 

Danielskuil Basic Kgatelopele Basic Yes 

De Aar Infra and Basic Emthanjeni Basic No 

Delportshoop Infra and Social Dikgatlong Social No 

Dibeng Social* Gamagara Infra and Basic No 

Dingleton Infra and Basic* Gamagara Infra and Basic Yes 

Douglas Infra and Social Siyancuma Infra and Social* Yes 

Eksteenfontein Social Richtersveld Infra and Basic No 

Fraserburg Infra and Basic* Karoo Hoogland Infra and Basic* Yes 

Gannaput Social !Kheis Social Yes 

Garies Infra and Basic Kamiesberg Basic* No 

Goedgedacht Social Tsantsabane Basic* No 

Griekwastad Infra and Social* Siyancuma Infra and Social* Yes 

Groblershoop Infra and Basic !Kheis Social No 

Groenwater Social Tsantsabane Basic* No 

Groot Mier Basic Mier Social No 

Grootdrink Social !Kheis Social Yes 

Hanover Infra and Social Emthanjeni Basic No 

Hartswater Infra and Basic Phokwane Infra and Social No 

Holpan Social Dikgatlong Social Yes 

Hondeklip Bay Basic Kamiesberg Basic* Yes 

Hopetown Infra and Social Thembelihle Social* No 

Hotazel Basic Kgalagadi Infra and Basic No 

Jan Kempdorp Infra and Social Phokwane Infra and Social Yes 

Kakamas Infra and Basic* Kai !Garib Infra and Social* No 

Kamieskroon Infra and Basic Kamiesberg Basic* No 

Karkams Social* Kamiesberg Basic* No 

Karos Infra and Social* //Khara Hais Infra and Basic No 

Kathu Infra and Basic Gamagara Infra and Basic Yes 

Keimoes Infra and Basic* Kai !Garib Infra and Social* No 

Kenhardt Social Kai !Garib Infra and Social* No 

Kheis Social Kamiesberg Basic* No 

Khubus Social Richtersveld Infra and Basic No 

Kimberley Infra and Basic Sol Plaatje Infra and Basic Yes 

Kleinzee Infra and Basic Nama Khoi Infra and Basic Yes 

Klipfontein Social Kamiesberg Basic* No 

Klippunt Social //Khara Hais Infra and Basic No 

Koingnaas Basic Kamiesberg Basic* Yes 

Komaggas Basic Nama Khoi Infra and Basic No 

Kuruman Infra and Social Ga-Segonyana Infra and Social Yes 

Lambrechtsdrif Social //Khara Hais Infra and Basic No 

Leerkrans Social //Khara Hais Infra and Basic No 

Lekkersing Social Richtersveld Infra and Basic No 

Leliefontein Social Kamiesberg Basic* No 

Lennetsville Social Kai !Garib Infra and Social* No 

Lime Acres Infra and Basic Kgatelopele Basic No 

Loeriesfontein Infra and Basic* Hantam Basic No 

Louisvale Social //Khara Hais Infra and Basic No 

Loxton Infra and Social* Ubuntu Social No 

Loxtonberg Social Kai !Garib Infra and Social* No 

101

Lutzburg Social* Kai !Garib Infra and Social* No 

Marchand Social Kai !Garib Infra and Social* No 

Marydale Social Siyathemba Social Yes 

Nababeep Infra and Basic Nama Khoi Infra and Basic Yes 

Niekerkshoop Social* Siyathemba Social Yes 

Nieuwoudtville Infra and Basic* Hantam Basic No 

Norvalspont Infra and Social Umsobomvu Infra and Social Yes 

Noupoort Infra and Social* Umsobomvu Infra and Social Yes 

Nourivier Social Kamiesberg Basic* No 

Okiep Infra and Basic Nama Khoi Infra and Basic Yes 

Olifantshoek Infra and Social* Gamagara Infra and Basic No 

Onseepkans Social Khâi-Ma Basic No 

Orania Infra and Basic Thembelihle Social* No 

Pampierstad Infra and Social Phokwane Infra and Social Yes 

Paulshoek Social Kamiesberg Basic* No 

Pella Social Khâi-Ma Basic No 

Petrusville Infra and Social* Renosterberg Social No 

Philandersbron Social Mier Social Yes 

Phillipstown Infra and Social* Renosterberg Social No 

Pofadder Basic* Khâi-Ma Basic Yes 

Port Nolloth Infra and Basic Richtersveld Infra and Basic Yes 

Postmasburg Infra and Basic Tsantsabane Basic* Yes 

Prieska Infra and Basic* Siyathemba Social No 

Raaswater Social* //Khara Hais Infra and Basic No 

Richmond Infra and Social* Ubuntu Social No 

Riemvasmaak Social Kai !Garib Infra and Social* No 

Rietfontein Social Mier Social Yes 

Ritchie Infra and Social Sol Plaatje Infra and Basic No 

Sanddrif Basic Richtersveld Infra and Basic No 

Schmidtsdrift Social Siyancuma Infra and Social* No 

Spoegrivier Social Kamiesberg Basic* No 

Springbok Infra and Basic Nama Khoi Infra and Basic Yes 

Steinkopf Infra and Basic* Nama Khoi Infra and Basic Yes 

Strydenburg Social* Thembelihle Social* No 

Stutterheim Social !Kheis Social Yes 

Sutherland Infra and Basic* Karoo Hoogland Infra and Basic* Yes 

Swartkop Social //Khara Hais Infra and Basic No 

Ulco Basic Dikgatlong Social No 

Upington Infra and Basic //Khara Hais Infra and Basic Yes 

Van Wyksvlei Social* Kareeberg Social Yes 

Van Zylsrus Social Kgalagadi Infra and Basic No 

Vanderkloof Infra and Basic Renosterberg Social No 

Victoria West Infra and Basic* Ubuntu Social No 

Vioolsdrif Social* Nama Khoi Infra and Basic No 

Vosburg Basic* Kareeberg Social No 

Warrenton Infra and Social* Magareng Social No 

Wegdraai Social !Kheis Social Yes 

Williston Infra and Basic* Karoo Hoogland Infra and Basic* Yes 

Windsorton Social Dikgatlong Social Yes 

∗ Towns and municipalities in the transition zone (see Figures 3.8 and 3.15) 

102

Table 5.2: Suggested Investment categories 

Category Development & Needs Classes of 

Number 

No. Towns 

Investment Emphasis of towns 

NSDP NCPGDS 

1 High Development Established • Basic Service 

Potential 


Growth Centres • Infrastructure Capital 32 

2 High Development Emerging • Basic Services 

Potential 

Growth • Infrastructure Capital 49 

High Human Needs Centres • Social/Human Capital 

3 Low Development Stagnating • Social/Human Capital 21 

Potential 


Small Towns 

4 Low Development Special Case • Basic Services 13 

Potential 


Towns 

5 - Transitional • Adaptable in regard to - 

Towns 

nrs 1-4 

6 - Traditional • Moshaweng requires 

Rural 

Settlements 

further investigation 154∗ 

∗Number of settlements registered in the 2001 Population Census 

5.2 Proposed Leader Towns 

The centres that will serve as the main growth engines for regional and social development in 

the province are identified with reference to the findings of this study. Table 5.1, as well as all 

the previous tables, maps and histograms supplement such a complex evaluation and decision. 

The spatial location of the selected towns are also considered to mobilize optimal trickledown 

benefits for the surrounding lower order towns with only a marginal development 

potential and high community needs. The challenge to devise a more equitable spatial 

development strategy for the province could be tackled via rational choices for future town 

development and appropriate investment strategies. In this process the provision of services 

over the entire provincial space could be structured more efficiently. 

A starting point for a selection of towns for substantial Infrastructural Capital investment are 

the following six established growth centres: Kimberley, Upington, Kuruman, Springbok 

and Colesberg, while either Calvinia or De Aar could be added on account of their 

accessibility and centrality in the vast Karoo region. Other towns could also be considered and 

added in the same way depending on the special niche to be filled, but it is doubtful whether 

103

the population numbers and economic base of the Northern Cape Province can support more 

than six leader towns. 

5.3 Salient research results 

In meeting the aims of the study in section 1.2, significant observations and results were 

recorded. Synoptically, the salient conclusions are: 

• The 115 individual town and 32 municipal profiles exhibit distinct spatial inequalities 

on the various Development Potential and Human Needs indices, as well as the 

Capital Investment categories (Figures 3.3 - 3.22). 

• 17 (15%) of the towns score positive (High/Very High) Development Potential values. 

Conversely, 34 (30%) of the towns register a negative (Low) value. The remaining 64 

Medium ranked towns hold an intermediate position in line with the provincial mean. 

• Significant for future development strategies, centres with a proven development 

record are of paramount importance as potential ‘growth engine’ nodes for their 

respective regions (Table 3.6 and Figure 3.3). They should be priority targets for 

Infrastructural Capital Investment from government in order to enhance sustainable 

and balanced economic development throughout the province (Table 3.7, Figure 3.9 

and Table 5.1). 

• Relative to the provincial mean, the Northern Cape has 37 (32%) of its towns 

experiencing High or Very High Human Needs index levels (Table 3.7 and Figure 

3.4). These towns should especially be targeted for Social Capital Investment from 

government (Table 3.7 and Figure 3.19). 

• Only 17 towns registered a substantial loss in absolute population numbers between 

the 1996 and 2001 census dates and even then some of these shifts may be due to 

urban boundary changes. But positive population growth is not necessarily an 

indicator of urban development. On the contrary, a large population (or high growth 

rate) may burden development resources and for that reason some smaller towns 

displayed a higher development potential than several larger towns. 

• Various reasons for the relatively slow/negative growth obtained in certain towns and 

municipalities - versus strong/positive growth experienced in others - can be 

advanced. These causes, linked to the multi-dimensional set of growth criteria 

described in section 2.13, erode the towns’ economic bases. Each settlement 

demonstrates a unique town profile in accordance with the quantitative indicators 

(Addendum 1.1 and 1.2) on which they scored positive and negative values. From 

104

these profiles the following overarching causes for retarded town growth may be 

105 

deduced: 

- Technological transformation, linked to faster motorcars on better roads, 

railroad electrification and computer/internet networking that facilitate more 

efficient and rapid interaction with a multitude of urban places at an increasing 

global scale. Towns that do not adapt to these changes may suffer negative 

consequences. 

- Economic transformation includes a fundamental shift from primary economic 

activities (e.g. fishing, mining and agriculture) to higher order service 

industries (e.g. IT, financial and professional services), that eroded the original 

reason for the existence of many towns. 

- Human behavioural transformation amongst modern and post-modern urban 

dwellers redefines inter alia recreation preferences, retirement patterns and 

general lifestyle preferences. Residents continually develop new expectations 

and demands to which town structures must respond in order to survive and to 

continue occupying a niche function in the province’s urban system. 

- Management capacity and leadership reflected in the quantity and quality of 

local municipal and provincial staff contingents and other decision making role 

players in the communities. In the absence of clear development visions and 

concomitant management skills, local authorities are reluctant to launch robust 

initiatives to counter negative growth tendencies and to capitalize on their 

positive attributes. 

- Many towns fail to capitalize optimally on their inherent development 

potential. Certain settlements misinterpret their potential and embark on futile 

initiatives that are not aligned with their resource base and development profile. 

They do not, therefore, maximise their real economic and resource assets. 

- Some towns simply lack sufficient resources to support inherent economic 

sustainability of the settlement. According to their town profiles and associated 

growth indicators, their future development prospects seem bleak and further 

external infrastructural investment in these towns should be minimized. 

• In some urban centres unrealistic expectations prevail regarding the role that tourism 

might fulfil as an economic growth mechanism for the town. Governments of developing 

countries often consider tourism a desirable route to accelerated economic development. 

However, the development of tourism in any given location requires that several key

elements combine to produce conditions conducive to growth. Usually they are: Natural 

106 

and cultural resources and attractions, infrastructure, investment, labour and strategic 

vision. Tourism is a resource based industry, dependent for its basic appeal upon nature’s 

endowment and society’s heritage. Although many towns in the Northern Cape possess 

the resources and attractions to support tourism development, local and national 

competition as well as various competitive elements has to consider. Other prerequisites 

are still absent from some Northern Cape towns, i.e. tourism infrastructure, marketing, 

potential investors and appropriately skilled labour. 

• A number of towns possess a unique place identity and should therefore be preserved to 

qualitatively enrich the province’s urban character. These identities mainly relate to 

unique natural features, cultural heritage, and human and economic activities for which 

these settlements became renowned or that provided the inhabitants with a special sense of 

belonging and purpose. Although some of these towns lack a vibrant economic base, they 

may deserve government protection. Quite often the tourism function plays a role in such 

cases. In a follow-up study the qualitative evaluation of the province’s settlements should 

highlight this element. 

• In many towns segregation and disparities inherited from the apartheid era are still visible 

in various forms, especially in spatial and institutional structures, as well as in some 

residents’ perceptions and behaviour. Intentions and resolutions in this regard are 

generally well documented, but implementation is slow. This is probably one of the 

reasons for the persistence of high levels of human needs in many towns. 

5.4 Recommendations 

Although the results of the study expose various opportunities for significant intervention and 

galvanizing of development actions, the report suggests some salient actions for 

implementation. We recommend: 

• The Provincial Government of the Northern Cape should stratify the province’s towns in a 

spatial development framework based on the classification of settlements in the respective 

Development and Needs categories (Table 3.6; Figure 3.3 and 3.4). 

• The Provincial Government should align its future urban investment strategy with the 

fivefold investment typology developed in Section 5.1 (Table 5.1 and 5.2; Figure 3.19). 

However, authorities are urged to implement such a scheme with appropriate caution not 

to jeopardize the unique context of specific places. This report merely presents the

empirical profiles as a point of departure for further deliberation between the affected 

parties. 

• Municipalities should use the town profiles presented in Chapter 4 and in Addendum 4 as 

a guideline for gauging future development initiatives on a local scale in their respective 

urban centres. In this process individual towns and municipalities may need further 

107 

investigation and interpretation to unpack the profiles in greater detail to expose specific 

local situations (see the case study of Springbok in Section 4.5). 

• The report, in conjunction with the relevant local policy and strategy documents, should 

be used to inform possible investors, entrepreneurs and developers, of the most 

appropriate locations and economic components that will best serve development and 

community needs in the province. 

• The information and results should be incorporated selectively as input to the Northern 

Cape Spatial Development Framework (PSDF). 

• The results of this research and its possible implications should be conveyed very 

sensitively to relevant role players at various levels and locations, emphasizing the context 

of the scientific procedure applied in the study. In this regard the report serves as a 

discussion document for further deliberation and consultation before final decisionmaking 

and implementation. 

5.5 Future study and investigation 

• This study should be repeated after five years in order to monitor changes to the factual 

situation over time. Municipalities and other relevant role players should understand that 

the findings of this report are not necessarily cast in stone, but that new information could 

yield different results in certain cases. 

• The quantitative town profiling in this study should be supplemented and integrated with a 

thorough qualitative self-evaluation from the local role-players. This exercise should 

highlight the various centres’ strong points for future economic and social development. 

The process could be used by local decision-makers to rethink the role their towns play 

within a municipal, regional, provincial and national context. In this process the site visits 

and personal interviews at each municipality will enhance the identification of the ‘sense 

of place’ in each town. 

• Each municipality could benefit by a detailed analysis of their unique town profiles 

displayed in a general way in this report. In this way, role players can find out what they 

can do to improve the economic status of their towns.

The National Spatial Development Perspective (NSDP) and Provincial Spatial Development 

Strategy (PSDF) that required this study provides a unique enabling platform for spatial 

development at various scales in the Northern Cape Province. The responsibility for either 

utilizing the designated potential or alternatively, coping with the lack of growth potential, 

rests equally on the shoulders of the local authorities, private entrepreneurship and on the 

provincial government. In doing so this report can contribute significantly to the fulfilment of 

the Northern Cape vision “to build a prosperous, sustainable and growing provincial 

economy, to reduce poverty and improve social development”. 

108

CONSULTED LITERATURE 

Atkinson, D. 2008. Promoting the second economy in small and medium-sized towns. 

Pretoria: The Presidency. 

Badcock, B. 2002. Making sense of cities: A geographical survey. London: Edward Arnold. 

Carter, H. 1981. The study of Urban Geography. London: Edward Arnold. 

Cheshire, P. 1990. Explaining the recent performance of the European Community’s major 

urban regions. Urban Studies 27: 311-33. 

Economic Development. (http://wikipedia.org.wiki/Economic_development). Accessed on 29 

July 2011. 

Economic Development Agency. 2011. EDA Discussion Document. Provincial Government 

of the Western Cape. Cape Town. 

Evans, H.E. 1992. A virtuous circle model of rural-urban development: Evidence from a 

Kenyan small town and its hinterland. Journal of Development 28: 640-667. 

Forum for the Future. 2005. The five capitals model (www.forumforthefuture.org.uk). 

Accessed on 29 July 2011. 

Gaile, G.L. 1992. Improving rural-urban linkages through small-town market based 

development. Third World Planning Review 14: 131-148. 

Hartshorne, T.A. 1980. Interpreting the city: An urban geography. New York: John Wiley. 

Hinderink, J & Titus, M.J. 2002. Small town and regional development: Major findings and 

policy implications from comparative research. Urban Studies 39: 379-391. 

Hoyt, H. 1939. The structure and growth of residential neighbourhoods in American cities. 

Washington, DC: Federal Housing Administration. 

109

Krige, S., Schur, M. & Sippel, G. 1998. The identification of towns in the Free State for 

urban upgrading and development program: A proposed method for consideration. 

Development Southern Africa 15: 361-377. 

Lynch, K. 1998. The image of the city. Massachusetts: MIT Press. 

Lloyd, N. & Horn, G. 2001. Local economic development in rural South African towns. 

Africa Insight 31:39-65. 

Markusen, A. & Gwiasda, V. 1994. Multipolarity and the layering of functions in world cites: 

New York City’s struggle to stay on top. International Journal of Urban and Regional 

Research 18: 168 -193. 

Moore, R.L. & Graefe, A.R. 1994. Attachments to recreation settings: the case of rail-trail 

users. Leisure Science 16: 17-31. 

National Urban Development Framework. 2009. Working draft prepared for Co-operative 

Governance and Traditional Affairs and the Presidency, in partnership with the Cities 

Network. 

Nel, E. 2005. Local Economic Development in South African small towns. In Nel E & 

Rogerson C.M. (eds): Local economic development in the developing world: the experience of 

Southern Africa, 253. New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction Press. 

Northern Cape Rural Development Strategy Papers. 2010. Strategy Paper 3. 

Northern Cape Provincial Growth and Development Strategy, 2004-2014 (Reviewed in 

2010). 

Oranje, M., van Huyssteen. E. & Meiklejohn, C. 2008. The National Spatial Development 

Perspective (NSDP) and assumptions on small town economic investment by government. 

Position paper at a Workshop hosted by department of Science and Technology. 

Pacione, M. 2001. Urban Geography – A global perspective. London: Routledge. 

110

Rondinelli, D.A. 1988. Market town and agriculture in Africa; The role of small urban 

centers in economic development. African Urban Quarterly 3: 3-10. 

Rural Development (http://wikipedia.org/wiki/Rural_development). Accessed on 29 July 

2011. 

Schneider, F., Kallis, G. & Martinez-Alier, J. 2010. Crisis or opportunity: Economic degrowth 

for social equity and ecological sustainability. Journal of Cleaner Production 18: 511-518. 

Smith, R.H.T. 1965. Method and purpose in functional town classification. Annals of the 

Association of American Geographers 55: 539-48. 

Stellenbosch University & CSIR. 2010. A revision of the 2004 Growth Potential of Towns in 

the Western Cape. Discussion Document. 

The Presidency. 2006. National Spatial Development Perspective (NSDP). Pretoria. 

Titus, M.J. & Hinderink, J. 1998. Town and hinterland in developing countries: perspectives 

on rural-urban interaction and regional development. Amsterdam: Thela Publishers. 

Tuan, Y.F. 1977. Space and Place: The perspective of experience. Minneapolis: University of 

Minnesota Press. 

Van der Merwe, I.J. 1983. Die stad en sy omgewing. Stellenbosch: University Publishers.. 

Van der Merwe, I.J., Ferreira, S. & Zietsman, H.L. 2005. An Investment strategy for effective 

town development in the Western Cape. Urban Forum 16: 295-312. 

Van Lindert, P. & Verkoren O (eds). 1997. Small towns and beyond. Amsterdam: Thela 

Publishers. 

Wandschneider, T. 2003: Small Towns and Local Economic Development in India, NRI 

Report 2767, World Bank and Natural Resources Institute: Kent. 

111

Weliwita, A. & Okpala, D. 2004: Promoting positive rural-urban linkages for sustainable 

development. Habitat Debate 10, UN-Habitat. 

112


MINUTES OF PROJECT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE REGARDING 

VOLUME 2 

1 NOVEMBER 2011 


The Project Management Committee met on 1 November 2011 at the offices of the Department of 

Rural Development and Land Reform (DRD&LR) in Kimberley. 

The purpose of the meeting was to: 

a) Discuss Consultative Draft 1 of Volume 2 of the PSDF and the comments received from the 

committee members prior to the meeting. 

b) Provide committee members and the service provider with an opportunity to address and 

clarify aspects of uncertainty. 

c) Reach concensus regarding the way forward as it relates to Volume 2. 

d) Discuss the relationship between Volume 2 and Volumes 3 and Volume 4 and the 

methodolgy and way forward as it relates to Volumes 3 and 4. 

The meeting was chaired by Mr Gerhard de Bruin of DRD&LR. The meeting was attended by the 

members listed in the table below. 

NAME ORGANISATION TEL CELL EMAIL 

G de Bruin DRDLR 0538325084 0828276264 GJdeBruin@ruraldevelopment.gov.za 

SW vd Merwe DMP 0218870124 0823201741 sw@dmp.co.za 

S vd Merwe DMP 0218870124 0833240925 schalk@dmp.co.za 

H Marais DBSA 0720167849 henrim@dbsa.org 

S Benade DEDAT 0538394039 0827891653 sbenade@ncpg.gov.za 

S Grobbelaar COGHSTA 0538072836 0829270903 sgrobbelaar@ncpg.gov.za 

A Strachan Office of the 

Premier 

0734872664 astrachan@ncpg.gov.za 

A Kwayisi DRDLR 0123128766 0716865402 aakwayisi@ruraldevelopment.gov.za 

K Moremi Office 

Premier 

of the 0538025107 0732147141 emoremi@ncpg.gov.za 

P Mangate DRDLR 0538325423 0762416651 psmangate@ruraldevelopment.gov.za 

S Nollovu DRDLR 0538325423 0786299059 sjnollovu@ruraldevelopment.gov.za 

G Bosman DEBAT 0538304800 0714103413 gbosman73@gmail.com 






H Louw DEBAT 0538304800 0798830410 hlouwdiamond@iburst.co.za 

K Mouibidu DEBAT 0835425372 kmouibidu@ncpg@gov.za 

Apologies were received from Ms. L. Ahjum, Ms. R Jacobs, Ms. J. Meyer, Mr. Binase and Dr. J. 

Mostert. 

2 PRESENTATION 

The service provider made two short presentations respectively pertaining to (copy of each 

presentation appended under Annexure 1): 

a) Consultative Draft 1 of Volume 2 of the PSDF. 

b) Way forward as it relates to Volumes 3 and 4. 

The service provider further submitted a report entitled Inventory of Completed Tasks and Way 

Forward (1 November 2011), the purpose of which is to serve as: 

(i) An inventory of the goals and objectives of the PSDF/PDRMP stipulated in the: 

• Terms of Reference in the Service Level Agreement. 

• Supplementary aspects listed in Annexure A of the Terms of Reference. 

• Objectives stated in the approved Inception Phase Report dated 24 February 2011. 

(ii) Summary of the status of the project as it relates to the tasks completed. 

(iii) Summary of the way forward as it relates addressing the aspects listed above. 

2.1 PRINCIPLES OF VOLUME 2 

As part of the presentation, the following principles were emphasised: 


characteristics of the province to be addressed in Volumes 3 and 4. The service provider is 

not required to undertake primary research, the information was drawn accordingly drawn 

from the data provided by the DRD&LR and the various sectors, the stakeholder 














2

2.2 COMMENT SUBMITTED BY COMMITTEE MEMBERS PRIOR TO MEETING 

The comment submitted by committee members prior to the meeting and the response of the 

service provider are listed in the table below: 

COMMENT RESPONSE 

a) Chapters on environment too long. Extent of chapters essentially equates to the submissions 

made by the relevant sectors. 

b) Comparative nature of statistics is useful point 

of departure for service delivery. 

Noted 

c) Economic section not integrated with Refer to Section D of Volume 1. 

d) 

settlement pattern. 

Ensure alignment of TOR + Annexure A, SLA, Refer to Annexure 2 of this document (Inventory of 

Inception Report. 

completed tasks and way forward) 

e) Illustrations relevant and generally well titled. Noted 

f) Include desired goal maps. To be addressed in Volumes 3 & 4. 

g) Infrastructure section to be expanded. DEDAT to provide info to include in Consultative Draft 2 of 

Volume 2. 

h) ITC policy to serve schools and rural areas. Ditto 

i) LED data not supported. Ditto 

j) Map of protected areas to be rectified (Vaalbos 

National Park has been de‐proclaimed. 

To be rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

k) Map regarding land reform. To be included in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

l) Maps regarding mining and agriculture. DEDAT to provide info to include in Consultative Draft 2 of 


m) Policy and strategy regarding export of mining 

produce versus local benefication. 

Ditto 

n) Policy on wind energy development. Ditto 

o) Quality, consistency and scale of maps. Maps and figures are, in general, direct quotes from the 

information base. 

p) Report addresses stated objective. Noted 

q) Sources of tables. To be rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

r) Strategy on alternative settlement expansion in 

line with economic potential of settlements 

Noted 

s) Strong statement regarding future of towns 

with diminishing economic base 

Noted 

t) Stronger correlation and statements regarding 

land reform, poverty alleviation in Pixley and 

Joe Morolong. 

DEDAT to provide info to include in Consultative Draft 2 of 


u) SWOT analysis. To be undertaken as part of Phase 3 & 4. 

v) Volume 2 overlaps with Volume 1. Overlapping and duplication is required in places. 

w) Reports is well structured and comprehensive. Noted 

2.3 COMMENT SUBMITTED BY COMMITTEE MEMBERS DURING MEETING 

The table below lists the comments made during the meeting, the response of the service 

provider, and the rectification agreed upon. 

MEMBER / 

INSTITUTION 

A Kwayisi 

DRDLR 

A Strachan 

Office of the 


Attendance register of public meetings to be 

loaded on website. 

Noted 

Tables must also be correctly referenced. Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

3

Premier 

G de Bruin 

DRDLR 

H Louw 

DEDAT 

H Marais 

DBSA 

K Mouibidu 

DEDAT 

S Benade 

DEDAT 

Page 19: Gariep River should be Orange River. Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

Components of Volume 2 lacks mapping, for 

example agriculture and mining. 

Ditto 

Some of the maps included in the document Maps and figures are, in general, direct quotes 

are outdated, for example, the map depicting 

solar radiation is mapped using 2001 data. 

from the information base. 

Provision to meet for climate change. To be addressed in Volume 3 & 4. 

Priorities and associated budgets: Should PSDF, per definition, indicates the spatial 

PSDF follow PGDS or make own proposals ? implications of the PGDS and provides strategies 

for the implementation of PGDS programs and 

projects. 

In terms of the Planning & Development Act Sectoral institutions prepare their own budgets. 

PSDF needs to be assign budgets. 

The PSDF provides an integrating framework for 

such process – it does not explicitely make 

provision for budgets. 

Ensure correct referencing. Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

DMAs must be labeled correctly. Ditto 

Page 1: Preparation of a spatial vision. To be addressed in Volume 3 & 4. 

Maps used are not well presented. Maps and figures are, in general, direct quotes 


Page 40: Properties of mining companies 

extending into the ocean must also be 

depicted. 

Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

PSDF will inform PGDS. The PGDS is at state 

level whilst the PSDF is more detailed. 

Noted 

Department of Water Affairs must be To be arranged by DRDLR. 

represented in PMC. 

Occurrence of previous names in Volume 2 is 

a result of source data used. Volume 2 being 

the inventory as it is, cannot change the 

referenced source data. Notes in the text may 

well refer to the change in names. 

Noted 

Regions in the map on page 10 are those 

provided by Tourism Northern Cape and are 

based on the unique characteristics of the 

various regions. 

Noted 

The section on infrastructure seems DEDAT to provide info to include in Consultative 

inadequate.. 

Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

Leading towns to be indicated. Refer to Section D of Volume 2. 

No more DMAs exist. To be clarified. 

Page 2, prioritization of projects – not Sectoral institutions prepare their own budgets. 

specifically noted in Volume 2. Will the PSDF The PSDF provides an integrating framework for 

allocate a budget or funds to identified such process – it does not explicitely make 

projects? 


Page 89: Conclusion on the demographics. Refer to Section D of Volume 2. 

Page 90: Population perimeter to show the 

brain drain out of the Northern Cape. 


Railway initiatives to be indicated. Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

Reference to the Green Kalahari is outdated. Occurrence of previous names in Volume 2 is a 

result of source data used. Volume 2 being the 

inventory as it is, cannot change the referenced 

source data. Notes in the text may well refer to 

the change in names. 

Rural nodes to be indicated. Refer to Section D of Volume 2. 

Names: Kgalagadi, John Toalo outdated, Occurrence of previous names in Volume 2 is a 

Gariep must be Orange. 


4

S Grobbelaar 

COGHSTA 

Page 10, how will the bioregions connect with 

the economic regions? Which will take 

preference? 

Page 14: Agriculture could have provided 

more accurate data. 

Vioolsdrif Dam already planned and 

approved. 

Sections on page 37 and 38 overlaps with 


Page 19: Water availability – groundwater 

resource to be addressed. 




Latest names, figures, other data to be used in 

Volumes 3 & 4. 

To be addressed in Volumes 3 & 4. 

Data made available by sectoral institutions was 

used in preparation of Volume 1. 

DEDAT to submitted approval and relevant 

information. 

Noted 


Page 4: Extent of the Northern Cape. The quote figure is confirmed correct by Mr. S. 

Grobbelaar. 

Page 65: How were the environmental factors Refer to Section D of Volume 2 and the 

factored into settlement categorisation. Settlement Study (Annexure 2 of Volume 2). 

Page 84, population figure is outdated. Data made available by sectoral institutions was 

used in preparation of Volume 1. DEDAT to 

provide info to include in Consultative Draft 2 of 


Show the impact of the incorporation of To be addressed in Volumes 3 & 4. 

North West and the Northern Cape. 

Maps must to be correctly referenced. Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

Mineral map required? Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

Page 10: Map of macro‐bioregions – 

boundaries not necessarily correct. 






Page 44, first alluvial diamond was discovered 

in Barkley West. 

Page 6: Old municipal boundaries. Ditto 

Page 65: Development potential of towns Refer to Section D of Volume 2 and the 

questioned. 

Settlement Study (Annexure 2 of Volume 2). 

This question is to be addressed during meeting 

with authors of Settlement Study (meeting to be 

arranged). 

Some of the maps still refer to Mashaweng Occurrence of previous names in Volume 2 is a 

and Kgalagadi. These names have changed result of source data used. Volume 2 being the 

and may be confusing. 






DMP to meet with individual departments. Such meetings to be held during Phase 3 & 4 of 

the PSDF process. 

PSDF has to link to and infuence the PGDS. Noted 

5

3 KEY RESOLUTIONS AND ACTIONS TO BE TAKEN 

The key resolutions taken by the PMC and the actions to be taken with immediate effect are as 

follows: 

a) The PSDF project is on schedule as per the Service Level Agreement. 

b) Volume 2 is materially adequate for submission to the Project Steering Committee subject 

to the amendments to be made as summarised in the table above. 

c) The amendments will be made and the amended document (entitled Consultative Draft 2 

of Volume 2) will be loaded onto the website by 24 November 2011. 

d) Subject to the amendments made the PMC recommends that the PSC approve 

Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2 at the meeting to be held on 29 November 2011. 

e) Committee members are to submit any additional comment to the service provider by 

Friday 11 November 2011. 

f) The proposal of the service provider that Volume 2 should be seen as ‘work in progress’ to 

be completed together with Volumes 3 and 4 is adopted. 

g) Proposals relating to the amendment of the SDF guidelines will be articulated and 

submitted to DRDLR on an ongoing basis. 

h) Service provider is to submit minutes and response on comments received to DRDLR by 24 

November 2011. 

i) Ms. S. Benade of DEDAT is to liaise with and submit outstanding information to the service 

provider in accordance with a schedule to be determined by the two parties. 

j) The settlement study needs to be studied and scrutinized on its own. 

k) A meeting is to be held with the Proffs Izak van der Merwe and Larry Zietsmann to discuss 

key aspects of the Settlement Study report. Mr. H. Louw will arrange and facilitate such 

meeting. 

l) Mr. Gerhard de Bruin will determine the date of the PSC and will make the necessary 

arrangements. 


6


INVENTORY OF COMPLETED TASKS AND WAY FORWARD 


A INTRODUCTION 

The purpose if this document is to provide the following: 

1) An inventory of the goals and objectives of the PSDF/PDRMP stipulated in the: 

a) Terms of Reference in the Service Level Agreement. 

b) Supplementary aspects listed in Annexure A of the Terms of Reference. 

c) Objectives stated in the approved Inception Phase Report dated 24 February 2011. 

2) Summary of the status of the project as it relates to the tasks completed. 

3) Summary of the way forward as it relates addressing the aspects listed under (1)(a)‐(c) 

above. 

The aspects listed are to be read together with the Guidelines for Evaluation of Spatial 

Development Frameworks (Department of Rural Development and Land Reform, 2011). 

The tables below list the aspects put forward in the documents referred to under (1) that are to 

inform the four phases/major components of the PDRMP/PSDF. The tables constitute the 

following: 

(i) Key aspects and terms of reference to be addressed. 

(ii) Volumes and relevant section(s)/chapter(s) where aspects have been addressed. 

(iii) Volume(s) within which spatial indices and strategies the various aspects are to be 

addressed during the subsequent phases of the project. 

B TERMS OF REFERENCE IN THE SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT 

In addition to complying with the statutory requirements in terms of the Northern Cape Planning 

and Development Act, 1998 (Act 7 of 1998) and responsibilities in terms of the Provincial Growth 

and Development Strategy together with the core components of an SDF as reflected in the 

Municipal Systems Act, 2000(Act 32 of 2000), the PDRMP/PSDF must achieve the following: 






TERMS OF REFERENCE IN THE SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT ADDRESSED IN 

VOLUME 

a) Provide a spatial rationale for the development of the 

province while taking into consideration development 

potential in the adjacent provinces. 

b) Give spatial effect to the directive of the national sphere of 

government. 

c) Translate national socio‐economic development priorities into 

space. 

d) Spatially un‐pack the provisions of the PGDS and guide 

implementation of key anchor projects. 

Section C & E of 


TO BE 

ADDRESSED IN 

VOLUME 


Section C, D & E 

of Volume 1 


Section C & E of 



Section E, F & G 



e) Provide direction for the CRDP roll‐out in the province. Section E, 

Chapter E.4 of 



f) Provide pointers for the alignment of District SDFs and where Section D & E of Volume 3 & 4 

disjuncture exists. 


g) Provide spatial mechanisms for harnessing and exposing the Section E, Volume 4 

competitive and comparative advantages of the province. Chapter 11.1 of 


h) Provide guidance to public and private land / infrastructure Section D of Volume 3 & 4 

investment in the province, taking cognisance of the growth 

and development potential. 


i) Indicate desired or undesired planning practices in a Section D & E of Volume 3 & 4 

particular area. 


j) Spatially co‐ordinate and direct the activities and resources of Section D of Volume 3 & 4 

the Northern Cape Government Departments. 


k) Identify issues deemed to be of provincial and regional Section E, F & G Volume 3 & 4 

significance together with strategic intervention proposals. of Volume 2 

l) Sustainable bioregional planning. Section D of 



m) A Strategic Environmental Assessment ethic that underpins Section E, Volume 3 & 4 

the drafting of the PDRMP/PSDF and its proposals. 

Chapter 13 of 

Volume 1; 

section E of 


n) Cognisance of the provincial and regional spatial implications Section E, F & G Volume 3 & 4 

of provincial sector plans and frameworks, e.g. the Disaster 

Management Plan, the Transportation Plan etc. 


o) Informed proposals through existing geological information. Section E, 

Chapter 13 of 


section E of 



2

C SUPPLEMENTARY ASPECTS LISTED IN ANNEXURE A OF THE TERMS OF REFERENCE 

C.1 INSTITUTIONAL 

ASPECT ADDRESSED IN 

VOLUME 

TO BE 

ADDRESSED IN 

VOLUME 


1. Highlight the vision and mission of the Northern Cape and its Section B of 

spatial implication. 


2. Confirm the interrelationship of the Northern Cape Provincial Section B of Volume 3 & 4 

vision and that of the district’s and local municipality’s from a 

spatial manifestation point of view. 


3. Identify main relevant principles and strategies in the Section B, D & E Volume 3 & 4 

Northern Cape and how it translate spatially. 

3 of Volume 1 

4. Delineating the provincial, district and municipal boundaries Section E, Volume 3 & 4 

and its wards. 

Chapter 12 of 


5. Existing legislation, policies, plans, resolutions pertaining to Section C of Volume 3 & 4 

spatial planning. Are they supportive to what the Northern 

Cape wants to achieve, or whether they need to be revised, 

etc. 


6. Highlight spatial implication of applicable provincial and Section C of Volume 3 & 4 

national plans, legislation, policies, strategies and directives. Volume 1 

7. Juxtapose existing PDRMP/PSDFs of adjacent provinces and Section C of Volume 3 & 4 

analyse trends and alignment. 


8. What are the main spatial provisions of the district, local Section E & G of Volume 3 & 4 

municipalities and the Provincial Growth and Development 

Strategy. 


9. The relationship between the spatial issues and the vision of Section B of Volume 3 & 4 

the province. Is there a correlation or disjuncture. 


10. Determining the way forward in terms of how the province Section B of Volume 3 & 4 

should be shaped from a spatial point of view. 


11. Point out areas needing urgent policy intervention. Volume 2 Volume 3 & 4 

12. There is a shared strategic vision for the spatial structure of Section B of Volume 3 & 4 

the Northern Cape as a whole. 


13. Ensure that the development of the PDRMP/PSDF is Section E, F & G Volume 3 & 4 

consultative from the beginning until to the end of the 

process. 


C.2 ECONOMIC 


VOLUME 

TO BE 

ADDRESSED IN 

VOLUME 


1. Map the areas where the main pressing needs and the Section E, F & G 

proposed multi‐sectoral projects are located. 


2. Provincial‐wide spatial issues (in relation to the needs Section E, F & G Volume 3 & 4 

identified) and projects (including their locality). 


3. The provincial investment and spending patterns. Is the Section E, F & G Volume 3 & 4 

provincial spending patterns in the interest of the NSDP & 

DFA, as an example? 


4. Identification and analysis of existing nodal points. Are they Section D of Volume 3 & 4 

3

viable and sustainable for promoting economic growth? 

Should their development be enhanced, etc? 

5. Where the potential agricultural land are and land currently 

affected by land claims? 

6. Point out viable and functional nodal points, and identify 

potential nodes and how they should be developed. What are 

the nodes without development potential? Name or identify 

the nodes, avoiding lengthy sentences of defining what a 

node is; 

7. Identify the functional development corridors and how they 

should be developed to support the nodes. 

C.3 SOCIAL 


Section E of 


Section D of 


Section F of 



VOLUME 

1. Settlement spatial patterns and dysfunctionalities. Is there 

any sign of sprawl, integration or any other effects of 

Apartheid? Is the environment and its activities functioning 

efficiently as a system? Can the provisions of the IDPs be 

implemented, etc? 

2. Where the major sporting nodes or areas are and whether 

they are supported by the relevant infrastructure? 

3. Where is the low income houses located? Is it a viable 

location from an economic and access point of view? Are 

there supporting infrastructures (bulk)? 

C.4 SOCIO‐ECONOMIC 

Section D of 


Section D of 


Section D of 



VOLUME 

1. Identification and analysis of strategic located vacant land and 

development potential land. 

2. Highlighting major structuring elements, urbanization trends 

and their spatial implication. 

3. Strategic roads and transportation networks (national, 

provincial and district roads). Are they systematically 

functional and supportive of each other? Is there a need for 

new roads and why or whether and which roads need to be 

upgraded and for what reason? Where are the roads leading 

to, and which ones will boost the economic growth of the 

province? Etc 

4. Location and trends of bulk services and infrastructure. 

Where does the province want the services and infrastructure 

to go? Is it congruent to where the relevant sectors want to 

implement their projects? If not what kind of engagement are 

necessary ? 

5. Spatial relationship between urban and rural areas. Does it 

exist? If not what prevents a harmonious interrelationship of 

the two? 

Section F of 


Section F of 


Section F of 


Section D & E of 





TO BE 

ADDRESSED IN 

VOLUME 




TO BE 

ADDRESSED IN 

VOLUME 






4

6. Objectives that will translate the space or the environment 

into the desired spatial form. 

7. Development of the conceptual framework to spatially map 

the desired spatial form. One may have a macro and/or a 

micro spatial plan depending on the amount of issues to 

include in the framework. Now the province should be 

portrayed as to how it will function sustainably as a system. 

8. Horizontal and vertical alignment of the conceptual diagram 

with other relevant plans. 

9. Recommend and point out strategic development areas and 

priority areas for investment. Avoid generalisation or vague 

statements. Illustrations or maps are recommended. 

10. Recommend viable land for housing development and 

supporting infrastructure. 

11. Delineate functional and integrating municipal 

/district/provincial roads and public passenger transportation 

network. Make proposals for upgrading of or new roads 

where necessary. 

12. Delineate proposed major bulk infrastructure for the whole 

province. Where appropriate recommend for new bulk 

infrastructure and the relevant services. 

13. Point out and delineate areas with high agricultural potential 

and areas affected by claims which the province needs the 

most for developmental purposes. 

C.5 ENVIRONMENTAL 

Section B of 


Section E, 

Chapter 13 of 


Section D of 


Section D & F of 


Section D & F of 



VOLUME 

1. Where the environmental conservation and sensitive areas 

are and what impact will development have on the 

environment? Which areas should not be developed at all? 

Which are the areas where some kind of development 

through strict management should be allowed? Inter regional 

connectivity; 

2. Point out and delineate environmental conservation and 

sensitive areas, major sporting nodes as well as areas with 

tourism potential. 

C.6 ECONOMIC INSTITUTIONAL 

Section C of 


Section C of 



VOLUME 

There are strategies and processes in place to involve the relevant 

decision makers and stakeholders. 

Section E of 










TO BE 

ADDRESSED IN 

VOLUME 



TO BE 

ADDRESSED IN 

VOLUME 


5

D OBJECTIVES STATED IN THE APPROVED INCEPTION PHASE REPORT DATED 24 FEBRUARY 

2011 

TERMS OF REFERENCE IN THE SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT ADDRESSED IN 

VOLUME 

a) Indicate the spatial implications of the core development 

objectives of the Northern Cape PGDS. 

b) Serve as a spatial plan that will facilitate Local Economic 

Development (LED). 

c) Lay down strategies, proposals and guidelines for the future 

spatial development of the Province. This includes, without 

being limited to, development objectives, proposals for land 

reform, urban renewal, reconstruction, integration, 

d) 

environmental planning, transport planning, infrastructure 

planning, and urban design so that the general well‐being of 

the particular community and order in the area are promoted 

in the most efficient manner. 

Promote the utilisation and unlocking the latent value of 

vacant government land through an innovative partnership 

approach to property development with the aim to support 

LED in a lasting and meaningful manner. 

e) Enhance the quality of development throughout the Province 

in accordance with the principles of ‘critical regionalism’. 

f) Promote the broadening of the economic base as an 

important principle underlying economic development. Apart 

from a general higher level of output, this also implies the 

following: 

‐ Introducing new activities, which are not currently 

operational in the Province. This means an extension of 

the production capacity in terms of new products and 

services. 

‐ Application of new technologies that is not being applied 

in production processes. This should make the Northern 

Cape Province more competitive. 

‐ Development of small, medium and micro‐enterprises 

(SMMEs) to have a broader representation based on the 

size of establishments. Size can be expressed in terms of 

either employment or production. 

‐ Broadening of ownership to include all members of the 

community. 

‐ Protecting and enhancing the interest of all property 

owners in the Province. 

g) Facilitating the preparation of provincial development plans 

and action plans to which financial budgets can be linked. 

Section E & G of 


Section E, 

Chapters 10 & 

11 of Volume 1; 

Section F & G of 


Section E of 




Section E, 

Chapters 10 & 


TO BE 

ADDRESSED IN 

VOLUME 





Section E, Volume 3 & 4 

Chapters 15 of 


Section E, Volume 3 & 4 

Chapters 10 & 




Ditto Ditto 

Ditto Ditto 

Ditto Ditto 

Ditto Ditto 

Ditto Ditto 

Section E, 

Chapters 10 & 




6

h) Providing a framework for undertaking performance 

i) 

management in terms of a set of measurable criteria, as such, 

promoting continual improvement of provincial and municipal 

functioning at all levels. 

Supporting the district and local municipalities in the 

preparation of their IDPs and, in particular, their SDFs 

prepared in terms of the Local Government Municipal 

Systems Act 32 of 2000. 

j) Providing a standard format for the implementation of 

bioregional planning with the aim to facilitate sustainable 

development throughout the Northern Cape. 

k) Facilitating the land‐use classification of the entire land 

surface of the Province in a standard format in accordance 

with defined Spatial Planning Categories (SPCs), which are 

based on a broad spectrum of environmental parameters and 

a system of values and ethics. 

l) Providing a framework that would inform any future 

municipal demarcation with the aim to reconcile future 

municipal boundaries with defined bioregional parameters. 

m) Providing a credible context for public investments in the 

coming years and promoting the development of areas that 

have lagged behind. 

n) Replacing inappropriate existing policy frameworks with a 

more ambitious forward‐moving, integrated approach to 

planning that will lead to the realisation of common goals of 

the Province. 

o) Providing clarity to guide decision‐makers in respect of 

development applications within the Province. 

p) Describing the existing and desired future spatial patterns 

that provide for integrated, efficient and sustainable 

settlements throughout the Province. 

q) Providing certainty to all stakeholders regarding spatial and 

socio‐economic implications of future development in the 


r) Providing a basis for co‐ordinated decision‐making and policy‐ 

formulation regarding future land‐use. 

s) Facilitating cross‐boundary co‐operation and co‐ordination 

between district and local municipalities, adjoining provinces, 

and bordering countries in respect of issues that are of 

mutual interest for their respective areas of jurisdiction (refer 

to inter alia issues pertaining to land‐use, biodiversity 

conservation, and resource utilisation). 


STELLENBOSCH 


Section D of 






Section E, 

Chapter 13 & 15 


Section E, 

Chapter 12 of 


Section D of 




Section B‐E of 


Section E, 

Chapters 10 & 






















7


FRAMEWORK / DEVELOPMENT & RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 

AGENDA FOR PROJECT STEERING COMMITTEE MEETING 


09:00 Welcoming & Introduction 

Purpose of meeting & recommendations by Project Management 

Committee 

09:15‐10:00 Session 1: Presentation regarding Volume 2 of the PSDF 

10:00‐10:30 Session 1 Discussion 

10:30‐11:00 Tea 

11:00‐11:45 Session 2: Presentation regarding Development Potential of 



12:15‐12:30 Presentation on Way Forward as it relates to Phase 3 & Phase 4 

12:30‐13:00 Concluding Discussion & Resolutions



VOLUME 2 

PROJECT STEERING COMMITTEE MEETING 



1

SUPPORTING MEETING DOCUMENTATION 

AGENDA 


FRAMEWORK / DEVELOPMENT & RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 

AGENDA FOR PROJECT STEERING COMMITTEE MEETING 


09:00 Welcoming & Introduction 

Purpose of meeting & recommendations by Project Management 

Committee 

09:15‐10:00 Session 1: Presentation regarding Volume 2 of the PSDF 


10:30‐11:00 Tea 

11:00‐11:45 Session 2: Presentation regarding Development Potential of 



12:15‐12:30 Presentation on Way Forward as it relates to Phase 3 & Phase 4 

12:30‐13:00 Concluding Discussion & Resolutions 


2

FOCUS OF THE MEETING 

Provincial Spatial Development Framework/Development & Resources Management Plan

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION 

DOCUMENTS 

1. Volume 1 & 2 on Website 

2. PSDF Pamphlet 

3. PSDF Executive Summary DVD 

4. Volume2onCD 

5. Annexure 2 of Volume 2. i.e. Study report entitled: Development 

Potential of Urban Settlements in the Northern Cape. Van der Merwe, 

I.J., and Zietsman, H.L. 2011 

6. Record of Public Participation 

7. Minutes of Project Management Committee Regarding Volume 2 

8. Inventory of Completed Tasks and Way Forward 


4

PRINCIPLES FOR CONSIDERATION 

1. Volume 2 is an inventory of aspects to be addressed in Volumes 3 and 4. 

2. Information drawn drawn from data provided by the DRD&LR, sectors, 

stakeholder consultation and additional sources explored by service provider. 

3. Content of Volume 2 is, in general, direct quotes from information base and 

therefore do not necessarily represent the quality and format of the service 

provider. 

4. Significance of possible inaccuracies should be adjudicated in context of their 

potential to have a meaningful effect on PSDF as a whole. 

5. Section H: Summary of Key Aspects is the primary component of Volume 2. 

Committee members need to ensure that all sectoral interests have been listed in 

this section. 

6. Phases 3 & 4 will involve ongoing information-gathering. Therefore not practical 

to, at this stage, consider Volume 2 as a final and complete product. Rather to be 

seen as ‘work in progress’ to be completed together with Volumes 3 and 4. 


A provincial policy document that: 

RECAP: WHAT IS THE PSDF ? 

• Gives effect to the overarching intent of the Northern Cape Provincial Growth 

and Development Strategy (PGDS) to ‘build a prosperous, sustainable and 

growing provincial economy to eradicate poverty and improves social 

development’. 

• Promotes a ‘developmental state’ in accordance with national and provincial 

legislation and international protocols and agreements pertaining to 

sustainability.. 

PSDF, on its own, will not have any influence –it depends on inter alia committed 

leadership, good governance, integration of sectoral interests, full involvement of 

stakeholders 


6

RECAP: TERMS OF REFERENCE 

Prepare a Provincial Spatial Development Framework / Development and Resources Management Plan 

that is aligned with the Northern Cape Planning and Development Act , the PGDS and other applicable 

legislation and policy, and which (b) gives effect to the following: 

a) Coherent land‐use/resource management in terms of bioregional planning principles which 

recognise the unique characteristics of the province. 

b) A spatial rationale for sustainable development in the province which implies the enhancement of 

human well‐being and environmental integrity through efficient use of the inherent resources 

(capital) of the province. 

c) Giving spatial effect to the directives of the national government as expressed in the National 

Spatial Development Perspective (NSDP). 

d) Giving spatial effect to the provisions of the Northern Cape PGDS and guide implementation of 

anchor projects. 

e) Providing direction for the Comprehensive Rural Development Program (CRDP) roll‐out in the 

province. 

f) Serving as a manual and directive for the preparation and alignment of municipal SDFs. 

g) Providing spatial mechanisms for the utilisation and enhancement of the competitive and 

comparative advantages of the province. 

h) Providing guidance to public and private infrastructure investment in the province, taking 

cognisance of the growth and development potential. 

i) Spatially co‐ordinating and directing the activities and resources of the provincial government 

departments. 

j) Identifying issues deemed to be of provincial and regional significance together with strategic 

intervention proposals. 


7

RECAP: PSDF VOLUMES & THEIR FUNCTIONS 

VOLUME 1 

Context, policy and principle framework, 

procedural guidance for the preparation 

of Volumes 2, 3 & 4. 

VOLUME 3 

‘Package’ of plans that serve as spatial 

directives regarding land‐use within the 

province and in defined areas outside its 

boundaries. Based upon a spatial vision. 

COLLATED INTO A PSDF 

DOCUMENT 

VOLUME 2 

Key environmental, cultural, heritage, 

economic, social, demographic, 

institutional and infrastructural aspects 

to be addressed in Volume 3 & 4. 

VOLUME 4 

‘Non‐spatial key issues collated and 

addressed under sectoral programs for 

which detailed policy and 

implementation strategies are provided. 


SECTION B: 

CONTEXT 

SECTION C: 

ENVIRONMENT 

SECTION D: 

SETTLEMENT 

SECTION E: 


SECTION F: 

ECONOMY 

STRUCTURE & CONTENT OF VOLUME 2 

Location 

Location 



Biophysical 

Biodiversity 

Cultural 


Demography 

Status 

Sectors 

Corridors 


SECTION G: 


SECTION H: 





Section B includes the following: 

SECTION B: CONTEXTUAL 

S ISSUE 

1. Locational & contextual aspects of the Northern Cape Province. 

2. International and national significance of the Northern Cape in terms of its 

primary comparative advantages. 

3. Administrative context with specific reference to the component 

municipalities and settlements. 

4. Component macro‐regional areas and their idiosyncrasies. 


LOCATION 

CONTEXT

INTERNATIONAL AND NATIONAL SIGNIFICANCE

MUNICIPALITIES 

SETT LEMENTS

MACRO 

REGIONS TH IR E CHARACTERIST 

ICS

BOX 1 

SUMMARY OF KEY CONTEXTUAL ASPECTS 

a) Align PSDF with development directives and objectives of adjoining countries and provinces. 

b) Consider traditional parameters as a key criterion in the demarcation of municipal boundaries. 

c) Enhance management of Kgalagadi and Richtersveld Transfrontier Conservation Areas. 

d) Include municipalities in formulation and establishment of cross-border agreements (currently 

primarily the function of national government). 

e) Interrogate boundaries of John Gaetsewe District Municipality against inter alia traditional 

domain parameters. 

f) Interrogate efficiency of cross-border arrangements with Namibia with specific reference to 

the Noord-Oewer / Vioolsdrift irrigation scheme, cross-frontier conservation schemes, and 

cross-frontier economic schemes such as the proposed film industry. 

g) Interrogate the delineation of the provincial, district, municipal and ward boundaries. 

h) Provide appropriate spatial context and orientation for the Northern Cape in terms of 

international agreements, protocols and conventions. 

i) Strengthen historical binds between the Karas Region of Namibia and the Northern Cape 

Province - aspects identified for further action are (i) the education and training sector, with 

the focus on ensuring that best practice is shared in skills development for economic growth, 

(ii) further development of the Nama language and culture, (iii) exchange of learners’ support 

material and teacher development programs. 


SECTION C: ENVIRONMENT 

Key aspects of the natural and cultural environment of the province in terms of the 

holistic definition of the ‘environment’ as put forward by the National Environmental 

Management Act (NEMA) 107 of 1998, namely the aggregate of all external conditions 

and influences affecting the life of an organism. 

In particular, ‘environment’ refers to the surroundings within which humans exist and that 

are made up of: 



c) any part or combination of (a) and (b) and the interrelationships among and between 

them; and 

d) the physical, chemical, aesthetic and cultural properties and conditions of the 

foregoing that influence human health and well‐being. 

NOTE: There is a gap in information relating to the biodiversity resources of the Province 

and the associated environmental services. 


BIO PHYSI 

CAL 

CHARACTERIST 

ICS

RADIATION CHARACTERISTIC 

S

WATE R – TH E PRIMARY RESOURC E

BIODIVERSIT Y – IMPERATIVE 

FOR SUSTAINA ILITY 

B

THE 

CO 

AST – A KEY RESOU RCE

BOX 2 

SUMMARY OF KEY ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS 

a) Consider designation of agricultural reserves in areas of high-potential agricultural soils with adequate 

irrigation water. 

b) Create appropriate ecological linkages between conservation areas. 

c) Designate coastal zone as a core conservation area. 

d) Institute standard development approach along the Orange River by all relevant municipalities. //Khara Hais 

SDF is to serve as a model in this regard. 

e) Enhance sustainable use of formal conservation areas and their resources. 

f) Enhance viability and sustainability of the Richtersveld Botanical and Landscape World Heritage Site which 

is the core of the Succulent Karoo Biodiversity Hotspot. 

g) Explore desirability of implementing strategies such as Protected Nature Areas and Special Management 

Areas in collaboration with organised agriculture and the Department of the Environment. 


i) Land-use along the coastline must be addressed in a similar manner by all relevant municipalities and 

stakeholders. 

j) Preparation and implementation of an efficient Water Demand Conservation Strategy must be mandatory 

on all municipalities. 

k) Promote cross-border conservation initiatives – explore the merit and desirability of UNESCO biosphere 

reserves. 


m) Protect high-potential agricultural land through appropriate land-use designation. 

n) Provide for biodiversity conservation in terms of SANBI’s ‘critical biodiversity area’ (CBA) indicators. 

o) Provide guidelines for the re-use and/or the more sustainable use of resources. 

p) Provide innovative strategies to help conserve conservation-worthy habitats on private land. 

q) Provide land-use plan as a basis for integration of mining activities with conservation. 

r) Provide strategy to off-set loss of conservation-worthy habitat through mining through ex-situ conservation 

projects. 

s) Standardise land-use planning and management by municipalities and other stakeholders. 


SECTION D: SETTLEMEN T PATTE 

RN 

Based upon research study: 

Development Potential of Urban Settlements in the Northern Cape 

Van der Merwe, I.J., and Zietsman, H.L. 2011 

Objective is to provide a premise for formulation of guidelines for the following: 

1. Determining and assessing the status of the settlements of the province with 

specific reference to their development potential and human needs . 

2. Prioritise government spending and LED to best benefit of province as a whole. 

3. Guide preparation of IDPs. 

4. Indicate what type of development and investment is required and how the 

municipal budget should be allocated to eradicate backlog or weaknesses. 

5. Measuring the change that occurred in local municipalities and settlements over 

a defined period in order to create a basis for future performance assessment 


COMPONENTS OF SETTLEMENT STUDY 

1 COMPOSITE INDICES 

2 DEVELOPMENT POTENTIAL 

3 HUMAN DEVELOPMENT NEED 

4 INVESTMENT TYPE REQUIRED 

5 CHANGE ASSESSMENT 

6 INTEGRATED MUNICIPAL & TOWN 

PROFILES 

PERFORMANCE 

ASSESSMENT 


COMPOSITE 

RESOURC ES

COMPOSITE 

INFRASTRUCTU RE

COMPOSIT 

E ECONOMY

BOX 3 

SUMMARY OF KEY SETTLEMENT ASPECTS 

a) District and local SDFs should incorporate place-specific guidelines for architecture and 

landscaping premised upon historic design precedents and vernacular. 

b) Formulate guidelines for the preparation of a provincial climate-neutrality strategy in terms of 

international best practice. 

c) Indicate actions to be taken by municipalities to enhance the status of settlements as it 

relates to development potential and human needs. 

d) Indicate investment typologies required by the various municipalities and settlements. 

e) Planning and design of industrial and mining infrastructure have to be undertaken in 

accordance with dedicated design criteria. 

f) Provide a spatial plan for bulk services and infrastructure for settlement priorities. 


h) Provide a spatial premise and rationale for decision-making as it relates to the appropriation 

of government funds. 

i) Provide a spatial premise and rationale for decision-making as it relates to the private sector 

investment in development. 

j) Provide broad guidelines for improvement of subsidised housing –municipalities must adopt 

such guidelines in their SDFs. These guidelines must be mandatory. 

k) Provide framework for performance management of municipalities and settlements. 

l) Provide spatial structuring elements to facilitate sustainable urban development. 


SECTION E: SOCIAL 

HUMAN 

Key aspects related to the Human Capital and the Social Capital i.e.: 

a) Human Capital refers to people’s health, education, training, knowledge, skills, 

spirituality and motivation, which are needed for a flourishing economy, 

productive work, poverty reduction and capacity for human relationships. 

b) Social Capital concernsinvestmentsbyinstitutionsthathelpusmaintainand 

develop human capital e.g. families, communities, municipalities, trade unions, 

hospitals and schools. This means access to varied and supportive 

opportunities for work, health, living conditions, etc. 

Also an inventory of other forms of capital required to ensure the well‐being and 

ongoing development of the above forms of capital, i.e. Manufactured 

(Infrastructure) Capital. The main components include buildings and infrastructure 

such as roads, communications, waste disposal, water systems, etc. 

NOTE: There are discrepancies between the estimates provided by the LED 

Strategy and the PGDS. 


ASPECTS ADDRESSED IN SECTION E 

HUMAN CAPITAL 

Demographic profile 

Demographic aspects that can influence future development 

Discrepancies between data sets 

Migration pattern 

SOCIO‐ECONOMIC STATUS 

Poverty 

Poverty alleviation focus area 

Income levels in the northern cape 

Social grants received 

Labour and employment 

Education 

Literacy and education levels 

Skill levels 

GENERAL SOCIO‐ECONOMIC INFORMATION 

Services standards: Housing; sewage removal; water reticulation; water needs on formal and informal 

stands; telecommunications; roads and streets; mode of transport; refuse removal; electricity and 

energy; health 

COMPREHENSIVE RURAL DEVELOPMENT 

LAND REFORM 


POPULATION 

DISTRIBUTIO N

HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 

NE EDS

DEVELOPMENT 

POTENTIAL 

OF SETTLEME NTS

INVESTMEN T TYPE 

REQUIRED

KEY ASP T EC 

LAND REFORM

BOX 4 

SUMMARY OF KEY SOCIAL & HUMAN ASPECTS 

a) Create incentives and opportunities for commercial banks to extend their input into LED and 

to unlock benefits associated with banking charters more efficiently. 

b) Develop an empirical spatial premise and rational for the provision of basic household 

services, training and education facilities, health services, etc. throughout the province. 

c) Ensure access to affordable energy services. Distribute information on costs associated with 

different energy sources and the best options for different uses, e.g. heating, cooking and 

lighting. 

d) Ensure that new mines adopt a strategy that would ensure ongoing socio-economic 

development and environmental rehabilitation. 

e) Eradicate gaps (lack of co-operation and communication) between the different sectors active 

in the Northern Cape as well as between the communities. 

f) Explore models for public-private partnerships (e.g. the Karsten Women Trust). 


h) Formulate a strategy for promotion of entrepreneurship and associated development 


i) Legislative processes that stifle sustainable development should be identified and reviewed. 

j) Promote job creation in the green jobs industries (e.g. manufacturing of solar water heaters, 

maintenance of wind generators and solar energy infrastructure). 

k) Proved guidelines for formulation of strategies to sustain socio-economic development after 

the life-span of projects. 

l) Provide a spatial rationale for the restoration of traditional parameters of settlements as a 

basis for community revitalisation. 

m) Provide broad guidelines for improvement of subsidised housing – district and local 

municipalities must adopt such guidelines in their SDFs. These must be mandatory. 

n) Provide strategies for the enhancement of entrepreneurship and associated development 


o) Provide strategies to ensure that communities benefit meaningfully from larger-scale physical 

development (e.g. the Sustainable Development Initiative {SDI} model). 



Key aspects of the economy with specific reference to: 

a) Economic sectors that are the drivers of the economy and the generator of the 

Financial (Monetary) Capital. 

a) Key issues to be addressed in order to ensure the ongoing growth and 

sustainability of the various economic sectors and the economy as a whole. 

NOTE: There are discrepancies between the estimates provided by the LED 

Strategy and the PGDS. 


ECONOMIC SECTORS 

MINING SECTOR 

ASPECTS ADDRESSED IN SECTION F 

AGRICULTURE AND AGRO-PROCESSING SECTOR 

FISHING AND MARICULTURE SECTOR 

ENERGY SECTOR 

TOURISM 

SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 

Southern African Large Telescope (Salt) 

Square Kilometre Array (SKA) 

Karoo Array Telescope 


MINING A KEY ECONOMIC 

DRIVER

RICH MINING RESOURCES 


AGRICULTUR E A KEY ECONOMIC 

DRIVER 


TOURISM 

A KEY ECONOMIC 

DRIVER 


FISHING MARICULTUR E A KEY ECONOMIC 

DRIVER 


PROPOSED 

ASTRONOMY ESERVE 

R

DEVELOPMENT 

CORRIDORS

KEY REQUIREMENT ADEQUAT E TRANSPORT 

NETWO RK

KEY REQUIREMENT EFFICIENT WATE R DISTRI BUTIO N

BOX 5 

SUMMARY OF KEY ECONOMIC ASPECTS 


b) Consideration enlargement of Boegoeberg dam and Prieska dam. 

c) Create opportunities for communities to become involved in operation of tourism facilities, providing services to the 

industry and acting as suppliers to the industry. 

d) Ensure that new development is subject to the availability of resources, with specific reference to water and bulk 

services infrastructure. 

e) Establishing stronger backward and forward linkages between sectors to ensure stronger multipliers. 

f) Explore need and desirability of a safe deep-water harbour at Port Nolloth. 

g) Facilitate preparation of holistic strategy for promotion of the Port Nolloth Fishing Node. 

h) Facilitate joint venture business arrangements between fishing companies to create a ‘critical mass’ of fish that would 

make fishing and fish processing more economically viable in the Port Nolloth area. 

i) Facilitate support for development of a small-scale experimental factory at Port Nolloth or Hondeklipbaai. 

j) Increase awareness, branding and marketing initiatives in the tourism industry to attract more tourists locally and 

internationally. 

k) Increase spectrum of tourist attractions and activities in focus areas to induce tourists to stay longer and encourage 

returns. 

l) Prepare long-term tourism plans and strategies, including precautionary measures and guidelines to reduce negative 

impact of development, with specific reference to visual impact in resource areas. 

m) Prioritise construction and upgrading of Hotazel-McCarthy’s Rest road and Hotazel-Vanzulsrus road that link Northern 

Cape with Botswana (crucial for enhancing the tourism sector of the province and the country). 

n) Prioritise construction of Vioolsdrif dam. 

o) Promote development of both ferrous and non-ferrous metals, as well as dimension stone. 

p) Provide a plan for supporting bulk services and infrastructure, including roads, electricity, water and telecommunication. 

q) Provide a spatial framework that indicates appropriate development regions and corridors based on the comparative 

economic advantages of the subject areas. 

r) Provide strategy to ensure that infrastructure spending has a long-term focus which is not subject to short-term political 

cycles and IDP budgets only. 



u) Revisit study on desirability of development of cargo facilities and chartered cargo air services out of Alexander Bay, 

Upington and Kimberley airports (previous work was not conclusive). 

v) Stipulate off-sets for detrimental impacts of mining on agriculture with specific reference to water pollution, dust, 

deterioration of roads, etc. 

w) Unlock potential of tourism markets, especially in rural areas where new product opportunities for cultural, adventure 

and ecotourism exist. 


SECTION G: PROPOSED 

PGDS INTERVENTIO NS 

Summary of the interventions listed in the PGDS that have to be provided for in 

the PSDF. 

Many of the proposed interventions do not have any spatial implications. 

However, they all have a bearing on the key imperatives for sustainable 

development, namely human well‐being, environmental integrity and economic 

efficiency. 

Volume 4 of the PSDF will therefore address such non‐spatial issues and 

interventions such as many of those listed in the PGDS. 


BOX 6 

SUMMARY OF KEY PGDS INTERVENTIONS 

a) Create a transformed and vibrant agricultural sector with an increasing contribution to the provincial economic 

growth, job creation and food security. 

b) Create work opportunities through innovative use of resources and sustainable development. 




f) Ensure on-going and sustainable environmental management. 

g) Establish, develop and support SMMEs and cooperatives, and community initiatives. 

h) Promote and develop the Northern Cape as a globally competitive tourism resource and destination. 

i) Promote economic growth through sustainable minerals exploitation and development. 




m) Reduce greenhouse gas emissions, climate change impact and improve air/atmospheric quality. 

n) Reduce the transport infrastructure backlog for economic growth and development by 2014. 


p) Support coherent implementation of the Comprehensive Rural Development Program (CRDP). 



1. CONTEXT 

2. ENVIRONMENT 

3. SETTLEMENT 


5. ECONOMY 

6. PGDS INTERVENTIONS 



CLOSURE OF SESSI ON 1 




PROJECT STEERING COMMITTEE MEETING 

VOLUME 2 

SESSION 3: WAY FORWARD 



1

PSDF VOLUMES & THEIR FUNCTIONS 

VOLUME 1 

Context, policy and principle 

framework, procedural guidance 

for the preparation of Volumes 2, 

3 & 4. 

VOLUME 3 

‘Package’ of plans that serve as 

spatial directives regarding landuse 

within the province and in 

defined areas outside its 

boundaries. Based upon a spatial 

vision. 

COLLATED INTO A PSDF 

DOCUMENT 

VOLUME 2 

Key environmental, cultural, 

heritage, economic, social, 

demographic, institutional and 

infrastructural aspects to be 

addressed in Volume 3 & 4. 

VOLUME 4 

‘Non-spatial key issues collated 

and addressed under sectoral 

programs for which detailed 

policy and implementation 

strategies are provided. 



SECTION A: 

INTRODUCTION 

SECTION B: 

GUIDING STATEMENTS 

SECTION C: 

PLANNING CONTEXT 

SECTION D: 

PLANNING APPROACH 

SECTION E: 

POLICY & PROCEDURAL GUIDELINES 


SECTION B: 

CONTEXT 

SECTION C: 

ENVIRONMENT 

SECTION D: 

SETTLEMENT 

SECTION E: 


SECTION F: 

ECONOMY 


Location 

Location 



Biophysical 

Biodiversity 

Cultural 


Demography 

Status 

Sectors 

Corridors 


SECTION G: 


SECTION H: 





STEPS TOWARDS PREPARATION OF VOLUME 3 & 4 

Step 1: Collation & Interpretation of Info from Vol 1 & 2 

Step 2: Swot Analysis to determine Priority Issues 

Step 3: Determine Spatial Vision that addresses Priority Issues 

Step 4: Based upon Spatial Vision & through on‐going Stakeholder 

Consultation, prepare the following: 

VOLUME 3: 

‘Package of Plans’ which serve as 

spatial directives 

NORTHERN CAPE 

PSDF 

VOLUME 4: 

‘Non‐spatial’ policy & strategies 

under sectoral programs 

1. Priority Matrix 

2. Spatial Structuring 

Elements 

3. Spatial Planning 

Categories 


SUPPLEMENTARY ACTIONS 

1. Further consultation with: 

a) Departments & sectoral institutions 

b) Municipalities regarding area-specific goals, objectives & implementation 

strategies 

c) Public & other general stakeholders 

2. Further interrogation of: 

a) Sectoral strategies & action plans 

b) IDPs & SDFs of district and local municipalities 

3. Investigate key themes & aspects identified in context of : 

a) Terms of Reference in the Service Level Agreement. 

b) Supplementary aspects listed in Annexure A of the Terms of Reference. 

c) Objectives stated in the approved Inception Phase Report dated 24 February 

2011. 

4 Prepare ‘package of plans’ & ‘policies & strategies’ in a standard format 


CLOSURE OF SESSI ON 3 



MINUTES OF PROJECT STEERING COMMITTEE REGARDING VOLUME 2 



The Project Steering Committee (PSC) met on 29 November 2011 at the Flamingo Casino in 

Kimberley. 









e) Consider the approval of Volume 2 in accordance with the recommendation of the Project 

Steering Committee. 

The meeting was chaired by Ms Jakoba Meyer of the Office of the Premier. The meeting was 

attended by representatives of (also refer to Annexure 1) COGHSTA, Rural Development and Land 

Reform, Development Bank of South Africa, Department Economic Development and Tourism 

(DEDaT), Office of the Premier, Department of Agriculture and Land Reform, Department of Social 

Development, Frances Baard District Municipality, Kgatelopele Local Municipality, Provincial 

Treasury, Department of Education, Department of Transport Safety and Liaison, Department of 

Water Affairs, John Taolo Gaetsewe District Municipality, Department of Energy, Department of 

Environment and Nature Conservation, SALGA, Sol Plaatje Local Municipality, Department of 

Mineral Resources and Dennis Moss Partnership. 

Apologies were received from F. Phatedi, G. Present, N. Rsvhugoni, T. Maseko, N. Swarts, L. 

Lekgetho, L. Brand, A Oliphant, J.T Loubser, R.K Williams, M Mlatha, G. Makgopa, B. Mahlangeni, 

M. Thibana, Z. Damana, Y. de Jager, R. Boysen, G. Munnik, S. Crouch, S. Benade, J Mostert, J. 

Burger, S. Diokpala, I. Viesa, R. Nel, M. Gama, N. Chimburuka, M. Jacobs. 






2 PRESENTATIONS AND SUBMISSIONS 

2.1 SERVICE PROVIDER 

The service provider made two presentations pertaining to (copy of each presentation appended 

as Annexure 5.1 and Annexure 5.2 respectively): 

Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2 of the PSDF. 

Way forward as it relates to Volumes 3 and 4. 

The service provider further submitted the following: 

a) Minutes of the Project Management Committee of 1 November 2011. These minutes were 

accepted by the PSC as a true reflection of the content and proceedings of the said 

meeting. 

b) Report entitled Inventory of Completed Tasks and Way Forward (1 November 2011), the 

purpose of which is to serve as: 




• Objectives stated in the approved Inception Phase Report dated 24 February 

2011. 



These records were accepted by the PSC as a true reflection of the actions taken and 

completed to date. 

2.2 SUB‐CONSULTANTS 

Prof. I van der Merwe and Prof. L Zietsman made a presentation regarding the study report 

entitled Development Potential of Urban Settlements in the Northern Cape. The research study 

was commissioned by the service provider and served as basis for the preparation of, in particular, 

Section D of Volume 2. 

The presentation was arranged by the service provider with the aim to provide the PSC with a 

comprehensive description of the study methodology and content and to address uncertainties 

regarding the report. The presentation was supplemented with further discussions held the 

afternoon of the 29th of November 2011. The costs for the presentation and additional 

discussions were carried by the service provider. 

3 PRINCIPLES OF VOLUME 2 



characteristics of the province to be addressed in Volumes 3 and 4. The information was 

drawn drawn from the data provided by the DRD&LR and the various sectors, the 

stakeholder consultation process undertaken, and additional sources explored by the 

service provider. 

b) Section H: Summary of Key Aspects is the primary component of Volume 2. Committee 


2

c) The process of preparing Volumes 3 and 4 would involve ongoing information‐gathering. It 




4 COMMENT SUBMITTED BY COMMITTEE MEMBERS DURING MEETING 


provider, and the rectification agreed upon (the notes taken by the DRD&LR are appended under 

Annexure 2). 

SESSION 1 COMMENT RESPONSE 

a) Gariep River to be changed to Orange River. 

b) District management areas no longer in use. 

c) Kgalagadi to be changed to John Taolo 

Gaetsewe and kgalagadi local / Moshaweng to 

be Joe Morolong. 

d) Clarity on what is meant by agricultural 

reserve and its application. 

e) Agricultural land in many instances includes 

habitats of high conservation importance. 

f) Alluvial vegetation must be afforded 

appropriate protection. 

g) Box 2, Aspect (g) – Implementation of 

protected area network to be undertaken in 

collaboration with, in particular, Department 

of Minerals. 

h) The statistics 2001 data used is old, but is the 

only available data since the resent stats data 

will only be available in a year or two. 

i) Distinction to be made on maps between 

completed and proposed water pipelines, 

using different colours. 

j) A statement on Blue drop status has to be 

reviewed. 

k) Review demarcation of water use areas along 

Free State border. 

l) Provision has to be made for the Northern 

Cape Conservation plan that is under 

development. 

m) Status of the PGDS is that it has been reviewed 

by executive council and circulated to 

stakeholders. 

n) Mines in Kuruman envisage to increase their 

production therefore pressure will be 

experienced on roads and development in the 

area. 

o) Economic problems in Kuruman need to be 

solved as people are still poor, right strategies 

a) Rectified throughout document. 

b) Ditto 

c) Ditto 

d) Clarified by service provider during 

meeting. 

e) Noted 

f) To be provided for in Volumes 3 & 4. 

g) Noted 

h) Rectified. 

i) Rectified in accordance with DWA’s 

input. 

j) Ditto 

k) To be addressed in Volume 3 & 4. 

l) Noted 

m) To be addressed in Volume 3 & 4. 

n) To be addressed in Volume 3 & 4. 

o) To be addressed in Volume 3 & 4. 

3

have to be applied. Therefore balance 

between human wellbeing, environmental 

integrity and economic efficiency should be 

achieved. 

p) Migration pattern in Kuruman has to be 

looked at as some schools are closing up while 

others experience influx of learners. 

q) Page 6 – Kamieskroon must be change to 

Kamiesberg 

r) Page 7 – Revise names of district and local 


s) Insert Ganspan under Phokwane. 

t) Page 16 – insert Smartt Syndrate Irrigation 

Board near Britstown/Vaalharts WUA. 

u) Revise WUA and WB boundaries in accordance 

with latest data. 

v) Page 23 – Insert Vaalharts Weir. 

w) Page 97 – Insert 3.2.1 Green Drop Status 

under Section 3.2: Sewage removal 

x) Frances Baard DM received a Blue Drop for 

their Koopmansfontein System – 95%. 

y) Kgatelopele received a Blue Drop for their 

Danielskuil System ‐ 95%. 

z) Page 143 –Map F.5. Include Pelladrift‐, 

Namakwa‐, Alexander bay to Port Nolloth‐, 

Riemvasmaak Pipelines. 

aa) The Vaal, Orange, Harts, Modder and a small 

section of the Riet River within NC are the only 

perennial rivers. 

bb) Ongers River is a seasonal/non‐perennial river. 

cc) Change all maps that indicate rivers accept 

Map C.4 on page 19. 

d) Inter‐regional planning should be included, in 

terms of the relationship between NC and 

surrounding towns 

e) How do we marry politics with what PSDF is 

trying to achieve. 

p) Rectified 

q) Rectified 

r) Rectified 

s) Rectified 

t) Rectified in accordance with DWA’s 

input. 

u) Rectified. 

v) Rectified. 

w) Noted 

x) Rectified. 

y) Rectified. 

z) Rectified in accordance with DWA’s 

input. 

aa) Noted 

bb) Noted 

cc) Rectified 

SESSION 1 COMMENT RESPONSE 

a) Investment categories and development 

potential to be define clearly. 

a) Refer to Section D of Volume 2. 

b) In the presentation of development potential 

towns it should be clarified how Orania is 

classified as a potential town. 

b) Refer to the study report. 

c) Rural industrialisation has to be tested. c) To be addressed during detailed 

planning of district and local 

d) 


Noted 

e) PSDF will present strategies 

premised upon the applicable 

legislation, policy and the principles 

of sustainability. 

4

f) The study must speak to rural declining towns 

and shows how the towns will be revitalized. 

g) What happen to areas with high agricultural 

potential and low developmental potential? 

h) What will be the impact of mining on the 

development potential of small towns? 

i) Clarify on the intension of the investment to 

develop the towns or to capacitate the people 

and have them moved to more developed 

towns? 

5 COMMITTEE RESOLUTIONS AND CONCLUSION 

f) Refer to Section D of Volume 2 and 


g) Ditto 

h) Ditto 

i) Ditto 

The resolutions taken by the PSC are as follows: 

a) Volume 2 is approved subject to the amendments listed in the table above. 

b) The PSDF process may continue on the basis of Volumes 1 and Volume 2 and the Service 

Level Agreement. 

c) The PSDF project is on schedule as per the Service Level Agreement. 

d) The service provider will meet with the relevant sectoral departments and functionaries 

during the week of 5‐9 December 2011 as part of Phase 3 and Phase 4. 

e) The relevant relevant sectoral departments and functionaries will avail themselves for the 

meetings. 

Mr. G. De Bruin thanked all for the well‐attended meeting and the service provider and sub‐ 

consultants for the presentations made. Service provider was commended for the work completed 

to date. In the latter regard, specific reference was made to the DVD of the PSDF which was 

introduced and shown during the meeting. 

The meeting started at 09:00 and ended at 13:00 with the showing of the DVD. An extended 

discussion on the study report entitled Development Potential of Urban Settlements in the 

Northern Cape was held between 14:00 and 6:00. 


5

ANNEXURE 1: 

Attendance Register 

6

ANNEXURE 2: 

Meeting Notes taken by the DRD&LR 

16


DVD 



The Project Management Committee met on 1 November 2011 at the offices of the Department of 

Rural Development and Land Reform (DRD&LR) in Kimberley. 









The meeting was chaired by Mr Gerhard de Bruin of DRD&LR. The meeting was attended by the 

members listed in the table below. 

NAME ORGANISATION TEL CELL EMAIL 

G de Bruin DRDLR 0538325084 0828276264 GJdeBruin@ruraldevelopment.gov.za 

SW vd Merwe DMP 0218870124 0823201741 sw@dmp.co.za 

S vd Merwe DMP 0218870124 0833240925 schalk@dmp.co.za 

H Marais DBSA 0720167849 henrim@dbsa.org 

S Benade DEDAT 0538394039 0827891653 sbenade@ncpg.gov.za 

S Grobbelaar COGHSTA 0538072836 0829270903 sgrobbelaar@ncpg.gov.za 

A Strachan Office of the 

Premier 

0734872664 astrachan@ncpg.gov.za 

A Kwayisi DRDLR 0123128766 0716865402 aakwayisi@ruraldevelopment.gov.za 

K Moremi Office 

Premier 

of the 0538025107 0732147141 emoremi@ncpg.gov.za 

P Mangate DRDLR 0538325423 0762416651 psmangate@ruraldevelopment.gov.za 

S Nollovu DRDLR 0538325423 0786299059 sjnollovu@ruraldevelopment.gov.za 

G Bosman DEBAT 0538304800 0714103413 gbosman73@gmail.com 

H Louw DEBAT 0538304800 0798830410 hlouwdiamond@iburst.co.za 






K Mouibidu DEBAT 0835425372 kmouibidu@ncpg@gov.za 

Apologies were received from Ms. L. Ahjum, Ms. R Jacobs, Ms. J. Meyer, Mr. Binase and Dr. J. 

Mostert. 

2 PRESENTATION 

The service provider made two short presentations respectively pertaining to (copy of each 

presentation appended under Annexure 1): 

a) Consultative Draft 1 of Volume 2 of the PSDF. 

b) Way forward as it relates to Volumes 3 and 4. 

The service provider further submitted a report entitled Inventory of Completed Tasks and Way 

Forward (1 November 2011), the purpose of which is to serve as: 




• Objectives stated in the approved Inception Phase Report dated 24 February 2011. 



2.1 PRINCIPLES OF VOLUME 2 



characteristics of the province to be addressed in Volumes 3 and 4. The service provider is 

not required to undertake primary research, the information was drawn accordingly drawn 

from the data provided by the DRD&LR and the various sectors, the stakeholder 














2

2.2 COMMENT SUBMITTED BY COMMITTEE MEMBERS PRIOR TO MEETING 

The comment submitted by committee members prior to the meeting and the response of the 

service provider are listed in the table below: 


a) Chapters on environment too long. Extent of chapters essentially equates to the submissions 

made by the relevant sectors. 

b) Comparative nature of statistics is useful point 

of departure for service delivery. 

Noted 

c) Economic section not integrated with Refer to Section D of Volume 1. 

d) 

settlement pattern. 

Ensure alignment of TOR + Annexure A, SLA, Refer to Annexure 2 of this document (Inventory of 

Inception Report. 

completed tasks and way forward) 

e) Illustrations relevant and generally well titled. Noted 

f) Include desired goal maps. To be addressed in Volumes 3 & 4. 

g) Infrastructure section to be expanded. DEDAT to provide info to include in Consultative Draft 2 of 


h) ITC policy to serve schools and rural areas. Ditto 

i) LED data not supported. Ditto 

j) Map of protected areas to be rectified (Vaalbos 

National Park has been de‐proclaimed. 

To be rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

k) Map regarding land reform. To be included in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

l) Maps regarding mining and agriculture. DEDAT to provide info to include in Consultative Draft 2 of 


m) Policy and strategy regarding export of mining 

produce versus local benefication. 

Ditto 

n) Policy on wind energy development. Ditto 

o) Quality, consistency and scale of maps. Maps and figures are, in general, direct quotes from the 

information base. 

p) Report addresses stated objective. Noted 

q) Sources of tables. To be rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

r) Strategy on alternative settlement expansion in 

line with economic potential of settlements 

Noted 

s) Strong statement regarding future of towns 

with diminishing economic base 

Noted 

t) Stronger correlation and statements regarding 

land reform, poverty alleviation in Pixley and 

Joe Morolong. 

DEDAT to provide info to include in Consultative Draft 2 of 


u) SWOT analysis. To be undertaken as part of Phase 3 & 4. 

v) Volume 2 overlaps with Volume 1. Overlapping and duplication is required in places. 

w) Reports is well structured and comprehensive. Noted 

2.3 COMMENT SUBMITTED BY COMMITTEE MEMBERS DURING MEETING 


provider, and the rectification agreed upon. 

MEMBER / 

INSTITUTION 

A Kwayisi 

DRDLR 

A Strachan 

Office of the 


Attendance register of public meetings to be 

loaded on website. 

Noted 

Tables must also be correctly referenced. Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

3

Premier 

G de Bruin 

DRDLR 

H Louw 

DEDAT 

H Marais 

DBSA 

K Mouibidu 

DEDAT 

S Benade 

DEDAT 

Page 19: Gariep River should be Orange River. Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

Components of Volume 2 lacks mapping, for 

example agriculture and mining. 

Ditto 

Some of the maps included in the document Maps and figures are, in general, direct quotes 

are outdated, for example, the map depicting 

solar radiation is mapped using 2001 data. 


Provision to meet for climate change. To be addressed in Volume 3 & 4. 

Priorities and associated budgets: Should PSDF, per definition, indicates the spatial 

PSDF follow PGDS or make own proposals ? implications of the PGDS and provides strategies 

for the implementation of PGDS programs and 

projects. 

In terms of the Planning & Development Act Sectoral institutions prepare their own budgets. 

PSDF needs to be assign budgets. 

The PSDF provides an integrating framework for 

such process – it does not explicitely make 


Ensure correct referencing. Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

DMAs must be labeled correctly. Ditto 

Page 1: Preparation of a spatial vision. To be addressed in Volume 3 & 4. 

Maps used are not well presented. Maps and figures are, in general, direct quotes 


Page 40: Properties of mining companies 

extending into the ocean must also be 

depicted. 


PSDF will inform PGDS. The PGDS is at state 

level whilst the PSDF is more detailed. 

Noted 

Department of Water Affairs must be To be arranged by DRDLR. 

represented in PMC. 

Occurrence of previous names in Volume 2 is 

a result of source data used. Volume 2 being 

the inventory as it is, cannot change the 

referenced source data. Notes in the text may 

well refer to the change in names. 

Noted 





Noted 

The section on infrastructure seems DEDAT to provide info to include in Consultative 

inadequate.. 

Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

Leading towns to be indicated. Refer to Section D of Volume 2. 

No more DMAs exist. To be clarified. 

Page 2, prioritization of projects – not Sectoral institutions prepare their own budgets. 

specifically noted in Volume 2. Will the PSDF The PSDF provides an integrating framework for 

allocate a budget or funds to identified such process – it does not explicitely make 

projects? 


Page 89: Conclusion on the demographics. Refer to Section D of Volume 2. 

Page 90: Population perimeter to show the 

brain drain out of the Northern Cape. 


Railway initiatives to be indicated. Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

Reference to the Green Kalahari is outdated. Occurrence of previous names in Volume 2 is a 





Rural nodes to be indicated. Refer to Section D of Volume 2. 

Names: Kgalagadi, John Toalo outdated, Occurrence of previous names in Volume 2 is a 

Gariep must be Orange. 


4

S Grobbelaar 

COGHSTA 

Page 10, how will the bioregions connect with 

the economic regions? Which will take 

preference? 

Page 14: Agriculture could have provided 

more accurate data. 

Vioolsdrif Dam already planned and 

approved. 

Sections on page 37 and 38 overlaps with 


Page 19: Water availability – groundwater 

resource to be addressed. 






To be addressed in Volumes 3 & 4. 

Data made available by sectoral institutions was 

used in preparation of Volume 1. 

DEDAT to submitted approval and relevant 

information. 

Noted 


Page 4: Extent of the Northern Cape. The quote figure is confirmed correct by Mr. S. 

Grobbelaar. 

Page 65: How were the environmental factors Refer to Section D of Volume 2 and the 

factored into settlement categorisation. Settlement Study (Annexure 2 of Volume 2). 

Page 84, population figure is outdated. Data made available by sectoral institutions was 

used in preparation of Volume 1. DEDAT to 

provide info to include in Consultative Draft 2 of 


Show the impact of the incorporation of To be addressed in Volumes 3 & 4. 

North West and the Northern Cape. 

Maps must to be correctly referenced. Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

Mineral map required? Rectified in Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2. 

Page 10: Map of macro‐bioregions – 

boundaries not necessarily correct. 






Page 44, first alluvial diamond was discovered 

in Barkley West. 

Page 6: Old municipal boundaries. Ditto 

Page 65: Development potential of towns Refer to Section D of Volume 2 and the 

questioned. 

Settlement Study (Annexure 2 of Volume 2). 

This question is to be addressed during meeting 

with authors of Settlement Study (meeting to be 

arranged). 

Some of the maps still refer to Mashaweng Occurrence of previous names in Volume 2 is a 

and Kgalagadi. These names have changed result of source data used. Volume 2 being the 

and may be confusing. 






DMP to meet with individual departments. Such meetings to be held during Phase 3 & 4 of 

the PSDF process. 

PSDF has to link to and infuence the PGDS. Noted 

5

3 KEY RESOLUTIONS AND ACTIONS TO BE TAKEN 

The key resolutions taken by the PMC and the actions to be taken with immediate effect are as 

follows: 

a) The PSDF project is on schedule as per the Service Level Agreement. 

b) Volume 2 is materially adequate for submission to the Project Steering Committee subject 

to the amendments to be made as summarised in the table above. 

c) The amendments will be made and the amended document (entitled Consultative Draft 2 

of Volume 2) will be loaded onto the website by 24 November 2011. 

d) Subject to the amendments made the PMC recommends that the PMC approve 

Consultative Draft 2 of Volume 2 at the meeting to be held on 29 November 2011. 

e) Committee members are to submit any additional comment to the service provider by 

Friday 11 November 2011. 

f) The proposal of the service provider that Volume 2 should be seen as ‘work in progress’ to 

be completed together with Volumes 3 and 4 is adopted. 

g) Proposals relating to the amendment of the SDF guidelines will be articulated and 

submitted to DRDLR on an ongoing basis. 

h) Service provider is to submit minutes and response on comments received to DRDLR by 24 

November 2011. 

i) Ms. S. Benade of DEDAT is to liaise with and submit outstanding information to the service 

provider in accordance with a schedule to be determined by the two parties. 

j) The settlement study needs to be studied and scrutinized on its own. 

k) A meeting is to be held with the Proffs Izak van der Merwe and Larry Zietsmann to discuss 

key aspects of the Settlement Study report. Mr. H. Louw will arrange and facilitate such 

meeting. 

l) MR. Gerhard de Bruin will determine the date of the PMC and will make the necessary 

arrangements. 


6

ANNEXURE 1: 

PRESENTATIONS MADE ON 1 NOVEMBER 2011 

1.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE MEETING 

VOLUME 2 OF THE PSDF 

1.2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE 

STRATEGIC SESSION TOWARDS PREPARATION 

OF VOLUME 3 & 4 

7

ANNEXURE 2 

INVENTORY OF COMPLETED TASKS AND WAY 

FORWARD 

8

Volume II - The Northern Cape Provincial Spatial Development ...

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?